diff options
Diffstat (limited to '41771-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 41771-0.txt | 13363 |
1 files changed, 13363 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/41771-0.txt b/41771-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aabc6f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/41771-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13363 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 41771 *** + + Department of the Interior + + Ethnological Survey Publications + + Volume IV, Part II + + THE HISTORY OF SULU + + + By + + NAJEEB M. SALEEBY + + Manila + Bureau of Public Printing + 1908 + + + + + + + +CONTENTS + + +PART II + + Page. + +Preface 117 + +Chapter I + +Geographical Description of the Sulu Archipelago 121 + + In general 121 + Island of Sulu 127 + Geographical features 127 + Principal coast settlements 129 + Districts of the island 131 + Town of Jolo 133 + General plan, buildings and streets 133 + Trade 137 + Population 144 + + +Chapter II + +Genealogy of Sulu 147 + + Translator's introduction 147 + Sulu author's introduction 147 + Descendants of Asip 148 + Descendants of Tuan Masha'ika 149 + Original and later settlers of Sulu 149 + Sulu historical notes 151 + Introduction 151 + Sulu notes 152 + + +Chapter III + +Rise and Prosperity of Sulu 155 + + Sulu before Islam 155 + Introduction of Islam and the rise of a Mohammedan + dynasty in Sulu 158 + Establishment of the Mohammedan Church in Sulu and the + reign of Abu Bakr 161 + Early days of the sultanate 163 + Successors of Abu Bakr 163 + Figueroa's expedition against Sulu 164 + Reasons for hostilities 168 + Rule of Batara Shah Tangah 171 + Figueroa's expedition against Mindanao 172 + Moro raids 175 + First Spanish conquest and occupation of Sulu 177 + Sulu supremacy in the Archipelago 179 + Successors of Bungsu 179 + Reign of Sultan Alimud Din I 180 + Reign of Sultan Israel 187 + Moro pirates 191 + Treaty of 1836 with the Sultan of Sulu 194 + Text of the treaty 194 + Ratification of the treaty by the Queen Regent + of Spain 196 + Expedition of Governor Claveria 199 + Visits to Jolo of Captain Henry Keppel and Sir + James Brooke 201 + + +Chapter IV + +Decline of Sulu 205 + + Expedition against Jolo 205 + Treaty of April 30, 1851 209 + Translation of the Sulu text of the treaty of 1851 212 + Politico-military government of Mindanao and adjacent + islands 214 + + +Chapter V + +Sulu Under Spanish Sovereignty 221 + + Occupation of Jolo 221 + Rule of Sultan Jamalul A'lam 224 + Cession of possessions in Borneo to British North + Borneo Company 225 + Treaty of July, 1878 226 + Translation of the Spanish copy of the treaty 227 + Translation of the Sulu text of the treaty 229 + Rule of Sultan Badarud Din II 233 + Struggle for the sultanate 237 + Rule of Sultan Harun 240 + Rule of Sultan Jamalul Kiram II 244 + + +Chapter VI + +Conclusion 247 + + Political status of Sulu at the time of Spanish + evacuation 247 + Spanish policy 249 + Attitude of the Moros 249 + Mistakes and difficulties of Spanish rule 251 + Report of Baltasar Giraudier 254 + Views of Espina 255 + Purpose of Spain 256 + Resources of Spain 260 + + +Appendixes + + Appendix I. The pacification of Mindanao by Ronquillo 269 + II. The pacification of Mindanao 275 + III. The Moro raids of 1599 and 1600 279 + IV. Gallinato's expedition to Jolo 283 + V. Olaso's expedition in 1629 289 + VI. Corcuera's campaign in Jolo 291 + VII. Obando's report on the preparations to be + undertaken to return Alimud Din to Sulu 305 + VIII. Obando's report on the circumstances + attending the attempt to return Alimud + Din to Sulu 307 + IX. Report on the occupation of Palawan and + Balabak 313 + X. A brief report on the expedition to take + possession of Palawan 317 + XI. The letter of the King of Spain to Sultan + Israel 319 + XII. Letter from the captain-general of the + Philippines forwarding a copy of the treaty + of peace, protection, and commerce with Sulu 321 + XIII. Royal directions relative to commerce with + Sulu, and the advisability of making + Zamboanga a free port 325 + XIV. Camba's report on the circumstances + attending the treaty of 1836 and its bases 333 + XV. Camba's report on commerce with Sulu and + the advisability of making Zamboanga a free + port 339 + XVI. Communication from the governor of Zamboanga + to the supreme government of the Philippines, + relative to the treaty of Sir James Brooke + with the Sultan of Sulu 345 + XVII. Communication from the supreme government of + the Philippines to the secretary of state, + relative to the treaty of Sir James Brooke + with the Sultan of Sulu 355 + XVIII. Regulations relative to taxes and imposts + on natives and immigrants in Sulu 359 + XIX. The protocol of Sulu, of 1877, between + Spain, Germany, and Great Britain 367 + XX. The protocol of Sulu of 1885, between Spain, + Germany, and Great Britain 371 + XXI. Decree of the general government in regard + to payment of tribute by Sulus 375 + XXII. Royal communications relative to the rights + of foreigners to the pearl fisheries of Sulu 377 + XXIII. Royal directions relative to the treatment + of foreigners engaged in pearl fishing in + the Sulu waters 383 + XXIV. La Torre's views on the policy that should + be adopted in Mindanao and Sulu 385 + + +Maps and Diagrams + + Map I. The Sulu Archipelago Frontispiece + Facing page-- + II. Sulu Island 128 + III. Sketch of Jolo before 1888 134 + IV. Sketch of Jolo at the present time 134 + Diagram 1. Sultans and royal datus of Sulu 158 + 2. Datus of Sulu not descended from Abu Bakr 158 + + + + + + + +PREFACE + + +The first object sought in the search for the Genealogy of Sulu was +a knowledge of those significant historical events of Sulu which +antedated the Spanish discovery and conquest of the Philippine +Islands, the connection which those events might have had with the +earlier history of the other islands and the light that they might +throw upon the subject of prehistoric Malayan immigration to the +Archipelago. The tarsila (genealogies) [1] of Mindanao show that +events of considerable importance had occurred in the Archipelago, +especially in the south, long before the Portuguese or the Spaniards +reached Malaysia. Some tribes, such as the Samals, we were told, had +emigrated from western Malaysia to the Sulu Archipelago and Mindanao, +and indications were not wanting that probably other tribes, now +inhabiting the Philippine Islands, came from the same place. Further, +information was desired relative to the mohammedanization of Sulu and +the possible connection that such a movement might have had with the +introduction of Islam into Sumatra and Malacca. + +The research so conducted was well rewarded. The history of Sulu +was traced as far back as the early days of its oldest settlements, +and the organization of the nation was followed back to the primitive +communities out of which the Sulu nation has grown. Records of early +Malayan expeditions and of communication between Sulu and Mindanao +were traced to the earliest missionaries who reached these Islands +by the way of Malacca, and through whom the sultanates of Mindanao +and Sulu were organized on plans similar to those of Malacca and +Palembang. A fuller account of the life history and work of these +missionaries will be given in a later paper of this series. We here +give only a narrative of the events in which they participated and +the part they played in making the history of Sulu proper. + +Many difficulties were encountered in the effort to secure an authentic +copy of the Genealogy of Sulu. Several trips of 20 to 40 miles were +made in small Moro sailing craft to visit datus who were said to have +copies of this document. The Sulu authorities who had the manuscript +or copies of it denied this fact from time to time, but after two +years and a half of persistent endeavor and inquiry, the original +manuscript was procured from the prime minister of the Sultan of Sulu, +whose confidence was gained by a long period of intimate acquaintance +and frequent communication. Soon after that, the Annals of Sulu (the +Luntar) were obtained from the sultan and some facts of importance were +learned and made use of in the course of this work. Diligent effort was +further made to collect all interesting Sulu traditions and documents, +and most of the best informed Sulus living were interviewed. Of these +the author feels under special obligation to mention Sheikh Mustafa +bin Ahmad, formerly prime minister to Sultan Harun; Hadji Butu, prime +minister of the present Sultan of Sulu; Datu Pangiran; and Hadji +Mohammed Tayib, one of the principal advisers of the present sultan. + +After the first object sought had been gained, it became apparent +that a general public interest in Sulu and Mindanao had been growing +rapidly. It therefore seemed advisable to complete the history of +Sulu up to the date of Spanish evacuation, for no such work has as +yet been published in the English language. It is of special interest +to Americans living in Mindanao and Sulu and of general interest to +Americans and others elsewhere to have a better understanding of the +Moros in general and to acquire some idea of the history of Islam +in the Philippine Islands. This the history of Sulu makes possible +for the reader in a most vivid and realistic manner. The history is +written without prejudice or bias, and events are related as they +appear in the light of facts, and by one capable of seeing things +from the standpoint of a Sulu as well as of a Spaniard. + +Nothing reveals the true character of a nation, its capabilities, +tendencies, and resources, better than its history. There is no time +when such general intimate knowledge of a people is more interesting +and more needed than during the period of their regeneration, and +there can be no time when the history of the Sulus will be more +interesting than at present. + +Besides the Moro sources above referred to, several authors in Spanish +and English have been consulted and quoted with due credit. Special +indebtedness must however be expressed to Col. Miguel S. Espina, +author of "Apuntes sobre Jolo," whose admirable work has been our +chief authority for the majority of the events which occurred after +the Spanish invasion of Sulu in 1578. Espina saw considerable service +in Sulu, was intimately acquainted with the Spanish administration of +Sulu affairs, and most of his information was derived from official +documents and other sources of equal authenticity. Most of the events +relating to the late period of Spanish occupation of Sulu have been +confirmed by personal investigation, and the Sulu view of every matter +of significance has been studied and understood. + +A chapter on the geography of the Archipelago is presented first to +give a general idea of the geographical relations of the Archipelago +of Sulu, the location of its various islands and settlements, and its +commercial resources. Special attention has been given to accurate +spelling of names and the correct location of settlements and small +islands. Unusual pains have been taken to get satisfactory maps of the +Archipelago and Island of Sulu and sketches of the town of Jolo. These +will help the reader and add interest to the succeeding chapters. + +In the Appendixes will be seen reprints of various documents, reports, +quotations and letters of direct and significant bearing on the history +of Sulu and Mindanao. They are arranged in chronological order and +are intended to complete the record and description of important +events in Moro history so as to throw light on the actual conditions +of life among the Moros, the political motives of the interested +powers, and the real state of affairs in Mindanao at the time of the +Spanish evacuation. The source from which each article is derived is +given in connection therewith. A considerable number of quotations or +chapters have been taken from "The Philippine Islands," by Blair and +Robertson, for which special obligation is hereby expressed. Many of +the official documents given could not be conveniently incorporated +in the text of the history proper, and are herein published, probably +for the first time. They include protocols, capitulations, official +letters, decrees, and correspondence relative to Sulu obtained from +the Division of Archives of the Philippine Islands. The originals of +the copies can be seen in Spain in the Indies Archives. + +Some liberty has been taken in correcting the spelling of geographical +and other proper names in order to render the history uniform in +its orthography and to avoid confusion and misconnection of events, +persons, and places. The same system of orthography has been used here +as that used and described in Part 1 of Volume IV, Ethnological Survey +Publications. Diacritical signs to denote the long sounds of vowels +have, however, been very rarely used. The Arabic "hamzat," occurring +in Moro words has been expressed by an apostrophe; while an inverted +apostrophe has been used to represent the Arabic sound or character +"`ain," the eighteenth letter of the Arabic alphabet. Annotations +which occur in the original documents have generally been indicated +by letters, while those made by the author are denoted by figures. + + +Manila, January, 1907. + + + + + + + +CHAPTER I + +GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF THE SULU ARCHIPELAGO [2] + + +IN GENERAL + +The Sulu Archipelago is a series of small volcanic islands which +extends in a northeast and southwest direction between the meridians +of 119° 10' and 122° 25' east, and the parallels of 4° 30' and 6° +50' north. It forms a continuous chain of islands, islets, and coral +reefs, which connects the peninsula of Zamboanga with the northeastern +extremity of Borneo and separates the Sulu Sea from the Celebes Sea. It +marks the southern line of communication between the Philippine Islands +and Borneo and is probably the chief route of former emigrations and +travel from Borneo to Mindanao and the southern Bisayan Islands. + +The islands of the Archipelago are so disposed as to form several +smaller groups, the most important of which are the following: The +Basilan Group, the Balangingi or Samal Group, the Sulu Group, the +Pangutaran Group, the Tapul or Siasi Group, and the Tawi-tawi Group. + +The Basilan Group is the first on the north and includes the Island +of Basilan and fifty-six small adjacent islands, all of which lie +north of the parallel of 6° 15' north and east of the meridian of +121° 19' east. This group, under the name of Basilan, constituted +the sixth district of the politico-military government of Mindanao, +organized by the Spanish Government in 1861. Since that date the +islands forming this group have not been recognized politically as +a part of the Sulu Archipelago. + +Basilan is the largest island in the Archipelago. Its northernmost +point is about 10 miles directly south of Zamboanga. The island is more +or less circular in outline and has a radius approximately 11 miles +long. Its area is about 400 square miles. Two prominent headlands +projecting, one on the east and one on the west, give the island a +maximum length of 36 miles. The greatest width, north and south, +is 24 miles. The eastern headland is long and has a picturesque, +conical peak, called Mount Matangal, which rises about 648 meters +above sea level. This peak is a very prominent landmark, visible +to a great distance from all points in the Celebes Sea and in the +Straits of Basilan. The western headland is less prominent. It has +an isolated peak about 287 meters above the sea, immediately north +of the settlement of Pangasa'an. The position of this peak makes it a +conspicuous landmark to vessels entering the Straits of Basilan from +the Sulu Sea. + +The surface of the island is high and hilly. Twenty-three peaks +are recognized, forming two distinct series or ranges, central and +peripheral. The central region of the island is an elevated tableland, +out of which rise a number of peaks forming the central series and +ranging from 609 to 1,019 meters above sea level. A thick forest covers +this region. The rivers are small and dry up in the dry season. Few +Yakans are to be found there, and their houses are isolated and far +apart. No cultivation is carried on in the interior. On the outside +of this region rises the peripheral series of hills or peaks which +lies parallel and near to the coast. With the exception of two, +all of these peaks are below 304 meters in height. The drop from +this line of hills to the coast is rapid in some places, and in +general the shore line is low and swampy and covered with mangrove +trees. The three largest valleys in the island are those of Gubawan +or Lamitan on the northeast, Kumalarang on the northwest, and Malusu +on the west. This region is generally considered fertile, but it has +a marked dry season and droughts are not rare. + +The island is very rich in timber; all its hills and mountains are +forest-clad to their summits. Excellent boats are constructed on the +south and west coasts of the island which rival the Tawi-tawi boats +in every particular. A few Americans have started hemp and coconut +plantations on the north coast, but native cultivation is not extensive +and compares very poorly with that of the Islands of Sulu, Tapul, and +Siasi. Most of the cultivation on the island is carried on by Yakans, +the Samals living chiefly on the products of the sea. The staple +products of the soil are rice, tapioca, and corn. Ubi (a kind of tuber +used as food), camotes (sweet potatoes), and wild fruits abound. The +number of cattle is not inconsiderable, but horses are few. Most of +the settlements on the island are on the sea coast and lie on the north +and west coasts. The larger ones, beginning at Isabela and going east, +are, on the north, Isabela, Patasan or Balaktasan, Malu'ung, Nipa, +Lamitan, Tagima, and Kandi'is; on the east, Tambunan, Buhi-lubung, +and Ubung; on the south, Amalwi, Giyung, and Mangal; on the west, +Libuk, Kabkaban, Kanas, Malusu, and Pangasa'an; on the north, Bulansa, +Atung-atung, Batanay, and Panigayan. [3] The prominent chiefs of the +island live at Lamitan, Ubung, and Malusu, which form the principal +centers of native power. The old name of Basilan was Tagima, so called +after the name of the old settlement of Tagima mentioned above. + +Isabela may be considered as the capital of Basilan. Its old name is +Pasangan, which is still the name of the stream at the mouth of which +it is built. The town is situated 4 miles inland, on the narrow channel +which separates Basilan from the small island of Malamawi. The channel +widens a little at this point and forms an excellent harbor. Under +Spanish jurisdiction it was a naval station with a dry dock for +gunboats. An aqueduct furnishes the town with fresh water brought +from a small stream in the neighborhood. The stone fort Isabel II, +built on the hill in 1842, commands both entrances of the channel. It +was designed to defend the town against the Moros. The abandonment +of the town as a naval station has led to its present decline. An +American sawmill planted there has been the chief source of lumber +supply for the town of Zamboanga and neighborhood. + +The largest islands in this group, excepting Basilan, are Baluk-baluk +and Pilas, both of which lie west of Basilan. A narrow channel which +lies in the direct route leading from Zamboanga to Jolo separates +these two islands. Tapiantana, Salupin, Bubwan, and Lanawan are the +largest islands of the group south of Basilan. + +The population of this whole group is generally estimated at 25,000. Of +these, 15,000 live in Basilan itself. The inhabitants of Basilan proper +are Yakans and Samals, while the adjacent islands are occupied entirely +by Samals. The Yakans are the aborigines of Basilan and extend farther +into the interior than the Samals. + +Basilan never enjoyed political independence. Before Spanish rule +it was governed by Sulu datus and paid tribute to the Sultan of +Sulu. Under the datus, subordinate Samal panglimas [4] and maharajas +[5] had charge of the various communities or settlements. The Samals +of Basilan are at present stronger than other Samals and enjoy a +greater degree of liberty and self-government than their brothers in +the Tawi-tawi Group. + +The Balangingi Group lies east of the meridian of 121° 28' east, and to +the south of the Basilan Group. It has nineteen islands, the principal +ones of which are Tonkil, Balangingi, Simisa, Tatalan, Bukutwa, Bulim, +Bangalaw. The islands of this group are small and low and do not exceed +38 square miles in area. Their inhabitants are Samals. The people of +Balangingi and Tonkil were notorious pirates. They built strong forts +and once surpassed all other Samals in power, political organization, +and prosperity. + +The Sulu Group lies west of the Balangingi Group and north of the +parallel of 5° 46' north. Its western boundary may be sent at the +meridian of 120° 46' east. It consists of about twenty-nine islands +with a total area of 380 square miles. The principal island of this +group is Sulu. To the north of Sulu lie Pangasinan, Marongas, Kabukan, +Bubwan, Minis, Hegad, and a few others; to the east lie Tulayan, +Kapwal, and Bitinan; to the south, Pata and Patyan. + +Tulayan lies north of Tandu and is separated from it by a narrow +strait. It has a good harbor on the southern side. It was ceded to the +English in 1763 by Sultan Alimud Din I out of appreciation of the favor +done in releasing him from prison in Manila and reinstating him as +Sultan of Sulu. The English, however, never made any use of the island. + +Pata is, next to Sulu, the largest island of the group. It is +mountainous and well populated. The description of the Island of Sulu +is given separately at the end of this chapter. + +The Pangutaran Group lies west of the Sulu Group and north of the sixth +parallel. It has fourteen islands and an area of 72 square miles. The +principal members of the group are Pangutaran, Pandukan, North Ubian, +Laparan, and Tababas or Cap. They are all low and flat with little more +than trees visible from the sea. They are surrounded by coral reefs +and sand banks, which in places form lagoons which can be entered only +at high water. The drinking water in these islands is brackish in the +hot season and has a black color during rains. Very often the people +go as far as the Island of Sulu to get good water. Pangutaran is the +fifth island in the Archipelago in size, being 11 miles long, north +and south, and 8 miles wide, from east to west. Its chief settlement is +Maglakub. Its northern and eastern coasts are the best populated. The +inhabitants of this group are chiefly Samals; few Sulus are found +mixed with them. Coconut trees and tapioca plants grow well in places. + +The Siasi Group lies to the south and west of the Sulu Group, east +of the meridian of 120° 33' east, and north of the parallel of 5° +24' north. It has thirty-eight islands with an aggregate area of 77 +square miles. Its population is estimated at 20,000. The principal +islands of this group are Siasi, Pandami, Lugus, Tapul, Laminusa, +and Kabinga'an. The first four are volcanic islands of some size; +the last two are low and flat. Tapul is the nearest island of the +group to Sulu. It is more or less round in circumference and rises +in the middle to a picturesque conical peak 505 meters above the +sea. It is about 5 miles in diameter and is separated from Lugus by +a very narrow channel. The island is 8 miles south of Sulu Island, +is well cultivated, and appears very attractive from the sea. It +supports a considerable population and has several fairly prosperous +settlements. The people are mostly Sulus; they are very warlike and +take great pride in their traditions. + +The chief settlement of this island is Kanawi, where lives Sharif +Alawi, the strongest chief on the island. Buhangin Hawpu, Pangpang, and +Pagatpat lie on the southern coast, east of Kanawi. The settlements on +the western coast are, beginning at the south, Suba Pukul, Kawimpang, +Tigbas, Banting, Kutabatu, Bagus; on the northern coast, Kawimpang, +Pangdan; on the eastern coast, Sampunay, Tulakan. + +Lugus is a larger island. Its long diameter extends 9 miles east and +west, and it has an area of 18 square miles. It is hilly and rough; +but the northern shore is fairly well cultivated. + +The chief settlements are on the western coast. They are Basbas, +where Datu Amilusin used to live, and Bulipungpung. On the north lie, +beginning at the east, Gapas, Ba'it-ba'it, and Hawit, the place of +Maharaja Sharafud Din; on the east Kalu'ukan, the residence of Panglima +Salahud Din; and on the south Aluduyung, and the Island of Munupunu. + +Siasi and Pandami are separated by a narrow channel which forms a +good anchorage for vessels. Siasi is prettier than Tapul in form +and is larger, but not equally wooded. It has an isolated, conical, +and beautiful peak in the center rising to a height of 509 meters +above sea level. The island is about 7 miles in diameter and has an +area of 39 square miles. Reefs and numerous islets form a fringe off +the east and south coasts and these teem with Samal houses. It is +thickly settled, fairly well cultivated, and has, in proportion to +its size, a considerable number of horses and cattle. The majority +of the people are Samals, but the chief rulers and some of their +retinues are Sulus. In this respect this island follows the general +rule governing all the larger islands of the Archipelago outside of +Sulu Island. The town of Siasi is on the western side. It lies on the +Pandami Channel and has a good harbor. A spring rising at the base of +the western slope of the mountain supplies the town with fresh water. + +A detachment of Spanish troops occupied the town in 1882 and built +a stone fort and barracks. American troops were there from 1900 to +1904, when they were relieved by a detachment of the Philippine +Constabulary. An effort was made in 1899 by the present sultan, +Jamalul Kiram II, to retain Siasi under his own jurisdiction for +the establishment of a custom-house where he could collect duties +on foreign goods, as was formerly done by his father; but no such +rights were conceded to him. Siasi is a closed port at present. The +residents of the town are Samals and Chinese traders. They vary from +500 to 700 in number. The other settlements on the island are, on the +north, Siyundu, Pagatpat, and Manta; on the east, Pamungunan, Tanjun, +Sipanding, and Bulikulul; on the south, Dugu, Latung, and Musu; on +the west, Nipanipa, Jambanganan, Dungus, and Sablay; in the interior, +Kabubu, Ju, and Kungatad. Siasi and Laminusa are important centers +of pearl and shell fishing. About 2,000 Samals live on Laminusa. + +Pandami is an attractive island. Its long diameter runs north +and south. Two round peaks, one at each end of the island, give +it the shape of a saddle and make a picturesque sight from the +sea. The people are chiefly Samals ruled by Sulu datus. Its best +settlements are on the west and south. The name given to this island +on Spanish maps is Lapak, which is the name of one of its southern +settlements. The northern extremity of the island is Diadia Point, +the northeast projection is Butun Point. The chief settlements on +the west are, beginning at the north, Subasuba, Tabunan, Pari'an +Pandami, Tubig-shina, Lahi, and Sibawud, which lies on a reef off +the southern point of the island. On the east lie Ambilan, Bakal, +and Lapak. Laminusa and Kabinga'an lie to the east of Siasi. They +are small but thickly populated by Samals. The chief settlements of +Laminusa are Tampan on the north and Kungkung on the south. + +The Tawi-tawi Group lies to the south and west of the Tapul Group and +extends as far west as the Sibutu Passage. This is the largest group +in number and area, including eighty-eight islands with a combined +area of 462 square miles. Its population is estimated at 25,000. These +islands form two distinct divisions or subgroups, differing in both +extent and population. + +The first or northern division includes Bangao, Sangasanga, Tawi-tawi, +Tandu-batu, and a large number of smaller islands, all of which +are rough, volcanic, mountainous, and very sparsely populated. The +second or southern division is a series of low, flat islands which +are smaller in area but more thickly populated than those of the +northern division. The principal names, beginning at the east, are +the following: Kinapusan, Bintulan, Tabawan, South Ubian, Tandubas, +Sikubun, Lata'an, Mantabwan, Banaran, Bilatan, Manuk-manka, and +Simunul. Extensive reefs and narrow channels and shoals separate these +islands from one another and from those of the northern division, +rendering navigation between them impossible except in vessels of +very light draft. + +Bangao, Sanga-sanga, and Tawi-tawi are separated by very +narrow channels and are practically one island. Bangao forms the +southwest extremity and is substantially one solid rock which rises +perpendicularly to a height of 228 meters. It is a conspicuous landmark +to vessels going through the Sibutu Passage. The town of Bangao is +a military station and an open port; it has an excellent landlocked +harbor and a very poor water supply. The town has been occupied by +troops since 1882, but it has never attained any size or importance. + +Tawi-tawi Island is a continuous range of hills covered by thick and +rich forests. The highest points in the range are the Dromedary peaks +(591 meters) lying about the center of the island. The length of the +island is about 34 miles and its greatest width 14 miles. It is next +in size to the Island of Sulu, but it is very sparsely populated. Its +chief settlements are Tungpatung, Balimbang, Lissum, and Bu'an on the +south coast, and Tawi-tawi, Tata'an, Butung, Tumhubung, Tumbaga'an, +Languyan, and Bas on the north. At Balimbang are built the best types +of Sulu and Samal boats. Good timber abounds in the neighboring hills, +and the little bay is transformed into a shipyard. The town used +to be a famous rendezvous for Samal pirates. Tata'an had formerly a +Spanish garrison; the present Moro town is a little distance to the +south of the ruins of the fort and is called Butung. It is built on +the hillside and commands a pretty view of the sea. It lies 100 miles +east of Lahat Datu, East Borneo. The anchorage is deep and safe, +being well protected by a large semicircle of reefs. A boa 30 feet +long was killed on the island in 1903. Rubber and gutta-percha are +found on this island. Tapioca and ubi are the staple products. + +Sibutu lies in a little group of the same name, situated between +the Tawi-tawi Group and Borneo and at a distance of about 15 miles +from each. The Sibutu Passage separates it from Manuk-manka, the +southernmost island of the Tawi-tawi Group, and the Alice Channel from +Borneo. This island did not lie within the limits of the Philippine +Islands as defined in the Treaty of Peace of December 10, 1898. It was +ceded by Spain with Kagayan Sulu, by a separate treaty in November, +1900. Its close proximity to Borneo renders it a convenient stopping +place for small Moro boats navigating between Borneo and Sulu. Sitanki, +an island and town, is the trade center of this group, and has just +lately been made an open port. + + + +ISLAND OF SULU + + +GEOGRAPHICAL FEATURES + +Sulu is an island of irregular shape and among the islands of the +Archipelago is next in size to Basilan. Its longest diameter runs east +and west and approximates 37 miles, while its average length does not +exceed 32 miles. Its greatest width is 14 miles and its average width +about 10 miles. The main structure of the island is volcanic, but it +is surrounded with a coral reef formation, which is most extensive +in the bays and on the south. + +Two indentations of the northern shore at Jolo and Si'it and two +corresponding indentations of the southern shore at Maymbung and +Tu'tu', divide the island into three parts--western, middle, and +eastern. + +The Bay of Jolo is quite open and faces the northwest. It is very +shallow near the shore and its head constitutes the roadstead of +Jolo. The Bay of Maymbung is a deeper indentation, but it is narrower +and shallower than the Bay of Jolo. The town of Maymbung lies at the +head of the bay and is about 9 miles south of Jolo in a direct line. + +The Bays of Si'it and Tu'tu' indent the island to such an extent as +to leave only a neck of land, less than 4 miles wide, connecting the +middle and eastern parts of the island. The settlement of Si'it lies +at the head of the bay and in the immediate vicinity of a small lake +of the same name. The shores of the Bay of Tu'tu' are marshy and are +covered with mangrove trees. The bay is very shallow to a considerable +distance from shore. Tu'tu' is the principal settlement near the head +of the bay. + +The backbone of the island is a mountain range which runs east and +west and lies nearer to the northern shore. The highest point is Mount +Tumangtangis, at the western extremity of the range. This mountain +reaches a height of 853 meters above sea level and descends very +rapidly to the western coast near Timahu. A spur of the mountain +terminates in Point Pugut at the northwestern extremity of the +island. [6] + +Toward the east, the ridge descends to a much lower level at Bud Datu, +Bud Agad, and Bud Pula, which lie immediately to the south of Jolo. It +rises again in Mount Dahu to an altitude of 716 meters. Mount Dahu is +a prominent landmark and forms the most picturesque landscape in the +background of Jolo. It is a steep and conical extinct volcano, similar +to, but smaller and more regular in form than Mount Tumangtangis. East +of Mount Dahu is another gap in which lies Tambang Pass. Beyond this +the range rises again at Mount Tambang and continues uninterrupted to +Mount Sinuma'an, at the extreme end of Lati, and Mount Bagshag. After +Mount Bagshag the range descends gradually toward Su' and Si'it. The +northern slopes of Mount Tumangtangis and Mount Dahu, and the crest of +Bud Datu are covered with grand forests, while the crests and lower +slopes of Bud Agad and Bud Pula are partly cultivated and partly +covered with tall grass. + +From the shores of the Bay of Jolo the land rises gradually and +presents a beautiful green appearance. The northern aspect of this +whole range and its beauty were appropriately described by Mr. Hunt, +as follows: + + + There are few landscapes in the world that exhibit a more + delightful appearance than the seacoasts of Sulu; the luxuriant + variety of the enchanting hills exhibits a scenery hardly ever + equaled and certainly never surpassed by the pencil of the + artist. Some with majestic woods that wave their lofty heads + to the very summits; others with rich pasturage delightfully + verdant, with here and there patches burnt for cultivation, + which form an agreeable contrast with enameled meads; others, + again, exhibit cultivation to the mountain top, checkered with + groves affording a grateful variety to the eye--in a word, it + only requires the decorations of art and civilized life to form + a terrestrial paradise. [7] + + +To the south of Bagshag [8] lies a small extinct volcano called Panamaw +or Pandakan, whose crater is now a lake. East of Si'it rise the Lu'uk +mountains of Urut, Upao, and Tayungan. From these the range extends +to Bud Tandu at the eastern extremity of the island. + +The highlands near the southern coast of the island divide into three +separate regions. The first and westernmost lies west of Maymbung +and forms the principal highlands of Parang. The highest points in +this region are Mount Tukay, east of the town of Parang, and Mount +Mabingkang, east of Tukay. To the east of Maymbung rise Mount Talipao +and Mount Kumaputkut, which form the middle and second region. The +third region is the southern part of the Lu'uk country. Its highest +point is Mount Bulag, to the north of Tandu-Panu'an. + +Between Mount Tukay and Mount Tumangtangis lies Bud Gapang. Midway +between Mount Talipao and Bud Datu is Mount Kumuray, in the +neighborhood of Langhub. + +The largest streams on the island are Tubig Palag and Bina'an. The +first is generally known as the Maymbung River. It passes through +the settlement of Maymbung and empties into the head of the bay of +the same name. It drains the southern slopes of Mounts Tumangtangis, +Pula, Dahu, and Kumuray. The Bina'an stream drains the southern +slopes of Mount Sinuma'an and the northern slopes of Mounts Talipao +and Kumaputkut and empties into the Bay of Tu'tu'. + + + +PRINCIPAL COAST SETTLEMENTS + +Beginning at Jolo and going west along the northern coast we pass +the following points of interest: The first is Point Baylam, the +western limit of the Bay of Jolo. At the head of the small bay that +follows lies the settlement of Matanda, where a Spanish blockhouse +marks the western limit of the Jolo line of fortifications. Next +comes Point Mangalis and the receding beach of Bwansa, the old +capital of Sulu. Here and in the next bay, at Malimbay and Kansaya, +Samal boats assemble in favorable weather for fishing. Back of these +settlements the land rises rapidly to Mount Tumangtangis. A teak +forest of considerable size lies between Tumangtangis and Jolo. + +Outside of the wall of Jolo and to the east lies the settlement of +Busbus, where criminals formerly were chopped to death after being tied +to a tree. A mile beyond is Mubu, where the old residence of Sultan +Harun stands out prominently. Copious springs of fresh water issue at +this place at a point near the high-water mark. A mile farther east we +come to Tandu (point or cape), where Datu Kalbi lives. This point is +generally known as Tandu Dayang Ipil [9] and marks the eastern limit +of the Bay of Jolo. The isolated hill of Patikul rises immediately +behind Tandu. The settlement of Patikul lies still farther away on +the beach. Here lives Datu Julkarnayn (Alexander the Great), the +brother of Datu Kalbi. The beautiful region lying between Patikul +and the mountains of Tambang and Sinuma'an is called Lati. + +Buhanginan lies about midway between Patikul and Higasan. At the +latter place or Tandu Manuk-manuk the shore line recedes toward the +south. Opposite this point lies the Island of Bakungan. Next comes +the larger settlement of Taglibi, above which rises Mount Ta'ung; then +Bunbun, near a point which marks the western entrance into the Bay of +Si'it. Midway between Bunbun and the head of the bay is Su', which may +be said to mark the boundary line between Lati and Lu'uk. Si'it is +a small settlement near the head of the bay. Beyond Si'it the shore +line turns north until it reaches Kansipat. About 2 miles farther, a +semicircular reef off the shore makes the excellent and well-protected +small harbor of Bwal. A large spring of pure, fresh water adds to this +place another natural advantage, one which gave it the prominence it +had in former days. The entrance into the harbor is very shallow and +allows only sailboats of light draft. The channel lies close to the +shore on the west side. Opposite the Island of Tulayan lie Tandu-batu +and a little farther inland Kuta Makis. Limawa lies about 3 miles +farther on near a point opposite the Island of Buli Kuting. Behind +this island and at the head of a shallow cove lies Patutul, the chief +settlement of Tandu. East of Bud Tandu is Tandu Pansan, the easternmost +point of the island. The eastern coast is exposed to storms and appears +rocky and barren, though the hills behind it are well cultivated. + +The first point on the southern coast is Tandu Panu'an, behind which +lies the settlement of Sukuban. This marks the southern extremity of +the boundary line between Tandu and Lu'uk. The country behind Kuta +Sihi' and Pitugu appears rich and well tilled. The hills come down +to the beach. Near the point at the eastern limit of Tu'tu' Bay lies +Kambing. The neighboring country is rich and prosperous. It is governed +by Maharaja Bayrula, one of the wisest and best chiefs of Sulu. West +of Kambing lie Pandang-pandang, Tubu-manuk, and Tu'tu'. The shore is +a continuous mangrove marsh, while the country behind is about the +richest and best tilled land on the whole island. The western side +of Tu'tu' Bay has few places of importance. The country behind is +picturesque and hilly, but not as well populated as other parts of +the island. Lubuk, Kabungkul, and Lumapit are the chief settlements. + +Beyond the point of Buhangin Puti', the shore line bends again north +and the Bay of Maymbung begins. Here mangrove swamps are extensive and +extend a good distance inland. The greater part of Maymbung is built on +piles over the water. It is surrounded by swamps on all sides. After +the tide recedes, strong odors arise from the muddy bottom to such +an extraordinary degree as to render the atmosphere of the place +very disagreeable and often unbearable to strangers. The center of +the town is a small, open square of reclaimed land filled with coral +rocks. Around this square were built the houses of Sultan Jamalul +A`lam and his ministers of state. The present sultan lives on a hill +about half a mile inland from the town. The square was probably the +site of the Maymbung fort which was destroyed by General Arolas in +1887. Some Chinese traders live in the town and export hemp, pearls, +pearl shells, etc., through Jolo. The population of the town and its +immediate suburbs varies considerably, but it is generally estimated +at 1,000. Beyond Maymbung the coast bends sharply to the south. In +the immediate vicinity of Maymbung lies Bwalu. A mile west of this +place begins the district of Parang. After Lipid and Lapa comes +Kabali'an, the western limit of the Bay of Maymbung. The shore line +then takes a more westerly direction. Passing Dandulit and Lakasan, +we reach Tandu Put, where the western coast of the island begins. This +southern region of Parang is well populated and is very pretty and +productive. Cultivated areas are seen on the side of the mountains +everywhere and they reach the very summit of Mount Tukay. + +The town of Parang is one of the largest settlements on the island +and has, at present, an estimated population of 1,000. It is situated +at the head of a small open bay facing the southwest and commands +a beautiful view of Tapul and Lugus and the intervening sheet of +water. It is the capital of the district and has one of the best +markets in the Archipelago for fish, shells, and pearls. The drinking +water in this neighborhood is brackish. + +An islet lies off the shore near Tandu Bunga. Beyond this point the +shore line turns north to Bwisan, which is one of the most prosperous +settlements in the district. Beyond Alu Pangku' the coast inclines a +little east and runs to Silankan and Timahu. Extensive coconut groves +and well-cultivated fields and fruit trees of various kinds abound +all along the coast from Parang to Timahu. + + + +DISTRICTS OF THE ISLAND + +The districts of the island conform in a great measure to its natural +divisions. However, political reasons have modified the natural +boundaries and increased the districts to six by division. These +districts are Parang, Pansul, Lati, Gi'tung, Lu'uk and Tandu. The first +district on the west is Parang. A line joining the western limit of +Bwalu on the south coast, with a point slightly east of the summit of +Mount Tumantangis, and projected to the sea on the north, delimits +this district on the east and carves out of the western natural +division the district of Pansul. The eastern boundary of Pansul is a +line running from a point 2 or 3 miles east of Maymbung to Mount Pula +and Busbus. The chief reason for separating Pansul from Parang was +to reserve for the sultan direct control over Jolo and Maymbung. This +district has more foreigners residing in it than any other. + +A line joining Su' and Lubuk marks the eastern limit of both Lati and +Gi'tung, the third and fourth districts. The watershed line joining +the summits of Mounts Dahu, Tambang, and Sinuma'an and falling on +the east to the vicinity of Su', divides Lati on the north from +Gi'tung on the south. For all practical purposes the district of +Lati may be said to lie between Jolo and Su', and the district of +Gi'tung or Talipao between Maymbung and Tu'tu'. The land joining +Si'it and Tu'tu' is low. Sulu traditions say that when the Samals +arrived in the island this neck of land was submerged and the island +was divided by a channel of water. The extinct volcano of Pandakan, +generally spoken of as the "Crater Lake," which lies in this vicinity, +may be of late origin and may have been the source of the geologic +deposits which helped to fill the channel. Spanish records speak of +a volcanic eruption in the vicinity of Jolo as late as 1840, and it +is very likely that other volcanic action occurred prior to that date +and after the arrival of the Samals in the fourteenth century. + +A line joining Limawa on the north and Sukuban or Tandu Panu'an on +the south, divides Lu'uk from Tandu, thus forming the fifth and sixth +districts respectively. A line joining Mount Tayungan and Bud Tandu +divides both Lu'uk and Tandu into a northern and a southern part. In +both cases the southern parts are more fertile and better cultivated +and probably more thickly populated than the northern. + +The Sulus are principally agriculturists. The greater part of the +people are farmers and a considerable portion of the interior of the +island is under cultivation. They raise a good number of cattle, +carabaos, and horses, which they utilize for tilling the soil and +transporting its products. Trails cross the island in all directions +and the interior is in easy communication with the sea. Fruits are +good and abundant. The forests are rich in jungle products and in +timber. Some copra and hemp is raised and the amount is being increased +annually. The staples are tapioca, rice, and corn. Sugar cane is raised +in small quantities. Ubi and taro are fairly abundant. Some coffee is +produced, but disease destroyed most of the plantations. Some tobacco +and vegetables are raised for home consumption only. + +Jolo is one of the best fish markets in the Philippine Islands. The +varieties of fish in Sulu waters are innumerable and of excellent +quality. The Island of Sulu surpasses Mindanao in the quality and +proportional amount of its fruit. There is an abundance of mangostins, +durians, nangkas (jack-fruit), lançones, [10] marangs, [10] mangos +of several varieties (mampalam, bawnu, and wanni), oranges, custard +apples, pineapples, bananas, etc. + +In the extent and quality of cultivation the district of Lu'uk +ranks first, Parang second, and Lati third. Good fresh water abounds +everywhere except on the western coast. Considerable irrigation is +possible in many localities. + + + +TOWN OF JOLO. + + +GENERAL PLAN, BUILDINGS AND STREETS + +Jolo is the Spanish representation (or rather misrepresentation) of +the word Sulu, sometimes written Sooloo. The early Spaniards wrote it +"Xolo," which later changed to Joló. The complete form of the word is +Sulug, as it is rendered in Magindanao. The Sulus pronounce it and +write it Sug. Sug means a sea current. The flow of the tide through +the innumerable narrow channels separating the numerous islands of +the Archipelago gives rise to unusually strong currents which figure +prominently in the seafaring life of the people. Therefore the term +is an appropriate designation for the Archipelago as a whole. + +The rulers of the island state have changed their capital four +times. The most ancient capital was Maymbung, the second was Bwansa, +which lies on the north coast of the island about 3 miles west of +Jolo. Here ruled Raja Baginda and the first three sultans of Sulu. The +fourth sultan moved to Sug, the third capital, and the town remained +the capital of the sultanate until 1876, the date of the Spanish +conquest and occupation. Sultan Jamalul A`lam then moved to Maymbung +and the Spaniards occupied the town. Since then the term Jolo has +become so intimately associated with it, that it is deemed preferable +to use it as a name for the town, while the term Sulu, which is more +correct and more commonly used, is retained in all other applications. + +The town of Jolo has been so closely identified with the history +of the sultanate as to claim considerable attention. The Spanish +buildings and improvements were sufficiently extensive to obscure +the ancient landmarks of the town and to render a complete and +intelligent understanding of the early history and traditions of the +place impracticable. A few words describing the location of Jolo, +its ancient landmarks, and the Spanish improvements will therefore +be of primary interest. + +The town as it stands at present is divided into four distinct +parts. The main or central part is Jolo proper or the "walled +town." This is known to the Moros as Tiyangi Sug meaning the "shops +or market of Sulu." The western half of this part bordering on Suba' +Bawang formerly was termed Luway. The second part, called San Remondo, +lies back and south of the walled town and is separated from it by a +little stream called Tubig Hasa'an. The third part is Tulay and lies +on the west side; the fourth is Busbus, on the east side. + +At the head of the roadstead separating the Pueblo nuevo or Tulay from +Jolo proper or Luway is a small tidal stream formerly called Suba' +Bawang. Some maps designate it as Rio del Sultan. This stream extends +back into a swamp and divides into two branches. The main or direct +branch extends in a more or less southerly direction to a point about +700 meters from the mouth of the stream, where it rises in copious +springs of fresh water at the edge of the swamp. The other branch +is formed by the junction of the rivulet that rises in the springs +of San Remondo with Tubig Hasa'an. The latter has its origin at the +foot of the hills above the cemetery and Blockhouse No. 2. Hasa'an +means grindstone, and the springs are said to have burst out of the +spot where a grindstone was set for use. Another stream, termed Suba' +Ligayan, drains the northern slopes of Buds Datu and Agad, and running +north, passes by Fort Asturias and through Tulay, and empties into +the roadstead of Jolo at a point about 250 meters west of the mouth +of Suba' Bawang. A branch of this stream formerly issued at Asturias +and connected with the main stream of Suba' Bawang. The land which +thus lay between Suba' Bawang and Suba' Ligayan was a delta. It was +called by the Moros u-laya (that is, the head of the net) because +of its triangular shape. It was mostly marshy, but it had a central +longitudinal strip of dry land which practically connected Tulay with +the base of the hills, at Asturias. At the upper end of this strip +there existed at one time a well-defined, sandy spot, different in +formation from the surrounding land, which was considered sacred and +was supposed to be the first land formed on the island. This spot was +Sug proper; after it was named the whole settlement which was built +along the banks of Suba' Bawang and at the head of the roadstead. + +The Sultan's palace, termed istana, his kuta (fort) and stockades +were built along the lower left bank of the stream Bawang; hence the +name Rio del Sultan. On the right bank lay the houses and stockades +of the other datus of high rank. Two bridges connected one side of +the stream with the other. + +On the outskirts of the town lay various kuta belonging to subordinate +datus, which defended the approaches to the town. The most famous of +these kuta was Daniel's Fort, the best stronghold of Sulu. On the +site of this fort was built in 1878 the fort or redoubt of Alfonso +XII, which was lately replaced by the present headquarters building +of the military post of Jolo. Another strong fort was built at the +foot of the hills just above the head of the delta above described; +it defended the inland approach to the town. This was Panglima Arabi's +kuta, on the site of which Fort Asturias was erected. Another kuta +was located on Point Baylam. + +The principal part of the town was formerly built over the shoal and +beach at the head of the bay. Extensive rows of buildings stretched +out into the roadstead and in front of the buildings now occupied as +the clubhouse and military hospital. The present "Chinese pier" is +constructed on the same plan. This extensive row of houses and shops +begins at the lower point of the Tulay delta and stretches straight out +into the sea. The bay is very shallow here and appears to be fairly +well protected from severe storms. A variety of fish called tulay, +after which the Moro town of Tulay is named, is caught in the bay. A +swamp bounds the town on the south and west, affording it considerable +protection from assault. However, it is open to attack from the sea +and from the east. The land on the east is high and affords the only +desirable site for residences. Here the strongest forts and defenses +were erected. + +The Spaniards built the central part of Jolo first. They raised it +considerably above sea level by extensive fillings, and surrounded it +by a loop-holed wall, 8 feet high and 1 1/2 feet thick, for protection +from Moro assaults. The new town was beautifully laid out with broad, +clean streets lined with double rows of arbol de fuego (fire trees), +ylang-ylang, [11] acacia, and other varieties of trees, some of +which are large and magnificent. Three parks, each one block in +size, added considerable picturesqueness to the place. Substantial +quarters were built for the officers, all houses were painted white +or whitewashed, and none of them had the nipa roofs so common in the +Archipelago. Business places, storehouses, a large market place, a +church, a theater, two schoolhouses, and a hospital were erected and +a public water supply provided. A stone pier was built extending 120 +meters into the sea, and provided with a light-house at its outer end. + +The town wall had five gates, two of which lay on the northwest or sea +front, one at the foot of the pier, and the other close to it. Through +the latter gate cargo was admitted from small boats, which can always +come up to this point at high water. The three other gates lay on the +land side, one at the south end of the town toward Tulay, another at +the opposite extremity facing Busbus, and a third one at the southern +end of Calle [12] Buyon, directly facing San Remondo. This last is the +only gate of the three kept open at present and is the only entrance +into the town from the land side. A tower called Torre de la Farola +surmounts the gate. Near the Busbus gate and forming the northeast +angle of the town was the fort or redoubt termed Alfonso XII. It was +built on a prominent eminence and commanded an extensive view of the +bay, the town, and the surrounding country. + +In the immediate vicinity lay the Cuartel España, which was a large +and substantial building occupying the northern extremity of the +town, facing the bay on the side of Busbus. At the extreme end of +the wall beyond the barracks was the tower or blockhouse called Torre +Norte. Another similar tower at the south gate was termed Torre Sur. At +the intersection of the south wall and the beach line was a strong +building called Cuartel Defensivo de las Victorias. The block lying +diagonally between this cuartel and the market had eight buildings +which were known as Casas de la Colonia para Deportados. + +Two roads and two bridges connected the south and southeast gates +with San Remondo. The continuation of these roads formed the two +main streets of this part of the town. San Remondo has six small town +blocks, nearly all of which are on reclaimed swamp land. The buildings +here are mere nipa huts and the streets are muddy and narrow, unlike +those of the walled town. Back of the town lies a large coconut grove +which extends to Blockhouse No. 2 on one side and Asturias on the +other. A straight and well laid out road directly connects these two +latter points and marks the southern limit of the town. + +A good road runs outside the wall connecting Busbus and Tulay. Later +usage has applied the term Tulay to all parts of the town lying west +of Suba' Bawang. Formerly the name Tulay was applied only to that +part lying west of Suba' Ligayan, while the intermediate section was +known as Pueblo nuevo. The bridge across the mouth of Suba' Bawang was +termed puente del sultan. On the other side of the bridge this street +extends through Pueblo nuevo and along the central strip of u-laya, +or the delta, to Fort Asturias, thus separating the waters of Suba' +Bawang from Suba' Ligayan. Midway between Tulay and Asturias stands an +obelisk-like monument erected by General Arolas and bearing the date +1892. Further fillings in Tulay have provided for several streets, +the chief one of which is the direct street running to the Chinese +pier and then on to the blockhouse of the playa [13] and the Ligayan +River. A large bridge crosses this river to Tulay proper. The road +ends at the beach a little beyond the bridge. In the central plaza at +Tulay stands a monument erected by General Arolas in 1891 in memory of +the three renowned conquerors of Jolo. On one side the monument bears +the inscription "A la gloria de los que con su esfuerzo hicieron esta +tierra Española;" the second side bears the inscription "Corcuera, +17 de Abril de 1638;" the third side, "Urbistondo, 28 de Febrero +de 1851;" the fourth side, "Malcampo, 29 de Febrero de 1876." A +straight road about three-fourths of a mile long called the Asturias +Road directly connects Asturias with the main entrance of the walled +town. Another road starts at this latter point and running along the +right bank of Tubig Hasa'an reaches the cemetery on the opposite side +of Blockhouse No. 2. The old bridge connecting a branch of this road +with the one running from Asturias to Blockhouse No. 2 was washed +away by a severe freshet in 1904, thus breaking what had formerly +been a complete circle of roads around the town. + +Busbus is wholly occupied by Moros. Its houses are dilapidated +nipa huts built on piles over the water. Back of the town is a +marsh which extends a little way toward the base of the hills. The +water from the marsh escapes into the bay by two rivulets, the first +of which runs through the settlement and is known as Tubig Uhang; +the other is artificial, forms the outer limit of the town, and is +called Buyung Canal. Persons convicted of capital crimes in the days +of the independent sultanate were tied to a tree at this place and +there their bodies were chopped to pieces; hence the name "Busbus" +which means to "chop up" or "dress wood." + + + +TRADE + +Jolo lies about 4 miles from the point of intersection of latitude 6° +north and longitude 121° east. It is about 540 nautical miles due +south from Manila and 81 nautical miles distant from Zamboanga. The +harbor is deep and free from currents. The bay is well protected on +the north by the Islands of Pangasinan and Marongas and is safe from +all storms except those from the northwest. + +Sulu occupies the most nearly central position of any island in eastern +Malaysia. It lies between Mindanao on the east and Borneo on the +west, and separates the Sulu Sea from the Celebes Sea. The commercial +advantages of this position are unique. To the north lie the Bisayas, +Palawan, Luzon, Formosa, China, and Japan; to the east Mindanao and +Basilan; to the south, the Moluccas, Celebes, and Java; to the west, +Borneo, Sumatra, and the Malay Peninsula. Besides, the Sulus are +natural-born sailors, and their famous pearl industry has prompted +them to trade since time immemorial. Their boats brought silk, amber, +silver, scented woods, and porcelain from China and Japan; gold dust, +wax, dyes, saltpeter, slaves, and food stuffs from Luzon, the Bisayas, +and Mindanao; gunpowder, cannon, brass, copper, iron, rubies, and +diamonds from Malacca and Bruney; [14] pepper and spices from Java, +the Moluccas, and Celebes. Chinese merchants traded with Sulu long +before the arrival of Legaspi, and while Manila and Cebu were still +small and insignificant settlements Jolo had reached the proportions of +a city and was, without exception, the richest and foremost settlement +in the Philippine Islands. Jolo, with the exception of Bruney, had +no rival in northeast Malaysia prior to the seventeenth century. + +Such commercial importance naturally attracted the attention of +the early Spanish Governors-General and was one of the causes which +led to the early invasion of Sulu. The long period of warfare which +followed this invasion retarded the progress of Jolo and reduced its +trade. Again, the rise of Spanish commerce in the north tended to +restrict the trade of Jolo. The growth of Manila, Cebu, and Iloilo +naturally diverted the commerce of Luzon and the Bisayas and the north +coast of Mindanao to those cities. The later commercial decline of +Jolo was probably brought about more in this way than as a result of +actual clash of arms. Jolo, however, remained an important port and +a transshipping station to Mindanao until a late date. + +At present trade has assumed new proportions and is following new +routes. Zamboanga, Kotabato, and Davao are directly connected with +Manila by regular steamship lines, and Jolo is fast losing its +importance as a transshipping port. Zamboanga, on the other hand, +is rising in importance and seems destined to become the port of +Mindanao. It is the capital of the Moro Province and lies in the +direct route connecting China, Manila, and Australia. It has direct +communication with Manila, Hongkong, Singapore, and Australia, and +is gradually diverting the trade of Mindanao from Jolo. + +In spite of overwhelming odds, however, Jolo will maintain considerable +commercial importance. It has well-established trade relations with +Borneo, the Malay Peninsula, China, and Luzon, and is connected +by regular steamship lines with Sandakan, Singapore, Manila, and +Zamboanga. Practically the whole trade of the Sulu Archipelago passes +through this port, and it stands now, as ever before, as the center +of business, power, and importance of the whole district of Sulu. + +In the early days the trade of Sulu was carried on by Moros and +Chinese. The Chinese appear to have entered the Archipelago prior +to its mohammedanization, and the commercial relations of China +and Sulu are really prehistoric. As hostilities between Spain and +Sulu increased, Sulu traders became less daring and grew fewer and +fewer. Chinese traders, on the other hand, were less molested and +conditions encouraged their increase. The "Chinese pier" is a very +old business establishment, and Chinese traders and merchants have +resided in Jolo for many generations. Their number, in 1851, exceeded +500. At present Chinese merchants have complete control of the trade +of the Sulu Archipelago. They are found everywhere and command all the +avenues of commerce. The Sulus have abandoned commerce as a trade and +apparently have no inclination to resume it on any large scale. This +is due mainly to the decline of their power and the present abeyance +of their national life. A new political revival will no doubt change +their attitude and may bring about a surprising development in arts +and trades as well as of commerce. + +The trade between Jolo and various islands and settlements of the +Archipelago is carried on by means of innumerable small Moro boats and +sloops termed sapits. Formerly such boats traded with Bruney, Sandakan, +the Celebes, Java, and all the various islands of the Philippine +Archipelago, but the stricter enforcement of the customs regulations, +which followed the establishment of open ports at Sitanki, Bangao, and +Kagayan Sulu, had the effect of checking trade with foreign countries +in such small boats and tended to concentrate the whole trade of the +Archipelago at Jolo. A review of the imports and exports of the port of +Jolo will therefore throw considerable light on the material resources +of the Archipelago, its industries, and the enterprise of the natives. + + + + +Port of Jolo + +IMPORTS + +==================================================================== +| | Fiscal year-- | +| Commodity |-----------------------| +| | 1905 | 1906 | +|------------------------------------------|-----------+-----------| +| Animals, etc | $214 | $71 | +| Brass, manufactures of | 6,402 | 2,548 | +| Breadstuffs | 4,881 | 3,870 | +| Cement | 745 | 989 | +| Coal | 4,208 | | +| Coffee | 621 | 872 | +| Cotton cloths, close woven | 82,999 | 80,381 | +| Cotton cloths, loose woven | 14,053 | 14,338 | +| Carpets | 5,379 | | +| Yarn and thread | 18,059 | 19,594 | +| Knit fabrics | 2,688 | 3,564 | +| Cotton cloths, all other manufactures of | 949 | 2,079 | +| Dyes | 2,691 | 3,807 | +| Opium | 14,578 | 6,601 | +| Earthen and stone ware | 1,494 | 2,419 | +| Fibers, vegetable | 308 | 153 | +| Dried fish | 216 | 456 | +| Shell fish | 375 | 497 | +| Fruits, canned | 272 | 254 | +| Fruits, not canned | 362 | 407 | +| Glass and glassware | 694 | 415 | +| Iron, steel, and manufactures of | 3,640 | 2,916 | +| Malt liquors | 2,020 | 822 | +| Matches | 956 | 372 | +| Mineral oils | 742 | 1,339 | +| Vegetable oils | 536 | 503 | +| Paints | 979 | 299 | +| Paper and manufactures of | 2,123 | 1,816 | +| Condensed milk | 1,516 | 1,363 | +| Rice | 76,172 | 57,416 | +| Silk and manufactures of | 1,614 | 1,318 | +| Soap | 724 | 610 | +| Spirits, distilled | 1,643 | 1,108 | +| Sugar, refined | 4,314 | 2,987 | +| Tea | 646 | 489 | +| Tobacco and manufactures of | 586 | 367 | +| Vegetables | 1,204 | 1,919 | +| Wearing apparel | | 3,699 | +| Wood and manufactures of | 2,270 | 1,646 | +| Wool and manufactures of | 2,282 | 206 | +| All others | 8,126 | 7,262 | +| |-----------+-----------| +| Total in U. S. currency | $274,281 | $231,772 | +| Total in Philippine currency | P548,562 | P463,544 | +==================================================================== + + +EXPORTS + +========================================================== +| | Fiscal year-- | +| Commodity |-----------------------| +| | 1905 | 1906 | +|--------------------------------+-----------+-----------| +| Animals | $42 | $70 | +| Hemp | 486 | 5,561 | +| Cordage | 5,084 | 5,054 | +| Fish | 7,893 | 13,151 | +| Copra | 17,870 | 30,052 | +| Copal | 3,793 | 4,458 | +| Gutta-percha | 108 | 3,939 | +| Hides | 839 | 867 | +| Mother-of-pearl (shells) | 88,516 | 60,051 | +| Tortoise shell | 1,971 | 2,856 | +| Shells, all others | 4,249 | 11,864 | +| All others | 8,033 | 4,610 | +| |-----------+-----------| +| Total in U. S. currency | $138,884 | $142,533 | +| Total in Philippine currency | P277,768 | P285,066 | +========================================================== + + + +Port of Zamboanga [15] + +IMPORTS + +============================================================ +| Agricultural imports | P250 | P40 | +| Wheat flour | 6,048 | 18,378 | +| Cement | 3,088 | 12,966 | +| Coffee | 5,656 | 10,646 | +| Copper, manufactures of | 838 | 686 | +| Cotton cloths, close woven | 92,254 | 97,866 | +| Cotton cloths, loose woven | 9,628 | 33,714 | +| Cotton wearing apparel | 2,136 | 5,152 | +| Cotton yarn and thread | 25,032 | 34,862 | +| Cotton, knit fabrics | 6,278 | 4,380 | +| Cotton, all other manufactures | 1,840 | 5,118 | +| Opium | 8,928 | 26,254 | +| Earthen and stone ware | 1,406 | 5,016 | +| China ware | 262 | 388 | +| Hats and caps | 1,164 | 598 | +| Iron, sheet | 6,470 | 12,786 | +| Cutlery, table | 76 | 142 | +| Cutlery, all other | 120 | 96 | +| Nails, wire | 500 | 530 | +| Boots and shoes | 762 | 2,884 | +| Beer in wood | None. | 198 | +| Beer in bottles | 8,410 | 42,618 | +| Other malt liquors | 1,902 | 548 | +| Matches | 60 | 988 | +| Tin, manufactures of | 188 | 40 | +| Oil, petroleum | 4,850 | 8,600 | +| Milk, condensed | 3,200 | 5,972 | +| Rice, husked | 119,572 | 161,642 | +| Brandy | 814 | 3,212 | +| Whiskey, bourbon | 822 | 1,240 | +| Whiskey, rye | 1,030 | 376 | +| Whiskey, all other | 6,668 | 19,566 | +| Sugar, refined | 3,566 | 5,488 | +| Tea | 1,346 | 2,484 | +| Zinc, manufactures of | 880 | 834 | +| All other imports | 49,712 | 86,807 | +| |------------+------------| +| Total in Philippine currency | 375,756 | 613,115 | +============================================================ + + +EXPORTS + +====================================================== +| | Fiscal year-- | +| Commodity |---------------------| +| | 1905 | 1906 | +|------------------------------+----------+----------| +| Bejuco (rattan) | P700 | P1,594 | +| Fish | 60 | 1,886 | +| Coconuts | None. | 2,258 | +| Copra | 125,734 | 157,398 | +| Almaciga [16] | 632 | 288 | +| Copal | 19,906 | 31,582 | +| Gutta-percha | 2,282 | 28,370 | +| Rubber | None. | None. | +| All other gums and resins | 910 | None. | +| Hides, carabao | 362 | 316 | +| Beeswax | None. | 3,024 | +| Shells, mother-of-pearl | 2,440 | 2,420 | +| Shells, tortoise | 8,708 | 7,638 | +| Shells, all other | 2,224 | 10,320 | +| Salt | None. | 1,508 | +| Wood, all kinds | 1,346 | 1,076 | +| All other exports | 9,590 | 9,860 | +| |----------|----------| +| Total in Philippine currency | 174,894 | 259,538 | +====================================================== + + +The above statements of the imports and exports of the port of Jolo for +the fiscal years 1905 and 1906 have been obtained through the kindness +and help of Mr. E. B. Cook, collector of customs for Jolo. They +represent the total value of the imports and exports of the town to +and from foreign ports only. They do not, however, give an idea of the +grand total of the imports and exports of the Archipelago. Account +must also be taken of the large amount of commodities smuggled into +the country by means of small boats which continually run between +the Tawi-tawi Group and Kagayan Sulu on the one side and Borneo and +Palawan on the other. Moreover, it is difficult to tell what part of +the trade of Basilan and the Samal group of islands is retained by Jolo +and what part has lately been drawn away by Zamboanga. Besides, some +trade between Sulu and Basilan, on one side, and Mindanao, Negros, +and Cebu on the other, is carried on by sailing craft; no account +of this is taken either at Jolo or Zamboanga. Since July 1, 1905, +all boats under 15 tons register have not been required to present at +the custom-house manifests of goods carried. It is clear, therefore, +that no correct estimate or opinion can be rendered on the strength +of these figures, unless one is aided by personal observation and +knowledge of actual conditions previous to July 1, 1903. + +Estimating the population affected by the trade of Jolo, at 100,000, +we note that the importation of cloths and woven materials amounted +to P204,431 in 1905 and P196,836 in 1906, or 37 per cent and 42 +per cent of total imports, respectively. There is no doubt that the +weaving industry among Sulus and Samals is far from being adequate to +furnish clothing material, and European cotton cloths are therefore +extensively used throughout the Archipelago. + +The importation of rice amounted to P152,344 in 1905 and P114,832 in +1906, or 27 and 24 per cent of the total imports, respectively. The +Sulus are agriculturists and should be able to raise sufficient rice +for themselves and the Samals. The islands most fitted for this +purpose are Sulu, Basilan, Tapul, Siasi, Pata, and Pandami. The +Samals are not agriculturists as a rule and seldom raise anything +except tapioca and corn. They generally live on flat, low islands, +unfit for the cultivation of rice. The Archipelago as a whole should +produce sufficient rice, tapioca, corn, and camotes to feed the whole +population. The importation of rice in 1905 was probably in excess +of the average amount; less rice was raised that year because of war +and general disturbances. + +The commodities of next importance are yarn and thread for weaving +purposes. Importation of these articles amounted to P36,118 in 1905 +and P39,188 in 1906, or 7 and 8 per cent, respectively. The country +does not produce silk, cotton, or wool. + +All other imports may be regarded as accessories. Of these opium +comes first, then dyes, breadstuffs, sugar, iron, steel, brass, paper, +and earthenware. A considerable amount of tobacco is imported by the +government free of duty, and quantities of tobacco, opium, and cloths +formerly were smuggled in. The reduction of imports in 1906 may be +due to increased production, to the depression that followed the +disturbances of 1904 and 1905, and to a diversion of certain parts +of the trade to Zamboanga. + +The exports, on the other hand, show a light increase in 1906. They +distinctly represent those resources of the country which are most +capable of development. At the head of the list stands the shell +industry, particularly the pearl shell, which amounted to P189,472 in +1905 and P149,542 in 1906, or 64 and 52 per cent of total exports, +respectively. The exportation of shell has lately been greatly +affected by the falling of the price of pearl shell in the market of +Singapore. The exportation of other shells seems, on the contrary, +to have increased. Pearl fishing is the principal industry of the +country and forms the main source of its riches. The fishing is done +exclusively by natives, but the trade seems to be wholly in the hands +of Chinese. The figures given above do not include pearls. It is +very difficult to obtain any statistics for this valuable product, +but on the whole it is reckoned by merchants as equivalent to the +whole output of shell. + +Second in importance comes copra, which amounted to P35,740 in +1905 and P60,104 in 1906, or 12 and 21 per cent of total exports, +respectively. The marked increase of this export in 1906 may +be explained partly by increased production and partly by the +general damage done to the trees in 1905 by locusts. Increase in the +cultivation of coconut trees is not perceptible and can not account +for the increase in exportation. + +Dried fish comes third in order, amounting to P15,786 in 1905 +and P26,302 in 1906. This industry is capable of unlimited +development. The fertility of the Sulu Sea is unusual and can hardly +be surpassed. Nothing but enterprise and organized effort is needed +to render this trade a source of enormous wealth to the country. The +natives are exceedingly skillful in fishing, but lack ambition and +initiative. The trade in fish is mostly in the hands of Chinese +merchants. + +Fourth in importance comes hemp. Both in fiber and cordage its exports +amounted to P11,140 in 1905 and P21,230 in 1906. Hemp culture has +markedly improved during the last year, and the increased production +is sufficient to explain the increase in exportation. Coconut trees +and hemp grow splendidly on all the larger islands of the Archipelago, +and their cultivation is capable of extensive development. + +Copal and gutta-percha are the products of Sulu, Basilan, and the +Tawi-tawi Islands. Although sufficiently important in themselves, +they sink into insignificance when compared with the four primary +staple products and the immense possibilities that lie in the line +of their development. + +The greater part of the trade of Jolo is handled by the Jolo Trading +Company, the firm of Hernandez & Co., and the commercial houses of +Chaun Lee and Ban Guan, all of which are controlled and managed by +Chinese merchants. The following list compiled in the office of the +Jolo Trading Company, for the Far Eastern Review, is a fair estimate +of the prospective exports of the town for the coming two years: + + +=================================================================== +| Article | Amount | Price | Total | +|---------------------------------+-----------+-------+-----------| +| | Piculs. | | | +| Hemp | 1,000 | P21 | P21,000 | +| Pearl shells | 150 | 45 | 6,750 | +| Trepang or beche-de-mar | 50 | 30 | 1,500 | +| Shark fins | 20 | 45 | 900 | +| Hemp rope | 30 | 25 | 750 | +| Caracoles (sea shells | | | | +| for buttons, etc.) | 40 | 12 | 480 | +| Black shells | 10 | 8 | 80 | +| Copra | 500 | 7 | 3,500 | +| Seaweeds | 40 | 4 | 160 | +| Hides | 10 | 20 | 200 | +| Cacao | 10 | 50 | 500 | +| Tortoise shells | 1-1/2 | 1,800 | 2,700 | +| Sea horses | | | 240 | +|---------------------------------+-----------+-------+-----------| +| Grand total | | | 38,760 | +|=================================================================| + + +Hemp is generally exported to Manila, while the other articles +mentioned in the above table are generally exported to Singapore. + +Trepang, shark fins, seaweed, and sea horses are foods highly prized +by the Chinese. + +If the value of pearls taken is estimated on the basis suggested by +the president of the Jolo Trading Company, it will bring the total +up to P58,760 per month. + + + +POPULATION + +The present population of Jolo is less than 2,000. This includes +all the natives and foreigners living in Tulay and Busbus; but the +United States troops are excepted. The bulk of the inhabitants is +made up of Filipinos, Chinese, and Moros. The census report of 1903 +gives the following statistics, which include Tulay and San Remondo, +but not Busbus: + + + ==================================== + | Color | Males | Females | + |================+=======+=========| + | Brown | 309 | 306 | + | |=================| + | Ilokano | 10 | 4 | + | Moro | 9 | 98 | + | Tagalog | 103 | 66 | + | Bisayan | 161 | 132 | + | Foreign born | 26 | 6 | + | Mixed | 74 | 48 | + | Yellow | 429 | 56 | + | White | 31 | 17 | + | |=======+=========| + | Total | 843 | 427 | + ==================================== + + + Walled town 541 + Tulay 615 + San Remondo 114 + ----- + Total 1,270 + + +Males of voting age + + Brown: + Filipino 189 + Ilokano 9 + Moro 4 + Tagalog 75 + Bisayan 101 + English 14 + French 1 + All others 5 + Mixed: + Filipino 1 + Chinese 8 + English 2 + Yellow: + Chinese 392 + Japanese 1 + English 3 + White: + American 22 + Spanish 2 + All others 1 + --- + Total 641 + + +As the great majority of the "mixed" population have Chinese fathers, +they, as a rule, follow Chinese custom and trade and may be regarded +as Chinese. The Chinese element may therefore be classified as follows: + + + ======================================= + | Chinese | Males | Females | Total | + |-----------+-------+---------+-------| + | Pure | 429 | 56 | 485 | + | Mixed | 70 | 45 | 115 | + | |-------+---------+-------| + | Total | 499 | 101 | 600 | + ======================================= + + +The Filipinos may be classified as follows: + + + ======================================= + | Filipinos | Males | Females | Total | + |-----------+-------+---------+-------| + | Brown | 274 | 202 | 476 | + | Mixed | 4 | 3 | 7 | + | |-------+---------+-------| + | Total | 278 | 205 | 483 | + ======================================= + + +The census statistics give a full and clear idea of the composition +of the resident population of the town in 1903. The Chinese and +their offspring, amounting to 600, undoubtedly form the preponderant +element. The Filipinos come next, amounting to 483 only. Considerable +change has, however, occurred since the census was taken, and +necessitates a revision of the above figures. The increase of the +garrison and the construction of many new buildings for the military +post has caused an influx of Filipinos from Zamboanga and Kotabato, +and more Chinese have undoubtedly come in since 1903. The census +figures again do not include Moros, some hundreds of whom live at +present in Tulay and Busbus. + +The following, based on close personal observation, is considered a +fair estimate of the present population: + + + ============================================================== + | | Walled | San Remondo | Tulay | Busbus | Jolo | + | | town | | | | | + |-----------+---------+-------------+-------+--------+-------| + | Moros | [17] 30 | 30 | 300 | 350 | 710 | + | Chinese | 250 | 10 | 400 | 20 | 680 | + | Filipinos | 170 | 100 | 250 | | 520 | + | |---------+-------------+-------+--------+-------| + | Total | 450 | 140 | 950 | 370 | 1,910 | + ============================================================== + + +The inhabitants of the town are more or less migratory +in character. The population is constantly changing. Few are +property owners. The majority are traders, carpenters, and domestic +servants. The Filipinos were originally "camp followers" and still +feel as strangers in the land. Many of the Moros living at Tulay +and Busbus are of mixed origin. The mixture is chiefly of Sulus and +Samals, with each other and with Chinese. The Jolo type of Moros is +by no means pure Sulu and has consequently misled many authors and +ethnologists. A large number of Samals frequent Tulay and Busbus and +often temporarily reside there, but because of their strong migratory +habits no estimate has been made of them. + +A few Arabians, Malays, and Indian traders are married in the country, +but their proportion is small and insignificant at present. + + + + + + + +CHAPTER II + +GENEALOGY OF SULU + + +TRANSLATOR'S INTRODUCTION + +The manuscript of which a translation follows is an exact copy of +the original, which is in the possession of Hadji Butu Abdul Baqi, +the prime minister of the Sultan of Sulu. The genealogy proper begins +on page 6 of the manuscript and is written entirely in Malay. This +was the rule among all old Moro writers and is a decided indication +of the authenticity of the document. + +Hadji Butu maintains that his ancestry goes back to Mantiri [18] +Asip, one of the ministers of Raja Baginda, the Sumatra prince who +emigrated to Sulu prior to the establishment of Mohammedanism in the +island. The Sulu ministry seems to have remained in Asip's lineage +down to the present time. + +The first five pages of the original manuscript are the genealogy of +Asip's descendants. This part is written in Sulu and was probably +composed at a later period than the Malay part of the book. It is +written by Utu Abdur Rakman, the nephew of Imam Halipa, who is the +son of Nakib Adak, the last person mentioned in the genealogy. Abdur +Rakman is a cousin of Hadji Butu. + +The addition of these five pages to the Genealogy of Sulu is for the +purpose of giving prominence and recognition to the sons of Asip, +who have been the right-hand men of the Sultans of Sulu since the +organization of the sultanate. + + + +SULU AUTHOR'S INTRODUCTION + +This is the genealogy of the sultans and their descendants, who lived +in the land of Sulu. + +The writing of this book was finished at 8 o'clock, Friday the 28th +of Thul-Qa`idat, [19] 1285 A. H. + +It belongs to Utu [20] Abdur Rakman, [21] the son of Abu Bakr. It +was given to him by his uncle Tuan [22] Imam [23] Halipa [24] +Abdur Rakman. This is the genealogy of the Sulu sultans and their +descendants. + + + +DESCENDANTS OF ASIP + +This is the genealogy of Mantiri [25] Asip, the hero and learned man of +Menangkabaw. [26] Mantiri Asip had the title of Orangkaya [27] at the +time he came to Sulu with Raja [28] Baginda. [29] He married a woman +from Purul [30] called Sandayli and begot Orangkaya Sumandak. Sumandak +begot Orangkaya Manuk [31] and Orangkaya Hamba. [32] Manuk begot +Orangkaya Buddiman [33] and Orangkaya Akal [34] and Orangkaya Layu +and Satya [35] Akum. His daughters were Santan, Satan, Ambang, Duwi, +Sitti, [36] and Tamwan. Orangkaya Buddiman begot Orangkaya Salimin [37] +and Dayang [38] Saliha. [39] The former begot Hinda Da'ar Maputra and +Utu Undik, Dayang [40] Patima, [41] Dayang Bahira, [42] and Dayang +Sawira. Dayang Saliha bore Idda. Akal begot Orangkaya Muhaddi, who +begot Hinda Human. Orangkaya Layu begot Dayang Jawsul [43]-Manalum, +who became famous. Manalum bore Ma'asum, Bulaying and Jamila. [44] +Jamila bore Itang. Ma'asum begot Bayi. Bulayin begot Inda and Duwalang. + +Jawsul begot Na'ika and Rajiya. [45] The former begot Orangkaya +Sila. Rajiya bore Tuan Aminud [46] Din. [47] Santan bore Ma'mun. [48] +Ma'mun begot Orangkayas Utung and Amang. Satan bore Palas and +Bahatul. Bahatul begot Abdul Hadi. [49] Ambang bore Orankayas +Amin and Bunga. [50] Orangkaya Amin begot Rajiya and Zakiya. [51] +Zakiya is the mother of Orangkaya Sila. Rajiya is the mother of Tuan +Aminud-Din. Bunga begot Aliya and Salima. [52] Salima bore Hinda +Baying Gumantung. + +Duwi bore Manduli and Immang. Manduli is the mother of Tuan Iman Anda +and Na'ima. [53] Immang bore Mali. Sitti bore Orangkayas Ugu, Garu, +Abu Bakr, Abu Samma, Manawun, Sayda, and Suda. Allak begot Ila and +Malum. [54] Ila bore Andungayi. Malum is the father of Imming. Tamwan +bore Ima. Ima begot Angkala. Angkala begot Inung. Inung begot Hinda +Nakib [55] Adak. + + + +DESCENDANTS OF TUAN MASHA'IKA + +This is the genealogy of Tuan Masha'ika. It was said by the men +of old that he was a prophet who was not descended from Adam. He +was born out of a bamboo and was esteemed and respected by all the +people. The people were ignorant and simple-minded in those days and +were not Mohammedans of the Sunni sect. Some of them worshiped tombs, +and some worshiped stones of various kinds. + +Masha'ika married the daughter of Raja Sipad the Younger, who was a +descendant of Sipad the Older. His wife's name was Idda [56] Indira +[57] Suga. [58] She bore three children, Tuan Hakim, [59] Tuan Pam, +and 'Aisha. [60] Tuan Hakim begot Tuan Da'im, [61] Tuan Buda, Tuan +Bujang, Tuan Muku, and a girl. Da'im begot Saykaba. Saykaba begot +Angkan. Angkan begot Kamalud [62] Din, and Katib [63] Mu`allam [64] +Apipud [65] Din, and Pakrud [66] Din, and many girls. + +Tuan May begot Datu Tka, who was surnamed Dina, Lama and Timwan. Dina +begot Abi [67] Abdul Wakid [68] and Maryam. [69] + + + +ORIGINAL AND LATER SETTLERS OF SULU + +This chapter treats of the original inhabitants of the Island of +Sulu. The first dwellers of the land of Sulu were the people of +Maymbung, whose rulers were the two brothers, Datu Sipad and Datu +Narwangsa. After them came the people of Tagimaha, who formed another +party. After these came the Bajaw (Samals) from Juhur. These were +driven here by the tempest (monsoon) and were divided between both +parties. Some of the Bajaw were driven by the tempest to Bruney and +some to Mindanao. After the arrival of the Bajaw, the people of Sulu +became four parties. [70] Some time after that there came Karimul +[71] Makdum. [72] He crossed the sea in a vase or pot of iron and +was called Sarip. [73] He settled at Bwansa, [74] the place where +the Tagimaha nobles lived. There the people flocked to him from all +directions, and he built a house for religious worship. + +Ten years later Raja Baginda [75] came from Menangkabaw to +Sambuwangan. [76] From there he moved to Basilan and later to +Sulu. When he arrived at Sulu the chiefs of Bwansa tried to sink +his boats and drown him in the sea. He therefore resisted and fought +them. During the fight he inquired as to the reason why they wanted to +sink his boats and drown him. He told them that he had committed no +crime against them and that he was not driven there by the tempest, +but that he was simply traveling, and came to Sulu to live among +them because they were Mohammedans. When they learned that he was a +Mohammedan, they respected him and received him hospitably. The chiefs +of Sulu who were living at that time were Datu Layla [77] Ujan, Datu +Sana, Datu Amu, Datu Sultan, [78] Datu Basa, and Datu Ung. Another +class of chiefs called Mantiri were Tuan Jalal, [79] Tuan Akmat, [80] +Tuan Saylama, Tuan Hakim, Tuan Buda, Tuan Da'im, and Tuan Bujang. The +Tagimaha chiefs were Sayk [81] Ladun, Sayk Sahdu, and Sayk Bajsala. The +Baklaya chiefs were Orangkaya Simtu and Orangkaya Ingsa. All the +above chiefs were living at the time Raja Baginda came to Sulu. + +There also came to Sulu from Bwayan, [82] Sangilaya Bakti and Sangilaya +Mansalah. The latter's wife was Baliya'an Ñyaga. + +Five years after Raja Baginda's arrival at Sulu the Raja of Jawa +[83] sent a messenger to Sulu with a present of wild elephants. The +messenger's name was Jaya. He died at Ansang, and two elephants only +arrived at Sulu. + +After that time there came Sayid [84] Abu Bakr from Palembang [85] +to Bruney and from there to Sulu. When he arrived near the latter +place he met some people and asked them: "Where is your town and where +is your place of worship?" They said, "At Bwansa." He then came to +Bwansa and lived with Raja Baginda. The people respected him, and +he established a religion for Sulu. They accepted the new religion +and declared their faith in it. After that Sayid Abu Bakr married +Paramisuli, the daughter of Raja Baginda, and he received the title +of Sultan Sharif. [86] He begot children, and his descendants are +living to the present day. He lived about thirty years in Bwansa. + +After Abu Bakr, his son Kamalud Din succeeded to the sultanate. Alawad +[87] Din did not become sultan. Putri [88] Sarip lived with her +brother Alawad Din. Alawad Din married Tuan Mayin, the daughter of +Tuan Layla. After the death of Sultan Kamalud Din, Maharaja [89] +Upu succeeded to the sultanate. After the death of Upu, Pangiran [90] +Buddiman became sultan. He was succeeded by Sultan Tanga. The sultans +who followed are, in the order of their succession, Sultan Bungsu, +[91] Sultan Nasirud [92] Din, Sultan Karamat, [93] Sultan Shahabud +[94] Din, Sultan Mustafa [95] called Shapiud [96] Din, Sultan Mohammed +Nasarud [97] Din, Sultan Alimud [98] Din I, Sultan Mohammed Mu`izzid +[99] Din, Sultan Isra'il, [100] Sultan Mohammed Alimud Din II, Sultan +Mohammed Sarapud [101] Din, Sultan Mohammed Alimud Din III. + + + +SULU HISTORICAL NOTES + + +INTRODUCTION + +These notes were copied by the author from a book in the possession +of Hadji Butu, prime minister to the Sultan of Sulu. Pages 1, 2, +and 3 form a separate article. They appear to be a supplement to the +Genealogy of Sulu, but they were undoubtedly derived from a different +source. Their contents are well known to the public and are probably +an attempt on the part of Hadji Butu to register what seemed to him +a true and interesting tradition of his people. + +Page 4 was copied by the author from an old, dilapidated document +which was torn in many places. It no doubt formed part of an authentic +genealogy of Sulu, older and more reliable than that of the manuscripts +on pages 148 and 149. It is written in Malay. + +Page 5 is a copy of a Sulu document issued by Sultan Jamalul-Kiram I +in the year 1251 A. H., or about seventy-three years ago. It confers +the title of Khatib or Katib [102] on a Sulu pandita [103] named +Adak. In conferring a title of this sort it is customary among the +Sulus to give the person so honored a new name, generally an Arabic +one, such as Abdur Razzak. [104] The same custom is observed in the +case of accession to the sultanate and other high offices. + +The writing at the top of the page is the seal of Jamalul Kiram. The +date given in the seal is the date of his sultanate. The flourish at +the end of the signature below is the mark of the writer. + + + +SULU NOTES + +Translation of page 1 of the original manuscript.--The first person +who lived on the Island of Sulu is Jamiyun Kulisa. [105] His wife +was Indira [106] Suga. [107] They were sent here by Alexander the +Great. [108] Jamiyun Kulisa begot Tuan Masha'ika. [109] Masha'ika +begot Mawmin. [110] Mawmin's descendants multiplied greatly. They +are the original inhabitants of Sulu and chief ancestors of the +present generation. + +Translation of page 2 of the original manuscript.--In the days of +the Timway [111] Orangkaya Su'il the Sulus received from Manila four +Bisayan captives, one silver agong, [112] one gold hat, one gold +cane, and one silver vase, as a sign of friendship between the two +countries. One of the captives had red eyes, one had black eyes; one, +blue eyes; and one, white eyes. + +Translation of page 3 of the original manuscript.--The red-eyed +man was stationed at Parang, [113] and is the forefather of all the +people of Parang. The white-eyed man was stationed at Lati, [114] +and is the forefather of all the people of Lati. The black-eyed man +was stationed at Gi'tung, [115] and is the forefather of the people +of Gi'tung. The blue-eyed man was stationed at Lu'uk, [116] and is +the forefather of the people of Lu'uk. At that time the religion of +Mohammed had not come to Sulu. + +Translation of page 4 of the original manuscript.--The first +inhabitants of the Island of Sulu were the people of Maymbung. [117] +They were followed by the Tagimaha [118] and the Baklaya. [119] Later +came the Bajaw (Samals) from Juhur. Some Bajaws were taken by the +Sulus and were distributed among the three divisions of the island, +while others drifted to Bruney and Magindanao. Some time after that +there came Karimul [120] Makdum. [121] He sailed in a pot of iron and +the ancients called him Sharif [122] Awliya. [123] The Sulus adopted +the Mohammedan religion and brought Makdum to Bwansa. [124] There +the Tagimaha chiefs built a mosque. Ten years later there arrived +Raja Baginda, who emigrated from Menangkabaw. [125] Baginda came to +Zamboanga first. From there he moved to Basilan and Sulu. The natives +met him on the sea for the purpose of fighting him. He asked them, +"Why do you wish to fight a Mohammedan who is coming to live with +you?" He married there. + + +The commission of Khatib Abdur Razzak. + +The Conqueror. By the order of the Omniscient King, The Sultan +Mohammed Jamalul Kiram. The year 1239. + + + +Translation of page 5 of the original manuscript.--Dated Wednesday, +the tenth of Ramadan, in the year "D," the first, which corresponds +to the year 1251 of the Hegirah of the Prophet Mohammed, may the best +of God's mercy and blessing be his. This day his majesty our master, +the Sultan Jamalul [126] Kiram [127] has granted Adak an official +title by virtue of which he will be known as Khatib [128] Abdur [129] +Razzak. [130] This is done in conference and consultation and with +the consent of all the people, without dissent. + + +By the will of God the most High. + +(Signed) The Sultan Jamaul Kiram. + + + [The End.] + + + + + + + +CHAPTER III + +RISE AND PROSPERITY OF SULU + + +SULU BEFORE ISLAM + +The Genealogy of Sulu is a succinct analysis of the tribes or elements +which constituted the bulk of the early inhabitants of the island and +is the most reliable record we have of the historical events which +antedated Islam. + +The original inhabitants of the island are commonly referred to as +Buranun or Budanun, which means "mountaineers" or "hill people." This +term is occasionally used synonymously with Gimbahanun, which means +"people of the interior," and with Manubus in the sense of "savage +hill people" or "aborigines." Some of the old foreign residents of +Sulu maintain that they recognize considerable similarity between the +Buranun and the Dayaks of Borneo, and say that the home utensils and +clothes of the Sulus in the earlier days closely resembled those of +the Dayaks. + +The capital of the Buranun was Maymbung. The earliest known ruler of +Maymbung was Raja Sipad the Older, of whom nothing is related except +that he was the ancestor of Raja Sipad the Younger. In the days of the +latter there appeared Tuan Masha'ika, about whose ancestry there seems +to be considerable ambiguity and difference of opinion. According to +the Genealogy of Sulu he was supposed to have issued out of a stalk +of bamboo, and was held by the people as a prophet. The traditions +state that Tuan Masha'ika was the son of Jamiyun Kulisa and Indira +Suga, who came to Sulu with Alexander the Great. + +Jamiyun Kulisa and Indira Suga are mythological names [131] and in all +probability represent male and female gods related to the thunderbolt +and the sun, respectively. The former religion of the Sulus was of +Hindu origin. It deified the various phenomena of nature and assigned +the highest places in its pantheon to Indra, the sky; Agni, the fire; +Vayu, the wind; Surya, the sun. The ancient Sulus no doubt had many +myths relating to the marriages and heroic deeds of their gods by +which natural phenomena were explained, and it is not unlikely that +the above story of Jamiyun Kulisa was one of those myths. Taken in +this light, the above legend may express the belief of the ancient +Sulus that, by the marriage of the gods, Jamiyun Kulisa and Indira, +rain fell and life was so imparted to the soil that plants grew. + +The word Masha'ika is so written in the Malay text as to suggest its +probable formation from two words Masha and ika. The Sanskrit word +Masha means "pulse" or "plant." Ika or eka means "one." On the other +hand masha-ika may represent the two parts of the Sanskrit mashika +which means "five mashas." It may not therefore be improbable that +masha-ika refers to the subordinate deity which assumes the form of +a plant or signifies the first man, whom the deity created from a +plant. It is not an uncommon feature of Malay legends to ascribe a +supernatural origin to the ancestor of the tribe, and Tuan Masha'ika +probably represents the admission into the Buranun stock of foreign +blood and the rise of a chief not descended from Rajah Sipad the +Older. The tarsila [132] adds that he married the daughter of Raja +Sipad the Younger, Iddha, [133] and became the forefather of the +principal people of Sulu. + +The common belief among the Sulus that Alexander the Great invaded +their island is one of many indications which lead one to think that +most of their knowledge and traditions came by the way of Malacca or +Juhur, and possibly Tuan Masha'ika came from the same direction. It +does seem therefore as if the dynasty of Sipad was supplanted by a +foreign element represented by Tuan Masha'ika. + +These two elements were later augmented by the Tagimaha who settled +at Bwansa and along the coast west of that point, and by the Baklaya +who settled on the same coast east of the present site of Jolo. The +four tribes thus brought so closely together mixed very intimately +and later lost their identity in the development of a single nation, +which reached its maturity under the guiding hand of a Mohammedan +master. In spite of later immigrations to the island and in spite of +conquest and defeat, the national character thus formed has remained +unchanged throughout history and the Sulu of to-day still maintains +that same individuality which he acquired in his earlier days. + +The noted emigration of the Bajaws or Samals of Juhur must have begun +in the earlier parts of the fourteenth century, if not earlier. These +sea nomads came in such large numbers and in such quick succession as +to people the whole Tawi-tawi Group, the Pangutaran and Siasi Groups, +all available space on the coast of Sulu proper, the Balangingi Group, +and the coasts of Basilan and Zamboanga, before the close of the +century and before the arrival of the first Mohammedan pioneers. + +The Samals exceeded the Sulus in number, and the effect of +such overwhelming immigration must have been considerable; but, +nevertheless, the Sulu maintained his nationality and rose to the +occasion in a most remarkable manner. The newcomers were taken into his +fold and were given his protection, for which they rendered noteworthy +service; but their relation was never allowed to exceed that of a +slave to his master or that of a subject to his ruler, and the Samals +thus remained like strangers or guests in the land until a late date. + +Besides the Samals, some Bugis [134] and Ilanun emigrants gained +a foothold on the northern and northeastern coast of Sulu. The +Bugis appear to have lost their identity, but the Ilanun are still +recognizable in many localities, and some of the principal datus of +Sulu still trace their origin to Mindanao. + +The numerous and extensive piratical expeditions undertaken by the +Sulus from time immemorial must have been a great source of further +influx of foreign blood. The earliest traditions say that, in the days +of the Timway, [135] Orangkaya Su'il, slaves or hostages were sent +by the raja of Manila to secure the friendship of the Sulus. These +slaves were, according to some accounts, of six colors, but the +written records give them as four--red-eyed, white-eyed, blue-eyed, +and black-eyed. The people do not entertain any doubt relative to the +truth of these statements, and the custom is current even among the +Samals of referring to the origin of some person as descended from +the red-eyed slave, in making distinction as to whether he comes from +a noble or is of low birth and as to the part of the country to which +he belongs. According to general opinion the red-eyed slaves lived at +Parang, the western section of the island; the white-eyed at Lati, +the northern section lying to the east of Jolo; the black-eyed at +Gi'tung, the middle and southern section; the blue-eyed at Lu'uk, +the eastern section. + +This color distinction is difficult to explain, but it must have arisen +out of the established custom of dividing slaves and captives, after +returning from a piratical expedition, among the great chiefs of the +various parties which composed the expedition. These parties as a rule +belonged to four sections representing the four great districts of the +island, over each of which one chief formerly was in authority. [136] + +The number of elements which have thus entered into the constitution of +the Sulu people must be great, for there was not a single island in the +Philippine Archipelago which was spared by these marauders. Indeed, +the nation owes its origin and its chief characters to piracy. As +pirates these people took refuge in this island and lived in it, and +as pirates they have stamped their reputation on the annals of history. + +However, the Sulus do not differ in this particular point from +the Malays of other countries. All Malays were equally addicted to +piracy. "It is in the Malay's nature," says an intelligent Dutch +writer, "to rove on the seas in his prau, as it is in that of the +Arab to wander with his steed on the sands of the desert. It is as +impossible to limit the adventurous life of a Malay to fishing and +trading as to retain a Bedouin in a village or in a habitation. * * * +This is not merely their habit; it may be termed their instinct." [137] + +"As surely as spiders abound where there are nooks and corners," +says another, "so have pirates sprung up wherever there is a nest +of islands offering creeks and shallows, headlands, rocks, and +reefs--facilities, in short, for lurking, for surprise, for attack, +and for escape. The semibarbarous inhabitant of the Archipelago, +born and bred in this position, naturally becomes a pirate. It is as +natural to him to consider any well-freighted, ill-protected boat +his property as it is to the fishing eagle above his head to sweep +down upon the weaker but more hardworking bird and swallow what he +has not had the trouble of catching." + +So we are told that before the days of Makdum and Raja Baginda, +Sulu had long been an emporium not only of regular traders from most +nations, but the headquarters of those piratical marauders who there +found a ready market for enslaved victims. + + + +INTRODUCTION OF ISLAM AND THE RISE OF A MOHAMMEDAN DYNASTY IN SULU, +1380-1450 + +To this period belongs the Mohammedan invasion of the Archipelago. If +the Buranun [138] were Dayaks in origin, they certainly did not +keep their Dayak characteristics very long. For in all probability +Tuan Masha'ika, the Tagimahas, and the Baklayas were Malays [139] +who came into Sulu from the west, and the dynasty established by +Masha'ika must have exercised due influence on the Buranun. Whatever +religion or customs these Malay conquerors had in their original land, +they no doubt continued to practise in their new home. It does not +appear that the Samals produced any change in this respect, and the +same worship and social organization which the Sulus had remained +unchanged until the Mohammedans reached the Archipelago. + +The two prominent characters who mark this era are Makdum and Raja +Baginda. Makdum was a noted Arabian judge or scholar who arrived at +Malacca about the middle of the fourteenth century, converted Sultan +Mohammed Shah, the ruler, to Islam and established this religion +throughout the state of Malacca. He evidently practised magic and +medicine and exerted an unusually strong influence on the people +of Malacca. Continuing farther east, he reached Sulu and Mindanao +about the year 1380. [140] In Sulu, it is said, he visited almost +every island of the Archipelago and made converts to Islam in many +places. The Island of Sibutu claims his grave, but the places at +which he was most successful are Bwansa, the old capital of Sulu, +and the Island of Tapul. It is said that the people of Bwansa built +a mosque for him, and some of the chiefs of the town accepted his +teachings and faith. The Tapul people claim descent from him, and +some of them still regard him as a prophet. + +Makdum's success in preaching a new faith to people as independent +in their individual views and as pertinacious in their religious +practices, beliefs, and customs as the Sulus must have been in his +time, is certainly remarkable and creditable to a high degree. The +results of his mission to Malacca and Sulu throw a new light on the +history of Islam in the Philippine Islands and modify the opinion +formerly held relative to its introduction by the sword. How much of +a lasting effect the teachings of Makdum could have had on Sulu is +very difficult of estimation, but in all probability the new sapling +planted in the soil of Sulu would have withered before long had it +not been for the future current of events which watered it and reared +it to maturity. + +Some time after Makdum (the Genealogy of Sulu says ten years) +there came into Sulu a prince from Menangkabaw called Raja +Baginda. Menangkabaw [141] is a rich, high region in central Sumatra, +from which many Malayan dynasties seem to have come. Raja was the usual +title applied to all Malayan kings. Baginda is said to have touched at +Sambuwangan (Zamboanga) and Basilan before reaching Sulu. The nature +of such a move can not be explained unless he followed the northern +route leading from Borneo to Kagayan Sulu, Pangutaran, and Zamboanga, +which route seems to have been taken by all Mohammedan missionaries +and invaders mentioned in the tarsila. + +The written records of Baginda's arrival and his later history are +exceedingly brief. When he arrived at Bwansa, the Sulus came out to +engage him in battle, as we would naturally expect; but, the tarsila +continues, on learning that he was a Mohammedan, they desisted from +fighting, invited him to stay with them, and seem to have entertained +him very hospitably. Such an account is absurd on the face of it. Raja +Baginda was not a trader nor a traveler touring the Archipelago. He +was accompanied by ministers and no doubt came to Bwansa to stay +and rule. His coming was an ordinary kind of invasion, which proved +successful. When Abu Bakr reached Bwansa, as we will learn later, he +was directed to Raja Baginda, who must have been the supreme ruler +of Bwansa. Accordingly we find all the chiefs of Sulu enumerated +in the tarsila at the day of Baginda's arrival subordinate in rank, +having no "rajas" among them. + +The Genealogy of Sulu is as misleading as the tarsila of Magindanao +in that it pictures the arrival of Baginda as peaceful as that +of Kabungsuwan. Some of the chiefs who were Mohammedans possibly +intrigued against their former overlords, and, joining Baginda's +forces, defeated their opponents; but the dearth of information +relative to this early Philippine history renders it impracticable to +secure any more light on the subject. It may not, however, be out of +place to remind the reader that the fourteenth century was marked by +unusual activity in methods of warfare. Gunpowder, which was known and +used as an explosive long before that date, had not been made use of in +throwing projectiles in battle. The Arabs, we know, used firearms early +in the fourteenth century, and we may conjecture that they introduced +such weapons into Malacca and other parts of Malaysia as they moved +east. It is not improbable then that a prince coming from Sumatra +was provided with firearms which overawed the ignorant inhabitants of +Bwansa and subdued the valor and courage of the Sulu and Samal pirates +of those days. The statement made in the tarsila of Magindanao that, +after the people of Slangan came down the river to where Kabungsuwan +was anchored, "He beckoned (or pointed his finger) to them, but one +of them died on that account, and they were frightened and returned," +is the only kind of evidence found which can possibly be interpreted to +indicate that a firearm was used. Lacking confirmation as this may be, +yet we positively know that when the Spaniards reached these Islands, +these people had an abundance of firearms, muskets, lantaka [142] +and other cannon, and we may be justified in saying that probably +firearms existed in the land in the century preceding the arrival of +the Spaniards. This brings us approximately down to Baginda's days. + +In considering the etymology of the titles of the Sulu chiefs mentioned +in the time of Baginda, we observe that they are of three classes. The +first class were the datus. These had mantiri or ministers and probably +represented the descendants of Raja Sipad and Tuan Masha'ika. The +second class were the sayk. "Sayk" is probably derived from the Arabic +"Sheikh" meaning "chief." These were the Tagimaha chiefs, and their +rank was evidently subordinate to that of datu. The third class were +the orangkaya, the Baklaya chiefs. These are also subordinate in +grade and could not have been higher than the sayk. The words datu +and orangkaya it must be remembered are of Malay origin, while raja +and baginda are Sanskrit, baginda being the highest and being often +used as equivalent to emperor, while raja means only king. + +Jawa is the Malay term for Java. The incident related in the tarsila +relative to the gift of two elephants sent by the raja of Java to the +raja of Sulu is interesting, in that it explains the existence in Jolo +of the elephants found there during the earlier Spanish invasions. It +further indicates that Raja Baginda was not an insignificant chief +and that he kept up some kind of communication with the rajas of +western Malaysia. + +The elephants received by Baginda were let loose, the story says, +and they lived and multiplied on Mount Tumangtangis. On the declivity +of this mountain there is a place still called lubluban-gaja, which +means the "habitat or lying-place of the elephant." The people relate +several stories which make mention of the elephant, one of which +declares that the chief who killed the last wild elephant was given +the hand of the sultan's daughter in marriage, in admiration of his +strength and bravery. + + + +ESTABLISHMENT OF THE MOHAMMEDAN CHURCH IN SULU AND THE REIGN OF ABU +BAKR, 1450-1480 + +Brevity is without exception a marked characteristic of all Moro +writings. Their letters, unlike those of the Malays and Arabs, are +brief and devoid of compliment or detail. + +It is very difficult to pick out a superfluous word or phrase from the +text of the Sulu tarsila. In fact, the narrative of events throughout +the manuscript is so curtailed as to be reduced to a mere synopsis of +headlines. It gives a very dim view of the general subject and leaves +out much that is desired. Thus, the whole question of establishing +Islam in Sulu and organizing its sultanate is dispensed with in one +short paragraph briefly enumerating the following facts: That Sayid +Abu Bakr came to Bwansa from Palembang by the way of Bruney; that he +lived with Raja Baginda and taught and established a new religion +for Sulu; that he was greatly respected by the people; and that he +married Paramisuli, the daughter of Baginda, and became sultan. + +The traditions of the country, notwithstanding their brevity, add +some further but less reliable information. It is the common belief +that Abu Bakr was born in Mecca and that he lived some time at Juhur +(or Malacca). Others state that it was his father, Zaynul Abidin, +who came from Mecca and that Abu Bakr was born of the daughter of +the Sultan of Juhur at Malacca. He came to Pangutaran first, the +narrative continues, then to Zamboanga and Basilan. His younger +brother, who had accompanied him, continued eastward to Mindanao, +while he remained at Basilan for a short while. Having heard of Abu +Bakr, the people of Sulu sent Orangkaya Su'il to Basilan to invite +him to Bwansa to rule over them. This invitation was accepted and +Abu Bakr was inaugurated sultan over Sulu soon after his arrival there. + +From the annals of Malacca we know that Abu Bakr was a famous authority +on law and religion and that his mission to Malaysia was prompted by +enthusiasm for the promulgation of the doctrines of Abu Ishaq, which +were embodied in a book entitled "Darul-Mazlum, or The House of the +Oppressed or Ignorant." After preaching these doctrines in Malacca with +success, he evidently proceeded farther east, stopping at Palembang +and Bruney and reaching Sulu about 1450. The hospitality with which +he was received at Bwansa points to success in his mission to a degree +that enabled him later to marry the Princess Paramisuli, the daughter +of Raja Baginda. He established mosques there and taught religion and +law; and the people and chiefs actually abandoned their former gods +and practiced the new religion and observed its commandments. This +process of reformation and conversion was no doubt slow and gradual, +but it was real and sure. + +There is no evidence to show that Abu Bakr had any military forces +by virtue of which he could assume military authority and rule after +Baginda's death. But it is perfectly credible that Raja Baginda, +being without a male heir, appointed Abu Bakr, his son-in-law and +chief judge and priest, as his heir, and delegated to him all the +authority he exercised over Bwansa and the Island of Sulu. This +it appears was acquiesced in by the native chiefs who accepted +Abu Bakr as their temporal overlord, as well as their spiritual +master. Claiming descent from Mohammed, he assumed the powers of a +caliph and entitled himself sultan. The Sulus as a rule refer to him +as As-Sultan ash-Sharif al-Hashimi, meaning the Sultan, the Hashimite +Sharif or noble. The words Mohammed and Abu Bakr are generally left +out when he is mentioned in prayer or in ordinary discourse. + +Having established the church, his next aim, after ascending the throne +of Sulu, was the political reorganization of the government. This he +undertook to frame on the same principles as those of an Arabian +sultanate, giving himself all the power and prerogatives of a +caliph. In enforcing such claims of absolute sovereignty, Abu Bakr +declared to the people and their local chiefs that the widows, the +orphans, and the land were his by right. This the people hesitated +to submit to, and another measure was adopted which reconciled the +interests of all parties. They agreed that all the shores of the +island and all that territory within which the royal gong or drum +could be heard should be the sultan's personal property, and that +the rest of the island should be divided among the subordinate +chiefs and their people. The island was accordingly divided into +five administrative districts, over each one of which one panglima +exercised power subject to the supervision and superior authority of +the sultan. These districts were again divided into smaller divisions, +which were administered by subordinate officers or chiefs called +maharaja, orangkaya, laksamana, parukka, etc. The districts were +called Parang, Pansul, Lati, Gi'tung, and Lu'uk. The boundaries which +it seemed necessary at that time to define were marked by large trees, +none of which is living at present. Thus a sangay [143] tree separated +Parang from Pansul. The location of this tree was at a point near Bud +Agad and the stream Agahun, which runs down from Tumangtangis toward +Maymbung. A bawnu [143] tree separated Pansul from Lati. This tree was +located at a place called Indung, intermediate between Asturias and +the walled town of Jolo. A mampalam [143] tree called Tarak separated +Lati from Lu'uk. It was in the vicinity of the settlement of Su'. A +variety of durian tree named Siggal-saggal formed the boundary of +Lati and Gi'tung. + +According to later usage, these districts are defined as follows: +Parang is the western district lying west of a line passing through a +point east of the summit of Tumangtangis and a point on the southern +coast 3 miles west of Maymbung. A line passing through Mount Pula +and a point a little east of Maymbung marks the boundary between +Pansul on the west and Lati and Gi'tung on the east. The watershed is +generally considered as the dividing line between Lati and Gi'tung. A +line joining Su' on the north and Lubuk on the south separates Lati +and Gi'tung from Lu'uk. A sixth district has lately been carved out +and termed Tandu, forming the easternmost part of the island. A line +joining Sukuban on the south and Limawa on the north divides Tandu +and Lu'uk. + +The government thus organized was conducted in conformity with local +customs and laws modified to such an extent as not to be repugnant +and contrary to Mohammedan laws and the precepts of the Quran. To +preserve this consistency, a code of laws was made and promulgated +by Abu Bakr. This, once established, became the guide of all the +subordinate officers of the state, who, as a rule, observed it and +carried out its instructions. The general lines on which Abu Bakr +conducted his government seem to have been followed very closely by all +his successors. Such an adventurous and aggressive man as he was could +not have stopped within the limits of the island. In all probability +he pushed out in various directions, but no records have so far been +found which give any account of the conquests he made or the limits +of his empire. Abu Bakr lived thirty years in Sulu and died about 1480. + + + +EARLY DAYS OF THE SULTANATE, 1480-1635 + + +SUCCESSORS OF ABU BAKR + +The dynasty founded by Abu Bakr ruled with a firmer hand and attained +considerable power and fame. The new organization establishing +law and order, consolidated the forces of the state and increased +its influence on the outside world. Islam added a new element of +strength and another stimulus to campaign and conquest. The Sulus never +exceeded 60,000 in number, yet we learn that, prior to the arrival of +Magellan, their power was felt all over Luzon and the Bisayan Islands, +the Celebes Sea, Palawan, North Borneo, and the China Sea, and their +trade extended from China and Japan, at the one extreme, to Malacca, +Sumatra, and Java at the other. + +Abu Bakr was succeeded by his second son, Kamalud-Din. Alawad-Din, +the elder son, was weak-minded and was evidently not supported by +the ministers of the state. The next three sultans who followed +were Diraja, Upu, and Digunung. Their full names are, the Sultan +Amirul Umara [144] Maharaja Diraja, the Sultan Mu`izzul Mutawadi`in +[145] Maharaja Upu, the Sultan Nasirud-Din Awal [146] Digunung [147] +(or Habud [148]). + +The sixth sultan was Mohammedul Halim [149] Pangiran Buddiman. During +his reign Governor Sandé equipped and directed large expeditions to +Borneo and Sulu. The armada sent to Sulu was commanded by Capt. Esteban +Rodriguez de Figueroa and reached the town of Jolo in June, 1578. It +is asserted that Rodriguez defeated Pangiran and exacted tribute from +the Sulus. Rodriguez, however, did not occupy Jolo, and no permanent +advantage was derived from his victory. + + + +FIGUEROA'S EXPEDITION AGAINST SULU + +This invasion marked the beginning of a state of war between Sulu +and Spain, which covered a period of three hundred years and caused +considerable devastation and loss of life. It cost Spain an immense +loss of men and money and finally brought on the decline of Sulu +and its end as an independent state. The magnitude of this strife, +its far-reaching effects, and its bearing on the Spanish and American +occupation of Sulu, invites special attention to the causes of the +war and the Sulu character which it depicts. + +The expedition to Jolo formed part of and immediately followed the +expedition which was directed by Governor Sandé against Borneo. There +is no doubt that, besides the reasons Sandé gave for the expedition +to Borneo, he was really actuated by jealousy of the Portuguese, +whose influence had reached Bruney and the Moluccas, and by a strong +desire to conquer Borneo, Sulu, Mindanao, and the Moluccas. His +reasons for sending the expedition against Sulu are best given in +his letter of instructions to Capt. Rodriguez de Figueroa, which is +extremely interesting and is herein quoted in full: [150] + + + That which you, Capt. Esteban Rodriguez de Figueroa, shall + observe on the expedition which you are about to make, God our + Lord helping, is as follows: + + From this city and Island of Borneo, God willing, you shall go + to the Islands of Sulu, where you shall endeavor to reduce that + chief and his people to the obedience of his Majesty. You shall + bargain with them as to what tribute they shall pay, which shall + be in pearls, as they are wont to give to the King of Bruney. You + shall exercise great care and, if possible, much mildness; for it + is of importance that those islands should not become depopulated; + therefore, in case they receive you peaceably, you shall treat + them well. And, in addition to the above, you must order that, + besides the tribute that they are to pay in pearls, they shall + obtain as many of them as possible, so that we, the Spaniards or + Castilians, may buy them; that they must trade with us from now on; + that every year Castilians will go to their lands with cloths and + merchandise from China, of whatever they shall declare that they + may need. You shall inform yourself of their needs; and if they + wish to come to our settlements you shall give them permission to + go freely to Manila and to come to Borneo, although not to steal. + + Item: You shall find out from them the whereabouts of the artillery + and anchors of a ship lost there some three years ago; and you + shall seek it and see that it be brought you with all haste. You + shall keep close watch over the artillery, ammunition, vessels, + sails, and other like things pertaining to the armed fleet; and + you shall deprive them of those supplies, for it is notorious + that those people are common marauders. + + And because of my information that the chief who calls himself + lord of Sulu is a Bornean, and owns houses in this city of Bruney; + that he fought against us in the naval battle, and that he fled + to Sulu, where he is now; and since I am told that he took two + galleys and three small vessels, artillery and ammunition, you + shall exercise the utmost despatch to obtain the said galleys, + vessels, artillery, and ammunition. If he acquiesce, you shall + give him a passport. You shall see whether he has any children; + and if so, you shall take one, and tell him that he must come to + see me in Bruney in February. + + And, as I have said, this must be done if possible gently, + in order that no people may be killed. You shall tell him that + it will be to their advantage to be vassals of his Majesty and + our allies. If they do not act respectfully, and it shall be + necessary to punish them in another manner, you shall do so. And + inasmuch as the Sulus, as is well known, are open pirates, whose + only ambition is to steal, and to assault men in order to sell + them elsewhere--especially as they go annually for plunder among + all the Pintados [151] Islands, which are under his Majesty's + dominion--you shall try to ascertain the Pintados slaves among + them, in order to return such to their homes, especially those + who are Christians. And, as I have said, you shall deprive them + of such vessels as seem to be used for raids, leaving them their + fishing vessels, so that if the said lord of Sulu so desire, he + can come to confer reasonably with me. Thus you shall ascertain + who has vessels, and who can inflict injuries; and you shall + command them expressly to settle down on their land, to cultivate, + sow, and harvest, develop the pearl industry, and cease to be + pirates. You shall order them to raise fowls and cattle. You shall + try to ascertain their number, and bring it to me in writing, in + order that I may see it, together with the distance from these + islands to the Sulu Islands, information regarding the food, + water, and healthfulness of that land, and other things that may + occur to you. And you shall tell the people in my name that they + shall tame for me a couple of elephants, and that I shall send + for those animals and pay for them. + + After having finished affairs in Sulu, if time permits, you shall, + God willing, go to the Island of Mindanao. There you shall try, + by the most convenient methods and with friendliness, to reduce + the chief of the river of Mindanao, and the other chiefs of that + island, and of those near by, to the obedience of his Majesty, + giving him to understand what they will gain in becoming his + Majesty's vassals and our allies, and in having trade with us. + + And, in order that the tribute may not prevent them from making + peace with us, you shall not ask them for any tribute; but you + shall take what they give freely, and nothing more, and in such + form as they are willing to give. Thus you shall suit their + convenience in everything pertaining to them, and cause them to + understand the great expenses of his Majesty in this land. You + shall also tell them that the gain therefrom affects them chiefly, + since we come to teach them our civilization, and most of all + the service of God, our Lord, who created and redeemed them, and + of whom they are ignorant; and how to live in accord with natural + law, as is their obligation. For this purpose you shall tell them + that you are going to their land for two principal reasons: + + The first is that they should cease to be pirates, who rob and + harry the weak, and enslave wherever and whomsoever they can, + selling their captives outside of their own island, and separating + them from their wives and children; and that they must cease to + commit other like cruelties and thefts, and must become good and + virtuous men, who shall grow to merit the second and principal + reason for going to their lands. You shall give them to understand + that they are ignorant of God, our Lord, who created and redeemed + them, so that when they know him they may serve him and become + good. It is quite evident that they will gain very much in these + things, and therefore it is right that they aid us and give us + something. This shall be at their own will, as above said. + + Item: You shall order them not to admit any more preachers of + the doctrine of Mohammed, since it is evil and false, and that + of the Christians alone is good. And because we have been in + these regions so short a time, the lord of Mindanao has been + deceived by the preachers of Bruney, and the people have become + Moros. You shall tell them that our object is that he be converted + to Christianity; and that he must allow us freely to preach the + law of the Christians, and the natives must be allowed to go to + hear the preaching and to be converted, without receiving any + harm from the chiefs. + + And you shall try to ascertain who are the preachers of the sect + of Mohammed, and shall seize and bring them before me and you + shall burn or destroy the house where that accursed doctrine has + been preached, and you shall order that it be not rebuilt. + + Item: You shall order that the Indians [152] shall not go outside + of their island to trade; and you shall seize those vessels used + for plundering excursions, leaving them those which, in your + judgment, are used for trade and fishing. You shall take also + what artillery and ammunition they have. + + You shall ascertain the harvest seasons and products of the land; + the gold mines and the places where they wash gold; the number + of inhabitants and their settlements; and their customs. You + must especially secure information regarding cinnamon, in order + to ascertain if it is found along the river, or if one must go + to Cavite for it, and why it is not as good as that which the + Portuguese take to Castilla. You shall ascertain how they cut + and strip it from the tree, and if it be of importance that it + dry on the tree, or in what other manner it should be treated, + for I have been told that that obtained from these districts in + the past has not been good and has not a good sale in Spain. + + And, since it might happen that the people will not make peace, + and may offer fight, and show disrespect, then you shall punish + them as you deem best, taking special care not to trust them; + for it is evident that before all else they will, if possible, + commit some treachery. You must not await such an occasion, + for we know already their treachery against his Majesty's fleet + commanded by Villalobos, certain of whose men they killed under + assurances of safety; and they seized a boat. In that treachery + all the inhabitants of the islands were participants; for four + or five thousand of the said natives attacked one small boat, + which contained four or five Spaniards. Likewise many people + took part in the killing of the said Villalobos's master-of-camp, + and other soldiers, in that same year. You shall remind them of + these things, and warn them; for, from now on, we shall destroy + them and their generation. + + And, since it might happen that, without any occasion of war + or peace, the said natives flee to the mountains, you shall + order that certain of the said natives summon them; and, when + they have come, you shall discuss the matter with them. If they + refuse to come, you shall, in conformity with your orders, remain + there a given time. And if they continue to refuse to come down, + you shall leave them, and shall return, without permitting their + houses to be burned or their palm trees to be cut down. Neither + shall anything be stolen from them; but you shall take only what + is absolutely necessary for food and the food and other things + necessary to provision your vessels for the return trip. + + You shall try to secure information of the Island of Linboton, + as well as of Batachina and Celebes, so as to advise me thereof; + and you shall do this in accord with the time limit I have set + for you to make this exploration, and you shall observe the same + rule as in that of Mindanao. + + In order that we may allot in encomiendas [153] whatever people + are found in these districts, you shall bring me a signed + notarial writ. Thus, as those lands have no other owner, the + natives thereof may be reduced to the obedience of his Majesty, + according to his will--and by war, if the natives begin it, so + that war on our part may be just, and that the same justice may + continue, so that we can compel them to obey, and impose tributes + upon them. You shall exercise much diligence in this and see to + it that these orders be carried out carefully and intelligently. + + God willing, I shall be in Bruney by the end of the month of + January next--or, at the latest, by the eighth of February--with + the fleet and all the necessaries that must be brought from Manila, + and that which is here. And at that time your grace shall come to + Bruney with the fleet that you have, and with all the people that + you have or shall have in the Pintados, so that we may do here + whatever is proper for the service of his Majesty, to which we are + bound. These instructions must not be disregarded in any point, + unless I advise you to the contrary by letter. And to this end + you shall see that all who live and dwell there be commissioned + for the above, in addition to their own duties. Given at Bruney, + May twenty-three, one thousand five hundred and seventy-eight. + + If the natives of Mindanao or of any other place shall give + tribute according to the above, you shall act according to the + usual custom in these islands--namely, you shall take one-half + and place it to the account of his Majesty, while the other half + shall be distributed among the soldiers. Given ut supra. + + + Doctor Francisco de Sandé. + + Before me: + Alonso Beltran, + His Majesty's notary. + + + +REASONS FOR HOSTILITIES + +The above shows clearly that Governor Sandé intended, first, to reduce +Sulu to a vassal state; second, to exact tribute in pearls; third, +to secure the trade of Sulu for the Spaniards; fourth, to punish the +Sultan of Sulu for the help he rendered the Sultan of Bruney against +the Spanish forces; fifth, to rescue the Christian slaves in Sulu; +sixth, to deprive the Sulus of their artillery and ammunition and of +all vessels except fishing vessels, in order to stop their piracy; +seventh, to compel the Sulus to become peaceful agriculturists; +eighth, to uproot the "accursed doctrine" of Mohammed and to convert +the Sulus to the Christian religion. + +The leader of the expedition was directed to carry out these +instructions as carefully and as gently as possible; and there is +no reason to think that he failed to comply with his orders to the +letter. But no matter how careful and faithful Captain Rodriguez could +have been, it was not difficult for the Sulus to understand the purpose +of the expedition and the motives of the Spanish Government, and it +does not stand to reason that such people would yield to vassalage +and receive a direct insult to their religion without resentment +and without a struggle. Governor Sandé knew the reputation of the +Sulus, but he must have underestimated their strength and failed to +provide garrisons for the occupation of the conquered territory and +the protection of peaceful natives. + +In January, 1579, Governor Sandé sent an expedition to Mindanao, +commanded by Capt. Gabriel de Ribera, under instructions similar to +those given to Captain Rodriguez. Ribera had additional orders to +visit Jolo and collect the tribute for that year, and special stress +was laid on procuring from the Sultan of Sulu "two or three tame +elephants." Ribera accomplished nothing in Mindanao; the natives +abandoned their villages and fled to the interior. On his return +to Kawite or Caldera, he met a deputation from Jolo, which brought +insignificant tribute and informed him of the existence of famine in +Sulu and the extreme distress of the people. He returned their tribute, +receiving in its place a cannon, which the Sulus had obtained from +a wrecked Portuguese galley. Ribera then returned to Cebu, without +producing any significant effect on conditions in Sulu. + +In April, 1580, Governor Sandé was relieved by Governor Gonzalo +Ronquillo, who did not take the same interest in Borneo and +Sulu. In the same year the kingdom of Portugal and its rich eastern +colonies were annexed to the Spanish domain. No danger could then be +expected from the direction of Borneo and Sulu, and the ambitious +new Governor-General turned his attention to more desirable fields +of conquest. + +Piracy was not the primary cause of this invasion of Sulu. Public +sentiment was not so strong against slavery in those days as it +is now; for the Spaniards and other leading civilized nations were +then diligently pursuing a profitable trade in it between the west +coast of Africa and the West Indies and America. Piracy is always a +crime among nations, but it can not be urged as the principal and +leading cause of this war or as sufficient reason in itself for +the early precipitation of such a deadly conflict between Sulu and +Spain. Religion, on the other hand, was declared by Governor Sandé +to be the "principal reason for going to their lands." He ordered +the Sulus not to admit any more preachers of Islam, but to allow +the Spanish priests to preach Christianity to them. The Mohammedan +preachers he directed to be arrested and brought to him, and the +mosques to be burned or destroyed and not to be rebuilt. + +Part of the instructions the Adelantado [154] Miguel Lopez de Legaspi +received before embarking on his expedition to the Philippines read +as follows: + + + And you shall have especial care that, in all your negotiations + with the natives of those regions some of the religious + accompanying you be present, both in order to avail yourself of + their good counsel and advice, and so that the natives may see and + understand your high estimation of them; for seeing this, and the + great reverence of the soldiers toward them, they themselves will + hold the religious in great respect. This will be of great moment, + so that, when the religious shall understand their language, + or have interpreters through whom they may make them understand + our holy Catholic faith, the Indians shall put entire faith in + them; since you are aware that the chief thing sought after by + his Majesty is the increase of our holy Catholic faith, and the + salvation of the souls of those infidels. [155] + + +In 1566, a petition was sent from Cebu to the King of Spain, bearing +the signatures of Martin de Goiti, Guido de Labezari, and the other +leading officers under Legaspi, setting forth, among other requests, +the following: + + + That the Moros, "because they try to prevent our trade with the + natives and preach to them the religion of Mohammed," may be + enslaved and lose their property. That slave traffic be allowed, + "that the Spaniards may make use of them, as do the chiefs and + natives of those regions, both in mines and other works that + offer themselves." [156] + + +In a letter addressed to Legaspi King Philip II said: + + + We have also been petitioned in your behalf concerning the Moro + Islands in that land, and how those men come to trade and carry on + commerce, hindering the preaching of the holy gospel and disturbing + you. We give you permission to make such Moros slaves and to seize + their property. You are warned that you can make them slaves only + if the said Moros are such by birth and choice, and if they come + to preach their Mohammedan doctrine or to make war against you or + against the Indians, who are our subjects and in our royal service. + + +In a letter addressed to King Philip II Bishop Salazar writes, June +27, 1588, as follows: + + + The second point is that, in the Island of Mindanao, which is + subject to your Majesty, and for many years has paid you tribute, + the law of Mohammed has been publicly proclaimed, for somewhat more + than three years, by preachers from Bruney and Ternate who have + come there--some of them even, it is believed, having come from + Mecca. They have erected and are now building mosques, and the + boys are being circumcised, and there is a school where they are + taught the Quran. I was promptly informed of this, and urged the + president to supply a remedy therefor at once, in order that that + pestilential fire should not spread in these islands. I could not + persuade them to go, and thus the hatred of Christianity is there; + and we are striving no more to remedy this than if the matter did + not concern us. Such are the calamities and miseries to which we + have come, and the punishments which God inflicts upon us. [157] + + +In drawing a contract with Capt. Esteban Rodriguez de Figueroa, in +1591, for the pacification and conquest of Mindanao, the Governor +and Captain-General Gomez Perez Dasmariñas makes the following +declarations: + + + His Majesty orders and charges me, by his royal instructions and + decrees, as the most worthy and important thing in these islands, + to strive for the propagation of our holy faith among the natives + herein, their conversion to the knowledge of the true God, and + their reduction to the obedience of His holy church and of the + king, our sovereign. * * * + + Moreover, the Island of Mindanao is so fertile and well inhabited, + and teeming with Indian settlements, wherein to plant the faith, * + * * and is rich in gold mines and placers, and in wax, cinnamon, + and other valuable drugs. And although the said island has been + seen, discussed, and explored, * * * no effort has been made + to enter and reduce it, nor has it been pacified or furnished + with instruction or justice--quite to the contrary being, at + the present time, hostile and refusing obedience to his Majesty; + and no tribute, or very little, is being collected. * * * + + Besides the above facts, by delaying the pacification of the said + island greater wrongs, to the offense and displeasure of God and + of his Majesty, are resulting daily; for I am informed that the + king of that island has made all who were paying tribute to his + Majesty tributary to himself by force of arms, and after putting + many of them to death while doing it; so that now each Indian pays + him one tae [158] of gold. I am also told that he destroyed and + broke into pieces, with many insults, a cross that he found, when + told that it was adored by the Christians; and that in Magindanao, + the capital and residence of the said king, are Bornean Indians + who teach and preach publicly the false doctrine of Mohammed, + and have mosques; besides these, there are also people from + Ternate--gunners, armorers, and powder-makers, all engaged in + their trades--who at divers times have killed many Spaniards when + the latter were going to collect the tribute, * * * without our + being able to mete out punishment, because of lack of troops. By + reason of the facts above recited, and because all of the said + wrongs and troubles will cease with the said pacification; and, + when it is made, we are sure that the surrounding kingdoms of + Bruney, Sulu, Java, and other provinces, will become obedient + to his Majesty: therefore, in order that the said island may be + pacified, subdued, and settled, and the gospel preached to the + natives; and that justice may be established among them, and they + be taught to live in a civilized manner, and to recognize God and + His holy law, I have tried to entrust the said pacification to + a person of such character that he may be entrusted with it. [159] + + +It is plain, therefore, that the sentiment of the times justified war +on the Moros for the cause of religion alone, and that, though the +primary object was conquest, no doubt the religious motives of the +Spaniards were stronger than their desire to check piracy. But, of all +the Christian nations, the Spaniards should have been most aware of the +tenacity, determination, and courage with which the Mohammedans defend +their faith, and the Sulus were no exception to the rule, for they had +been born and reared in that religion for more than four generations. + +A wiser policy on the part of Governor Sandé would have either let the +Moros of Sulu and Mindanao alone, or effected a complete reduction of +the state of Sulu and immediate occupation of the coasts of Mindanao +with strong forces; for it appears from all accounts that neither +the Sulus nor the Magindanaos were as strongly organized then as they +were a generation later, and either alliance or war should have been +easier then than afterwards. + +The Spaniards at that time were excellent warriors. Their conquests +of the Bisayan Islands and Luzon were rapid and brilliant, but it +appears that the system of government which they inaugurated there +met with distinct failure the minute it was extended to the more +organized communities and the greater forces they encountered in the +south. The Sulus, on the other hand, fought in the defense of their +national independence and religion, and never found life too dear +to sacrifice in that cause. They resented the treatment of Spain, +and in their rage and desire for revenge built stronger forts and +fleets and became fiercer pirates. + + + +RULE OF BATARA SHAH TANGAH + +Pangiran must have died about 1579 and was followed by Sultan +Batara Shah Tangah, who is in all probability the Paquian or Paguian +Tindig of the Spanish writers. Tangah's claim to the sultanate was +strongly contested by his cousin, Abdasaolan [160] who ruled over +Basilan. The latter attacked Jolo with a strong force, but failed +to reduce its forts. Tangah, however, felt insecure and went to +Manila to request Governor Sandé's aid and returned to Sulu with +two Spanish armed boats (caracoas). [161] Abdasaolan, whose power +had in the meantime increased, prepared for defense and watched for +the advance of the Sultan's boat. Finding that the caracoas were at +a considerable distance from the Sultan's boat he manned two light +salisipans [162] with a strong force and dispatched them, with speed +to intercept Tangah. The Sultan's party was completely surprised, +and in the fight that resulted Tangah was killed. On reaching Jolo +the Spanish forces attacked the town. The Sulus fought valiantly, +but their fort was reduced. The officers in command of the caracoas +assembled the people and had Raja Bungsu, who was wounded in the fight, +elected sultan to succeed Tangah. The full title of Bungsu was "The +Sultan Muwallil Wasit Bungsu." [163] + + + +FIGUEROA'S EXPEDITION AGAINST MINDANAO + +In 1596 Capt. Esteban Rodriguez led an expedition into Mindanao, +for its conquest and pacification. + +It is maintained that he proceeded up the Mindanao River as far as +Bwayan, the capital of the upper Mindanao Valley. + + + Don Esteban Rodriguez prepared men and ships, and what else was + necessary for the enterprise, and with some galleys, galleots, + frigates, vireys, [164] barangays, [164] and lapis, [165] set out + with two hundred and fourteen Spaniards for the Island of Mindanao, + in February of the same year, of 1596. He took Capt. Juan de la + Xara as his master-of-camp, and some religious of the Society + of Jesus to give instruction, as well as many natives for the + service of the camp and fleet. + + He reached Mindanao River after a good voyage, where the first + settlements, named Tampakan and Lumakan, both hostile to the + people of Bwayan, received him peacefully and in a friendly + manner, and joined his fleet. They were altogether about six + thousand men. Without delay they advanced about 8 leagues + farther up the river against Bwayan, the principal settlement + of the island, where its greatest chief had fortified himself + on many sides. Arrived at the settlement, the fleet cast anchor + and immediately landed a large proportion of the troops with + their arms. But before reaching the houses and fort, and while + going through some thickets [cacatal] [166] near the shore, they + encountered some of the men of Bwayan, who were coming to meet + them with their kampilan, [167] carazas [168] and other weapons, + and who attacked them on various sides. The latter [i.e., the + Spaniards and their allies], on account of the swampiness of the + place and the denseness of the thickets [cacatal], could not act + unitedly as the occasion demanded, although the master-of-camp and + the captains that led them exerted themselves to keep the troops + together and to encourage them to face the natives. Meanwhile + Governor Esteban Rodriguez de Figueroa was watching events from + his flagship, but not being able to endure the confusion of his + men, seized his weapons and hastened ashore with three or four + companions and a servant who carried his helmet in order that he + might be less impeded in his movements. But as he was crossing + a part of the thickets [cacatal] where the fight was waging, + a hostile Indian stepped out unseen from one side and dealt the + governor a blow on the head with his kampilan that stretched + him on the ground badly wounded. [169] The governor's followers + cut the Mindanao to pieces and carried the governor back to the + camp. Shortly after the master-of-camp, Juan de la Xara, withdrew + his troops to the fleet, leaving behind several Spaniards who had + fallen in the encounter. The governor did not regain consciousness, + for the wound was very severe, and died next day. The fleet after + that loss and failure left that place, and descended the river + to Tampakan, where it anchored among the friendly inhabitants + and their settlements. + + The master-of-camp, Juan de la Xara, had himself chosen by the + fleet as successor in the government and enterprise. He built a + fort with arigues [170] and palms near Tampakan, and founded a + Spanish settlement to which he gave the name of Murcia. He began + to make what arrangements he deemed best, in order to establish + himself and run things independently of, and without acknowledging + the governor of Manila, without whose intervention and assistance + this enterprise could not be continued. [171] + + +Bwayan was 30 miles up the river and 25 miles above Magindanao +or Kotabato where Bwisan, the Sultan of Magindanao, was strongly +fortified. It is difficult to believe that Rodriguez could advance so +far even with a small scouting party. A careful review of the Spanish +reports referring to these early campaigns in Mindanao indicates that +Bwayan has been erroneously used in place of Magindanao, the ancient +capital of the sultanate of Magindanao. + +Bent on the conquest of Mindanao, Governor Tello prepared another +expedition under Gen. Juan Ronquillo [172] and dispatched it by the +way of Cebu. At Caldera, it was joined by the fleet of Mindanao and +the whole force proceeded east in the direction of the Mindanao River, +on the 6th of February, 1597. Captain Chaves arrived with his frigates +at the river on the 8th of January. In a battle fought at Simway +to capture Moro vessels going to seek aid from Ternate he had a leg +cut off and received a shot in the helmet above the ear. Ronquillo +arrived at the mouth of the river on February 21, and on the 17th of +April he engaged a Moro fleet with 40 arquebusiers and defeated them, +killing a number of their brave men and some Ternatans without losing +any of his men except 5 Bisayans. Leaving a guard of 34 men under +Chaves at the fort of Tampakan he advanced up the river with a force +of 230 sailors and gunners. The enemy retired behind some parapets as +soon as the artillery opened upon them, and brought some artillery +to bear on the flagship (one of the galleys), but could not retard +the Spanish advance. + + + "I answered their fire with so great readiness," said Ronquillo in + his report, "that I forced them to withdraw their artillery. But, + as if they were goblins, they remained here behind a bush or a + tree, firing at us without being seen." Reinforced by the chief + of the hill tribes, Lumakan, with 500 natives, Ronquillo resumed + the fighting after the delay of a few days. "Finally," continued + Ronquillo, "I planted my battery of eight pieces somewhat over + 100 paces from the fort. Although I battered the fort hotly, I + could not effect a breach through which to make an assault. All + the damage that I did them by day, they repaired by night. * * * + + "I was very short of ammunition, for I had only 3,000 arquebus + bullets left, and very few cannon balls; and both would be spent + in one day's fighting, during which, should we not gain the fort, + we would be lost--and with no power to defend ourselves while + withdrawing our artillery and camp. * * * + + "I reconnoitered the fort and its situation, for it is located + at the entrance of a lagoon, thus having only water at the back, + and swampy and marshy ground at the sides. It has a frontage of + more than 1,000 paces, is furnished with very good transversals, + and is well supplied with artillery and arquebuses. Moreover it + has a ditch of water more than 4 brazas [173] wide and 2 deep, + and thus there was a space of dry ground of only 15 paces where it + was possible to attack; and this space was bravely defended, and + with the greatest force of the enemy. The inner parts were water, + where they sailed in vessels, while we had no footing at all." + + "Again, I reflected that those who had awaited us so long, had + waited with the determination to die in defense of the fort; and + if they should see the contest ending unfavorably for them, no one + would prevent their flight. Further, if they awaited the assault + it would cost me the greater part of my remaining ammunition, + and my best men; while, if the enemy fled, nothing would be + accomplished, but on the contrary a long, tedious, and costly + war would be entered upon. Hence, with the opinion and advice of + the captains, I negotiated for peace, and told them that I would + admit them to friendship under the following conditions: + + "First, that first and foremost they must offer homage to his + Majesty, and pay something as recognition" (a gold chain). Second, + "that all the natives who had been taken from the Pintados Islands + [Bisayan Islands] last year, must be restored." Third, "that they + must break the peace and confederation made with the people of + Ternate, and must not admit the latter into their country." Fourth, + "that they must be friends with Danganlibor and Lumakan, * * * + and must not make war on their vassals." Fifth, "that all the + chiefs must go to live in their old villages." [174] + + +Ronquillo later reported the place indefensible and was authorized +to retire to Caldera. + +Ronquillo must have advanced as far as the settlement of Kalangnan +or possibly Magindanao (Kotabato), the capital of Sultan Bwisan. The +report he rendered relative to the country, its people and chiefs, +is very interesting and an excerpt of the same is herewith quoted +because of its bearing on conditions throughout Moroland: + + + The leading chiefs collect tribute from their vassals. * * * These + Indians are not like those in Luzon, but are accustomed to power + and sovereignty. Some collect five or six thousand tributes. * * * + + Hitherto it has not been possible to tell your lordship anything + certain of this country except that it will be of but little + advantage to his Majesty, but a source of great expense. It has + far fewer inhabitants than was reported, and all are very poor, + so that their breakfast consists only in cleaning their arms, + and their work in using them, and not in cultivating the land, + which is low and swampy in this river. There is no chief who can + raise 20 taes of gold. Rice is very scarce; in the hills is found + a small amount, which is used for food by the chiefs only. There + are some swine, and a few fowls that are very cunning, and less + fruit. [175] + + +These early expeditions of the Spaniards against the Moros undoubtedly +aroused in the latter a great desire for vengeance. The forces the +Spaniards sent to conquer Mindanao and Sulu were very small. Such +forces would have been strong enough to reduce any island of the +Bisayan group, or even Luzon, but against the Moros they proved +insufficient and inadequate. They however succeeded in provoking +bitter hostilities and marked the beginning of a long period of terror +and bloodshed. + + + +MORO RAIDS [176] + +In 1599 combined Moro fleets invaded and plundered the coasts of the +Bisayan Islands, Cebu, Negros, and Panay. + +Captain Paches, who was in command of the fort of Caldera, attacked +the northern coast of the Island of Sulu. After landing at some point, +it was observed by the Sulus that his fuses were wet and that his +guns could not fire well. They then rushed his position, killed him, +and dispersed his forces. + + + The following year saw the return of a larger and still more + dreadful expedition. The people of Panay abandoned their towns + and fled into the mountains under the belief that these terrible + attacks had been inspired by the Spaniards. To check these + pirates, Juan Gallinato, with a force of 200 Spaniards, was sent + against Sulu, but like so many expeditions that followed his, + he accomplished nothing. * * * "From this time until the present + day" (about the year 1800), wrote Zuñiga, "these Moros have not + ceased to infest our colonies; innumerable are the Indians they + have captured, the towns they have looted, the rancherias they + have destroyed, and the vessels they have taken. It seems as + if God has preserved them for vengeance on the Spaniards that + they have not been able to subject them in two hundred years, + in spite of the expeditions sent against them, the armaments + sent almost every year to pursue them. In a very little while + we conquered all the islands of the Philippines, but the little + Island of Sulu, a part of Mindanao, and the other islands nearby, + we have not been able to subjugate to this day." [177] + + +Gallinatos's expedition occurred in 1602. [178] After three months of +protracted fighting at Jolo, he was unable to reduce the fortifications +of the town and retired to Panay. + +In 1616 a large Sulu fleet destroyed Pantao in the Camarines and the +shipyards of Cavite and exacted large sums for the ransom of Spanish +prisoners. Moro fleets in 1625 sacked Katbalogan in Samar. + +In 1628 Governor Tavora sent an expedition to Sulu under Cristobol +de Lugo. Cristobol disembarked half of his infantry, sacked the town +of Jolo, set part of it on fire and sailed back to Cebu. + +In 1629 the Moros raided Samar and Leyte. In 1630 an armada composed +of 70 vessels and having 350 Spanish and 2,000 native soldiers, under +Lorenzo de Olaso Ochotegui, arrived at Jolo. Olaso misdirected his +forces and, advancing too near to the wall of the fort, was wounded +in his side and fell. He was rescued by the officers who followed him, +but the troops were demoralized and retired. The expedition, however, +landed at various points on the coast and burned and pillaged small +settlements. [179] + +In the same year P. Gutierrez came to Mindanao on a mission to +Corralat. [180] On his return he met Tuan Baluka, wife of Raja Bungsu, +at Zamboanga. Baluka urged P. Gutierrez to delay his departure from +Zamboanga and warned him of the danger of meeting the Sulu expedition +under Datu Ache. He, however, continued on his way and was overtaken by +Datu Ache's force, but on account of the message and flag he delivered +to Ache from Tuan Baluka, he was allowed to proceed safely. + +For some time the Jesuits had been urging upon the Philippine +Government the occupation of the southern coast of Mindanao. This +meant an advance into the enemy's camp and a bloody struggle for +supremacy in the southern seas. The consequences of such a step +were foreseen by the Government and very few governors would have +dared undertake such a grave responsibility. In 1635, Governor Juan +Cerezo de Salamanca was petitioned by the Jesuits to establish an +advance post of the Spanish forces at Zamboanga for the protection of +missionaries and the Christians who had to navigate in the southern +seas. Salamanca granted their request and sent Capt. Juan de Chaves, +who disembarked at Zamboanga on the 6th of April, 1635. The force under +Captain Chaves consisted of 300 Spanish and 1,000 native soldiers. In +June they began the construction of a stone fort on a plan designed by +the Jesuit missionary P. Melchor de Vera, who was an expert engineer. + +The advantages to be derived from the position of this garrison +were demonstrated before the year was over. As a piratical fleet +was returning from Cuyo, Mindoro, and the Kalamian Islands, the +favorable opportunity was watched for, and as the two divisions of +the fleet separated, the Spanish forces pursued Corralat's pirates +and dealt them a deadly blow in the neighborhood of Point Flechas, +killing about 300 Moros and saving 120 Christian captives. [181] + + + +FIRST SPANISH CONQUEST AND OCCUPATION OF SULU, 1635-1646 + +Gen. Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera relieved Salamanca before the end +of the year 1635 and continued the same policy with additional vigor +and great ability. He quickly resolved upon attacking the Moros in +their own strongholds, and thought that by crushing their power at +home he would be able to put an end to their piratical raids. + +He arrived at Zamboanga February 22, 1636, proceeded first to Mindanao, +fought Corralat and destroyed some of his forts and sailed back to +Manila. [182] Corcuera returned to Zamboanga in December, 1637, +and prepared for an expedition against Sulu. On January 1, 1638, +he embarked for Sulu with 600 Spanish soldiers, 1,000 native troops, +and many volunteers and adventurers. He had 80 vessels all told and +arrived at Jolo on the 4th. [183] + +Anticipating an invasion, Sultan Bungsu had strengthened his +garrisons and called for aid and reënforcements from Basilan, Tapul, +and Tawi-tawi. On his arrival Corcuera found the town well fortified +and the enemy strongly intrenched. The Moros were well disciplined +and had a well organized guard. The forts occupied strategic points +and were strongly defended; the trenches were well laid, and the +Moros shot well and fought fearlessly. + +Corcuera besieged the town with all his forces and attacked it +repeatedly and valiantly using powerful artillery, but he could not +reduce it. Several efforts to tunnel the walls or effect a breach in +them by mines were frustrated by the vigilance and intrepidity of +the Sulus. The siege lasted three months and a half, at the end of +which time the Sulus evacuated the town and retired to the neighboring +hills, where they intended to make the next stand. Corcuera, taking +possession of the town, reconstructed its forts and established three +posts, one on the hill, one at the river, and one on the sandbank in +front of the town. The garrison he established there consisted of 200 +Spanish soldiers and an equal number of Pampangans, under the command +of Capt. Ginés Ros and Gaspar de Morales. In May Corcuera returned to +Manila with all the triumph of a conqueror, leaving Gen. Pedro Almonte, +the senior officer next to himself in command of the expedition, as +governor of Zamboanga and Ternate and chief of the forces in the south. + +Soon after the establishment of the Jolo garrison, the Sulus under Datu +Ache attacked the soldiers in the quarry and killed a few Spaniards +and captured 40 Chinese and Negroes (galley slaves). This and other +depredations committed by the Sulus from time to time, some of which +were provoked by the ill behavior of the Spanish officers and troops, +forced Almonte in June, 1639, to come over to Sulu and take the field +a second time. With 3 captains and 1,200 Spanish and native soldiers, +he marched over the island, attacked the Sulus in their homes, burned +their houses and killed every man he could reach. It is said that he +hung 500 heads on the trees, liberated 112 Christian captives, and +captured quantities of arms. When he asked the Gimbaha Sulus (at one +of the settlements of Parang) to submit to the sovereignty of Spain, +they refused to recognize his authority, challenged his forces, +and fought him desperately. They wore helmets and armor and used +spears and swords. On one occasion, Captain Cepeda engaged them in +battle and returned with 300 captives, leaving on the field 400 dead, +a fearful lesson to those who survived. Cepeda lost 7 Spaniards and +20 natives only, but he had a large number wounded. + +Not satisfied with the havoc he wrought on the Island of Sulu, and +desiring to follow and catch the fugitive sultan, Almonte invaded +the other large islands and followed the sultan and the datus all +over the Archipelago. At Tawi-tawi, however, he met with a reverse, +and the captain who led the expedition returned with considerable loss. + +Soon after Almonte's departure, the Sulus who had fled returned +and lost no time or opportunity in harassing the garrison. Several +piratical excursions invaded the Bisayas and Camarines. Soon Dutch +vessels, invited by Sulu emissaries sent to Java, appeared in the +vicinity of Zamboanga and Jolo and threatened the Spanish garrison +and incited the Moros to resist the Spaniards and attack their +forces. Anticipating trouble with the Dutch, and foreseeing the +danger of maintaining a garrison at Jolo under the circumstances, +the Spaniards planned to evacuate the town. Accordingly on the 14th +of April, 1646, they left Jolo. Before withdrawing their troops, +they managed to make a treaty with the Sulus, which took the form of +an alliance both offensive and defensive. The purpose of the treaty +was declared to be the maintenance of peace between both parties and +mutual aid against foreign enemies. In case of assistance against a +foreign nation, the expenses of the war were to be defrayed by the +party requesting aid. The Spanish Government recognized the supreme +authority of the Sultan of Sulu from Tawi-tawi to Tutup and Pagahak, +reserving sovereignty rights for the King of Spain over Tapul, Siasi, +Balangingi, and Pangutaran only. In return for the evacuation of Jolo, +and as a sign of brotherhood, the Sultan of Sulu promised to send +yearly to Zamboanga three boats, 8 fathoms long, full of rice, and to +allow the Jesuit priests to come to Jolo unmolested. Other provisions +were inserted in the treaty for the exchange and redemption of slaves, +criminals, or others who happened to run away from Zamboanga to Sulu +and vice versa. + +This treaty did not remain in force for any great length of time, +for we hear again in 1647 that the Sulus invaded the Bisayas and +harassed the vicinity of Zamboanga. + + + +SULU SUPREMACY IN THE ARCHIPELAGO, 1647-1850 + + +SUCCESSORS OF BUNGSU + +Bungsu had a very long reign marked with reverses and misfortunes. He +died before 1640, and was succeeded by Sultan Nasirud Din II and Sultan +Salahud Din Karamat. The latter was known to the Spanish writers as +Baktial, which was his Sulu name before the sultanate. During the +reign of Karamat the Philippines were threatened by a Chinese invasion +from the north and by war with Holland, and the government, under the +circumstances, decided to abandon Zamboanga and the Moluccas. This +purpose they carried out in 1663. In the days of Karamat the Sulus +became very active and made many raids in various directions. The +decline of Spain's political power and her inactivity in the century +that followed the evacuation of Zamboanga caused obscurity in the +Spanish records of the history of Sulu and Mindanao. The events of +this century are, with few exceptions, lacking in significance and +interest. [184] + +The sultans who followed Karamat are, in the order of their succession, +Shahabud Din, Mustafa Shafi`ud Din, Badarud Din I, Nasarud Din, +and Alimud Din I, better known as Amirul Mu'minin (Ferdinand I of +Sulu). The first three were brothers, the sons of Karamat, while the +last two were the sons of Badarud Din. + +In 1718 Governor Bustamante reoccupied Zamboanga for the purpose +of waging war against piracy. "The citadel (Fuerza del Pilar) was +rebuilt on an elaborate plan under the direction of the engineer, Juan +Sicarra. Besides the usual barracks, storehouses, and arsenals, there +were, within the walls, a church, a hospital, and quarters for the +Pampangan soldiers. Sixty-one cannon were mounted upon the defenses." + +In 1725, a Chinese named Ki Kuan was sent to Manila to arrange for +peace and returned with two Spanish commissioners, who made a treaty +with the sultan of Sulu providing for trade between Manila and Jolo, +the return or ransom of captives, and the ceding to Spain of the +Island of Basilan. Notwithstanding this treaty Moro raids continued +either by toleration of the sultan and datus or at their instigation. + +In 1730 a brother of the sultan commanded an expedition of 31 +vessels, which attacked the fort of Taytay and ravaged the coast of +Palawan. Another expedition spent nearly a whole year cruising and +destroying among the Bisayas. + +In retaliation a large Spanish fleet united at Zamboanga and, under +Ignacio de Irebri and Manuel del Rosal, invaded the shores of Sulu and +ravaged and burned some settlements. At Bwal they found the settlement +well protected and extensively fortified, so they contented themselves +with destroying some plantations and burning outlying houses. At +Tapul considerable damage was inflicted. A force of 600 disembarked, +dispersed the Sulus, burned their settlements, destroyed many farms, +the salt works, and many boats, and returned to Zamboanga. In 1732 +similar raids were made and hostilities continued until 1737. + + + +REIGN OF SULTAN ALIMUD DIN I + +One of the earliest events in the reign of Alimud Din I was his +ratification of the treaty of 1737. The sultan was represented +in Manila by Datu Mohammed Ismael and Datu Ja`far, who signed the +document. The treaty was drawn in January, 1737, by Governor-General +Fernando Valdés y Tamon and contained five articles. + +The first article declared the determination of both parties to +preserve permanent peace between the two states, all differences or +grievances to be settled amicably, and hostilities between subjects +or vassals to be strictly prohibited and punished; the second provided +for alliance and mutual aid against any foreign foe. European nations +were, however, excluded from the provisions of this article; the third +provided for free trade between the two states, restricted by the use +of passports to be issued by superior authority; the fourth provided +that each state should be held responsible for all infractions of +the peace committed by its subjects and should be bound to punish the +same and make proper amends to the proper party; the fifth provided +for the exchange of captives and return of all church images and +ornaments in the possession of the Sulus. + +To all appearances Alimud Din I was a man of peace and a reformer. He +kept his part of the treaty faithfully and piracy was actually +suppressed during the whole period in which he held the reins of +government. He revised the Sulu code of laws and system of justice. He +caused to be translated into Sulu parts of the Quran and several Arabic +texts on law and religion. He strongly urged the people to observe +faithfully their religion and the ordained five daily prayers. He even +went so far as to prescribe punishment for failure to observe this +rule. He wanted all pandita to learn Arabic and prepared Arabic-Sulu +vocabularies as a preliminary step to making the Arabic the official +language of the state. He coined money, organized a small army, +and tried to establish a navy. His name is foremost in the memory +of the Sulus, partly because of his able administration and partly +on account of the fact that he is the grandfather of all the present +principal datus of the Sulus. + +In September, 1746, a special commission from Manila carried to +Alimud Din a letter written by King Philip V in 1744, requesting the +admission of Jesuit missionaries to Jolo with permission to preach +the Christian religion to the Sulus. The sultan entertained the +commission very hospitably and gave in their honor a royal reception +and a review of the troops. A council was held in which the sultan +conferred with the leading datus of Sulu and granted the request of +King Philip V. He further authorized the building of a church and +recommended the erection of a fort at some convenient locality for +the safe protection of the missionaries. In return for this favor he +requested that the Spanish Government give him, as an aid in building +a navy, the sum of P6,000, 12 piculs [185] of gunpowder, 12 piculs +of nails, and 1 picul of steel. This, he represented, was needed to +enable him to suppress piracy and to check the depredations of his +enemies in Borneo. This request the Spanish Government granted, and +Jesuit missionaries entered Jolo, translated the catechism into Sulu, +and distributed it freely among the people. + +The liberties exercised by the Jesuits in their endeavor to proselyte +the Sulus and the strong friendship the sultan manifested toward them +created great dissatisfaction among the people, and an opposition party +was formed, under the leadership of Prince Bantilan, for the purpose of +expelling the missionaries and deposing Alimud Din. Bantilan was the +son of Sultan Shahabud Din and had as much right to the sultanate of +Sulu as any son of Sultan Badarud Din. After the death of the latter +the sultanate should have reverted to the line of Shahabud Din; but it +happens very often that the sons of the last sultan are either older +than those of the former or meet with more favor and are, as a rule, +supported by the majority of the council of datus; thus the regular +order of descent changes in favor of the stronger person. Probably +Bantilan was preceded by both Nasarud Din and Alimud Din for some +such reason as the above. This he resented at heart, but suppressed +his resentment until this favorable opportunity offered itself. He +then headed the opposition to the sultan and the missionaries and won +the majority of the datus and panditas to his side. Hostilities soon +increased and civil war was imminent. In an effort to assassinate +the sultan, Bantilan thrust a spear at Alimud Din and inflicted +a severe wound in his side or thigh. During the disturbances and +confusion which followed it became dangerous for the missionaries +to remain at Jolo. One of the ministers of the sultan provided them +with a salisipan in which they escaped without harm and withdrew to +Zamboanga. This occurred late in 1748. Overpowered, disheartened, +and grieved, Alimud Din left Jolo with his family and numerous escort +and came to Zamboanga, seeking the aid of Spain against Bantilan. The +latter proclaimed himself sultan with the title of Mu`izzud Din, +[186] strengthened the defenses of his capital, and waged war on all +the datus who had supported Alimud Din. His power soon became supreme, +and he reigned with a strong hand. + +At Zamboanga Alimud Din is said to have given the officers many +presents and offered the Governor Zacharias 40 male Papuan slaves, who +were well dressed. Zacharias, unreasonably prejudiced and distrustful, +suspected some ill design and refused the present. Not receiving +sufficient attention and consideration at Zamboanga, Alimud Din asked +leave to go to Manila. This granted, he sailed and arrived at Cavite +January 2, 1749. At Manila "he was received with all the pomp and +honor due to a prince of high rank. A house for his entertainment +and his retinue of seventy persons was prepared in Binondo. A public +entrance was arranged which took place some fifteen days after he +reached the city. Triumphal arches were erected across the streets, +which were lined with more than 2,000 native militia under arms. The +sultan was publicly received in the hall of the Audiencia, where +the governor promised to lay his case before the King of Spain. The +sultan was showered with presents, which included chains of gold, +fine garments, precious gems, and gold canes, while the Government +sustained the expense of his household." [187] + +Following this reception, steps were taken for his conversion. His +spiritual advisers cited to him the example of the Emperor Constantine +whose conversion enabled him to effect triumphant conquests over +his enemies. Under these representations Alimud Din expressed his +desire for baptism. The governor-general, who at this time was a +priest, the bishop of Nueva Segovia, was very anxious that the rite +should take place; but this was opposed by his spiritual superior, +the archbishop of Manila, who, with some others, entertained doubts +as to the sincerity of the Sultan's profession. + +"In order to accomplish his baptism, the governor sent him to his own +diocese, where at Paniki, on the 29th of April, 1750, the ceremony +took place with great solemnity. On the return of the party to Manila, +the sultan was received with great pomp, and in his honor were held +games, theatrical representations, fireworks, and bull fights. This +was the high-water mark of the sultan's popularity. [188] + +At his baptism the sultan received the name of Ferdinand, and Spanish +authors often referred to him as "Don Fernando de Alimud Din I, +Catholic Sultan of Joló." It is further stated that two datus and +five of his principal followers were baptized. The crown prince, +Raja Muda Mohammed Israel and his sister Fatimah attended school in +Manila and learned Spanish manners and customs. + +A year and a half passed and no action was taken by the authorities +to restore Alimud Din. In the meantime Bantilan's fleets were busy +ravaging and pillaging the Bisayas. In July, 1750, a new governor, the +marquis of Obando (Francisco José de Obando) arrived in Manila. After +some deliberation he resolved to reinstate Alimud Din and punish +Bantilan and his pirates. [189] Accordingly, on May 19, 1751, the +sultan and his retinue were sent on board the Spanish frigate San +Fernando and were convoyed by a squadron composed of seven war vessels +under the command of Field Marshal Ramon de Abad. Falling in with +bad weather off the shore of Mindoro, the San Fernando was disabled +and made for Kalapan. The squadron, however, continued its voyage +uninterrupted to Jolo, arriving there on the 26th of June. After some +desultory fighting, Abad arrived at an understanding with the Sulus +and arranged for Datu Asin to come to Zamboanga with sufficient boats +to escort the sultan back to Jolo. + +The sultan in the meantime stopped at Iloilo where he changed +boats. Meeting with contrary winds he was carried off his course to +Dapitan, and from there he set sail again for Zamboanga, which he +reached on July 12. + + + Before Ferdinand I left Manila, he had addressed a letter + to the sultan of Mindanao, at the instance of the Spanish + Governor-General. The original was written by Ferdinand I in Moro; + a version in Spanish was dictated by him, and both were signed by + him. These documents reached the governor of Zamboanga, but he + had the original in Moro retranslated and found that it did not + at all agree with the sultan's Spanish rendering. The translation + of the Moro text runs thus: + + "I shall be glad to know that the Sultan Mohammed Amirud Din + and all his chiefs, male and female, are well. I do not write + a lengthy letter, as I intended, because I simply wish to give + you to understand, in case the sultan or his chiefs and others + should feel aggrieved at my writing this letter in this manner, + that I do so under pressure, being under foreign dominion, and + I am compelled to obey whatever they tell me to do, and I have + to say what they tell me to say. Thus the governor has ordered + me to write to you in our style and language; therefore, do not + understand that I am writing you on my own behalf, but because + I am ordered to do so, and I have nothing more to add. Written + in the year 1164 in the month Rabi`-ul Akir. Ferdinand I, King + of Sulu, who seals with his own seal." + + This letter was pronounced treasonable. Impressed with, or feigning + this idea, Governor Zacharias saw real or imaginary indications + of a design on the part of the sultan to throw off the foreign + yoke at the first opportunity. [190] + + +After the landing of Datu Asin and his followers at Zamboanga, the +governor found out by his spies that they had many arms and quantities +of ammunition in their boats which lay in the roadstead opposite +the town and fort. Suspicious and distrustful from the beginning, +Zacharias interpreted these facts as positive proof of an intention +on the part of the sultan and Datu Asin treacherously to attack the +town when an opportunity offered itself. He then at once confiscated +part of the arms, ordered the boats to leave the port, imprisoned +the sultan and Datu Asin and all their retinue, and communicated his +suspicions and the action taken to Manila. Among the prisoners were +the sons and daughters of the sultan, several datus and dignitaries +and panditas, and many male and female followers and servants. In +all 217 persons entered the prisons of the fort, most of whom were +later transferred to Manila and confined in Fort Santiago. + +Zacharias's interpretation of the action of the sultan and Datu Asin +was simply absurd and his behavior reflected considerable discredit +on his ability as an officer and administrator. It was further most +regrettable that his views were accepted as true by higher authority +in Manila where no clemency or redress was extended to the unfortunate +sultan and datus. + +By a degree of the Governor-General, the following accusations were +set forth against the sultan and Datu Asin, viz: + + + 1. That Prince Asin had not surrendered captives; 2. That whilst + the sultan was in Manila, new captives were made by the party who + expelled him from the throne; 3. That the number of arms brought + to Zamboanga by Sulu chiefs was excessive; 4. That the letter to + Sultan Mohammed Amirud Din insinuated help wanted against the + Spaniards; 5. That several Mohammedan, but no Christian books, + were found in the sultan's baggage; 6. That during the journey to + Zamboanga he had refused to pray in Christian form; 7. That he had + only attended mass twice; 8. That he had celebrated Mohammedan + rites, sacrificing a goat, and had given evidence in a hundred + ways of being a Mohammedan; 9. That his conversation generally + denoted a want of attachment to the Spaniards, and a contempt for + their treatment of him in Manila, [191] and, 10. That he still + cohabited with his concubines. + + The greatest stress was laid on the recovery of the captive + Christians, and the governor added, that although the mission + of the fleet was to restore the sultan to the throne (which, + by the way, he does not appear to have attempted), the principal + object was the rescue of Christian slaves. He therefore proposed + that the liberty of the imprisoned nobles and chiefs should be + bartered at the rate of 500 Christian slaves for each one of the + chiefs and nobles, and the balance of the captives for Prince + Asin and the clergy. [192] + + +It is not therefore surprising to hear of the extraordinarily +revengeful activity which the Sulus exhibited during the period of +humiliation to which their sultan and nobles were subjected in Manila. + +Bantilan was a man of strong personality, a warrior, and a leader. The +expeditions which he organized against his enemies were unusually +strong and left havoc everywhere. The towns he pillaged and the +captives he carried away alarmed the Spanish Government to a high +degree. A high council of war was convened in Manila in 1752, which +declared for an unmerciful campaign and a war of extermination to +be conducted with the utmost conceivable cruelty. Volunteers and +Bisayan corsairs were called to aid the regular troops. Unlimited +authority was granted them to annihilate the foe, burn his villages, +destroy his crops, and desolate his lands. The corsairs were exempted +from all taxes. They were allowed to keep or sell all female captives +and all males under 12 and over 30 years of age. Old men and crippled +persons were to be killed. Male captives between 12 and 30 years of +age were to be turned in to the government; the captors to receive +in compensation from P4 to P6 per man. Nursing children were ordered +to be baptized. At first the corsairs were required to turn in to +the government one-fifth of all valuables looted, but this was soon +afterwards revoked and all corsairs who equipped themselves retained +all their booty. + +As part of the general campaign, Field Marshal Abad made another attack +on Jolo with a force amounting to 1,900 men. The fleet cannonaded +the forts for seventy-two continuous hours. A division of the troops +landed and engaged the Sulus, but after suffering considerable loss +retreated disastrously. + +The raids of the Spaniards and Bisayans helped to increase the +vigilance of the Sulus and excited them to extreme cruelty and an +abnormal degree of revenge. [193] + + + The year 1753 is stated to have been the bloodiest in the history + of Moro piracy. No part of the Bisayas escaped ravaging in this + year, while the Camarines, Batangas, and Albay suffered equally + with the rest. The conduct of the pirates was more than ordinarily + cruel. Priests were slain, towns wholly destroyed, and thousands + of captives carried south into Moro slavery. The condition of the + Islands at the end of this year was probably the most deplorable + in their history. [194] + + +In the meantime Prince Asin died of grief in his prison. + +Early in 1753 Alimud Din petitioned the governor to allow Princess +Fatimah to go to Jolo for the purpose of arranging a peace with +Bantilan. This request was granted on condition that she deliver +50 slaves to the Spanish Government on her arrival at Jolo. This +she complied with faithfully, adding one Spanish captive to the 50 +Christian slaves wanted. Her mission was apparently successful and she +returned to Manila with Datu Mohammed Ismael and Datu Maharaja-Layla, +a commission sent by Bantilan. They brought a letter from Bantilan, +which was transmitted to the governor by Alimud Din together with +a draft of a treaty for the restoration of peace between Spain and +Sulu. Bantilan expressed deep regret for Alimud Din and the existing +condition of hostility and gave strong assurance of his desire for +the return of the sultan and the reëstablishment of peace with Spain. + +The governor acceded to the petition of the sultan and sent a letter +to Bantilan with the commission, requesting that all hostilities stop +for the period of one year pending the consideration and completion +of the new treaty. In 1754 Governor Arandia assumed command and +approved of the proposed treaty. To expedite matters he sent the +commanding officer of the southern forces to find out what had been +done by Bantilan toward the fulfilment of the conditions agreed +upon. Bantilan met the commanding officer in a most friendly manner +and discussed the questions frankly and ably. He explained in clear +and impressive manner the principal causes of hostility and strongly +blamed the governor of Zamboanga for his unjust imprisonment of the +sultan and Datu Asin and his unbearable treatment of the messengers +and representatives of the Sulu authorities. He declared his wish +and true desire for peace and delivered to the commanding officer 68 +Christian captives and two Spanish sloops. The officer was strongly +impressed with the integrity of Bantilan and with the honesty of his +intentions, and gave to the governor a very favorable report of both +Alimud Din and Bantilan. He assured him that the sultan was not a +traitor at all, but a man of good intentions, who was simply unable +to carry out some of his plans and promises because of the determined +resistance of many of the principal datus. + +A general council was held in Manila early in 1755, in which it was +resolved to set the sultan free and return him to Jolo if the Sulu +authorities carried out the terms of the following conditions: + +1. That all captives within the sultanate of Sulu be delivered within +one year. + +2. That all valuable property and ornaments looted from the churches +be returned within one year. + +General Zacharias who had attended the council set out from Manila in +September to take charge of the government of Mindanao. He brought back +to Jolo 6 princes, 5 princesses, 20 women, and 130 men of the sultan's +retinue. He had letters from Alimud Din and the Governor-General to +Bantilan and was authorized to conduct the preliminaries of a peace +treaty. Other ambassadors who accompanied Zacharias were empowered +to ratify the same. The ships arrived at Jolo on October 4, and the +ambassadors were well received by Bantilan. The latter agreed to all +the conditions imposed in as far as it was in his power to carry them +out. But he stated that many captives were bought from Mindanao chiefs +and were owned by datus on Basilan and other inaccessible places, who +were unwilling to give them up unless they were justly compensated. He +added that many such datus were in alliance with datus in Mindanao +and were planning to attack Zamboanga, and that the time was very +inopportune for him to force them to deliver all captives. + +The terms were actually impossible of execution and the endeavor to +make the treaty and ratify it proved fruitless. + +Alimud Din remained in prison until 1763, when the English, after their +conquest and occupation of Manila, reinstated him on the throne of +Sulu. During the period of his imprisonment he felt greatly humiliated, +but lived as a Christian and with one wife only. At the death of his +wife, in 1755, he was allowed to marry a Sulu woman who had been his +concubine, but who had professed Christianity and was living at the +College of Santa Potenciana. + +The Sulus received their former sultan with a good heart and Alimud +Din resumed his former authority as Sultan of Sulu. The people had +evidently acquired strong sympathy for him and Bantilan had either +undergone a change of heart or felt convinced that it was of no avail +to go against such strong popular sentiment and fight the English +forces. Withdrawing from Jolo he moved to Kuta Gubang near Parang, +where, a few years later, he died. + +In return for the favors which he received from the English, Alimud Din +ceded to them that part of North Borneo lying between Cape Inarstang +and the River Frimanis with the adjacent Island of Balambangan and +the Island of Tulayan. Balambangan was soon after that occupied and +garrisoned by English forces. + +In the later days of his reign, Alimud Din was addressed as Amirul +Mu'minin (The Prince of the Faithful) by which name he is better known +to the Sulus. Moro incursions increased at that time and the Sulus +became so daring as to invade the Bay of Manila in 1769, carry away +captives from the wharves of the city, and appear at the Plaza del +Palacio at retreat before they were repulsed or even detected. Becoming +old and weak, Amirul Mu'minin abdicated the sultanate in favor of +his son Israel, in November, 1773. + + + +REIGN OF SULTAN ISRAEL + +Sultan Israel followed the same progressive policy which characterized +his father's administration. However, his succession was contested +by rivals, and the people were not unanimous in his support. In +his foreign relations with the English and Spaniards he was at the +beginning uncertain as to the side toward which to lean. Both powers +had an eye on Sulu and appeared interested in its affairs. However, +before long he refused the request of the English to be allowed to move +their factory from Balambangan to Tandu-dayang, in the neighborhood +of Jolo, and exchanged messages of friendship with King Carlos III, +who congratulated Israel on his succession to the sultanate and thanked +him for his action relative to the removal of the Balambangan factory +to Sulu Island. [195] The early education Israel received in Manila, +together with the consideration with which the Spanish authorities +treated him at that time, helped to win his sympathies to the Spanish +side and to form a sort of an alliance between Sulu and Spain against +Great Britain. Such an alliance was further needed to strengthen his +hand in Sulu, for the purpose of checking any insurrection that might +be fomented by rival datus or unfriendly chiefs. The Spaniards promised +to help him in his endeavors to organize an army and a navy; and, he on +his part, agreed to open the ports of Sulu for free commerce with the +Philippine Islands. He further asked the Spanish Government for capital +to work his mines, promising to pay back one-fifth of the output. + +In 1774 and 1776, Jolo was visited by Captain Thomas Forrest, who in +his "Voyage to New Guinea" described the town and country as he saw +them. His account is so interesting and so clear that the following +extracts [196] are quoted therefrom: + + + They have a great variety of fine tropical fruits; the oranges + are fully as good as those of China. They have also a variety + of the fruit called jack, or nangka, durians, a kind of large + custard apple named madang, mangos, mangustines * * *. The Sulus + having great connection with China, and many Chineses being + settled amongst them, they have learned the art of ingrafting + and improving their fruits * * *. + + The capital town is called Bawang, [197] situated by the seacoast, + on the northwest part of the island, and containing about 6,000 + inhabitants. Many of them were Ilanun * * *. + + This island * * * is well cultivated, affording a fine prospect + from the sea, on every side far superior to that of Malay countries + in general * * *. + + Here are wild elephants, the offspring, doubtless, of those sent + in former days, from the continent of India [198] as presents to + the kings of Sulu. Those animals avoid meeting with horned cattle, + though they are not shy of horses. After harvest the Sulus hunt + the elephants and wild hog, endeavoring to destroy them * * *. + Sulu has spotted deer, abundance of goats, and black cattle. + + The pearl fishery * * * proves also to the Sulus the cause of + their consequence amongst their neighbors, as being a nursery + for seamen, ready to man a fleet of praus upon an emergency * * *. + The praus [boats] of the Sulus are very neatly built, from 6 to + 40 tons burden, sail well, and are all fitted with the tripod + mast. [199] * * * + + The arts are in greater forwardness here than at Mindanao. * * * + In the common market is also a copper currency, a convenience much + wanted at Mindanao, where, as has been said, the market currency + is rice. + + The Sulus have in their families many Bisayan, some Spanish + slaves, whom they purchase from the Ilanun and Magindanao + cruisers. Sometimes they purchase whole cargoes, which they carry + to Passir, on Borneo, where, if the females are handsome, they + are bought up for the Batavia market. The masters sometimes use + their slaves cruelly, assuming the power of life and death over + them. Many are put to death for trifling offenses, and their bodies + left above the ground. An attempt of elopement is here seldom + pardoned, or indeed at Magindanao. Yet, the distance being so + small from either Sulu or Slangan, [200] to the Spanish settlement, + I have wondered how any stay, as they are not closely confined. + + The Bisayan slaves play often on the violin, and the Sulus are + fond of European music. [201] I have seen the Sultan Israel, who + was educated in Manila, and his niece, * * * dance a tolerable + minuet. I have also seen the datus go down a country dance, + but as they wore heavy slippers, they did it clumsily. + + The Sulus are not only neat in their clothes, but dress gaily. The + men go generally in white waistcoats, buttoned down to the wrist; + with white breeches, sometimes strait, sometimes wide. * * * + Both sexes are fond of gaming. * * * + + In the cool of the evening, I had the pleasure of seeing the + Sultan's niece and another princess. They wore waistcoats of + fine muslin close fitted to their bodies; their necks to the + upper part of the breasts being bare. From the waist downward + they wore a loose robe, girt with an embroidered zone or belt + about the middle, with a large clasp of gold, and a precious + stone. This loose robe like a petticoat came over their drawers, + and reached to the middle of the leg; the drawers of fine muslin + reaching to the ankle. They rode across with very short stirrups, + and wore their hair clubbed atop, Chinese fashion. They often + put sweet oils on their hair which give it a gloss. The ladies + sat their horses remarkably well; and this is an exercise women + of fashion indulge all over the island. + + "The Island Sulu is far from being large; but its situation + between Mindanao and Borneo makes it the mart of all the Moorish + kingdoms. I do not find that the Portuguese ever pretended to + settle, much less to conquer these islands; but they visited them + frequently for the sake of trade; and in those days, there was + greater commerce in these parts than can well be imagined. For, + while the trade was open to Japan, there came from thence two or + three ships laden with silver, amber, silks, chests, cabinets, + and other curiosities made of sweet-scented woods, with vast + quantities of silks, quilts, and earthenware, from China. For + these the merchants of Golconda exchanged their diamonds, those + of Ceylon their rubies, topazes, and sapphires; from Java and + Sumatra came pepper, and spices from the Moluccas." (Harris' + History of the Portuguese Empire, p. 685.) + + About fifteen datus * * * make the greater part of the + legislature. * * * They sit in council with the Sultan. The + sultan has two votes in this assembly, and each datu has one. The + heir apparent, * * * if he side with the sultan, has two votes; + but, if against him, only one. There are two representatives of + the people, called mantiris, like the military tribunes of the + Romans. The common people of Sulu * * * enjoy much real freedom, + owing to the above representation. + + The state of Sulu is small, * * * containing scarce above 60,000 + inhabitants; yet are these powerful, and have under them, not only + most of the islands that compose that Archipelago, but a great part + of Borneo, some of which they have granted to the English. They + have the character of being treacherous, and of endeavoring always + to supply by fraud what they can not effect by force. * * * + + Only seven years have elapsed since the Sultan of Kulan * * + * on the northeast of Borneo, was at war with the Sultan of + Buru, on the same coast. One of them applied to the Sulus for + assistance. The datus Alimud Din and Nukila went; and watching + their opportunity, attacked both the sultans, plundered them, + and carried them with their wives, children, and many of their + headmen to Sulu. They were sometime after sent back, on condition + that they should become tributary, which they are at this day. + + +The intentions of the East India Company in fortifying Balambangan +were regarded with suspicion by the Spaniards, who employed every +method possible to incite hostilities between the Sulus and the +English. The English agents at Jolo won the sympathy of a party +headed by the strong datus in chief command of the Sulu forces. The +Spaniards had the sultan and his party on their side. This question +of national policy was a matter of serious and important concern to +the people. It stirred up the whole Sulu community, and party issues +were ardently and publicly discussed. + +The jealousy which the English and Spaniards exhibited toward +each other and the methods they used to secure alliance with Sulu, +had the effect of exciting the suspicion of the Sulus toward both +nations. Besides that, the Spanish officials at Zamboanga showed +exceedingly poor judgment, and their action aroused the indignation +of all parties in Sulu, and led to the renewal of hostilities. + +In 1773 a majority of the leading datus favored an alliance with +England against Spain. In 1775 the English party weakened and the +garrison of Balambangan was treacherously attacked and destroyed +by Sulu agents and forces secretly sent there by Sultan Israel and +his council. The conduct of the Sulus in this incident depicts very +clearly a marked trait of the Sulu character. A full description +of this incident is given herewith in the words of Captain Forrest, +who had an intimate knowledge of the conditions at Balambangan and +the causes leading to the massacre. + + + When John Herbert, esq. went to Balambangan early in the preceding + year [1774], he found great want of buildings to accommodate the + company's servants, civil and military; those gentlemen who had + just been saved from the shipwreck of the Royal Captain on the + shoals of Palawan, as well as the crew of that ship. About this + time, one Tating, a Sulu datu, and first cousin to Sultan Israel, + came with many of his vassals to Balambangan, offered his service + as a builder, was employed by Mr. Herbert, and, in the whole of his + behavior, gave satisfaction. The datu, falling sick, went home to + Sulu for the recovery of his health. This blessing soon obtained, + he returned to the prosecution of his task at Balambangan. + + He now brought from the sultan and council letters recommending + him as a trustworthy person, to erect whatever warehouses or + buildings might be wanted. With him came two other datus, Muluk + and Nukila. But Datu Tating took care to show only part of his + numerous followers, concealing the rest in the Island of Banguey, + and even in some recesses of Balambangan, which, being covered + with wood, as those islands generally are, there was no great + fear of discovery. + + Surmises, however, had some days begun to spread reports of a + plot, while Tating proceeded with such address, that the chief + and council, who were not without their suspicions, apprehended + no danger very nigh. + + During the night strict watch was kept all over the settlement. At + dawn, the gun, as usual, announced the morning, and for a few + moments tranquillity reigned. A house at some small distance + suddenly fired proved the signal to the Sulus. They rushed into + the fort, killed the sentries, and turned the guns against the + Bugis guard. The few settlers, lately rendered fewer by death, were + fain to make their escape in what vessels they could find. [202] + + +The governor and five others escaped on board a vessel, leaving behind +a great quantity of arms and wealth. The English factors who were +at Jolo fled in a Chinese junk. In the same year Tating attempted a +similar attack on Zamboanga, but failed. During 1776 and 1777 he and +other Sulus harassed the Bisayas and ravaged the coast of Cebu. + + + +MORO PIRATES + +Sultan Israel was poisoned in 1778 by his cousin Alimud Din II, +the son of Bantilan. During the reign of Sultan Alimud Din II, +hostilities between Sulus and Spaniards increased, and for the period +of ten years or more traffic between Luzon and the southern islands +was paralyzed. About 500 Spanish and native Christians were every +year carried into captivity by the Moros. The government was greatly +exercised over this grave situation, and in 1789 the Captain-General +Mariquina reported to the King that "war with the Moros was an evil +without remedy." + +In the latter part of 1789 Sharapud Din, the son of Alimud Din I, +ascended the throne of Sulu. While a youth he was imprisoned with +his father in Zamboanga and accompanied the latter to Manila. Very +little is known of his reign except that he was animated by the same +spirit and principles which characterized his father's reign and that +of his brother Israel. He coined money, and one of his coins which +was obtained from Jolo bears the date 1204 A. H., which was probably +the date of his succession. Sultan Sharapud Din was followed by his +sons Alimud Din III and Aliyud Din I. + + + The continued presence of the Moros in Mindoro, where they haunted + the bays and rivers of both east and west coasts for months at a + time, stealing out from this island for attack in every direction, + was specially noted by Padre Zuñiga, and indicated how feebly + the Spaniards repulsed these pirates a hundred years ago. + + It was the last severe phase of Malay piracy, when even the + strong merchant ships of England and America dreaded the Straits + of Borneo and passed with caution through the China Sea. Northern + Borneo, the Sulu Archipelago, and the southern coasts of Mindanao + were the centers from which came these fierce sea wolves, whose + cruel exploits have left their many traditions in the American + and British merchant navies, just as they periodically appear in + the chronicles of the Philippines. + + Five hundred captives annually seem to have been the spoils taken + by these Moros in the Philippine Islands, and as far south as + Batavia and Macassar captive Filipinos were sold in the slave + marts of the Malays. The aged and infirm were inhumanly bartered + to the savage tribes of Borneo, who offered them up in their + ceremonial sacrifices. The measures of the Spanish Government, + though constant and expensive, were ineffective. Between 1778 and + 1793 a million and a half of pesos were expended on the fleets + and expeditions to drive back or punish the Moros, but at the + end of the century a veritable climax of piracy was attained. + + Pirates swarmed continually about the coasts of Mindoro, + Burias, and Masbate, and even frequented the esteros [203] of + Manila Bay. Some sort of peace seems to have been established + with Jolo and a friendly commerce was engaged in toward the + end of the century, but the Moros of Mindanao and Borneo were + increasing enemies. In 1798 a fleet of 25 Moro bancas passed up + the Pacific coast of Luzon and fell upon the isolated towns of + Baler, Kasiguran, and Palanan, destroying the pueblos and taking + 450 captives. The cura of Kasiguran was ransomed in Binangonan + for the sum of 2,500 pesos. For four years this pirate fleet had + its rendezvous on Burias, whence it raided the adjacent coasts + and Katanduan Island. [204] + + +Governor Aguilar assumed command in 1793 and made every effort to +remedy this condition of affairs. He divided the Archipelago into six +divisions, each of which was provided with a fleet of six gunboats. He +repaired the forts of the Bisayas, Mindoro, Tayabas, Batangas, and +Zamboanga. While preparing for defence, he negotiated with the Sulu +and Mindanao Moros for peace and partially succeeded in establishing +a condition of truce with Sulu. + +In 1798 he convened a council to consider further measures for the +suppression of piracy. All records pertaining to Moro affairs were +submitted to Rufino Suarez, "Asesor del Gobierno," who was directed +to report on this subject. The report was rendered in April, 1800, +and contained full information and recommendations as to the best +measures and methods that the government could undertake for that +purpose. Aguilar, however, did not act on the recommendations of +Suarez, but continued his negotiations with the Moros who became +peaceful and remained so until 1803. In this year the English attacked +Zamboanga unsuccessfully, instigated hostility between Sulu and Spain, +and reoccupied the Island of Balambangan, which they held for three +years only. + +In 1805 a treaty was made between Sulu and Spain whereby it was agreed +that no foreign resident would be permitted in Sulu without the +consent of the Spanish Government, and that in case of war between +Spain and any foreign country, the Sultan's ports would be closed +against Spain's enemies. Between 1805 and 1815 detailed accounts of +piratical raids are infrequent. + +Sultan Aliyud Din died in 1808 and was succeeded by his pious brother +Shakirul Lah. It is related that Shakirul Lah slept on boards and +covered himself with sarongs only. He used to leave his home at night, +search for the poor and needy and feed them. + +In 1815, the raiders took 1,000 native prisoners and captured several +Spanish, British, and Dutch vessels. In October, 1818, a Spanish fleet +under Pedro Esteban encountered 25 Moro vessels in the vicinity of +Albay, seized nine of them and sank the rest. + +Sultan Shakirul Lah was succeeded in 1823 by Sultan Jamalul Kiram +I, the son of Alimud Din III. In the same year, Governor Antonio +Martinez, impressed by the superior policy and success of Corcuera, +organized an expedition under Alonso Morgado and attacked the pirates +in their home lairs, at Basilan, Pilas, Sulu, and Mindanao. The Spanish +fleet consisted of 2 schooners, 4 gunboats, 6 tenders, 2 junks, and +1 transport schooner. The expedition reached Pilas in March, 1825, +took the fort by assault and killed 50 Moros. At Jolo it cannonaded +the town for ten hours and then left for Mindanao, where it inflicted +considerable damage. It destroyed Moro boats at Illana Bay, Pollok, +and Dumankilis Bay. + +General Ricafort sent another expedition, in 1827, to Jolo, consisting +of 20 vessels and 500 troops; but Jolo was so well fortified and the +Moro forces so numerous that the Spanish soldiers could not disembark, +and the expedition returned without accomplishing any results. + +The seal of Sultan Jamalul Kiram I bears the date 1239 A. H., or +about 1823 A. D., which in all probability indicates the year of his +succession. He issued regular appointment forms for his subordinate +officers of state and dated his communications, using the current +Malay and Mohammedan dates combined. In the estimation of the Sulus +he was a strong and very prosperous sultan. + +On the 23d of September, 1836 A. D. or 1252 A. H., he signed a +commercial treaty with Capt. José M. Halcon as the representative of +Captain-General Salazar. [205] The principal part of the treaty was +an agreement regulating boat licenses and the duties to be paid by +Sulu boats in Manila and Zamboanga and by Spanish vessels in Jolo. In +another document bearing the same date and signed by the same parties, +an alliance was declared guaranteeing general peace and safety to +Sulu boats in Philippine waters and to Spanish and Filipino craft in +the Sulu Sea. The sultan further consented to have a Spanish trading +house constructed at Jolo for the safe storage of merchandise under +the charge of a Spanish resident agent. + + + +TREATY OF 1836 WITH THE SULTAN OF SULU + + +TEXT OF THE TREATY + +Articles of agreement arranging the duties to be paid by Sulu craft +in Manila and Zamboanga, and by Spanish craft in Jolo, which schedule +can not be changed except by a new agreement. + +Article 1. Sulu craft which, with proper license, go to Manila, may +import products of the Islands subject to the Sultan, by paying a +consumption duty of 2 1/2%. + +Article 2. Wax and cacao may be deposited in the Manila Custom-House +by paying 1%; but if these articles are imported the established 14% +will be paid. + +Article 3. Sulu craft that trade in Zamboanga will pay a duty of 1% +on products of the islands subject to the Sultan. + +Article 4. All these duties will be paid in silver to the Protecting +Spanish Government on the basis of one-half the appraised value. + +Article 5. Spanish craft in Jolo will pay the following duties in kind: + + + Pesos +Ships of three masts from Manila, with Chinese passengers 2,000 +The same, without passengers 1,800 +Brigantine from Manila, with Chinese passengers 1,500 +The same, without passengers 1,300 +Schooner from Manila, with Chinese passengers 1,400 +The same, without passengers 1,200 +Pontin (small trading boat) from Manila, with Chinese + passengers 1,400 +The same, without passengers 1,200 +Galley from Manila or other ports of the Philippines, with + cargo of rice (palay), sugar and saguranes [206] 300 +The same for the Philippine Islands with cargo of merchandise 500 + + +Article 6. These duties fixed for Spanish craft will be paid in kind +in accordance with the values laid down in the following schedule, +one-half of which will be selected by the Sultan's government officials +from the cargo and the other half shall consist of such articles as +the captain of the boat may select, valuation to be in accordance +with the schedule. Articles not in the schedule can not be exacted +from the captain, nor will he give such payment: + + + ================================================================= + | Articles | Quantity | Value | + | | | (pesos) | + |======================================+==============+=========| + | Rice | One laga | 2.00 | + | Sugar | One pilon | 5.00 | + | Coconut oil | One tinaja | 6.50 | + | Chapas (plates) | Per thousand | 1.00 | + | Cambayas ordinarias (cloth) | Per thousand | 9.00 | + | Carancali (cloth) | Per piece | 11.00 | + | Coco, black and blue, (cloth) | 11 yards | 4.50 | + | Coquillo blanco, (cloth), 6 brazas | | | + | (12 yards) | 1 piece | 6.50 | + | Coco blanco, (cloth), 22 brazas | | | + | (44 yards) | 1 piece | 16.50 | + | Javal de caranclan (cloth) | 1 piece | 26.00 | + | Cacha (cloth) | 1 piece | 4.00 | + | Manta coleta (shirting) | 1 piece | 1.00 | + | Plain muslin, 12 varas | 1 piece | 10.00 | + | Fancy muslin | 1 piece | 5.00 | + | Colored muslin, 12 varas | 1 piece | 15.00 | + | Unhusked rice | One laga | 1.00 | + | Paños de Costa (cloth) | 1 piece | 11.00 | + | Ordinary cambric kerchiefs | 1 kerchief | .50 | + | Ordinary stamped kerchiefs | Per dozen | 3.00 | + | Woolens | 1 piece | 6.00 | + | Common woolens | 1 piece | 5.00 | + | Printed cotton with flowers | 1 piece | 9.00 | + ================================================================= + + +Article 7. Sulu ships found trading in ports without a license or +passing contraband will be treated as smugglers in accordance with the +Spanish laws laid down for such. Spanish schooners and small trading +craft (galeras) that show by manifest in Jolo that they carry a cargo +of Philippine produce, and are afterward discovered to have, in place +thereof, a cargo of merchandise (géneros), and to have discharged +such cargo in the port to be sold therein, will be fined 500 pesos as +per values in Jolo, two-thirds of said sum to go to the Sultan, and +one-third to the Royal Treasury of the Protecting Spanish Government. + +Article 8. Should the import duties on any articles of commerce +produced in the Sulu Islands be reduced in Manila or Zamboanga to +a lower rate than that now established, the Spanish Government will +also make a reduction so that Sulu ships may always pay less, as has +been agreed. + +Should the Sultan of Sulu collect smaller duties from any foreign +ship than those established for Spaniards, either as a tax or by +a reduction of the valuation of the dutiable articles, he will be +obliged to make such a reduction in duties for Spanish craft as will +give the advantage to the flag of His Catholic Majesty as stipulated. + +Last Article. Should the text of these articles of agreement differ +in the two languages, the Spanish text will be literally adhered to. + +Palace of Jolo, September 23, 1836, which is the 14th of the moon +Jamadul Akir, 1252.--José M. Harun,--Rubric,--Sultan Mohammed +Jamalul Kiram,--Datu Mohammed Harun,--Datu Mohammed Buyuk,--Datu +Bandahala,--Datu Muluk,--Datu Sabalmar,--Datu Mamancha,--Datu +Juhan,--Datu Maharaja-Layla,--Datu Sabuwayan,--Datu Muluk Kahar,--Datu +Nay. + +I, Don José María Halcon y Mendoza, Frigate Captain of the Royal Navy, +etc., Special Commissioner appointed by the Captain General of the +Philippines to establish these articles of agreement (capitulaciones), + +Certify that when I received from the hands of the Sultan of Sulu the +copy herewith, in the act of the exchange, by which I handed him the +duplicate with the ratification of the Governor General, I remarked +at the end of the present a writing in Malay, on the page following +that of the seals and signatures which is the reverse of folio six, +on which it can be seen. + +I also certify that having examined the contents of said improper +addition which, although unauthorized, appears in writing in the +present document, it was found to be the text of the circular of the +Sultan to his people, in four articles, whose translation, made by +the Datu Muluk-Bandarasa, and verified separately by several persons, +reads as follows: + +Article 1. The people of Sulu who wish to go to Zamboanga or Mindanao +shall ask the Sultan of Sulu for a passport so that they may suffer +no harm if they meet ships belonging to the Navy. + +Article 2. Passports shall be issued stating the number of people on +board and the cargo when requested. + +Article 3. I give this order for the safety of those who travel by +sea, as instead of being pursued by the ships of the Navy, they shall +be helped. + +Article 4. I give you the present patent so that when you meet the +ships of the Navy of the King of Spain, my brother, they may not harm, +but help you. + +And in proof thereof, I make out the present certificate, written +of my hand and attached to the Articles of Agreement, of which it is +impossible to make a new copy, on account of the absence of some of +the Datus who were present when they were agreed to, and approved them. + +Given on board her Majesty's schooner "Tirol" in the roadstead of +Jolo on the 29th of March 1837. + + +José Ma. Halcon, (His flourish). + + + +RATIFICATION OF THE TREATY OF 1836 BY THE QUEEN REGENT OF SPAIN + +Isabel II, Queen of Spain, by the Grace of God and the Constitution of +the Spanish Monarchy, and in her Royal name and during her minority, +the Queen Dowager her mother, Doña María Cristina of Bourbon, Regent +of the Kingdom: + +Whereas on the twenty-third of September of last year, at the palace +of Jolo, a treaty of peace, protection and commerce having been drawn +up, concluded and signed by the frigate-captain of the national fleet, +Don José María Halcon, commander in chief of the naval forces anchored +in the roadstead of Jolo, representing the Captain General of the +Philippine Islands, and the Sultan Jamalul Kiram and Datus; which +said treaty, composed of six articles, word by word, is as follows: + +Capitulations of Peace, Protection and Commerce, executed to the +most Excellent Sultan and Datus of Sulu, by his high Excellency the +Captain-General, Governor of the Philippine Islands, in the name of +the high and powerful Sovereignty of her Catholic Majesty, being drawn +up and agreed to by both parties, to wit: representing the Spanish +Government as plenipotentiary of his high Excellency the Captain +General, Don Pedro Antonio Salazar, Governor of the Philippines, the +frigate-captain of the royal fleet, Don José María Halcon, commander +in chief of the naval forces anchored in the roadstead of Jolo; and +upon the other part, the Sultan Jamalul Kiram, Raja of Sulu and Datus +who subscribe, which parties enacted as follows: + + + Article 1 + + His high Excellency the Captain-General, Governor, for her Catholic + Majesty, of the Philippine Islands, assures the most excellent + Sultan and Datus of Sulu, for the present and forever, of the most + stable peace between the Spaniards and natives of all the islands + subject to the Crown of Spain and the tributaries of the lands + governed by the Sultan and Datus. He offers the protection of his + Government and the aid of fleets and soldiers for the wars which + the Sultan shall find necessary to wage against enemies who shall + attack him, or in order to accomplish the subjection of the peoples + who rebel in all the confines of the islands which are found + within Spanish jurisdiction, and which extend from the western + point of Mindanao as far as Borneo and Palawan, except Sandakan + and the other lands tributary to the Sultan on the coast of Borneo. + + The Sultan of Sulu, upon his part, accepting the friendship of + the Spanish Government, binds himself to keep peace with all the + vassals of her Catholic Majesty, and further binds himself to + consider as his enemies those who hereafter may be such to the + Spanish nation, the Sulus proceeding with armed men to the wars + which may arise, in the same manner as if they were Spaniards; in + case of his furnishing such aid, the provisions for the support + of the Sulus shall be supplied by the Royal exchequer of her + Catholic Majesty, as they are for the other soldiers and people + of her army and navy. + + The sense of the second clause of the Capitulations of one thousand + seven hundred and thirty-seven, that they are not bound to furnish + assistance for wars against European nations, is hereby renewed + and affirmed. + + + Article 2 + + In accordance with the friendship and protection which unite + Sulu with the Spanish provinces of the Philippines, the Sulu + boats shall navigate and trade freely with the open ports of + Manila and Zamboanga, and the Spanish vessels with Jolo, where + not only will both be well received, but shall find protection + and the same treatment as the natives. + + In a separate Capitulation are determined the duties which the + Spanish vessels shall pay in Jolo, and those which the Sulus + shall pay in Manila and Zamboanga; but by these Capitulations it + is agreed that whenever the Sulus convey cargoes of products of + the islands, they shall pay in Manila and Zamboanga less than + foreign vessels, and the Spanish vessels shall not pay in Jolo + as much as is charged the ships of other nations. + + + Article 3 + + In order that the traffic of Spanish vessels in Jolo shall not + suffer the injuries and delays occasioned by the difficulties of + their market, the Sultan and Datus consent to the construction of a + factory or trading house, with safe warehouses, where merchandise + may be stored without risk: and the Sultan and Datus agree always + to respect this place, in which there will be a resident Spanish + agent, who shall assume charge of all the business entrusted + to him. If the Sulus should desire to do likewise in Manila, + they shall be permitted; but the Spanish Government receives + for storage merchandise from the Custom-house of that city upon + payment of fees of but one per centum. + + The Sultan shall designate the proper place for the location + of the warehouses, which shall be convenient for loading and + unloading and the Government shall request the Sultan to furnish, + and shall pay for, the materials and workmen that may be necessary. + + + Article 4 + + In order that the Spanish and Sulu vessels may navigate and trade + with safety, free from the piracies of the Hanuns and Samals + the Spanish Government will strengthen its fleets in Mindanao + waters, which same will protect equally those of both nations; + and in order that good may not be confused with evil persons, + the following rules shall be observed: + + 1st. All Spanish vessels arriving at Jolo shall show to the Sultan + their permit upon anchoring, and the same shall be sealed upon + sailing; without which the captain shall be punished at Manila. + + 2d. All Sulu vessels which proceed to Manila or Zamboanga, shall + carry the permit of the Sultan, and in possession of the same + shall be free and unmolested. + + 3d. All Spanish or Sulu vessels which shall proceed for trading + to Mindanao, shall go first to Zamboanga to notify the Governor, + who shall sign their permit without cost. + + 4th. Every Spanish or Sulu vessel which shall be found by the + fleets of Illana or Sindangan bays, without permit of the Governor + and Sultan as aforesaid, shall be seized and shall lose all her + merchandise, of which two-thirds shall be awarded to those making + the capture and one-third to the Sultan of Sulu, if the vessel + is Sulu, and to the Spanish Government if the vessel is Spanish. + + 5th. The Governor of Zamboanga shall determine the procedure in + the case of vintas [small sail boats] of the towns of Pilas and + Basilan Islands friendly to said Plaza [Zamboanga]. + + 6th. Sulu merchant vessels proceeding outside the islands of the + Sultan or to Mindanao with a permit, should not flee from the + fleets which they encounter, because the latter are intended to + defend them and run down evil-doers. Commanders of the fleets + shall be ordered to receive and aid the advice-boats of the Sultan. + + + Article 5 + + The Sultan and Datus of Sulu pledge themselves to prevent the + piracies of the Ilanuns and Samals in the Philippines, and if they + are unable, the Sultan shall so report in order that the Spanish + Government may afford assistance or undertake the task alone. + + + Last Article + + If the sense of these Capitulations is not conformable in both + languages, the same shall agree with the literal Spanish text. + + Palace of Jolo, September 23, 1836, which is the fourteenth of the + moon Jamadul Akir of one thousand two hundred and fifty-two. The + seals.--Sultan Mohammed Jamalul Kiram.--Seal--signed.--José + María Halcon.--Datu Mohammed Harun.--Seal.--Datu Mohammed + Buyuk.--Seal--Datu Bandahala.--Seal--Datu Amilbahar.--Datu + Muluk.--Datu Sabalmar.--Datu Mamancha.--Datu Juhan.--Datu + Maharajah-Layla.--Datu Sabuwayan.--Datu Muluk Kahar.--Datu Nay. + + Therefore, the Government of our August Daughter, having been duly + authorized by the decree of the Cortes of the thirteenth of the + present month, for the ratification of the inclosed treaty, and + the same having been seen and examined by Us, we have approved and + ratified and by these presents do hereby approve and ratify the + contents thereof as a whole, in the best and most complete form + possible, promising on the faith and the word of Queen Regent, + in the name of our August Daughter, to comply with and observe + the same, and compel wholly the compliance with and observance + of the same. In witness whereof, we command the disposition of + the same, signed with our hand, and sealed with our own private + seal by the First Secretary of State. Done at Madrid, this October + twenty-ninth, one thousand eight hundred and thirty-seven. + + + I the Queen Regent. + + [A shield in wax.] + + Eusebio de Bandaxi y Azara. + + + +EXPEDITION OF GOVERNOR CLAVERIA + +In 1842 the Spanish Government built the stone fort at Isabela de +Basilan. The Balangingi and Basilan Moros appear about this time to +have become a menace to the peace and to the commerce of nations. To +punish Datu Usak of Malusu for depredations committed against French +vessels, Basilan was blockaded by a French fleet in 1843. Aspiring +for Chinese trade and for the possession of a port in the neighboring +seas the French in 1844 concluded a treaty with the Sultan of Sulu +for the cession of the Island of Basilan for a considerable sum of +money. The terms of this treaty do not appear to have been carried +out, but this act and the frequent appearance of English, Dutch, +and French vessels in Sulu waters aroused the Spaniards to active +measures for the subjugation of the Sulu Archipelago. + +This year Jamalul Kiram I died, and his son Mohammed Pulalun succeeded +to the sultanate. The "Luntar" or "Sulu Annals" begin January, 1844, +and appear to have been started by Sultan Pulalun. + +In 1845 a frigate attacked the Island of Balangingi, but it was +repulsed and gained no advantage except that of ascertaining the +strength of the enemy. The shores of Basilan and the principal +islands lying between it and the Island of Sulu had numerous forts, +the strongest of which were on the island of Balangingi, the chief +stronghold and headquarters of the Samal pirates. Realizing the +seriousness of the situation Governor Claveria took the matter in +hand and with energy and enthusiasm made every effort to strengthen +the fleet and increase its efficiency. + +In 1848 he secured three steam war vessels called Elcano, Magallanes, +and Reina de Castilla which were built by the English and were the +first steam gunboats the Philippine Government ever employed. Steam +was certainly destined to mark a new epoch, one which saw the beginning +of the end of Moro piracy. + +With two additional pilot boats and three transport brigs the +expedition, headed by Governor Claveria in person, left Manila in +January and, coming by the way of Dapitan, reunited at Caldera Bay, +where it received additional troops from Zamboanga. + +The Island of Balangingi is scarcely 6 square miles in area, +low, flat, surrounded by shoals, and covered to a great extent by +mangrove swamps. Most of its settlements had their houses built over +the water and little dry land could be seen in the vicinity. Part +of this land was covered with coconut trees. A labyrinth of small, +narrow channels led to the various settlements and divided the island +into four distinct parts. Four strong forts were built by the Moros +at points difficult of access and surrounded by swamps. These forts +were constructed of thick trunks of trees driven into the soil as +piles and set close to each other and in 3 rows of varying heights, +to afford suitable positions for the artillery, part of which was set +in covered inclosures commanding the channel leading to the fort. The +walls of these forts were 20 feet high and could not be scaled without +ladders. The immediate vicinity of the fort was set with sharpened +bamboo sticks and pits to hinder and trap the attacking forces. The +fort of Sipak, the strongest of the four, was provided with redoubts +and towers and showed considerable skill in its construction. + +The Spanish troops consisted of three regular companies of infantry, +two of volunteers, and detachments of artillery, pikemen, engineers, +and laborers. They experienced some difficulty in landing and attacked +the most accessible fort first. The fighting was heroic and desperate +on both sides. The Moros, it is said, fought like fiends; but they were +completely overpowered in the end. In the fort of Sipak many women +and children were gathered and considerable property was stored. The +Moros had hoped to save all within its impregnable walls. When these +walls were entered, some of the defenders in their desperation thrust +their spears and krises into their wives and children, killed them +first, and then dashed themselves against sure death at the point of +Spanish bayonets. The Moros consider such action most valorous and +honorable and do it in order not to allow their wives and children +to fall into slavery or be killed by the hand of the enemy. + +In the fight at the first fort 100 Moros perished and 14 pieces +of artillery were captured. The Spaniards lost 7 dead and 50 +wounded. After the reduction of the second fort at Sipak 340 Moros were +burned in one pile and 150, mostly women and children, were taken as +prisoners; others, who sought refuge in the swamps or tried to swim +away, were killed by the fire of the fleet and their bodies were +washed ashore by the waves. The Spanish losses in this engagement +amounted to 17 dead, 4 officers and 13 men, and 155 wounded. Three +hundred slave captives were rescued and 66 pieces of artillery were +captured. Quantities of ammunition, silks, silver and gold vessels, +bracelets and other ornaments, jewels, utensils and arms of all sorts, +and books of prayer were found inside the fort. + +The troops investing the third fortification at Sungap found the +fort evacuated, but the first Spaniard who scaled the wall fell dead +from a kampilan blow at the hand of the only Moro who refused to run +away and remained at his post to meet what he considered an honorable +death. Thirteen cannons of small caliber were found in this fort. The +Moros who had fled to the fourth fort at Bukutingal did not make any +determined stand, but soon fled leaving several cannons behind. The +Spaniards desolated the island, burned its forts and settlements, +and cut down more than 8,000 coconut trees. + +The conquest of the Balangingi Samals was complete and the expedition +returned to Manila in triumph. Here great rejoicings, parades, and +festivities were held in honor of the event. Governor Claveria was +decorated and promoted by the Queen and many of the officers and men +were variously rewarded. + +The Balangingi Samals rivaled the Sulus in power, bravery, and wealth, +but the signal victory of Claveria crushed them so completely that +they have never since had any considerable force. The Samals who were +carried away were transplanted to the Province of Kagayan in northern +Luzon, where they remained until a late date. + + + +VISITS TO JOLO OF CAPTAIN HENRY KEPPEL AND SIR JAMES BROOKE + +In December, 1848, Jolo was visited by Capt. Henry Keppel, in command +of the Maeander, and his description of the town contained in the +following extracts taken from his "Visit to the Indian Archipelago" +will be of unusual interest: [207] + + + The town is built partly on land and partly on the sea. That + part which is on the land, and which might almost be called the + citadel, was at the time of our visit, strongly stockaded and + flanked with batteries mounting heavy guns * * *. That portion + of the town which is not within the stockades is built in regular + Malay fashion, on piles. The houses run in rows, or streets; and + outside of them is a platform about 6 feet wide to walk upon. This + is supported underneath by a light scaffolding of bamboo. These + rows of birdcage-looking buildings extend into the sea for half a + mile over a shoal which is nearly dry at low water. The population + is numerous, composed principally of fishermen and Chinese + traders. The said platform runs the whole length of the rows: + and its planks were so carelessly thrown across that it seemed + wonderful how the children could escape, if they always did escape, + falling through the yawning spaces which invited them to a watery, + or a muddy grave; they were crawling about these rickety stages + in vast numbers; if the tide was out when they fell, they would + be received into 3 feet deep of soft mud, supposing always that + they did not break their little backs across the gunwales of the + canoes beneath, which were made fast to the scaffolding. * * * + + What we saw of the country [in the neighborhood of Jolo] + was highly cultivated, consisting, with intervals of jungle, + of pasture grounds and gardens, very flourishing and pretty, + with abundance of cattle. * * * + + The day after we had commenced [watering] was a market day. The + mountaineers came down in parties of from six to twelve, mounted + on well-formed little horses, or oxen, according to their + rank and means; on these they sat with graceful ease, spear in + hand--they were all well armed besides, with shield and kris; + in some instances also we observed the heavy two-handed Ilanun + sword [kampilan]. They had a wild and independent bearing; + and, when seen in groups, some standing, some squatting, the + women all chattering, under the wide spreading tree, they much + increased the interest of the already picturesque scene. They + seemed indifferent as to the sale of their stock, which was + conducted chiefly by the women, who freely accompanied them, + and were by no means ill favored. The townspeople, who met and + traded with these mountaineers, were dressed in gayer colors, + but not so well armed. * * * Though the market on this occasion + was well attended, the trade was slack; but I doubt not that, + in the palmy days of active piracy, a considerable amount of + business was transacted under this old banyan tree. * * * + + December 30 was the day appointed for Sir James Brooke's + interview with the Sultan of Sulu. We landed in full costume at + 10 o'clock. Having walked over the sea suburbs, and arrived at + the beach, we found a guard of honor and attendants waiting to + conduct Sir James to the Sultan's presence; they were a motley + group, but made themselves useful in clearing the way. + + Passing within the outer stockade, we arrived, after a few minute's + walk, at the royal residence. It was walled in and fortified: + a large space was inclosed by double rows of heavy piles driven + into the earth, about 5 feet apart, and the space was filled up + with large stones and earth, making a very solid wall of about + 15 feet in height, having embrasures, or rather portholes, in + convenient places for cannon, out of which we noticed the rusty + muzzles of some very heavy guns protruding. A great part of the + town was stockaded in a similar way; and the country houses of + the datus and mountain chiefs of any importance were also walled + in and had guns mounted. + + Passing through a massive gateway, pretty well flanked with guns + and loopholes, we entered a large court, in which some 2,000 + persons were assembled, armed and in their best apparel, but + observing no sort of order; it was a wild and novel sight. Malays + are always armed. The kris to them is what the sword was to + an English gentleman in the feudal times. Every person who, by + virtue of his rank or on any other pretext, could gain admittance + was in attendance on this occasion; for our Rajah had become a + justly celebrated man in the great Eastern Archipelago, and was + an object of curiosity. + + We were conducted through the crowd to a corner of the courtyard, + where a building inferior to a small English barn, was pointed + out as the Sultan's palace. We entered it by a flight of broad + wooden steps (for the palace was raised on piles), through a + narrow passage thronged with guards * * * and we found ourselves + in the royal presence. + + The audience chamber was not very large; a table, covered with + green cloth, ran across the center of it; above the table, and + around the upper end of the room sat a very brilliant semicircle of + personages, the Sultan occupying a raised seat in the middle. The + cortège consisted of his grand vizier, the members of the royal + family, and the great datus and officers of state. Behind these + stood the guards and attendants, dressed in silks, the colors + being according to the fancy of their respective masters. + + The Sultan gave us a gracious reception, shaking hands with each + officer as he was presented. This ceremony over, chairs were + placed for Sir James and his suite; while those of our party, + who could not get seats, formed a semicircle on the other side + of the table. The scene was striking and gay. + + The Sultan is a young-looking man, but with a dull and vacant + expression, produced by the too free use of opium: his lips + were red with the mixture of betel nut and cere leaf, [208] + which he chewed. + + He was dressed in rich silks, red and green the predominant + colors. A large jewel sparkled in his turban, and he wore jewels + also profusely on his person. + + The hilt of his kris, the great distinguishing ornament of all + Malays, was beautifully decorated with gold wire, curiously + twisted in. Immediately behind the Sultan, in closest attendance + on his person, stood the cupbearer, a fine young man dressed in + green silk, who held in his hand a purple finger glass, which + was constantly held to his royal master's mouth, to receive + the filthy-looking mixture which is in such favor with these + people--composed of the juice of the betel leaf, with the areca + nut and gambier. The other personages composing the circle were + dressed with equal gaudiness, in bright silks; in the selection, + however, of their colors they displayed considerable taste. Many + of the guards were dressed in very ancient chain armor, consisting + of skull caps and tunics, covering the arms and reaching from + the throat to the knee. + + Those armed with sword, spear, and kris did not look amiss; but + two sentries, placed to guard the entrance to this ancient hall of + audience, each shouldering a very shabby-looking old Tower musket, + of which they looked very proud, had an absurd effect. + + After a reasonable time passed by each party in admiration of + the other, the conversation was opened by Sir James Brooke, who, + as Her Majesty's commissioner in these regions, submitted to the + Sultan certain propositions on matters of business. + + To these His Majesty expressed his willingness to accede; and + he graciously reminded Sir James that the royal family of Sulu + were under considerable obligations to the English; inasmuch as + his great-grandfather, Sultan Amir, [209] having been once upon + a time imprisoned by the Spaniards in the fortress of Manila, + was delivered from durance vile and reinstated on the throne of + his ancestors by Alexander Dalrymple----A. D. 1763. This was now + the more liberal on the part of His Majesty, because his royal + ancestor had not at the time allowed the service to be altogether + unrequited; for he ceded to the English Government a fine island + adjoining Sulu (of which, by the bye, no use appears to have been + made), together with the north end of Borneo and the south end + of Palawan, with the intervening islands. + + At length we took leave of his Majesty, retiring in much the + same order as that in which we had entered. Although no actual + treaty was concluded with the Sultan, Sir James paved the way for + opening up commerce and for cultivating a better understanding + with the natives. + + In the afternoon we visited one Datu Daniel, a powerful chief, + very friendly, and well disposed toward the English. His stronghold + was at a short distance in the country, at the foot of one of the + mountain slopes, fortified in much the same way as the Sultan's, + but on a smaller scale; his stockades were, however, quite as + strong, and his guns in better order. His inclosed court, being + likewise a farmyard with a good supply of live stock, looked as + if he was better prepared than his royal master to stand a long + siege; his wives looked happy, his children merry, and, on the + whole, his domestic life appeared tolerably comfortable. * * * + + Considering that Sulu was the great commercial center of these + seas, we were surprised at not seeing more large praus; there + were none afloat, and very few hauled up; the number, however, + of building sheds and blacksmith's forges showed that they have + the means of starting into activity at short notice. + + +Who could have thought that, after such devastation and havoc as the +Spaniards wrought on Balangingi, another chief would have the courage +to settle on such a hateful spot again! Yet we learn that in spite +of the contrary advice of the Sultan and his council, Datu Tampang, +as early as December, 1848, stationed himself at Pa'at, Balangingi +Island, and constructed a fort with the intention of defying the +Spanish forces and fighting them again. An isolated case like this can +not be explained except on the ground of foolhardiness, for Tampang +was soon after that dislodged by the governor of Zamboanga. But it +appears that it was necessary again for the Spaniards to send another +squadron under Manuel Quesada, consisting of two steam gunboats and +other sloops and vessels, to clean up Balangingi once more and to +strike at the Moros of Basilan and Pilas. Nor was this sufficient, for +we learn that before the end of the same month of December, 3,000 Sulus +and Samals attacked the Spanish forces on Basilan, probably at Isabela, +and were repulsed. In 1849 the Spaniards retaliated and reduced to +ashes the settlements of Bwal, Samalang, and Gumbalang. Undaunted, +the Moros of Tonkil, together with others, in 1850 raided the Islands +of Samar and Kamigin and carried away more than 75 natives. + + + + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +DECLINE OF SULU, 1851-1896 + + +EXPEDITION AGAINST JOLO + +The fearlessness of the Moros in battle, their determination, +persistence, and fortitude must have disheartened the Spaniards +very often in their weary attempts to conquer and pacify Sulu. The +Sulus have never had any standing army. Every able-bodied male was +a soldier and a sailor. Thousands of Sulus and Samals stood ready +at a moment's notice to man a fleet and defend a fort. Every fort +the Spaniards reduced the Sulus could rebuild in a short time; +every fleet destroyed they could replace with little expense. They +had enough pearls to purchase guns and ammunition, and a few months +after a defeat they were ready to fight again, better prepared than +before. War with Sulu, in the way it was conducted, meant a war of +extermination and hostilities without end. Its worst evils befell the +helpless natives of the coast settlements of the Bisayas and southern +Luzon to whom Spain was unable to afford safe protection. The Moros +would slip through in the night or take advantage of a favorable wind +and attack the Spanish forces or the defenseless villages while they +were unaware of danger or unprepared for a fight. For a long while it +seemed beyond the power of the Philippine Government to reëstablish +peace or restrict hostilities to Sulu waters. The magnificent victory +of Claveria was hailed as marking the beginning of a new era of safety +and glory, but its effects did not last long, and the fear of the +Moros beset the hearts of the Bisayans once more. + +In the light of such profound experience as the Philippine Government +had had with Moro affairs Governor Urbiztondo might have contented +himself with punishing the Moros of Tonkil and their abettors and +allies, but another element of serious concern entered into the +problem which threatened not only to render it more vexatious and +unsolvable, but dangerous in the extreme. It was not so much the evils +of disturbed relations with Sulu as the harm that would arise from +English occupation of or alliance with Sulu that Urbiztondo feared, +for in 1849, Sir James Brooke visited Jolo and made a treaty with the +Sultan of Sulu, [210] the seventh article of which declared a promise +made by the Sultan of Sulu not to make any cessions of territory within +his dominion nor recognize sovereignty rights nor promise fealty to any +nation without the consent of Great Britain. The overt object of this +treaty was "to keep open for the benefit of the mercantile world that +improvable field for commercial enterprise," but the ultimate purpose +of such an agreement was not difficult to foresee. The governor of +Zamboanga went to Jolo and protested strongly, declaring such a treaty +an act of disloyalty to Spain, for which the Sultan and his council +would be held responsible. The subject was debated with considerable +feeling on both sides. The governor remained at Jolo twenty-seven +days and returned without advantage. + +The treaty was never ratified by Great Britain, but such endeavors on +the part of a strong maritime European power made it necessary for +Spain to act decisively and expeditiously. Urbiztondo then pressed +to the attention of Sultan Pulalun and his council the necessity of +punishing the Samals of Tonkil for their depredations on Samar and +Kamigin and requested the return of the captives whom they carried +away. Considerable controversy followed and the Sulus pretended that +they were unable to punish Tonkil, but offered no objection to its +castigation by the Philippine Government. + +Aware of the seriousness of the situation, Urbiztondo made preparations +for war and decided to attack not Tonkil only, but Jolo also, repeating +there the example of Balangingi, and to bring Sulu under the control +of Spain. Referring to this cause, Captain Keppel, in his "Visit to +the Indian Archipelago," makes the following remarks: + + + His [the Sultan's] fortified position gave him weight, which he + had frequently thrown into the scale of humanity: and it must + now be feared that many whom he was able to hold in check will + again follow their evil propensities unrestrained, as they did + under previous dynasties. + + The resentment of Spain, as visited upon the Sultan of Sulu, seems + equally impolitic and unjust. The pretext was piracy, of which + some solitary instance may very possibly have been established + against a Sulu prahu; but the Sultan was certainly sincere in his + wish to coöperate against that system. There is ground to fear + that national jealousy was desirous of striking its puny blow + at an European rival, through the degradation of the Sultan of + Sulu--that he has incurred, in fact, the resentment of the Spanish + colonial governors, by those commercial treaties with ourselves + which were but lately concluded by Sir James Brooke. [211] + + +On the 11th day of December, 1850, Urbiztondo left Manila in command +of a force consisting of 100 troops of artillery, 500 of infantry, 2 +mountain howitzers, and a number of irregular troops and workmen. Two +steamboats, one corvette, and one brigantine carried the troops +to Zamboanga, where they arrived on the 20th. Here 2 companies of +infantry and 102 volunteers and 6 tenders under the command of the +governor of Zamboanga joined the expedition. At Belun they burned +250 houses and 20 vintas. A small force of Moros was encountered, +of which they killed 3 and captured 17 prisoners, one of whom was a +panglima. The chief of Bukutwan surrendered and promised to remain +obedient to Spain. At Tonkil bad weather was encountered and the +whole expedition turned toward Jolo. + +Jolo was well fortified. It had five forts on the sea front, the +strongest two of which were that of the Sultan on the right and that of +Datu Daniel on the hill. Three other forts were located on prominent +points at the base of the hills. The town was further defended by a +double line of trenches, other fortifications and much artillery. The +population was estimated at 6,000 Moros and 500 Chinese. + +The fleet saluted the town and anchored in the roadstead. Two +officers were sent ashore to notify the Sultan of the presence of +the Governor-General and of his wish to have an interview with the +Sultan and two of his datus, on board. The people were excited to such +a high degree, that the mob grew violent and uncontrollable as the +officers drew near the shore. Insults and weapons were hurled at them +from every side, and the people shouted to them to return lest they be +killed. They, however, pushed on in the direction of the Sultan's fort, +where some datus came out to meet and protect them. Even then spears +were thrown at them, and one of the datus had to use his kampilan in +order to enforce his orders. The Sultan at last came out personally, +embraced the officers, and conducted them to the audience hall. There +the message was delivered to the Sultan and his council, but they +all refused to go on board. The officers met the same difficulty +in leaving the Sultan's house as in coming in, and as soon as they +embarked five shots were discharged at them by the mob. The officers +reported that the town had more than 10,000 fighting men and that +it was well provisioned and well defended, and that all the women +and children were removed to the mountains. Urbiztondo decided that +his forces and provisions were inadequate for the occasion and did +not risk a combat. On January 1, 1851, as the fleet was preparing to +sail away, the Sulus fired at it, killing seven, wounding four, and +damaging the hulls of some of the vessels. The fleet returned the fire, +but kept moving, and sailed away in the direction of Tonkil. Here +the expedition met no organized resistance. Six hundred men were +disembarked, fought some armed parties, caught 4 and killed 25 men, +and rescued 29 captives. About 1,000 houses and 106 boats were burned, +and the fleet then returned to Zamboanga. + +Here Urbiztondo made further and extensive preparations to strengthen +his expedition. The commanding marine officer was sent to Manila +with special instructions to augment the fleet and bring sufficient +ammunition and provisions. The Augustinian friar Pascual Ibañez +raised a force of 750 Cebuans and 21 barangay, or large boats, and +volunteered his help. Lumber was cut at Basilan, and lankan, [212] +rafts, and ladders were constructed. Volunteers were further called +for, and a large fleet of war vessels and transports was assembled +at Zamboanga February 12, 1851. + +Besides the staff, engineers, surgeons, and chaplains, the reënforced +expedition contained 11 officers and 253 privates of artillery, 1 +officer and 30 privates of sappers, 123 officers and 2,593 privates +of infantry, 525 volunteers from Cebu, 100 from Iloilo, and 300 from +Zamboanga; in all 142 officers, 2,876 privates, and 925 volunteers, +besides rowers and other workmen. The vessels carrying the forces +were 1 corvette, 1 brigantine, 3 steamboats, 2 gunboats, 9 tenders, +9 transports, and 21 barangay, with various vintas, [213] lankan, +and rafts. On February 19 mass was celebrated and the expedition +started for the haughty and arrogant city. + +Jolo was reached on the 27th and the fleet anchored in two divisions +opposite both sides of the town. The troops disembarked at dawn next +morning and engaged the enemy as both divisions of the fleet began +a simultaneous bombardment of the town and forts. The marksmanship +of the Sulus and Spaniards was splendid, and the guns of the forts +were very active. The spectacle was magnificent, the attack was most +valorous, and the defense most valiant. In the heat of battle one +friar was killed as he was scaling the wall and three officers fell +by his side and lay surrounded by 70 corpses of Sulus. After several +attempts one of the forts on the northeast side was taken by storm and +the escaping Sulus made for Daniel's fort. As they were admitted into +the latter, it was rushed by the Spanish troops who entered in spite +of the desperate resistance the Sulus made. As the inner inclosure was +gained the Sulus hurled themselves from the parapets and fled. The +fighting continued until next day, when every fort was reduced, and +the Sulus evacuated the town. The casualties of the attacking forces +were 36 dead and 92 wounded, while the Sulus lost 300 dead. The whole +town was burned to ashes and 112 pieces of artillery were taken. After +four days, the Governor-General and his council decided to evacuate +the town and sailed away, leaving it ungarrisoned. They evidently +thought that their purpose was accomplished and that they could not +afford to leave a force sufficiently strong to defend the place. + +On April 30 a treaty was made with Sultan Pulalun by the +politico-military governor of Zamboanga, Col. José Maria de Carlos. The +treaty was declared to be "an act of incorporation of the sultanate +of Sulu to the Spanish Monarchy." The Sulus understood it to be a firm +agreement and friendly union with Spain. They, however, appear to have +recognized the supremacy of Spain and accepted her protectorate. They +agreed to use the Spanish flag and prohibit piracy. They further +bound themselves not to make any treaties with any nation other +than Spain nor to build forts nor to import firearms without her +permission. Spain promised to respect and recognize the ranks of +the Sultan and datus and to protect Sulu boats everywhere and to +the same extent as Spanish boats. Duties on foreign boats were to +be paid to the Sulus. Religious liberty was guaranteed. The Sultan +issued passports to the Sulus and countersigned Spanish passports +given to people entering the ports of Sulu. + +It was agreed that Spain would build a trading post at Jolo and +establish a small garrison for its protection. The Sultan and the +datus resumed their residence in the town of Jolo, with apparently +very little change from former conditions. + +In consideration of the losses incurred by the Sultan and datus +through the destruction of their houses and town, and on condition +that the Sulus aid in the construction and protection of the Jolo +trading post, annuities were granted to the Sultan, three datus, +and one subordinate chief. + +The treaty was written in both Spanish and Sulu and was signed and +sealed by both parties. Complete and exact translations of the Spanish +and Sulu copies of this treaty have been carefully made and are here +given in full. The Sulu copy of the treaty appears to have been written +or dictated by interpreters not versed in Sulu, and the difference in +text is such as would easily explain the frequent misunderstandings +between the Spanish officials and the Sulu authorities in cases +pertaining to the application of the terms of this treaty. + + + +TREATY OF APRIL 30, 1851 + + + SULTANATE OF SULU + + Act of Incorporation into the Spanish Monarchy, April 30, 1851 + + + Solemn declaration of incorporation and adhesion to the Sovereignty + of Her Catholic Majesty Isabel II, Constitutional Queen of Spain, + and of submission to the Supreme Government of the Nation, made + by His High Excellency the Sultan of Sulu, Mohammed Pulalun, + Datus Mohammed Buyuk, Muluk, Daniel Amil Bahar, Bandahala, Muluk + Kahar, Amil Badar, Tumanggung, Juhan, Sanajahan, Na'ib, Mamancha + and Sharif Mohammed Binsarin, in the name and in representation + of the whole island of Sulu, to Colonel José María de Carlos y + O'Doyle, Politico-Military Governor of the Province of Zamboanga, + islands of Basilan, Pilas, Tonkil, and those adjacent thereto, + as Plenipotentiary specially authorized by His Excellency Antonio + de Urbiztondo, Marquis of Solana, Governor and Captain-General + of the Philippine Islands. + + Article I. His Excellency the Sultan of Sulu, for himself, his + heirs and descendants, Datus Mohammed Buyuk, Muluk, Daniel Amil + Bahar, Bandahala, Muluk Kahar, Amil Badar, Tumanggung, Juhan, + Sanajahan, Na'ib, Mamancha and Sharif Mohammed Binsarin, all of + their own free will, declare: That, for the purpose of making + amends to the Spanish Nation for the outrage committed against + it on the first of January of this year, they desire and request + that the island of Jolo and all its dependencies be incorporated + with the Crown of Spain, which for several centuries has been + their only sovereign and protectress, making on this day a new + solemn declaration of adhesion and submission and recognizing + Her Catholic Majesty Isabel II, Constitutional Queen of Spain, + and those who may succeed her in this supreme dignity, as their + rightful Sovereign Lords and Protectors, in virtue of the treaties + made in old times, of the treaty of 1836 and the additions made + thereto by the present governor of Zamboanga in August, and also + and very particularly of the recent conquest of Jolo on the 28th of + February of the present year by Captain-General Antonio Urbiztondo, + Marquis of Solana and Governor-General of the Philippine Islands. + + Article 2. The Sultan and Datus solemnly promise to maintain the + integrity of the territory of Sulu and all its dependencies as + a part of the Archipelago belonging to the Spanish Government. + + Article 3. The island of Sulu and all its dependencies having been + incorporated with the Crown of Spain, and the inhabitants thereof + being part of the great Spanish family which lives in the vast + Philippine Archipelago, the Sultan and Datus shall not be empowered + to make or sign treaties, commercial agreements or alliances of + any kind with European powers, companies, persons or corporations, + and Malayan sultans or chiefs, under pain of nullity; they declare + all treaties made with other powers to be null and void if they + are prejudicial to the ancient and indisputable rights held by + Spain over the entire Sulu Archipelago as part of the Philippine + Islands, and they ratify, renew and leave in force all documents + containing clauses favorable to the Spanish Government that may + have been drawn up before this date, however old they may be. + + Article 4. They renew the solemn promise not to carry on piracy + or allow anybody to carry on piracy within the dominions of Sulu, + and to run down those who follow this infamous calling, declaring + themselves enemies of all islands that are enemies of Spain and + allies of all her friends. + + Article 5. From this day forth the island of Sulu shall fly the + Spanish national flag in its towns and on its ships, and the Sultan + and other constituted authorities shall use the Spanish war flag, + under the principles in use in other Spanish possessions, and + shall use no other either on land or on sea. + + Article 6. The island of Sulu and its dependencies having been + declared an integral part of the Philippine Archipelago, which + belongs to Spain, commerce under the Spanish flag in all the + ports of the Sultanate shall be free and unmolested, as it is in + all the ports belonging to the Nation. + + Article 7. The Sultan and Datus of Sulu, having recognized the + sovereignty of Spain over their territory, which sovereignty is + now strongly established, not only by right of conquest but by + the clemency of the conqueror, they shall not erect fortifications + of any kind in the territory under their command without express + permission of His Excellency the Governor-General of these Islands; + the purchase and use of all kinds of firearms shall be prohibited + except with a license issued by the same supreme authority, + and craft found with arms other than the edged weapons which + have from time immemorial been in use in the country shall be + considered as enemies. + + Article 8. The Spanish Government, as an unequivocal proof of + the protection which it grants the Sulus, will give the Sultan + and Datus adequate Royal titles establishing their authority and + their rank. + + Article 9. The Spanish Government guarantees with all solemnity + to the Sultan and other inhabitants of Sulu the free exercise of + their religion, with which it will not interfere in the slightest + way, and it will also respect their customs. + + Article 10. The Spanish Government also guarantees the right + of succession to the present Sultan and his descendants in the + order established and as long as they observe these agreements, + and equally guarantees the rank and dignities of the privileged + classes, which shall retain all their rights. + + Article 11. Sulu ships and goods shall enjoy in Spanish ports, + without any distinction whatever, the same privileges and + advantages granted the natives of the Philippine Islands. + + Article 12. Except in the case of Spanish ships, the duties that + constitute the income with which the Sultan and Datus maintain + their respective ranks shall remain in force, so that they may + continue to keep up the proper splendor and decorum of their + station; for this purpose said duties shall be paid by all ships + coming to their ports; other measures will be taken later on to + enhance their dignity and increase their prestige. + + Article 13. For the purpose of assuring and strengthening the + authority of the Sultan, and also of promoting a regular trade + which may enrich the island of Sulu, a trading post, garrisoned by + Spanish forces, shall be established as soon as the Government so + orders, and in accordance with Article 3 of the Treaty of 1836; + for the building of the trading post the Sultan, Datus, and + natives shall give all the assistance in their power and furnish + native labor, which will be paid for, and all necessary materials, + which they will charge at the regular market prices. + + Article 14. The trading post shall be established at the place + called Daniel's Kuta, next to the roadstead, as it is the most + suitable place; but care shall be taken not to encroach in any way + on the native cemetery, which has to be religiously respected, and + no buildings whatever shall be erected in said cemetery, so as to + avoid the trouble that would ensue to those who might build there. + + Article 15. The Sultan of Sulu may issue passports to all persons + within his dominions that may request them, and fix the amount + of the fees; he is also authorized to countersign or place his + seal on the passports of Spaniards visiting his place of residence. + + Article 16. In view of the Sultan's declarations regarding the + losses suffered by him in the destruction by fire of his forts + and palace, and convinced of the reality of the losses, the + Spanish Government grants him an annuity of 1,500 pesos in order + to indemnify him in a certain way for these losses and at the same + time to help him to maintain, with proper splendor, the decorum due + his person and his rank. The same considerations induce the Spanish + Government to grant Datu Mohammed Buyuk, Muluk and Datu Daniel Amil + Bahar 600 pesos per annum each, and 360 pesos to Sharif Mohammed + Binsarin on account of his good services to the Spanish Government. + + Article 17. The articles contained in this solemn Act shall + go this day into full effect, subject however to the superior + approval of His Excellency the Governor-General of these Philippine + Islands. Any doubt which may arise in regard to the text of this + Act shall be resolved by adhering to the literal meaning of the + Spanish text. + + Signed at Jolo on the 19th of April 1851.--Seal of the + Sultan.--Seals of Datus Muluk Kahar; Tumanggung; Sanajahan; + Mamancha; Muluk Bandahala; Amil-Badar; Juhan; Na'ib; and signature + of Sharif Mohammed Binsarin.--The Politico-Military Governor of + the province of Zamboanga etc.: José María de Carlos y O'Doyle. + + I, Don Antonio de Urbiztondo y Eguía, Marquis de la Solana, Knight + Grand Cross of the Royal American Order of Isabel the Catholic, + Knight of the Royal Order of San Fernando of the first and third + class, and of that of San Hermanegildo, Lieutenant-General of the + National Forces, Governor and Captain-General of the Philippine + Islands, President of the Royal Audiencia of the Philippine + Islands, Judge-Subdelegate of Post Office Revenues, Vice-Royal + Patron, and Director-General of the troops, etc., approve, confirm + and ratify this capitulation in the name of Her Majesty Isabel II. + + + Manila, April 30, 1851.--Antonio de Urbiztondo. + + True copy.--Seal of the Captain-General of the Philippines. + + + Royal order approving the salaries assigned to the Sultan and + Datus of Sulu, December 14, 1851. + + The Queen (whom God save), in view of the letter of Your Excellency + of May 3rd last, No. 1236, and of the report of the Secretary of + State on the subject, has been pleased to approve the salaries + assigned by Article 16 of the Capitulation to the Sultan and Datus + of Sulu, and amounting to 1,500 pesos for the Sultan, 600 pesos + for each of the Datus Mohammed Buyuk Muluk and Daniel Amil Bahar, + and 360 for Sharif Binsarin. + + + By Royal order etc. + + Madrid, December 14, 1851. + + The Intendant of the Philippines. + + + +TRANSLATION OF THE SULU TEXT OF THE TREATY OF 1851 + + A statement of firm agreement and union (in friendship) made by + the Queen Spain Isabel II, Constitutional Queen of all Spain, and + the honorable officers of her government, with the Mawlana Sultan + Mohammed Pulalun and the Datus Mohammed Buyuk, Muluk, Amil Bahar, + Bandahala, Muluk Kahar, Amil Badar, Tumanggung, Juhan, Sawja'an, + Na'ib, Mamancha, and Tuan Sharif Mohammed Binsarin. + + The King was represented here by Colonel Don José María de Carlos + y O'Doyle, Politico-Military Governor of the Province of Zamboanga + and islands of Basilan, Pilas, Tonkil, and others, who was given + power and authority by General Don Antonio de Urbiztondo, Marquis + of Solana, Governor and Great Captain of the Philippine Islands. + + Article I. The Mahasari Mawlana Sultan of Sulu and his ministers + together with the datus mentioned above have the great desire to + state that they had good intentions toward the people of Spain, + on January 1, of this year. They also state that the relation + of Sulu and its dependencies to Spain has been one of intimate + union from the first until now. + + They make anew, to-day, a firm agreement of union in friendship + with the Queen of Spain Isabel II, Constitutional Queen of All + Spain, and all her honorable officers, to reaffirm the previous + agreement of 1836, as also the agreement of last year made with + the governor of Zamboanga, in the month of August, which fully + affirmed the "Kunkista" [214] of Sulu which was effected on the + 28th of February, this year, by Señor the excellent Don Antonio + Urbiztondo, Marquis of Solana, Governor and great Captain of the + Philippine Archipelago. + + Article II. The Sultan and Datus promise with firm intention and + brotherhood not to revoke their agreement to the occupation of + Sulu and its dependencies, regarding them as dependencies of Spain. + + Article III. Sulu and her dependencies alike use the Spanish flag; + the people of Sulu and her dependencies are one with the people + of Spain, and ally themselves to the Philippine Islands. + + It shall not be right for the Sultan and the Datus to make treaties + with Malay datus or any nation other than Spain, whether that + nation is Spain's ally or not. Should such treaties be made they + would be null. So also they can not make any contracts with any + persons other than Spaniards, nor any agreement contrary to the + previous ones. Such agreements, if made, will not be binding + because Spain is in all the islands of Sulu as she is in her + Philippine Islands, and Sulu has previous friendship treaties + with Spain. + + Article IV. New promise: Pirates shall not be allowed at all + here in Sulu. Should they commit any crime they shall be punished + wherever they may be. + + Article V. The subordinate rulers, and all boats, from this day + on, shall use the Spanish flag, but the Sultan and the Datus can + use a war flag like the Spanish officials. They will not use any + other flag. + + Article VI. The Island of Sulu and all its dependencies large + and small, being the same as the Philippine Islands in that they + belong to Spain, all Spanish officers and all ships flying the + Spanish flag may navigate through the Sulu Archipelago without + any objection. + + Article VII. It is recognized by the Sultan and the Datus that + the King of Spain is powerful these days and is just and merciful + in acquiring "Kunkista," and that it is not right to build forts + without informing the Spanish Government nor to buy arms without + having also informed the Spanish Government, nor to have boats + carry any arms except the kris and the spear, for other arms are + signs of enmity. + + Article VIII. The Spanish Government, wishing to promote fellowship + with the people of Sulu, gives the sultan and the datus titulu + (titles) to increase their respect and honor. + + Article IX. The Spanish Government assures the Sultan and all + the people that it will let their religion alone, and that it + will not try to change their religion, nor object to the free + exercise of their worship and the customs of their race. + + Article X. The Spanish Government does also promise the people and + the Sultan that it will not break its word. It also promises to + recognize the ranks of the Sultan and the Datus, and also those + of subordinate rulers and the people. + + Article XI. Sulu boats and goods may go to Spanish countries + without any objection, in the same manner as if they belonged to + that country. + + Article XII. All ships that come to Sulu, except those of Spain, + pay duties as previously, in order that the Sultan and the Datus + may get a share of the income of their towns, and may adopt + measures which will improve and benefit the town. + + Article XIII. If the power of the Sultan is well established and + sustained, he may be able to secure other profits besides this, + by helping the Spanish Government, in accordance with Article 3 + of the treaty of 1836, providing for the building of a trading + post which would be guarded by Spain. It will be proper for the + Sultan and the Datus to help in the erection of this trading post, + and all labor and lumber shall be paid for according to the custom + of the place. + + Article XIV. This trading post shall be built near the site of + the fort of Amil Bahar. [215] It shall not encroach upon nor + cause any injury to the cemetery of the Mohammedans, but out of + due respect to their religion no house shall be erected there, + and in case any be erected it shall be destroyed. + + Article XV. The Sultan of Sulu has the right to give passports + to all of his people who request it, sign those which he issues, + and countersign Spanish passports coming to Sulu. + + Article XVI. The Spanish Government, forgiving the previous + offenses of the Sultan, and in consideration of the destruction by + fire of his palace and his fort, grants the Sultan a yearly sum + of P1,500 as a help and an indemnity for his losses. The Spanish + Government also grants to each of the Datus Mohammed Buyuk, Muluk, + and Amil Bahar, P600 a year, and to Tuan Sharif Mohammed Binsarin + P360 on account of his good services to Spain. + + Article XVII. The articles of this treaty shall take effect + to-day. They shall be shown to the Captain-General of the + Philippine Islands lest he would not agree to them. They are also + in Spanish. + + +This treaty gained its purpose in that it checkmated the agreement +of Sir James Brooke, but it certainly did not receive as much +consideration at Jolo and Zamboanga as it did at Madrid and London. Its +effect was temporary only. As early as 1854 a town on Kapul was burned +by the Spanish forces from Basilan. In 1855 the Sulus made a dash upon +Zamboanga and burned the best part of the town. The "Light Fleet" +issued from Isabela de Basilan in 1857, surprised Simisa, rescued +76 captives, and took 116 prisoners. The chiefs against whom the +expedition was directed presented themselves later to the governor of +Zamboanga and exchanged the Moro prisoners for 60 Christian captives, +1 priest, and 1 European woman. Many pirates continued to scour the +remote parts of the Archipelago. In 1858 Governor-General Norzagaray +published a proclamation calling the attention of chiefs of provinces +and municipalities to the approach of the season at which the pirates +appear, and invoking their aid to caution the people and to take proper +measures for the defense of their towns. Rewards were also offered for +catching or killing pirates and for seizing their boats wherever found, +but this had no important effect. In 1860 about 400 Moros raided the +Straits of San Bernardino and plundered several settlements. + +The year 1861 marks a new era in the history of piracy and a new +step in the organization of government for Mindanao and Basilan. At +this time Spain and the Philippines were passing through a period of +progress. Alive to the truth that commerce and piracy can not coexist, +the government provided a competent naval force by which it was able +to maintain unquestionable supremacy in the Sulu Sea. It purchased +eighteen steam vessels in England and used them for chasing Moro +pirates and for blockading the port of Jolo. The operations conducted +by these vessels drove away hordes of pirates from Philippine waters, +and, in the course of a decade, terminated that long term of piracy +under which the Islands had suffered for three centuries. + + + +POLITICO-MILITARY GOVERNMENT OF MINDANAO AND ADJACENT ISLANDS + +Affairs in Mindanao had progressed so satisfactorily that Pollok, +Kotabato, and Davao were occupied by permanent garrisons, and peace +and tranquillity reigned over the Celebes Sea. A politico-military +government was then established for all the pacified territory +of Mindanao and Basilan, and was designated as the Government +of Mindanao. It comprised six districts, the first five of which +belonged entirely to the Island of Mindanao. The sixth was called the +district of Basilan and was defined as "comprising Basilan and the +Spanish possessions in the Archipelago of Sulu." Sulu was not brought +under this organization until 1878, when an additional district was +created for this purpose. The form of this government and its chief +characteristics are best described in the words of the royal order +creating it, which is herein given in full because of many points +of interest which are contained in the text and form of the decree, +and which can not be well illustrated otherwise: + + + Superior Civil Government + + Office of the Deputy Superintendent of the Philippine Treasury + + CIRCULAR + + The Minister of War and Colonies communicated to this Superior + Civil Government, on the 31st of July of last year, the following + Royal order: + + Your Excellency: The Queen (whom God protect) has been pleased + to issue the following Royal decree: Pursuant to the reasons laid + before me by the Minister of War and Colonies, and in accordance + with the opinion of the Council of Ministers, I hereby decree + the following: + + Article I. A politico-military Government is hereby established + for the island of Mindanao and adjacent islands. + + Article II. The Government of Mindanao shall be divided into six + districts: 1. the Zamboanga District, formed of that part of the + province of the same name which includes all of Sibugay Bay, + and the west coast of the island as far as Murciélagos Point; + 2. the District of the North, including, in the northern part of + the island, all the territory between the boundary line of the 1st + District and Dapitan Point, on Tutwan Bay; 3. the Eastern District, + between Dapitan Point, and Karaga Bay; 4. the Davao District, + beginning on the boundary line of the 3d District and including + the Bay of Davao and all the southern extremity of the island; + 5. the Central District, including Illana Bay, situated between the + 1st and 4th districts; 6. the District of Basilan, comprising the + Spanish possessions in the Archipelagoes of Sulu and Basilan. The + capital of the Government shall be in the Central District, + the most advantageous place at the mouth of the Mindanao River + being chosen. These districts shall be divided into two classes; + to the first class shall belong the Northern, Central and Eastern + districts, and to the second those of Zamboanga, Davao and Basilan. + + Article III. The Governor of Mindanao shall receive 6,000 pesos + as salary, and 2,000 pesos as entertainment fund. The latter + shall be supplied from the revenues from Government real estate + and licenses. The Governor's residence shall also be supplied by + the State. + + Article IV. This Governorship shall correspond to the class of + brigadier generals; but the first Governor appointed may be a + colonel, who will be entitled, as a reward, to an appointment as + brigadier general after three years. + + Article V. The Governor of Mindanao shall be succeeded in + his command by the officer of the highest rank in the island, + pending the appointment of another Governor, or such action + as the Captain General may deem advisable. In the districts, + the Governor shall be succeeded by the officer next in rank, + until the Governor of Mindanao appoints an Acting Governor and + requests the Captain General to take such action as may be called + for by the regulations in force. + + Article VI. The duties and powers of the Captain General in + regard to the Government of Mindanao, and those of the Governor of + the island, shall be the same as those provided for the Bisayas + in my Royal decree of this date. As military authorities, they + shall observe the usual relations between Captains General and + Commanders General of Provinces. The Governor of Mindanao shall + forward each month to the Captain General of the Philippines a + tabulated record of the resolutions taken by him in the exercise + of his authority, so that the latter may be able to exercise with + efficiency the general supervision to which he is entitled. The + Captain General shall forward to the Supreme Government, through + the proper channels, both this tabulated record, and a statement + of the action he has taken in the premises. + + Article VII. The districts of the first class shall be governed by + lieutenant-colonels and those of the second class by senior majors. + + Article VIII. The duties of these district governors shall be + those specified, up to the present time, for the politico-military + Governors of the island. + + Article IX. The Governor of Mindanao shall have a Secretariate + with the following personnel: a Secretary at 2,500 pesos per year; + one clerk, class one, at 1,200; one clerk, class two, at 1,000, + and one clerk, class three, at 800. 1,000 pesos are furthermore + provided for the salaries of copyists, and 500 for office supplies. + + Article X. There is hereby created for Mindanao a Revenue Office + which shall serve as depositary of the revenues, and shall have + charge of collecting all taxes, and of the administration of the + Army. It shall have the following personnel: an Administrator at + 2,500 pesos; a Controller at 2,000; one clerk, class one, at 1,000; + two clerks, class two, at 800, and a cashier at 800. 1,500 pesos + are provided for the salaries of copyists and other auxiliary + employees, and 600 for office supplies. + + Article XI. The chiefs of districts shall remain in charge of + the collection of taxes in the manner hitherto established, and + shall be entitled to the allowances provided for that purpose. The + provisions of this article shall not interfere with those already + made for the departments of the administration which exist at + the present time in Mindanao and their dependencies. + + Article XII. For expediting their official business the district + governors shall have a secretary at a salary of 800 pesos in + districts of the first class, and 600 in those of the second + class. To each secretary's office 75 pesos are assigned for office + supplies, and 150 for a copyist. + + Article XIII. The mission of the Jesuits, which has already been + sent to Mindanao, shall look after the spiritual wants of the + island, and Jesuits shall take the place of the other priests as + soon as the mission has a sufficient personnel, and in the manner + which may be deemed most convenient. + + Article XIV. The first and principal object of the mission shall + be to secure the conversion of the races which have not yet been + subjected, and even after the parishes of the island are provided + for it shall maintain a sufficient number of missionaries for + that purpose; each missionary shall be aided to the extent of + 800 pesos a year from the Royal Treasury. + + Article XV. The War and Navy Departments, together with the + Colonial Office, shall decide what forces of the army and navy are + required for Mindanao; the Captain-General shall have authority + to make such changes as the circumstances may require, but he + shall always report such changes to the respective Ministers + for approval. + + Article XVI. The Governor can use the naval forces whenever he + finds it necessary, with the assent of the commanding officer + thereof. + + Article XVII. It shall be the constant duty of the army to explore + and to occupy the country; for that purpose, two columns at least + shall be detached each year from each district, and go through + said districts in different directions. The chiefs of these columns + shall make out a report about the territory reconnoitered by them; + said reports shall be included in a general report made by the + Governor, which shall be forwarded to the Department of War and + Colonies through the Captain-General of the Philippines; this + information will allow the Governor to give, in the following + years his instructions to the columns sent out to explore the + country, without losing sight of the advantage of establishing + friendly relations with the tribes which inhabit the island, and + the necessity of maintaining communication between the different + districts. These columns shall be provided with everything that may + be required to overcome the obstacles they will find on their way; + and during the expedition, officers and soldiers shall receive + field rations, issued in kind, according to the advice of the + Military Health Department. For this purpose 10,000 pesos shall + be carried on the budget for the first year, and 100 pesos shall + be given for each expedition to the officer commanding a column, + for extraordinary expenses. + + Article XVIII. Two special agents shall be appointed by the + government for the purpose of studying means of developing all + the natural resources of the island of Mindanao. + + Article XIX. In order to encourage colonists to settle in such + parts of the island as may be deemed best, they will be furnished, + at their request, the tools and implements required for their + work or trade. The Governor is furthermore authorized to pay + the traveling expenses of colonists who may wish to settle in + the island without exceeding the sum hereinafter provided, the + expenditure of which shall be duly accounted for. The new settlers + shall be entitled to the foregoing privileges for ten years, + and 12,000 pesos shall be appropriated for that purpose during + the first year, from the revenues accruing from government real + estate and licenses. The new settlers shall be exempt from tribute; + the same favor shall be granted all tribes that submit peacefully. + + Article XX. The laws and regulations in force in the other islands + of the Philippines shall be observed in all the offices of the + Treasury Department. The prohibitions mentioned in the tariff + shall apply to the custom house of Zamboanga; articles imported + into the island in Spanish bottoms, and for local consumption, + shall pay, during the next ten years, 2 per cent ad valorem, if + of Spanish origin and 5 per cent if of foreign origin. If brought + under a foreign flag said articles shall pay double the amounts + specified above. If, after importing an article for use in the + island, it is reëxported to some other Spanish island, it shall + pay, on arrival at the latter the difference between what has been + paid in Mindanao and the regular duty established in the tariff. + + Article XXI. Lands now under cultivation, and those placed under + cultivation during the next ten years, shall pay no other impost + than that required by the regulations now in force, per quiñon + of land, as an acknowledgment of ownership. [216] + + Article XXII. The Government shall always have on hand a reserve + fund of 10,000 pesos to meet any urgent and unexpected need + that may arise; in such cases only, the Governor shall assume + the responsibility of using this sum, or part of the same, and + shall account for the expenditure, in the usual manner. + + Article XXIII. A sum of 3,000 pesos per year is placed at the + disposal of the Governor for presents to the independent tribes, + for the purpose of gaining their friendship; the same amount + is assigned to the mission of the Jesuits. These funds shall be + expended and accounted for in the best possible form. + + Article XXIV. For the expenses of installation a special estimate + shall be drawn up, and action shall be taken thereon as provided + by the laws for urgent cases. + + Article XXV. No extra pay or allowances of any kind shall be + given except such as are provided in the present decree, and the + per diems usually granted military engineers when they are sent + out on official business. + + Article XXVI. The War, Navy, and Colonies Departments shall execute + the present Decree in the parts which respectively concern them, + and shall work in common for the execution of such parts thereof + as may belong to two or more Departments. + + Article XXVII. So many of the laws and orders in force as are + inconsistent with the provisions of the present decree are hereby + repealed. + + Given at San Ildefonso on the 30th of July, 1860. + + Rubric of Her Majesty.--The Minister of War and Colonies. Leopoldo + O'Donnell.--Communicated to you by Royal order for your information + and action. + + +Sultan Pulalun was regarded by the Sulus as an able administrator +and a just ruler. His influence and fame and that of his father +endeared the house of Jamalul Kiram to the people to such an extent +as to restrict the succession of the sultanate to their direct line +of descent for a considerable period of time. Following the steps of +his father, he published a revised code of Sulu laws and conducted +the affairs of his government with care. Pulalun died September 24, +1862, and was followed by his son, Jamalul A`lam. + +The succession of Jamalul A`lam was contested by Datu Jamalul Kiram, +the grandson of Sultan Shakirul Lah. The wife of Datu Jamalul +Kiram was the daughter of Datu Daniel Amil Bahar, and the latter +was inclined to support his son-in-law. Jamalul A`lam, however, had +the majority of the council of the datus on his side, and a Spanish +commission sent to Jolo in November, confirmed his sultanate. Espina +states that at that time the sultan was living with Datu Asibi, and +that the portrait of Queen Isabel II was placed before the sultan +when he made his declaration before the commission to recognize the +authority and sovereignty of Spain over all the dominions of Sulu, +including her dependencies in Borneo. + +It is noted in the Sulu Annals, under date of February 1, 1867, that +a Spanish war vessel arrived at Jolo and demanded the punishment and +delivery of three men, one of whom was called Imam Mindang. The sultan +arrested all these men and had them executed on February 9 in the +presence of the officer in command of the vessel. It appears that in +spite of the vigilance of the Spanish navy, piratical expeditions were +kept up by discontented Moros not fully submissive to the sultan. This +led to further activity on the part of Spanish gunboats, and war was +consequently carried into Sulu waters and territory. + +Another note in the Sulu Annals, under date of March 5, 1872, states +that 13 Spanish vessels attacked Jolo, killed 3 men and 1 woman +and lost 2 officers and 100 soldiers. That same year the famous +warrior Datu Daniel Amil Bahar died; and Puerta Princesa, capital +of Palawan, was garrisoned by native troops. A naval blockade of +Jolo was established and hostilities between Sulu and Spain were +resumed. In 1873-1875 considerable damage was done by the fleet +throughout the Archipelago, and two German vessels were seized while +carrying contraband of war to the Sulus. + +In the estimation of the Sulus, Jamalul A'lam was one of their best +rulers. He carried out many public improvements, built roads and +bridges and mosques, enforced public attendance at the Friday church +services, and executed the laws with justice and force. He was as +able a ruler as any sultan Sulu had since the days of Abu Bakr, +but the vicissitudes of fortune were certainty against him. Before +his reign ended, Spain's hand fell upon him strong and heavy, his +capital was wrested from him, and his power waned. + + + + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +SULU UNDER SPANISH SOVEREIGNTY + + +OCCUPATION OF JOLO + +The Sulu sultanate remained practically independent for four hundred +and twenty-five years. Its decline was not caused by national +retrogression or political dissension, but by the hostility +and aggression of its adversary. Sulu's power arose through the +introduction of firearms into eastern Malaysia and began to decline +at the introduction of steam war vessels into the Philippine +Archipelago. The mobility and speed of steam war vessels put to +disadvantage all Moro sailing and rowing craft. Pirates were chased on +the sea and hunted in their lairs. The fear which steamboats struck in +the hearts of Moros made them run away from their homes and settlements +and hide in the jungles whenever they heard the whistle of a steamboat, +or saw it approaching from a distance. The steamboats purchased by +Governor Claveria in 1848, which crushed the power of the Balangingi +Samals, were referred to by Captain Keppel in the following words: + + + "On the 14th of January [1849] we left Zamboanga, getting under + weigh in company with such a fleet of gunboats as would have done + credit to any nation." + + +The vessels purchased in 1861 increased the efficiency of the navy to +such a degree as to make it possible to carry war into Sulu territory, +attack many remote islands and settlements and blockade the port +of Jolo so effectively as to check the importation of firearms and +ammunition, and restore a condition of safety and peace on the sea. + +The campaign of 1876 was a very significant event in the history +of Sulu. It decided the fate of this state and definitely fixed +its relation to the Philippine Archipelago. Spain's determination +to conquer Sulu never waned and seemed stronger then than ever +before. The Governor-General was a man of great ability and aspired +to the highest military honors. Moro raids recurred occasionally and +the strained relations of the two states became so tense that rupture +was inevitable. + +In reviewing the history of Spanish campaigns in Sulu up to this +time, one is strongly impressed with the futility of conquest without +occupation. To invade a Moro settlement, defeat its forces, burn its +houses, kill some of its inhabitants, and carry some away as prisoners, +is not very different in character and effect from a Moro raid. Such +methods incited the Moros to revenge themselves by waging war on their +invaders. This they did by raiding, which is their established method +of warfare. Up to this time natural advantages remained on the side of +the Sulus and Spanish forces could accomplish no permanent results, +in spite of their superior methods of warfare and excellent military +organization. + +Since the days of the great Corcuera, no Spanish general appears +to have recognized the importance of the occupation of Sulu as an +essential factor in its pacification. Their apparent inability to +comprehend the real solution of this question might have arisen from +consciousness of their inability to provide an adequate force for the +purpose. However that may have been, the honor of such an achievement +remained for Governor-General Malcampo, who carried it out with credit +to himself and to the government which he represented. With a clear +understanding of the task to be accomplished, he resolved to conquer +Sulu and occupy it, and then suppress piracy by striking the pirates at +home. He left Manila on the 5th of February, 1876, with a large force +composed of one battalion of the peninsular regiment of artillery, one +company of mountain artillery, five regiments of infantry, ordnance, +engineers, sanitary and prison detachments, and two companies of the +Guardia Civil. [217] At Zamboanga, the expedition was reinforced by +864 volunteers, 400 of whom were from Zamboanga and 464 from Kagayan +de Misamis commanded by the Augustinian friar, Ramon Zueco. + +The whole expedition, estimated at 9,000 troops, left Zamboanga on +the 20th of February. They were conveyed in 10 steamboats and 11 +transports, and were escorted by a fleet of 12 gunboats under the +admiral in command of the Philippine naval forces. The Island of +Sulu was reached on the 21st, and next morning a force disembarked +at Patikul, 4 miles east of Jolo. The Moros at this place offered +some resistance and caused some casualties, but later in the +day abandoned the place and fled. Here a considerable column was +detached to reconnoitre the interior and advance on Jolo from the land +side. This plan proved impracticable and the column suffered severely +from heat and thirst and returned next day to the beach at Tandu, 2 +miles east of Jolo. On the 29th, a general advance was made on Jolo +by land and sea. The fleet opened fire on the town, while the land +forces rushed the forts and trenches on the sides. The main force +was directed against the fort of Daniel, which was captured after a +sharp fight. The Moros in the other forts made a fiercer resistance, +but were soon overcome by the fire of the Spanish artillery and the +whole town was taken by assault. On the 30th, the fort of Panglima +Adak, situated at the base of the hills, was taken. Not content +with this brilliant victory and intent upon striking a decisive and +deadly blow, Malcampo directed various expeditions against the other +strongholds of Sulu. A force of marines and volunteers destroyed 80 +boats and burned 90 houses on Tapul. On March 16 an expedition to +Lapak destroyed its forts and reduced the settlement to ashes. On +March 22 the forts of Parang were reduced, the settlement was burned, +and many Sulus killed. On the 24th Maymbung was similarly destroyed. + +A large garrison was established at Jolo, consisting of two regiments +of infantry, one company of artillery, one company of engineers, +and two companies of disciplinarios. [218] Capt. Pascual Cervera, a +captain of frigate of the navy was given command of the garrison, under +the title of politico-military governor of Sulu. General Malcampo was +given the title of "Count of Jolo," while many decorations were awarded +to gallant officers, and a medal was struck for each participant in +the campaign. + +The step thus taken by the Philippine Government appears to have +been well planned and firmly resolved. No sooner was a footing +gained than measures were undertaken to quarter the troops and +fortify the place. Barracks were constructed on favorable spots on +the edge of the swamps, and the forts Alfonso XII and the Princess +of Asturias were erected on the site of Daniel's and Panglima Adak's +kuta, respectively. Plans were further laid out at this early time +for the building of a town and the founding of a colony. Governor +Cervera, to whom this task was first entrusted, was a vigorous, +prudent, and circumspect chief. He prosecuted the work with energy +and kept a vigilant watch on the movements of the enemy. He began +the construction of a military hospital and established the office +of captain of the port. Small expeditions were made to Bwan, Mapaid, +Balimbing, and South Ubian for the chastisement of pirates who took +refuge there. The kuta of the first three of these settlements were +destroyed and their armaments were taken. This year saw considerable +sickness in the garrison of Jolo; a large number of patients were +removed to Zamboanga and 318 to Cebu. + +On October 1, Governor Cervera was temporarily relieved as governor +of Sulu by Col. Eduardo Fernandez Bremon, and on December 31, 1876, +Brig. Gen. José Paulin assumed permanent command of the garrison +as the second governor of Sulu. The latter continued the peace +negotiations which were commenced by Governor Cervera and expended +a good deal of energy in trying to conciliate some datus and their +followers. His measures were, however, resented by the Sulus and +hostilities increased. He left Jolo April 30, 1877, and the command +was temporarily held by Lieut. Lopez Nuño and José Marina, for three +months and one month and a half, respectively. + + + +RULE OF SULTAN JAMALUL A'LAM + +After the fall of Jolo and its destruction by General Malcampo, +Sultan Jamalul A'lam removed to Bud Datu and later to Likup. The datus +dispersed in all directions, but Datus Asibi and Pula, the strongest +chiefs after the sultan, remained in the neighborhood of Jolo, at +Tandu and Patikul. The Sulus were united at that time and formed one +party, which was faithful and loyal to the sultan. They regarded the +establishment of a Spanish garrison at Jolo as an intrusion upon their +soil and an intolerable humiliation and offense. The common people +resented the invasion as bitterly as the datus. A few years before +they regarded themselves the lords of the southern seas. The Bisayan +and the Kalamian Islands, Paláwan, and eastern Borneo were their +hunting grounds. They sailed proudly on the seas and had the dignity of +masters of innumerable vassals and slaves. But now like fierce tigers +driven back to their dens or packs of hungry wolves chased to their +haunts, they waited for no word of command or organized resistance, +but hurled themselves recklessly at the Spanish soldiers wherever +they encountered them. Individuals and small parties lost no chance of +firing a rifle from behind the bushes or throwing a lance from across +the ditches. Venders in the market who saw a chance to strike a blow at +the soldiers, could not resist the temptation, but recklessly darted +at the enemy with a kris or barong [219] brandished in hand. A vender +from Lu'uk who did not have a barong of his own snatched one from a +neighbor and rushed at the guard. The soldiers were attacked in the +forest while cutting lumber or firewood, at the river while getting +drinking water and at the beach while bathing. Juramentados [220] +crept on the sentinels in the dark and from ditches and the beach +and inflicted considerable loss and damage. Some desperate characters +entered the trenches and fought the soldiers on guard, while others +slipped into the barracks and caught soldiers and officers off their +guard and threw torches on the roofs of the warehouses. + +Jamalul A'lam discouraged all overtures for peace, and for more +than two years could not be reconciled to the new conditions and +political status. Early in 1877 he encouraged hostilities of all +sorts. Juramentados and small attacking parties harassed the garrison +frequently. On the 25th of February a force of more than 2,000 Sulus +advanced against the garrison, but were easily repulsed. Small +parties surprised pickets and attacked laborers. On the 9th of +September about 800 Sulus charged the town from the land side and +from the sea and 300 attacked Fort Asturias. They were repulsed in +the afternoon, but resumed the attack at night and retreated with +great loss. Another general fight occurred on the 11th, but the Moros +were again overpowered and driven back. Undaunted by these failures, +the Sultan called a council of the datus and planned for another +attack in the future. The juramentados became more treacherous and +intrepid. They hid their barongs inside their trousers and in bundles +they pretended to be taking to the market and attacked the guard +unawares and after admission into the plaza. This state of affairs +continued until June, 1878. + + + +CESSION OF POSSESSIONS IN BORNEO TO BRITISH NORTH BORNEO COMPANY + +In January, 1878, Sultan Jamalul A`lam ceded the Sulu possessions +in Borneo to the Sabah or British North Borneo Company. He granted +the authorized representative of this company, Baron von Overbeck, +absolute ownership and dominion over that large territory for a +money consideration of $5,000, Mexican currency, per annum. The +Sabah Company was preceded in 1865 by an American company started +by Mr. Torrey on the Kimanis River. The concessions of the American +company were obtained from the Sultan of Bruney; but this enterprise +proved a financial failure and its rights were bought by the Austrian +Baron von Overbeck and the English merchant Mr. Alfred Dent. + +"In spite of the opposition of Spain, which claimed that the Sultan of +Sulu being a Spanish vassal could not dispose of his territory without +her consent, the English company organized by Mr. Dent succeeded in +obtaining a charter of incorporation under Act of Parliament, 1st +November, 1881, as the 'British North Borneo Company' with right to +acquire other interests in, over, or affecting the territories or +property comprised in the several grants." Baron von Overbeck and +Mr. Dent obtained from the Sultans of Bruney and Sulu a series of +charters conferring on them sovereign authority in North Borneo under +the titles of Maharaja of Sabah, Raja of Gaya, Raja of Sandakan, and +Datu Bandahara. The territory governed by the British North Borneo +Company has a coast line of over 600 miles and an area of more than +30,000 square miles. The form and text of the commission granted by +Sultan Jamalul A`lam appointing Baron von Overbeck Datu Bandahara and +Raja of Sandakan is herein quoted as given in the annual report of +Gen. George W. Davis, commanding the Department of Mindanao, under +date of August 1, 1902: + + + "To all nations on the face of the earth whom these matters may + concern: We, Mahasari Padukka Mawlana as-Sultan Mohammed Jamalul + A`lam bin al-Marhum Mahasari Padukka as-Sultan Mohammed Pulalun, + Sultan of Sulu and its dependencies, send greeting: + + +"Whereas, we have seen fit to grant unto our trusty and well-beloved +friends, Gustavus Baron von Overbeck and Alfred Dent, esquire, +certain portions of the dominions owned by us, comprising all the +lands on the north and east coast of the Island of Borneo, from the +Pandasan River on the northwest to the Sibuco River on the east coast, +including amongst others the states of Paitan, Sugut, Bangaya, Labuk, +Sandakan, Kina Batangan, and Mumiang and all the lands and territories +in Darvel Bay as far as the Sibuco River, together with all the lands +belonging thereto, for certain considerations between us agreed, and, + +"Whereas, the said Baron von Overbeck is the chief and only authorized +representative of his company in Borneo: + +"Now, therefore, know ye that we, Mahasari Padukka Mawlana as-Sultan +Mohammed Jamalul A`lam bin al-Marhum Mahasari Padukka as-Sultan +Pulalun, Sultan of Sulu and its dependencies, have nominated and +appointed and do hereby nominate and appoint the said Baron von +Overbeck supreme and independent ruler of the above-named territories, +with the title of Datu Bandahara and Raja of Sandakan, with absolute +power over life and death of the inhabitants of the country, with all +the absolute rights of property over the soil of the country vested +in us and the right to dispose of the same as well as the rights +over the productions of the country, whether mineral, vegetable, +or animal, with the rights of making laws, coining money, creating +an army and navy, levying customs dues on home and foreign trade, +and shipping and other dues and taxes on the inhabitants as to him +may seem good or expedient, together with all other powers and rights +usually exercised by and belonging to sovereign rulers, and which we +hereby delegate to him of our own free and sovereign will. + +"And we call upon all foreign nations with whom we have formed friendly +treaties or alliances, and we command all the datus, nobles, governors, +chiefs, and people owing allegiance to us in the said territories +to receive and acknowledge the said Datu Bandahara as the supreme +ruler over the said states and to obey his commands and respect his +authority therein as our own. And in case of the death or retirement +from office of the said Datu Bandahara then his duly appointed +successor in the office of supreme ruler and governor-in-chief of the +company's territories in Borneo shall likewise, if appointed thereto +by the company, succeed to the title of Datu Bandahara and Raja of +Sandakan, and all the powers enumerated above be vested in him. + +"Done at the palace of the Sultan, at Likup, in the Island of Sulu, on +the nineteenth of Muharam, A. H. 1295, being the 22nd day of January, +A. D. 1878." + + + +TREATY OF JULY, 1878 + +Col. Carlos Martinez became Governor of Sulu on the 28th of September, +1877. This distinguished commander applied himself to his work with +unusual enthusiasm and assiduity, and by tact and sagacity succeeded in +restoring order and peace, in the form of a treaty signed by him and +by Sultan Jamalul A`lam in July, 1878. Great credit for the success +of the negotiations belongs to Datu Harun ar-Rashid, who spared no +effort to convince the Sultan that peace and loyalty to Spain were +preferable to a condition of continued hostility, which meant ruin +to the state of Sulu. The treaty laid stress on the submission of +Sulu to Spanish sovereignty, and the terms of the Sulu text expressed +the same fairly well and without evasion. This being the last treaty +entered into by both states, it may be considered to define the final +relation that existed between them and the exact position which Sulu +occupied in the Philippine Archipelago during the last period of the +Spanish régime. The best account of this relation is given in the +words of the treaty itself, careful translations of which have been +prepared from both the Spanish and Sulu texts and are herein added +for full information: + + + +TRANSLATION OF THE SPANISH COPY OF THE TREATY + + Decree + + Office of the Governor-General of the Philippines, + + Manila, August 19, 1878. + + The Supreme Government having approved the bases of pacification + and capitulation which are submitted through me to his Majesty, + the King, by the Sultan of Sulu and the Datus of Sulu, and the act + to that effect, which I confirmed and ratified on the 15th instant, + having been drafted and signed by the commission appointed for that + purpose by me in representation of my authority, and the Sultan and + Datus, in representation of the sultanate of Sulu, I hereby direct + that a copy of said act be published in the Official Gazette of + Manila, in order that said bases be officially and publicly known. + + + Moriones. + + +[Copy referred to.] + + + An Act drafted on the bases of pacification and capitulation + presented by the Sultan of Sulu and the Datus to His Majesty the + King Alfonso XII, through His Excellency the Governor-General of + the Philippine Islands, acknowledging the sovereignty of Spain + over the territory of this sultanate. + + +In the town of Likup, Sulu, and in the palace of His Excellency the +Sultan of this Archipelago, on the 20th of July 1878, 23rd day of +the month Rajab, year of the Hegira 1295: + +Present: Carlos Martinez y Romero, Colonel of Infantry and +Politico-Military Governor of Jolo, Francisco Fernandez de Alarcon y +García, Colonel of Marine Corps, Frigate Captain and Commander of the +Naval Station of Jolo, and interpreters, Alejo Alvarez y Villasis and +Pedro Ortuoste y García, these constituting a commission representing +His Excellency, the Governor-General of the Philippines: + +Also present: Padukka Mahasari Mawlana, Sultan Mohammed Jamalul A`lam +and the Datus Padukka Raja Muda, Mohammed Badarud Din, the Padukka +Mohammed Zaynul `Abidin Raja Lawut, the Padukka Datu Mohammed Harun +ar-Rashid and the Datu Padukka Muluk Bandarasa, in the name and +representation of the Sultanate of Sulu; + +The object of the meeting was to read and sign the articles of +pacification and capitulation presented by the Sultan and Datus to +the Governor-General on February 24th, of this year, and approved by +His Majesty Alfonso XII, on May 3rd last; the reading of the articles +being proceeded with as follows: Bases of pacification and capitulation +presented by the Sultan and Datus of Sulu, to his Majesty the King of +Spain Don Alfonso XII, through His Excellency the Governor-General of +the Philippines, acknowledging the sovereignty of the King of Spain +over the territory of the said sultanate. + +Article 1. We declare that the sovereignty to Spain over all the +Archipelago of Sulu and its dependencies is indisputable, and as a +natural consequence of this declaration we constitute ourselves loyal +subjects of His Majesty King Alfonso XII, and of his successors to +the power. + +Article 2. The Spanish Government shall give the Sultan a yearly salary +of 2,400 pesos, 700 to the heir of the sultanate Datu Badarud-Din +and 600 to each of the Datus Padukka Raja Lawut Zaynul `Abidin, +Padukka Datu Harun ar-Rashid, Padukka Datu Muluk Bandarasa Pula, +members of the Sultan's Council, to compensate them in some way for +the losses they have suffered. + +Article 3. Spain has the right to occupy such points in the Sulu +Archipelago and its dependencies as may seem necessary to the Spanish +authorities, respecting towns, families and property; in case of +forcible appropriation for the public good, compensation shall be +paid according to appraisement; we beg that exception be made for the +land extending from Sinungan Point to the south coast of Kadungdung, +which we would use for our residences; it could be occupied by the +Government in case of war with a foreign power. + +Article 4. The Sultan shall be empowered to collect duties from foreign +merchants and ships trading with places not occupied by the Government. + +Article 5. The Sultan shall be allowed to communicate directly with +the Governor-General whenever he has a complaint to make against the +Governor, or the commander of war ships. + +Article 6. The Sultan shall be authorized to issue licenses to carry +muzzle-loading firearms when requested by Sulus, after presenting +two honorably known witnesses who will guarantee their proper use +both on land and sea. + +Article 7. The Sultan shall be allowed to issue passports to Sulu +craft; but when any of said craft has to leave the Sulu Archipelago, +the owners will first have to go before the Governor; the principal +datus and some other persons serving under commissions from the Sultan +are to be excepted from this formality; but the Sultan shall report +all such cases to the Governor. + +Article 8. We will use all our efforts to cause pirates and malefactors +to desist from their evil inclinations; and, if we can not prevent +them, we will inform the Governor of Jolo for him to take the +necessary measures, whenever we know the whereabouts of said pirates +and malefactors; but we will not be held responsible if we have +no information concerning them; we furthermore agree to render all +assistance in our power in running down such pirates and malefactors. + +Article 9. We shall be allowed the free exercise of our religion and +customs. Catholic missionaries will have liberty to visit and reside +in any place in Sulu, and its dependencies, and will give us notice +before going, so that in case of danger we may furnish an escort; +failure to give us notice will relieve us from all responsibility +for any mishap that may befall them. The same caution applies to any +European or Christian Indian native who may wish to visit the interior. + +Article 10. We pledge ourselves to deliver to the Spaniards all +Christian delinquents and criminals, and all Moros in the same case +shall be returned to us. + +Article 11. Sulu and its dependencies shall raise the Spanish flag +on vessels and in towns; however, if a boat does not fly said flag +it shall not be held at fault if it has a passport; at the place of +the Sultan's residence he shall fly the Spanish war flag. + +Article 12. All the articles of the foregoing capitulation shall be +observed without alteration, except by mutual agreement. + +Both commissions unanimously agreeing to the foregoing articles as +read, said articles being identical with those whose copies were in +the hands of the Governor and of the Sultan of Sulu, the latter and +the persons with them signed this document on the spot, place, day, +month and year aforesaid. + +The Sultan of Sulu,--His rubric and stamp,--the Governor of Sulu, +Carlos Martinez,--Mohammed Harun ar-Rashid,--the Commander of the +Naval Station, Francisco Fernandez de Alarcon y García,--Mohammed +Zaynul `Abidin,--Mohammed Badarud Din,--Mohammed Pula,--interpreters, +Alejo Alvarez, Pedro Ortuoste. + +I, Don Domingo Moriones y Murillo, Lieutenant-General of the National +Army, Marquis de Oroquieta, Knight Grand Cross of the Royal and +Military Order of San Hermenegildo, of the Royal and Distinguished +Order of Carlos III, of that of Military Merit, Red and White, and +many others for feats of arms, Governor and Captain-General of the +Philippine Islands, etc., etc., in the name of His Majesty the King +of Spain, Alfonso XII, whom God keep, do confirm and ratify the above +act of pacification and capitulation, in all its parts. + +Manila, August 15, 1878.--Domingo Moriones.--True copy.--Tomas Aguirre +de Mena. + + + +TRANSLATION OF THE SULU TEXT OF THE TREATY OF 1878 + + This document is intended to confirm the treaty which was agreed + upon by Padukka Mahasari Mawlana Sultan Mohammed Jamalul A`lam + and all the datus and chiefs of Sulu. These statements which + we make shall be sent to His Majesty, the King of Spain, Don + Alfonso XII, through His Excellency the Governor-General of the + Philippines. All the country that the Sultan rules shall obey + the orders of the King of Spain. + + This in Likup, in the palace of Padukka Mahasari Mawlana Sultan + Mohammed Jamalul A`lam, on Monday the 22nd of July, 1878 A. D., + or the 23rd of Rajab, 1295 A. H. + + There met the Politico-Military Governor of Sulu, Señor Don Carlos + Martinez y Romero, Colonel of Infantry; and the Commander of the + Naval Station of Sulu, Colonel of Marine Infantry and Frigate + Captain, Señor Don Francisco Fernandez de Alarcon y García and + Señor Captain Alejo Alvarez, and Señor Don Pedro Ortuoste y García, + the representatives of His Excellency the Governor-General of + the Philippines. + + Also present: Padukka Mahasari Mawlana Sultan Mohammed Jamalul + A`lam of Sulu, and Padukka Datu Mohammed Badarud Din, and Padukka + Datu Raja Lawut Mohammed Zaynul `Abidin, and Padukka Datu Muluk + Bandarasa Mohammed Pula, and Padukka Datu Mohammed Harun ar-Rashid + who are properly obeyed by all their subjects. + + The object of the meeting was to read, confirm, and sign + the agreement presented by Padukka Mahasari Mawlana Sultan + Mohammed Jamalul A`lam and all the datus, to His Excellency the + Governor-General, on the 22nd day of Safar, 1295 A. H., or the + 24th of February, 1878 A. D., which was approved by His Majesty + the King of Spain, Alfonso XII, on the 3rd day of May, of this + year, or the 2nd of Jamadil-Awal. + + The following is the copy of the statements that were read: + + This is the treaty of Spain with the Sultan and Datus of Sulu + which was sent to His Majesty the King of Spain, Don Alfonso XII, + through His Excellency the Governor-General of the Philippines. + + Article I. All the people of Sulu and its Archipelago shall obey + only the King of Spain, Alfonso XII, or whosoever shall succeed + him. This being our wish, we will not change or turn away to any + other nation. + + Article II. The Spanish Government shall pay the Sultan an annual + salary of 2,400 pesos, Mexican currency, and Padukka Datu Raja + Muda Mohammed Badarud Din 700 pesos. It shall also pay 600 pesos + to each of the three following datus, namely: Padukka Datu Raja + Lawut Mohammed Zaynul `Abidin, Padukka Datu Muluk Bandarasa + Mohammed Pula, and Padukka Datu Mohammed Harun ar-Rashid; this + is to compensate them for the losses they suffered. + + Article III. The Spanish Government may occupy any place it chooses + along the northern coast of the island, from Sinungan to Bwal and + as far as Kadungdung, but the southern coast of the island from + Kadungdung to Sinungan shall be left for the Sultan; on condition, + however, that it may be occupied by the Spanish Government in + case of trouble with foreigners, at any future time. In case + the plantations or fields of the people are appropriated for + such occupation, they shall be compensated for. Houses, however, + shall not be removed. + + Article IV. The Sultan shall have the right to collect duties + from all foreign merchants and ships of whatever nationality they + may be, in case they come to our ports; but we have no right to + collect duties from them when they come to ports occupied by the + Spanish Government. + + Article V. In case of disagreement between us and the governor + of Sulu, or the commanders of war ships, the Sultan shall have + the right to communicate with the Captain-General direct. + + Article VI. All the people of Sulu can, if they choose, use + muzzle-loading rifles and lantaka. [221] They will, however, be + required to present a certificate from two or three free people, of + good reputation, to the effect that they (who use the firearms) are + good and well-behaving people and that they do not use such arms + for mischief. Under such conditions the Sultan may give a license. + + Article VII. The Sultan has the right to give passports to Sulus + wishing to travel for commercial purposes to whatever place they + may go, on condition that they pass by Jolo to inform the Spanish + governor of their destination. In case those of noble birth or + the datus do not stop at Jolo, the Sultan himself shall inform the + Governor, for they, as a rule, have the former's consent to travel. + + Article VIII. We will try to suppress all pirates; but in case + we are unable to do so we will notify the Governor of their + location. But in case we do not know where they are, we can not + be held responsible for such information. We will also aid the + Government with as many men as we can afford to bring together, + and we shall be pleased to give guides who can tell the hiding + places of such pirates. + + Article IX. Our customs and usages, including our religion, shall + not be changed. If there is any priest who desires to travel around + in this country, he ought to inform the Sultan, so that he may send + a companion with him; but in case he fails to ask permission and + travels around without obeying this rule and is killed, the Sultan + can not be held responsible for such results. The same condition + shall govern in the case of all Spaniards and soldiers or any + one else who may desire to live outside of the places agreed upon. + + Article X. We guarantee to deliver all Christians who run away on + account of crime; so also must the Spaniards treat us Mohammedans + in case our servants and people run away to them. It would not + be right for the Spaniards to hold or protect them. + + Article XI. The Sulus and all the Sultan's subjects have the right + to trade in small or large boats whether they use flags or not; + this on condition that they have passes; but in case they like to + use a flag they must use the Spanish flag. The Sultan shall not + use a flag of his own, but that of the King of Spain. All other + datus and chiefs of the islands, whenever they use any flag, + must use the Spanish commercial flag. + + Article XII. The Spaniards and the Sultan shall fully observe + the articles of this agreement which has to be ratified by the + Spanish Government. We sincerely beg that, whenever there is any + disagreement between us and the Spanish Governor concerning some + crime, careful and proper investigation be made, without any + undue haste to fight. We have full trust and confidence in the + Spanish Government and expect that the Spanish Government will + have similar trust in us. + + Article XIII. It shall not be right to alter the articles of this + agreement without the mutual consent of both parties. + + Both parties having understood all the articles of this treaty + do hereby confirm it all and certify to it. Said articles being + identical with those which were presented by Padukka Mahasari + Mawlana Sultan Mohammed Jamalul A'lam, signed by us in the palace + in Likup, on the day mentioned above in this document. + + I, Don Domingo Moriones y Murillo, Lieutenant-General of the + National Army, Marquis de Oroquieta, Knight Grand Cross of the + Royal and Military Order of San Hermenegildo, of the Royal and + Distinguished Order of Carlos III, of that of Military Merit, + Red and White, and many others for feats of arms, Governor and + Captain-General of the Philippine Islands, etc., etc., in the name + of His Majesty the King of Spain, Alfonso XII, whom God keep, do + confirm and ratify the above act of pacification and capitulation, + in all its parts. + + + Manila, August 15, 1878 A. D. + + (18, Sha'ban, 1295 A. H.) + + +The status of Sulu as defined by this treaty resembled that of a +protectorate rather than a dependency. The internal administration +of Sulu, its customs, laws, and religion were fully respected and +were not subject to Spanish jurisdiction, confirmation, approval, or +interference of any sort, except in matters pertaining to regulations +for the use of firearms. + +The foreign political relations of Sulu were made subject to the +full control of the Philippine Government. This control (or sovereign +right) was the chief motive for the war and was declared by the treaty +indisputable. On the strength of this both England and Germany, in +1885, concluded a treaty with Spain recognizing her full sovereignty +over the whole Sulu Archipelago, including Balabak and Kagayan +Sulu. In that same treaty Spain relinquished all claims to that +part of northeastern Borneo formerly ruled by the Sultans of Sulu; +this being the territory administered by the British North Borneo +Company. The commercial relations of Sulu with foreign countries +were not submitted to Spanish supervision or control outside of the +territory occupied by the garrisons, and the sultan was empowered to +collect duties from foreign merchants and ships trading with Maymbung, +Siasi, and other places not occupied by the Philippine Government. + +The treaty on the whole secured for Spain the fruits of her conquest +and established a stable condition of peace and safety throughout +the whole Archipelago and in the neighboring southern seas. Foreign +interference ceased, commerce revived, and trading routes were resumed +without danger or risk. + +Governor Martinez had a brilliant term of service marked by important +results and excellent public improvements. He began the titanic +labor of filling the swamps and brought the town of Jolo to its +present level. He laid out its streets, plazas, parks, and trees, +finished the tower of the Queen (blockhouse No. 2), and constructed +the blockhouse of the playa at Tulay, the military hospital, the +light-house and various bridges. A great part of this work was done +by prison labor, 400 prisoners having been transferred from Manila +to Jolo for this purpose. His administration marked the beginning +of a period of prosperity to the colony and temporary peace with the +Sulus. He reëstablished friendly relations with the sultan and datus +and had success in many undertakings. Early in 1880 he fell sick and +to the regret of all parties left Jolo for Manila. + +Governor Martinez was relieved by Col. Rafael Gonzalez de Rivera, the +fourth governor of Sulu, on February 3, 1880. Rivera followed in the +steps of Martinez, but circumstances changed as the sultan's health +declined, and the sultana's political intrigues divided the state into +two hostile parties. On March 30 the scouts at the tower of the Queen +were attacked by a band of Sulus, who killed 2 privates, and wounded 1 +sergeant and 6 privates. However, the Sulus were repulsed, losing 12 +men dead. The sultan, when called upon to punish the transgressors, +responded promptly, went to Lu'uk and chastised them severely. In +December of the same year Datu Pula reported some juramentados in the +suburbs, two of whom were encountered by the troops; one was killed +and the other fled. + +After the treaty of 1878, Jamalul A'lam established his official +residence at Maymbung and acted in a dignified and creditable +manner. He observed the terms of the treaty faithfully until his +death. He was intelligent, vigorous, and willing to learn. He received +Spanish and native visitors with befitting courtesy and was well +respected and endeared himself to everybody who knew him. Following +the example of his father, he published a code of laws which is said +to have been milder than that of his predecessors. It is no doubt +a modification or a reproduction of the code used by Pulalun and +Jamalul Kiram I. It was in current use in the country at the time of +the Spanish evacuation in 1899. + +Jamalul A'lam lived an honorable life and kept one wife only for the +greater part of the time. He repudiated the mother of his eldest son, +Badarud Din, and loved tenderly Pangian Inchi Jamila, the mother +of his second, Amirul Kiram. Inchi Jamila was not very beautiful, +but she was attractive, intelligent, active, and comparatively +young. She associated with her husband in the administration of +affairs and wielded considerable influence on the chiefs and council of +state. She was very generous and entertaining, and won the respect of +the majority of the datus. Wishing to secure the sultanate for her son, +Amirul Kiram, she attempted to alienate Badarud Din from his father +and used her influence on the council to that end. Intrigues followed +and the state divided into two factions, partisans of Amirul Kiram +and Pangian Inchi Jamila and partisans of Badarud Din, the rightful +heir. Jamalul A'lam managed affairs with a strong hand and kept all +parties united, but early in 1881 his health began to decline rapidly +and his favorite wife meddled all the more with the affairs of the +state. The knowledge of her schemes soon spread, and as it became +known that Jamalul A'lam was actually failing, disorder arose and a +condition bordering on anarchy prevailed. On the 22d of February armed +Sulus attempted to force the gates of Jolo, but they were repulsed +and most of them were killed. The sultan grew worse and disturbances +increased. The front of the plaza of Jolo became an arena of war, +several attacks were made on the town, and conditions became so bad +that Rivera requested reënforcements from the Governor-General and +permission to take the field against the hostile parties. The request +was forwarded through the governor of Mindanao, who indorsed the +communication, recommending that he be empowered to decide whether +reënforcements were needed or not, and in case they were needed, to +lead the troops himself. This being granted, the governor of Mindanao +came to Jolo, reported unfavorably, and returned to Zamboanga. + + + +RULE OF SULTAN BADARUD DIN II + +Jamalul A'lam died April 8, 1881, but before his death he caused word +to be sent to the governor of Sulu informing him that an attack on +Jolo was imminent. At 3 a.m. on the 10th, the Sulus issued from the +woods and made a general attack on the garrison, which resulted in +failure and in the loss of 103 Sulus, who fell dead in the ditches. + +The garrison of Jolo amounted, at that time, to 27 officers and 753 +men. All that Colonel Rivera could do was to protect the plaza and keep +himself well informed about matters in general. On April 14, Panglima +Adak brought letters from Inchi Jamila relating to the succession to +the sultanate. She announced that the late Sultan directed in his will +that Amirul Kiram be elected sultan, and she endeavored to influence +the governor in his favor. Rivera expressed himself in favor of Badarud +Din, declaring this to be the only course he could take in conformity +with the terms and intentions of the treaty. This put a quietus on +the cause of dissension and the council of datus voted unanimously +in favor of Badarud Din II, who had just completed his nineteenth year. + +In the meantime, disturbances in Sulu had caused some +alarm at Manila and prompt action was taken by the General +Government. Brigadier-General La Corte, who was intending to inspect +the fortifications of the south, was directed temporarily to assume +command of the government of Mindanao and personally to conduct +what operations it might be necessary to undertake on the Island of +Sulu. La Corte came by the way of Cebu and Zamboanga and brought the +Sixth Regiment of Infantry from Cebu and two companies of the Second +Regiment of Infantry from Zamboanga. Soon after his arrival at Jolo, +he addressed a strong letter to Sultan Badarud Din requesting the +punishment of the Sulus who attacked the Plaza of Jolo on April +10. Badarud Din responded promptly and commissioned Datu Pula to go +to Lu'uk and Taglibi and punish the transgressors. This, however, +was not carried out, for Panglima Sakandar of Lu'uk, who was loyal to +the Sultan, placed himself at the service of Badarud Din and promised +to bring the aggressors alive or dead. The Sultan's forces attacked +the rancheria of Maharaja Abdulla, the chief aggressor, and killed +nine men and one datu. The maharaja and the chiefs of seven other +rancherias of Lu'uk then surrendered themselves and swore allegiance +to Spain. The sultan and the chief datus later presented themselves +before General La Corte and reaffirmed their fealty to the Spanish +Government. The Governor-General subsequently wrote a letter to the +Sultan, expressing his pleasure and recognizing the sincere efforts +of the latter to reëstablish peace and tranquillity. + +In June, 1881, General La Corte authorized the construction of the +loopholed wall with towers and embrasures to complete the defenses +of the town. He recommended frequent reconnaissances of the interior +and target practice for the forces of the garrison, and advised the +governor to strengthen the hand of the Sultan and to require from him +at the same time strict enforcement of all obligations that tended to +prove the loyalty of his people to the Spanish Government. General +La Corte left Jolo on the 29th of June, taking back the troops of +the Second Regiment of Infantry to Zamboanga. + +Governor Rivera was relieved on November 15, 1881, by Col. Isidro +Gutierrez Soto. The new governor exhibited unusual coolness and +personal courage. He visited Maymbung without military escort and +attempted in every way to strengthen his friendship with the Sultan and +datus and to encourage them to have similar confidence in the Spanish +officials; but dissensions among the Sulus and the jealousy of Pangian +Inchi Jamila frustrated all his efforts. Without opposition Badarud +Din might have ruled fairly well, but the plotting of Inchi Jamila +and the unfriendliness of her party made a coward of him. He became +inconsistent and seemed at times to lack confidence in the Spanish +Government. He projected a secret trip to Sandakan and the Spaniards +notified him that in case he left Sulu without the permission of the +Government another sultan would be appointed in his place. + +In January, 1882, Bangao was occupied by troops, and part of the +southern squadron was stationed there. In May Siasi was similarly +garrisoned. On April 29, 1882, Governor Soto became ill and left +for Manila. He was relieved temporarily by Brig.-Gen. José Paulin, +who was on a tour of inspection in the south and had come to Jolo to +conduct some official negotiations with the sultan. + +On the 2d of June, Col. Eduardo Fernandez Bremon took office as +governor of Sulu. Soon after this time Sultan Badarud Din left +Jolo on a pilgrimage to Mecca and delegated his authority to Datu +Aliyud Din in conjunction with the Sultana Inchi Jamila. Governor +Bremon's command was very eventful and difficult. Cholera came from +Singapore and overran the whole Archipelago. Disturbances increased, +the turbulent inhabitants of Lu'uk became restless and hostile, +and juramentados came so frequently that they actually besieged the +town. The wall and towers and the defensive Barracks of Victory were +finished and these completely checked the entrance of hostile Sulus +into the town. Ladrones and wandering parties infested the suburbs and +hills and communication with Maymbung was broken. In August Governor +Bremon fell ill and asked to be relieved of his command. In September +a general attack on the plaza of Jolo was planned by the Sulus and +conditions assumed a very serious aspect. For one whole month, it is +said, the gates of Jolo were not opened. + +The charge of Sulu affairs at this critical stage was intrusted to +General Paulin, who arrived at Jolo on October 1, accompanied by +Col. Julian Gonzalez Parrado, who was appointed to relieve Colonel +Bremon as governor of Sulu. The Sulu squadron was increased and the +garrison of Jolo reënforced. General Paulin conducted an expedition +to Lu'uk to chastise the rancherias of Tu'tu' and Bwal, which were +reported to be the chief centers of hostility and disturbance on the +island. He first called at Maymbung, and pressed upon Datu Aliyud Din +and the council the necessity of their doing their part toward the +punishment of the guilty parties, and Datu Aliyud Din at the head of +a small force accompanied the expedition. Troops were disembarked at +Pandang-pandang, Kadungdung, Tampukan, and Bwal; they burned parts +of these rancherias and made some advances inland. The fighting +was not severe and the Sulus harassed the troops to a considerable +extent. The navy coöperated with the troops, but the expedition was +small and accomplished no significant results. + +In his report to the Governor-General, General Paulin recommended the +repetition of such expeditions in order to impress the Sulus with the +superiority of Spanish arms and to punish all transgressors. Commenting +upon the nature of the warfare the expedition experienced he considered +the natural difficulties attending campaigns in the island as being +difficult to overcome. The art of war, he said, has no application as +against Moros. The Sulus, he continued, are either treacherous wild +beasts or fanatical heroes, according to the sentiment which at the +time impels them to fight. They are savage warriors who hide in order +to attack and rise at the feet of the enemy when least expected. They +conceal themselves in clumps of trees and cliffs or ditches, and when +ready to fight, discharge their firearms or throw lances and bolos, +while howling and dancing frantic war dances. They flee after an +attack, but in their flight they attack the rear guard. + +Governor Parrado was a man of considerable ability and tact. Confidence +and peace were reëstablished, the datus often came to town and the +people attended the market in large numbers. In December, 1882, +Tata'an, on the northwestern coast of Tawi-tawi, was occupied by +troops. + +On his way back from Mecca, Sultan Badarud Din was met at Singapore +by a representative of the Philippine Government, who requested +that he return to Jolo by the way of Manila. The sultan declined, +stating that the recent death of his son made it imperative for him to +return directly to Maymbung, but he promised to visit Manila later. He +reached Sulu in January, 1883. After his arrival he exhibited vigor +and watchfulness and soon prepared to go to Manila. This project +seemed to excite unusual disturbance, bordering on panic at Parang +and Lu'uk, and for fear of undesirable consequences he changed his +mind and gave up the trip. + +By his pilgrimage to Mecca, which was the first ever taken by a +Sultan of Sulu, Badarud Din gained respect and influence, but no +sagacity. Desiring to strengthen his authority and to imitate the +European nations by organizing a police force for the sultanate, +he brought 2 Egyptian officers and 30 Sikhs from Singapore and made +arrangements with an English house in Singapore for the purchase of +200 breech-loading rifles. The rifles caused the Spanish Government +some anxiety, but thorough investigation and inquiry proved that they +never went beyond Labuan. The Sikhs were not paid for two months after +arrival at Maymbung and left the service at once. Such organization +meant a first step toward reform, but Badarud Din had no education +worthy of the name and lacked the requisite ability, strength, and +character for carrying on such measures. Soon he acquired the opium +habit and methods of licentious living. He finally lost his hold on +affairs in general. + +Datu Aliyud Din removed to Matanda, where a large house was built for +him by the governor of Sulu; and a village of 400 people soon arose +around his residence. The blockhouse of Jovellar was then built near +the beach for his protection and help. + +So far the governor of Sulu addressed the sultan as his son, the +sultan addressed the governor as his father and relations were friendly +and pleasant. But in June, 1883, three juramentados slipped into the +post, killed two officers and wounded one officer and two soldiers +before they could be dispatched. Governor Parrado addressed a strong +letter to the sultan requesting the immediate and proper punishment +of the district from which the juramentados came. The sultan neither +responded nor did he send information relative to the place from +which the juramentados came. Governor Parrado then took matters into +his own hand, made an expedition to Taglibi and chastised its chief +Sahibud Din. Soon after, two soldiers were killed in the vicinity of +Jolo while cutting bamboo and another expedition was undertaken to +Buhanginan to punish the murderers. An expedition was also made to +South Ubian, where the pirate Panglima Jami was reported to have taken +refuge. Jami was not found at this place, but the local chiefs burned +Jami's kuta and house and promised to deliver him to the government +when he returned to Ubian. + +Governor Parrado proved himself an efficient and able administrator. He +recognized the absurdity of a policy of extermination, and felt +conscious of the lack of a uniform, well-planned and settled policy on +the part of the General Government toward Sulu. He realized that the +Moros possessed a form of civilization and could not be treated like +savages. He used his influence for good in times of peace and employed +his forces to reëstablish peace with justice in times of hostility. He +was strong and sagacious in most of the measures he undertook. + +Datu Pula, a strong chief worthy of trust and a man of prestige, +died before the expiration of the year 1883. Pula's influence always +tended toward peace with Spain and the support of Badarud Din against +his rival. His death was consequently a loss to both sides. The sultan +and the governor continued on good terms of friendship during January +and February, 1884, and the affairs of Sulu were conducted smoothly +and peacefully, but on the 22d of February, 1884, Badarud Din died; +the state was soon rent by dissension and another period of trouble +and disturbance followed. + + + +STRUGGLE FOR THE SULTANATE + +The question of a successor to Sultan Badarud Din II proved to be very +vexatious, both to the Sulus and to the Spanish Government. At that +date the eligibles to the sultanate belonged to three houses--that +of Sultan Jamalul Kiram I, the house of Sultan Shakirul Lah, and +that of Datu Putung, the son of Sultan Alimud Din I. These houses +were represented by the three candidates, Raja Muda Amirul Kiram, +Datu Aliyud Din, and Datu Harun ar-Rashid. + +Amirul Kiram was the oldest brother of the three sons of Sultan +Jamalul A'lam from Pangian Inchi Jamila. He was born on the 27th of +March, 1868, and was at one time the rival of Badarud Din II, his +older brother. The sultanate remained in the line of Jamalul Kiram I +for four consecutive generations and the majority of Sulus had come +to consider the sons of Jamalul A'lam as the direct heirs to the +throne. The influence of Pangian Inchi Jamila was a strong factor +in itself and the claims of Raja Muda Amirul Kiram were vigorously +pressed upon the council of state. + +Datu Aliyud Din was the son of Datu Israel, the son of Sultan Shakirul +Lah. He urged that the descendants of Sultan Shakirul Lah had an +equal right to the sultanate with the descendants of Jamalul Kiram I, +and protested against the injustice of electing a minor in preference +to older and maturer members of the family. + +Datu Harun ar-Rashid had no sultan in his line for five generations and +consequently did not press his claim to the succession. He was a cousin +of Pangian Inchi Jamila and a close friend of Jamalul A'lam. He was the +only living signer of the treaty of 1878, but since that date he had +removed to Palawan, where the Spanish Government intrusted him with the +rule of the Moro population of Palawan, Balabak, and the neighboring +southern islands, and where he had rendered very creditable service. + +Datu Aliyud Din and his party were so determined in their opposition +to Pangian Inchi Jamila and Raja Muda Amirul Kiram that they would not +entertain any proposals of compromise or attend the council of state at +Maymbung. The country was agitated and all datus and subordinate chiefs +took sides with one or the other of the two candidates. The majority +of datus and chiefs were in favor of Amirul Kiram. Datus Pula-pula, +Uyung, Marachak, Kalbi, and Julkarnayn, who were as a rule united, +and who wielded the strongest authority on the island next to that of +the sultan, remained almost neutral, but at heart indorsed the claim +of Aliyud Din. In general the southern and greater half of the island +supported Amirul Kiram of Maymbung, while the northern half favored +Aliyud Din, who had in the meantime moved his residence to Patikul. + +Governor Parrado offered his good offices and tried to overcome the +difficulty by suggesting that Amirul Kiram be elected sultan, but that +Aliyud Din should act as regent during the minority of the former. He +went so far as to name a new and general council of state to meet at +Maymbung and decide the question. He submitted this proposition to +both parties threatening to leave them to their fate in case they +did not comply with his advice. The Maymbung party accepted the +governor's proposition, but the Patikul party did not; consequently +both candidates were proclaimed sultans, one at Patikul and one +at Maymbung, and both prepared to fight. Ambuscades, skirmishes, +surprises, robberies, and cattle stealing followed. Governor Parrado +remained neutral until July when he made friendly visits to Maymbung +and Patikul and again counseled concord and compromise. Datu Harun +arrived in Sulu on the 17th of November and both parties solicited his +support and consulted him; but he failed to effect any agreement. A +little later he accompanied the governor of Sulu to Manila where +he received much attention because of the success that attended +his services at Palawan. He remained in Manila about one month and +returned to live at Matanda, filled with a strong desire to better +himself and his country. A year passed and no agreement could be +reached, nor did the Spanish Government officially recognize any of +the claimants. Amirul Kiram indulged in licentiousness and Aliyud +Din took to opium. + +Governor Parrado during his administration completed the Cuartel de +España and the market building and improved the forts Alfonso XII +and the Princess of Asturias. The majority of the nipa houses were +replaced by better structures of brick with iron roofs. A system of +waterworks was put in and Jolo was declared an open port. On July 23, +1885, Parrado was succeeded by Col. Francisco Castilla. + +Governor Castilla followed the policy of his predecessor and remained +neutral. Amirul Kiram had in the meantime massed a large force and +attacked Aliyud Din. The latter's party had weakened and only 800 +remained to defend Patikul and its kuta. The Maymbung forces greatly +outnumbered their adversaries, defeated them, destroyed the kuta, +and burned the settlement. Datu Aliyud Din fled to Basilan and lived +for a while with Sharif Aqil. Raja Muda Amirul Kiram then requested +the Spanish Government to recognize his succession to the sultanate +and a commission was sent from Manila to investigate the matter and +report on it. After five months' service as governor of Sulu Colonel +Castilla asked to be relieved at the end of the year and Col. Juan +Arolas succeeded him in January, 1886. + +Governor Arolas devoted himself to his work with unusual enthusiasm +and exemplary energy. Public works and sanitation received his best +attention. Trees were planted, the streets were improved, the gutters +and sewers were repaired and renewed, and the town was kept thoroughly +clean. The death list of the garrison was reduced from 102 in 1885 +to 51 in 1886. A good road was constructed outside the wall and a +beautiful street was extended from the southern gate of the town to +Tulay and Asturias on both sides of which coconut and shade trees were +planted. The streets of Tulay were planned on the same scale as those +of the walled town, and fillings on a large scale were commenced for +this purpose. Excellent waterworks were completed and iron pipes were +laid throughout the walled town and Tulay for the use of the garrison +and the public. + +As a result of the report of the commission appointed to investigate +Sulu affairs and the subject of succession to the sultanate, directions +were received from Madrid and Manila to the effect that Datu Harun +should be appointed subsultan and Amirul Kiram sultan, and that both +be requested to go to Manila, take the oath of fidelity to Spain, +and be invested with authority by the Governor-General. Datu Harun +had made himself very agreeable to Governors Parrado and Castilla and +a strong friendship had grown up between them. Arolas soon learned to +like Harun and trusted him. Amirul Kiram was then 18 years old and his +age probably suggested the necessity of having a regent who would be +competent to take charge of affairs and who would be favorable to the +policy of the Spanish Government. The wish and opinion of the Sulu +nation and the desire of the ambitious sultana to be regent herself +were not fully respected and could not be approved, and the dictates +of the Spanish Government had to be complied with. Harun, as might +have been expected, obeyed the royal directions. Amirul Kiram refused +to go to Manila, considered it a humiliation for him to have a regent +and to be compelled to visit Manila for the approval of the Spanish +Government. He felt that he was the rightful heir and the choice of +the Sulus and that the treaty of 1878 well guarded his rights and +granted the Sulus the full privilege of electing their chiefs. The +Sulu character asserted itself in his action and the nation stood by +him and counseled noncompliance to directions prejudicial to their +own rights and national honor. + + + +RULE OF SULTAN HARUN + +Datu Harun went to Manila alone and Governor Arolas recommended his +appointment as sultan. Governor-General Terrero cabled to Madrid and +obtained authority for this action on September 11, 1886. Harun was +officially announced in Manila as Sultan of Sulu, and his appointment +on the 24th of September was made the occasion of some formality. + + + Sultan Harun placed his hands upon the Quran, his Minister + Sheikh Mustafa bin Ahmad officiating, and his high Excellency the + Governor-General administered to him the oath in the following + form: "Do ye swear to uphold steadfastly all the stipulations + covenanted in the capitulations and to give faithful obedience + to His Majesty, the King?" To this Sultan Harun answered: "I + swear to comply with the terms of the capitulations and with the + commands of His Majesty, the King." And His Excellency replied: + "May God and men help ye if ye do this and if ye do not, then + may God and the Government punish you!" + + +Sultan Harun arrived at Jolo in October, and, escorted by 200 +Spanish soldiers, one gunboat, and one steam launch, he proceeded +to Parang where he expected the Sulus to declare their allegiance +to him. However, their reception was not as warm as he expected +and he soon found it to his advantage to retire to Jolo. The Sulu +chiefs appealed to arms and prepared to defend the rights of Amirul +Kiram at the cost of their lives. Desiring to support his nominee in +the sultanate Governor Arolas visited Parang in company with Sultan +Harun on the 2d day of November and an additional number of chiefs, +including Panglima Damang, swore allegiance to Sultan Harun. + +Such measures aroused the activity of Amirul Kiram and his party and +several places in Parang were attacked by the Maymbung forces and +considerable unrest prevailed. Harun's sultanate seemed unacceptable +to the great majority of datus, and hostilities arose in many +localities. Murders and juramentado attacks occurred in the vicinity +of Jolo. The kuta of Bwisan and Timahu were attacked and reduced, +the settlements burned, and much blood was shed. Hostilities extended +to Siasi and the kuta of Datu Hiyang was attacked. In February, 1887, +a force of 3,000 Sulus started from Maymbung and attacked Jolo. The +garrison repulsed the attack, but juramentados and hostile bands +harassed the town. Small expeditions reconnoitered Tapul, Lugus, +and Siasi; but no active measures could be taken against Maymbung +until reënforcements could arrive from Zamboanga and Kotabato. + +At that time General Terrero headed a campaign in the upper Mindanao +Valley against Datu Utu and forces were drawn from Zamboanga and Jolo +to coöperate at Kotabato. With the return of the troops in April the +war vessels which operated on the Mindanao River also came to Jolo and +Governor Arolas began preparations at once to fight Amirul Kiram who +was strongly intrenched in Maymbung. The gunboats, some marines, and +Sultan Harun's small force attacked the settlement by sea. Governor +Arolas led the land troops himself and marched against Maymbung at +night. The Moros of the interior harassed the advancing troops from +all sides, but everything that could be reached was burned and more +than 40 Sulus were disabled or killed before the fort of Maymbung was +reached. The latter was a square 75 meters on each side, built partly +on land and partly in the water. The walls on the land side were +constructed of coral rock, while those toward the sea were built of +double rows of piles filled behind with stone and earth. Large cannon +and breech-loading rifles were abundantly used by the Sulus and one +rapid-firing gun commanded the main approach on the land side. The +fighting was fierce and heroic on both sides. Out of a large force +of Sulus defending the fort and town 250 lay dead after the battle +was over. The Spaniards lost 17 dead and 96 wounded. The sea forces, +after caring for the Chinese population, set fire to the whole town +and reduced it to ashes. Governor Arolas was highly praised in Manila +and Madrid and was later promoted to be a brigadier-general. + +If military operations, war, and death are efficient and suitable +measures to daunt the Sulus, coerce their will, and make them yield +to superior authority, this Maymbung campaign should certainly have +produced the desired result. Many thought that the moral effect of this +victory was excellent beyond measure and for that reason entertained +great hopes. Governor Arolas felt the cause of Spanish sovereignty +and suzerainty to be amply vindicated and Spanish honor strongly and +proudly upheld, but as early as the 9th of May another fight stared +him in the face. Arolas and Sultan Harun had to march against Parang +and invest the kuta of Panglima Damang. After the surrender of Damang +an expedition was sent to Lati and another to Tapul Island. This +latter campaign was extremely difficult and trying. The country was +rough, the forest thick, and the enemy fierce. Panglima Sayadi would +not recognize Harun's sultanate and would not obey the mandates of +the governor of Sulu, so his chastisement was decreed and Tapul was +attacked. Sayadi and his men fought like tigers at bay, and Governor +Arolas was compelled to lead his troops in person. Sayadi was defeated +after two days' fighting, 90 of his men were killed, and the fort was +demolished. The Spanish casualties were 13 dead and 155 wounded. Sultan +Harun reconnoitered the shores and interior of the island, destroyed +small forts, and obtained the surrender of several chiefs. + +On the 29th of July, 1887, Pangian Inchi Jamila presented herself at +Jolo and expressed her submission and that of Raja Muda Amirul Kiram +to the governor of Sulu and to Sultan Harun. Governor Arolas insisted +that Amirul Kiram should come personally and express his surrender, +and allowed him ten days in which he could come with safety and +impunity. After her return Pangian Inchi Jamila sent Sultan Harun +the seal of the sultanate; but neither the chiefs nor Amirul Kiram +himself agreed to the personal surrender requested. Governor Arolas was +disposed to make Spanish sovereignty over Sulu a fact, absolute and +complete, and required implicit obedience. The Sulus had a different +view of the respective rights of the two governments and continued +their resistance. Another campaign was necessary on Siasi Island, +and Datu Hiyang and many Moros were killed. + +Another expedition was directed against Kadungdung and southern Lu'uk +and another against the Island of Pata. Innumerable hardships were +sustained by the troops and many Sulus were killed. Sultan Harun +and his forces coöperated with the Spanish forces and reconnoitered +inaccessible places. The partisans of the young Raja Muda Amirul Kiram +were supposed to have been completely vanquished and the young prince +was expected to humiliate himself before Sultan Harun at any time. Such +hopes were, however, false, for on October 30 Bwal and the northern +Lu'uk district had to be punished. After some fighting the Sulus +evacuated Bwal and fled to the mountains and 53 houses were reduced to +ashes; nor was this sufficient, for in 1888 expeditions amounting in +some cases to 1,500 troops, comprising from two to four companies of +artillery, were conducted against Purul, Tambang, Patikul, Taglibi, +Buhanginan, Pandan, Sari`ul, and Pigi-Dahu. Hundreds and probably +thousands of Sulus were killed, but notwithstanding, Arolas's cruel +efforts to force Sultan Harun upon the people resulted in failure. The +Sulus scorned Sultan Harun and his apparent supremacy, persisted in +their resistance, and kept their allegiance to Amirul Kiram. True to +their traditions they remained faithful to the candidate whose right +to the succession was in their estimation and conviction stronger +than any other claim backed by the forces of General Arolas. + +Before the end of the year 1886 Datu Uyung invited Datu Aliyud Din +back to Patikul, where he remained for about one year. Datus Kalbi +and Julkarnayn joined the party of Aliyud Din and defended him against +Amirul Kiram and Sultan Harun. + +In 1887 Patikul and Lati were attacked by Governor Arolas and Datu +Aliyud Din fled to Siasi and Laminusa, from there he returned, late in +1888, to Bunbun and Patikul; there he lived quietly until his death, +about 1892. + +The administration of Governor Arolas was the longest in duration, +the most eventful, the most interesting, and the most warlike +administration Sulu had under Spanish rule. The difficult situation +the governor found at his arrival, his misunderstanding of the Sulu +character and underestimation of Sulu public opinion, his integrity, +his exalted opinion of Spanish sovereignty and honor, his disregard of +treaties and precedent, his ability as a commander of troops, and his +warlike policy, all combine to make a picture vivid in its colors and +unique in its make-up. Governor Arolas can not be held responsible +for what had transpired prior to his appointment as governor, and +the policy he followed was probably dictated for him in general +from Manila; but it is difficult to conceive of a man executing +his duty with such vigor, earnestness, and thoroughness as General +Arolas did, unless his heart and soul approved of such a policy and +added enthusiasm and zest to the impetus of duty. Furthermore, there +are many reasons for believing that Governor Arolas recommended the +main lines of the policy he pursued. At all events he impersonates, +as far as the object of this work is concerned, that combined agency +of government which is responsible for the significant events of +his administration of Sulu affairs. In commenting upon his policy +it would therefore be proper to refer to him personally, without the +least intention of fixing the blame on anybody, or indeed of finding +fault at all, but with the sole intention of eliciting the facts and +showing the actual condition of affairs in their proper light. + +In going over the long list of expeditions and campaigns conducted +by General Arolas and of the casualties on both sides, one can not +help but express admiration, surprise, or blame as to the justice +or advisability of the policy pursued, its motives, conduct, and +effect. For, if the treaty of 1878 was still in force--and there is +no reason to suppose that it was abrogated--why did Governor Arolas +institute new rules and conditions pertaining to the sultanate +and render compliance with them necessary for qualification and +confirmation? If by virtue of the prerogative of sovereignty it was +deemed necessary to interfere with Sulu internal affairs and customs +for a beneficial and good purpose, why was it not right then to +oppose and check Datu Aliyud Din as soon as it became evident that the +majority of the Sulus wanted Amirul Kiram as sultan and Aliyud Din had +refused to honor the governor's proposals and recommendations? Why was +it not considered right for the Government to object to war between +the contending parties from the beginning and to assume for itself +all the powers and prerogatives of a protector or arbitrator? If the +good of the Sulus was the ultimate object sought, why was not the +rightful heir supported from the beginning and advantage taken of +such an opportunity to enlist the sympathy of one party, at least, +on the side of the Government, strengthen the weak head of the nation, +and bring order and tranquillity out of chaos and anarchy? + +Apparently the worthy cause of peace and Sulu welfare were +completely overlooked, while the main object of asserting power +and gaining supremacy was pressed and prosecuted at the expense +of a thousand souls and war with every strong chief throughout the +whole Archipelago. Governor Arolas trampled on the treaty, assumed +arbitrary and absolute authority, and treated noncompliance with +his wishes as disloyalty and insurrection. This attitude might have +been due to his peculiar military training and ideas, but it was +certainly unjust and overbearing. Nations can not be trampled under +foot without bringing about resentment and retaliation and people +can not be treated as privates in a company of disciplinarios or +deportados. The result of such coercion is hatred, and the effect +of abuse is enmity. Such methods do not tend to civilize a country +or better its chances of progress. They kill ambition, harden the +heart, and dull the senses. The first step toward the progress of +a subordinate nation is imitation of its superior; but imitation is +generally engendered by admiration and kindly influences, and cruel +warlike measures are certainly disposed to kill such good agencies. + +Sulu military operations ceased soon after the arrival of +Governor-General Weyler in Manila, and some of the Jolo forces were +withdrawn. + +General Arolas left Jolo in 1893 and was succeeded by Col. Cesar +Mattos, who was in turn followed by Gen. Venancio Hernandez before the +end of the same year. The successors of General Arolas did not have +similar motives for upholding Harun's sultanate against overwhelming +odds. They saw in him a weak and vacillating sultan who was a burden +to the state. Consequently Sultan Harun was relieved in 1894, and he +returned to his home in Palawan. During his incumbency Sultan Harun +lived at Mubu in the vicinity of Jolo. The house he occupied was the +best building ever occupied by a Sulu sultan. He was ambitious and +willing to reform his people, but he never had a strong following +and was very unfortunate in that he had to fight so hard and so often +for a nominal allegiance and false support from his people. + + + +RULE OF SULTAN JAMALUL KIRAM II + +Raja Muda Amirul Kiram, who fought and suffered so long for the throne +of his father and brother, succeeded Sultan Harun and assumed the +name of Sultan Jamalul Kiram II. He was not obliged to go to Manila +in order to be vested with proper authority by the Governor-General, +but it seems that he pledged himself in one way or another to pay some +tribute to the Spanish Government, and consequently a decree was issued +by Governor-General Blanco on March 1, 1894, directing a general census +of the Moros of the Sulu Archipelago and the collection of a tax of 1 +real [222] from each individual. The proceeds of this tribute, after +deducting the allowances made for the interpreters and collectors, +were to be devoted to the development of the institutions of Jolo, and +especially to the construction of roads. It is said that the sultan +was unable and unwilling to collect the tribute so decreed, but that +he paid from his own purse the sum of P10,000 or its equivalent on +the basis of a population of 100,000 and at the rate of 1 real per +person. The collection of this tax was abandoned in the following +year and was never resumed. + +The Sulus' adherence to the cause of Jamalul Kiram II was not based on +any personal influence he exerted on the people, but on the influence +of his mother and the people's devotion to the house of Jamalul Kiram +I. Datu Aliyud Din's claim was theoretically strong, but for various +reasons his party weakened; while Amirul Kiram, though a fugitive, +gradually gained in influence and rose to power. + +The administration of Governor Hernandez was the longest in duration +next to that of Governor Arolas and was, on the whole, peaceful and +tranquil. On one occasion in 1895 hostilities broke out with Datus +Julkarnayn and Kalbi, and the Sulus of Lati and Patikul attacked +the town of Jolo causing several casualties. However, peace was +soon restored by Governor-General Blanco and no further hostilities +occurred. Governor Hernandez built the direct road, known as the +Asturias Road, which leads from the gate of the walled town to Fort +Asturias. About 1897 General Hernandez was relieved by Col. (later +Brig.-Gen.) Luis Huerta, the last Spanish governor of Sulu. + +Spain evacuated Sulu in May, 1899, and Jolo was garrisoned by American +troops on the same day. On the 20th of August Gen. J. C. Bates +concluded a treaty with Sultan Jamalul Kiram II, generally known as +the "Bates Agreement," and the sovereignty of Sulu passed from Spain +to the United States of America. [223] + + + + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +CONCLUSION + + +POLITICAL STATUS OF SULU AT THE TIME OF SPANISH EVACUATION + +The cause for which Governor Arolas shed the blood of several +hundred Spanish soldiers and killed some thousands of Moros was +utterly defeated. The tenacity with which the Sulus resisted Spanish +domination, their obdurate opposition and bravery in battle, and their +obstinate passive resistance in peace, baffled all Spanish efforts +to subvert their political organization or gain a single point of +advantage without paying too dearly for it. The Sulus succeeded at +last in inaugurating their candidate as Sultan of Sulu. Their laws +and the administration of their internal affairs were not interfered +with. Their religion, social conditions, national usages and customs +were unaffected by any change whatsoever. Spanish influence and +jurisdiction did not extend beyond the limits of the garrison and no +material reform or progress reached the Moro community through that +channel. No effort was made by Spain to educate the Sulus and no +adequate measure was proposed by her governors which was applicable +to the needs of the Sulus and acceptable to their ideas. The Sulus +felt that there was a strong inclination on the part of the Spanish +Government or some of its recognized agents to change their religion +and destroy their national unity, and consequently they never had +complete confidence in Spanish officers and representatives and +repulsed every influence that tended to establish close relations +between them and the Christians of the Spanish garrison. + +No tax or tribute was collected from the Sulus, and their territory was +exempted from the operation of the laws of the Philippine Islands. Sulu +imports could come in Sulu craft free of duty and unhampered by any +vexatious regulation. Duties could be collected by Sulus at all ports +unoccupied by Spain; and if hostilities could have been brought to an +end, the Sulus, in their pursuit of the peaceful vocations of life, +might have felt no appreciable difficulty or inconvenience from +Spanish occupation of Jolo, except the loss of the revenues of the +ports of Jolo and Siasi and some control over the trade of the Chinese. + +Slavery remained an established institution of the land and its +continued practice among the Moros was neither denounced nor +restricted. The pearl industry remained in the hands of the Sulus +and pearl fishers and shell dealers paid a variable tax to the sultan +and local chiefs. Piracy was completely suppressed, and the invasion +of Christian communities and the capture of Christians as slaves by +Sulus terminated at the conquest of Jolo in 1876. + +Before the campaign of 1876 the sultan ruled with a strong hand, lived +in state, was prosperous and had considerable wealth. The principal +datus lived at Jolo, and the Sulu forces were united. Jamalul A`lam +remained rich until his death, but subsequent wars and licentiousness +reduced the estate of his sons. The separation and dispersion of the +datus, however, weakened the Sulus more than any other cause. Each datu +began to feel more or less independent of the other, their jealousies +increased and became more intense and effectual; their forces were +disunited, and each chief relied solely upon his own fortifications and +following. United action was ignored or became impracticable. Soon the +subordinate chiefs began to feel their importance, gradually asserted +their rights, and assumed greater dignity and power in proportion to +their prosperity and the following they could command. Jamalul A`lam +ruled firmly, had every chief under his control, and held the state +intact. Three chiefs outside of his house were sufficient to sign the +treaty he made with Spain. These were Datu Harun, Datu Raja Lawut +Zaynul `Abidin (Asibi), the father of Datus Kalbi and Julkarnayn, +and Datu Muluk Bandarasa Pula, the son of the famous Datu Daniel, +and the father of the present Datu Pula-pula of Mubu or Tandu. No +maharajas or hadjis figured prominently in those days, and the +panglimas served as state messengers. + +As soon as it became known that Jamalul A`lam was dying a condition +bordering on anarchy arose and disorder prevailed as in the days of +Badarud Din. Things grew worse during the regency of Datu Aliyud +Din, and worse still during the civil strife between the latter +and Raja Muda Amirul Kiram. General Arolas and Sultan Harun had to +fight every chief in his turn and every island by itself. Each chief +felt independent of the rest of the country and had his own ideas +as to who should be appointed sultan. Each datu was defended by +his own men only and each had to meet the Spanish forces by himself +unaided. Even Maymbung had to face the mighty foe with forces which +could be assembled from the immediate neighborhood only. Small +detachments did sometimes reënforce the forts of their neighbors, +but the proportion of help so extended to the actual strength of +the forces that could have been united was so insignificant that no +account can be taken of such coöperation. + +Thus the total or combined strength of Sulu was reduced to small, +insignificant and disunited entities; the power of resistance +to outside invasion was diminished, but at the same time the +susceptibility of the country to foreign influence became nil. It +was an easy matter for General Arolas to defeat one party or chief +alone, but the necessity of fighting each chief by himself defeated +his purpose and efforts in the end. Unconsciously, Spain brought +on an abnormal condition of affairs in Sulu, extremely difficult to +manage and for which she never found the proper remedy. The ruling +sultan, though well supported by the greater mass of the people, +had neither the knowledge, the tact, nor the strength necessary to +correct the wrong done, and things in general tended rather to the +worse than to the better. The parties created by the civil strife of +1884 existed in 1899 with very little change, and their enmity had +become deeply rooted and ineradicable. The whole northern portion +of the island east of Jolo and eastern Tandu represented a distinct +party unfavorable to Jamalul Kiram II and at times seemed to be +wholly under the leadership of the two brothers, Datus Kalbi and +Julkarnayn. Similar parties existed in Tapul, Lugus, Siasi, and the +Tawi-tawi Group, many settlements having two chiefs, one representing +the sultan and the other the hostile party. To add evil to existing +wrong, the chiefs took advantage of this condition and vacillated in +their alliance from one party to another as it seemed to them more +advantageous for the time being. General Arolas fought both parties, +incurred the bitter enmity of all chiefs and gained for himself and +the cause of prosperity no advantage whatsoever. All the Sulus hated +Spain at heart and welcomed the end of her sovereignty, with the hope +of having more peace and better relations with her successor. + + + +SPANISH POLICY + + +ATTITUDE OF THE MOROS + +The vivid picture presented by the history of Sulu thrills the reader +with scenes of horror, cruelty, and misdirected energies. On one page +we read of how a rich and mighty sovereign stretched his hand across +the border of his domain into the territory of his weak neighbor and +coveted his jewels and treasure, and, being refused, struck terror, +desolation, and destruction in the home of the latter. On another +page we read how, as if possessed by a mighty demon, that weak and +petty king-neighbor summoned the powers of the wind and sea to his aid, +marched upon his strong enemy in the night, assailed him while unaware, +robbed his house, and carried his people away to work for his homely +sustenance. The mighty sovereign wakens in the morning, and in his +rage curses his wretched neighbor and swears vengeance upon him and +his wicked fellow nomads of the sea, but the rich and mighty lord of +the north has enemies and rivals in the west and far south and does +not dare leave his home unguarded. Part of his available warriors +he thought would be sufficient, and their valor and patriotism were +counted on as an additional asset and a sure guaranty of victory. The +sails of a gigantic fleet were unfurled and chariots and steeds were +provided for the triumphal march into the enemy's pearl land. But +the mighty sea rolled and the furious winds blew and the giant did +not prove a match for the weak, for man can not go against nature, +and valor is a poor aid against overwhelming odds. Yet some men's +hearts are made of stone and one or two experiences do not teach them +enough; so we see the same scene repeated time and time again, until +an opportune moment arrived and a new chapter was opened in which we +find the rich sovereign richer and mightier. This time nature takes +sides with might and turns the scales against the weak and petty king +of the south and leaves him wrecked and stranded on his coral reefs. + +The Sulu is a Malayan of prominent type, reared in his infancy +by a Brahman priest and brought up to maturity under the care of a +Mohammedan instructor. He rejected his idols as early as 1450 and had +been for more than a century prior to the arrival of Legaspi at Cebu, +a faithful and devoted worshipper of "Allahu Ta'ala," the Almighty and +only God, according to the teaching of the prophet Mohammed and the +holy Quran. He had laws, an established government, an organized state, +an alphabet, and a system of education. By trade he was a planter and +fisher, and both land and sea yielded him plenty. He turned the timber +of his rich forests into boats and utilized the currents of the sea +and the movements of the wind. Navigation came natural to him, and he +sailed to distant lands and traded his pearls for silks and spices. He +had a wide range of experience, and his knowledge of the world was by +no means restricted to one island or to one limited group of islands. + +The dominion of the Sultan of Sulu was complete and his power was +well respected throughout the Archipelago. Between Mindanao and +Borneo 150,000 people--Yakans, Samals, and Sulus--lived and obeyed +one man. True, the Sulus had no standing army or navy, but they had +innumerable boats, forts, and firearms, and every able-bodied man was +a soldier and a sailor, always armed, and always ready for a call to +arms. His immediate neighbors were pagans, or "infidels," who paid +him homage and tribute. He was the master of the land and the lord +of the southern seas. He was chivalrous in his manners and received +his friends with liberal hospitality; but he wasted no sympathy or +kindness on his enemy. The enemy of the state was also an enemy to +"Allahu Ta'ala," and no life was deemed too dear to sacrifice for +the cause of home and God. It was the idea of his home that started +the blood rushing through his veins, and religion fittingly fanned +the flame and heated his blood to the boiling point. There is honor +even among thieves, and a nation made up of fierce pirates need not +go begging for dignity, gallantry, and self-pride. Let the Sulu be +idolatrous or a fire worshiper and he will "go juramentado" on the +strength of his faith in wooden or fire gods before he yields to a +master or serves as a slave. He will die before he surrenders. Such +metal is what makes the Sulus brave, independent, and unyielding. + +The Sulus watched the progress of Legaspi at Cebu, Panay, and Luzon, +saw how the pagan chiefs were subjugated, and witnessed the expulsion +of their brother Mohammedans from Manila. They had played this rôle +themselves, and when the enemy reached their shores they needed no +word of explanation or stimulus to resist, except that which they had +in their breeding and general make-up. Spain instigated hostilities +and coveted their domain; it was not their part to yield, but it was +Spain's clear duty to reëstablish peace before the evils resulting from +war outweighed the good obtained. This she failed to do, and the Sulus +were invaded repeatedly and harassed constantly. Bitter animosity +filled the hearts of the Sulus, and a desire for revenge prompted +them to retaliate; and what can be expected from people of their race +and civilization except cruelty and barbarity in war! We know that +"war is hell" among highly civilized nations and why should we expect +of the Sulus a moral conduct out of proportion to their intellectual +development and the influences of their civilization and religion? The +life of an "infidel" was not a matter of religious concern to them +at all. The Prophet himself led his people against nonconformists and +promised them reward instead of pardon or intercession before God. The +Quran taught them that patriotism is a part of their religion, +and love of home and family left no place for cowardice and no +patience with humiliation. They therefore fought well and fought +cruelly. They raided the enemy's country, robbed him, and carried +away many slaves. Slavery was also sanctioned by their religion and +formed an established custom or method of punishment which took the +place of imprisonment and saved the expense of jails and guards. + +Humanity called for different action on both sides; but it evidently +made no impression on the Sulus. Not satisfied with just measures of +war and direct retaliation, they developed an abnormal propensity for +piracy, invaded the Spanish domain frequently for the procurement +of slaves and for other wicked purposes, and committed unspeakable +horrors and atrocities. But to treat evil with evil adds no virtue +to the credit of the other side. We rarely read of wounded Moros +after an engagement, and, strange to say, all wounds of Moros were +invariably immediately fatal. If few Moros were ever kindly treated +after battle, certainly many more were promptly dispatched in a manner +that terminated suffering and life at the same time. + + + +MISTAKES AND DIFFICULTIES OF SPANISH RULE + +Had Spain exerted more effort to increase the Jolo garrison in +1646 and trusted the charge of this garrison to an able and upright +administrator, the fruits of the brilliant conquest of General Corcuera +would not have been lost, and in all probability the trouble with +Sulu would have been ended before the termination of the seventeenth +century. However, instead of this course, weak characters were charged +with the management of affairs, and in place of permanent and strong +occupation of the land an insignificant treaty was made with the Sulus +with no intention on the part of Spain of keeping it permanently and +with no hope that it would be kept by the Sulus. Similar mistakes +were frequently repeated and a cruel inhuman strife marked with an +astounding profuseness of bloodshed and terrible loss of life and +evil of all sorts, was prolonged for the space of three hundred and +twenty years without any advantage that is worth considering. + +In consequence of all this, the Sulu has been pictured to the outside +world as a black devil incarnate, borne in mischief and conceived +in iniquity; without a human characteristic, barbarous and savage as +his second cousin the orang-utan of Borneo. The Sulu had no means or +chance of pleading his cause before an international court, and his +cry could not be heard or registered by a foreign hand or press. He +was not met except with a predetermination to fight him. He was not +approached except with the intention of sharing his treasure. He +was not invited except to surrender his right of government and no +alternative was offered him except tribute or death. It is out of +reason to expect such people to abandon their customs, traditions, +government, and religion without a struggle. It is out of reason to +expect them to yield to threats and be daunted by a bombshell shot from +a distance. The jungle is thick and extensive, their boats and sails +are ready and light; they know the routes of the sea and can follow +the currents of the ocean in the dark as well as in the light. The +coasts of Borneo and the Celebes are not too far from them, and living +there is as cheap and easy as at home. It is beyond reason to expect +that all sultans, datus, and panglimas will resign their offices, +give up their rank and privileges, and be content to plant corn on +the hillside or catch fish along the beach. The laws of nature are +not ambiguous, and man is man whether his skin is white or brown. + +The chief difficulties Spain had to contend with in the south arose +out of the natural weakness of her system of administration. Her +Governors-General changed frequently. The Moro question received +a secondary attention, and no definite policy or settled course +of action was ever systematically worked out and followed. What +Corcuera planned was not carried out by his successors, and measures +which were approved by General Terrero were disapproved by General +Weyler and ignored by General Blanco. Had Governor-General Urbiztondo +preceded Governor-General Claveria, Jolo might have been attacked and +conquered before 1851, and had Governor-General Malcampo preceded +Governor-General Urbiztondo, the garrison of Jolo might have been +established twenty-five years earlier. + +The policy of Governor Parrado was not followed by Governor Arolas, +and the plans and pledges of the latter were not fully respected +by his successors. Treaties were made to be broken rather than +to be obeyed, and at the end of three hundred and twenty years of +protracted relations with Sulu, no satisfactory policy can be said to +have been decided upon at either Madrid or Manila. The treaty of 1878 +was a temporary expedient. It was not intended to express a policy +nor did Spain intend to restrict her influence to the provisions of +a treaty nor to tie her hands so fast for any length of time. Spain +was intent on the complete conquest of Sulu, the assimilation of all +the Moro tribes, and the unification of government, religion, and +civilization throughout the Philippine Archipelago. This ideal was +the hope of all governors of Sulu and formed a concealed motive that +prompted their actions and guided their administration. The governors +of Sulu differed only in their ideas as to the length of time which +should pass before the Sulus should be denied their autonomy, and the +methods by which the change could be best brought around. There were +opportune and inopportune times to interfere, which were left for the +Governor-General to decide, and in the majority of cases his decision +was controlled not by the immediate needs of the occasion, but by +interests pertaining to the general administration of the Archipelago, +which left partial attention and inadequate means available for the +solution of the vexatious difficulties in the south. Generals who +were anxious to distinguish themselves, took the first opportunity +that offered itself, but satisfied themselves with the immediate +results of victory or the simple correction of the wrong calling +for military action, without bearing in mind the general situation +and the requirements of the next step that should be undertaken as +part of a course planned for the carrying out of a settled general +policy. Thus bound to observe the general provisions of the treaty +of 1878, and limited in the authority granted them from Manila and in +the strength of the garrison assigned to Jolo, the governors of Sulu +felt their hands completely tied, and consequently they could not +accomplish much and left matters to drift with the current of events. + +During the governorship of General Terrero, Governor Arolas was +given a free hand and sufficient troops to carry out his plan; but +Arolas was not much more than a fighting man and an excellent post +commander, and the evils of his strenuous measures outweighed the good +he accomplished; and when the Jolo garrison was subsequently reduced +by Governor-General Weyler his policy could not be continued and was +necessarily doomed to utter failure. + +However, nobody was quicker to note such mistakes and to observe the +needs of the situation than the Spanish officers themselves, especially +inspectors-general who were commissioned to investigate matters and +conditions in Sulu, and historians who made a study of Sulu affairs. + + + +REPORT OF BALTASAR GIRAUDIER + +Of works of this nature we give brief accounts of the estimable +report of Baltasar Giraudier, Director of the "Diario de Manila," +which was presented to the Governor-General, Domingo Moriones, in +1880, and the noteworthy remarks and recommendations of the author of +"Apuntes sobre Jolo," Miguel A. Espina, colonel of infantry. + +Baltasar Giraudier accompanied General Malcampo to Jolo in 1876 and +made special inquiry into the situation in the south. He clearly +stated that the terms of the treaty of 1851 could not be carried out +(to advantage). Failure to observe this treaty provoked the sultan and +Sulus to impatience, resistance, and a rebellious attitude. Referring +to the Jolo campaign of 1876 he estimated the strength of the attacking +army at approximately 11,000 troops, and described Jolo as an actual +churchyard, held in a constant state of siege, and a great cost +to the nation in men and money. Naked facts, he asserted, did not +justify former expeditions, and hostilities were often provoked for +ulterior motives. Considerable harm resulted from such misdirected +measures, while much good to both nations could have been derived from +a policy of attraction, frank, loyal, and disinterested. He called the +attention of the authorities to the necessity of a faithful observance +of the terms of treaties, in order to expect and demand with right +and respect a reciprocal observance of such treaties by the Moros; +to the advisability of honoring and strengthening the authority +of the sultan in order to secure his good will and coöperation in +maintaining peace and harmony and in repressing the evil tendencies +of rebellious datus and subchiefs; to the great advantages that may +arise from reëstablishing the salary of the sultan and promoting +those friendly relations which tend to strengthen the Sulu alliance +and render this state a stronghold and a protecting wall against +invasion from foreign countries. He condemned the treaty of 1878 as +limiting the government's freedom of action and checking the progress +and success of the nation's policy. + +He reiterated that there is great need and necessity of defining +the policy of the nation relative to Sulu and the Moro country in +general. Such a grave question should be settled on a firm basis +and should not be subject to the caprice of an individual governor +or commander of a war vessel. No opportunity should be allowed for +ignorance, malice, false pretexts, and ulterior motives that defame +the national honor, weaken the policy of the government, or work to +the detriment of the people and the country. He pointed to several +incidents of wrong conduct or imprudence on the part of officials which +provoked trouble and war and left on the Moros an impression that the +Spaniards were acting deceitfully and in bad faith. The general policy +he outlined for the information of the government and for the uniform +conduct of all officials was submitted in the form of recommendations, +the most important of which are briefly noted as follows: + + + 1. The sultan and datus should be treated with respect and + consideration. + + 2. Immediate justice and impartiality should be strictly + administered and practiced in all cases and under all conditions, + especially when crime or outrage is committed against the Moros; + for such action would demonstrate in an impressive manner an + upright conduct which would command the fullest respect of the + Moros and obedience to law and order. + + 3. It is of the utmost importance that the belief, temples, + and cemeteries of the people be respected. + + 4. The speedy punishment of all Moro misconduct and aggression + should be secured through the datu or chief. + + 5. The fleet should make frequent visits to various islands to + familiarize the people with the flag, to map the country, and to + study conditions in general. + + 6. Religion should be fully tolerated in the same manner as in + India and Java. Proselytism should be prohibited. + + 7. The sultan should be invited to live in Jolo; an edifice + should be constructed for his residence which would increase his + dignity in the eyes of his people; and he should be given a high + office in connection with the government (as secretary) which + would engender and promote his interest in the government and + its welfare and secure needed and desirable coöperation between + officers and chiefs. + + +In conclusion, Giraudier pointed to the wisdom of English and Dutch +policy in affording education to the sons of native princes and +chiefs at public expense, to the necessity of large sacrifices at +the beginning which would be amply compensated for by a general +pacification of the Archipelago in the end. + + + +VIEWS OF ESPINA + +Colonel Espina assumed that retrogression was out of the question +and that the flag which was waving over Sulu must be defended and +supported. Sulu could not be abandoned to her fate and Spanish +sovereignty had inevitably to be exercised. Extermination of Moros +he held to be absurd and impossible, and measures so directed he +regarded as injurious and unwise. He entertained strong hopes, +amounting to actual conviction, that Moros could become Spanish in +political organization, sympathy, and civilization, and that their +religion did not form an obstacle to their reformation and assimilation +unless conversion into the Christian religion was insisted upon and +rigorously kept up. He thought that the cause of religion alone was +sufficient to prolong the war indefinitely and lead the Government to +a policy of extermination and failure. Instead of that he advised a +prudent and tolerant policy declaring absolute noninterference with +religion and hearty coöperation with the Sulus in matters of general +concern and public welfare. He considered it of great importance to +occupy all the principal islands of the Archipelago with garrisons +and to establish colonies and agricultural stations at the most +desirable localities and harbors. He wrote at considerable length +on the organization of a rural police force to maintain order and +carry out the various measures of his policy. He pointed out the +advisability of strengthening the authority of the sultan over Sulus, +of rendering his appointment subject to the approval or choice of the +Spanish Government, and of selecting a council of state loyal to the +Spanish Government and serving under salary. The chief features of +the policy he outlined are as follows: + + + 1. The organization of the sultanate should be made or continued + in accordance with the laws and customs of the country, but in a + manner agreeable to the interests of the Spanish Government. Rank, + order, and religion should not be interfered with. + + 2. The sultan and members of the council of state should be + appointed by the Governor-General and should have salaries. + + 3. A new treaty should be made in order to rectify those clauses + of the treaty of 1878 pertaining to the maintenance of peace and + the guarantee of safety of life and property. + + 4. Slavery should be abolished, radically and thoroughly. + + 5. Compulsory tribunals of justice or courts should be established + to relieve datus and chiefs of the exercise of such functions. + + 6. Commerce should be encouraged and rendered free for all boats + for a period of twenty-five years. + + 7. Roads should be constructed to facilitate communication and + transportation from the central region of the island to its + principal harbors. + + 8. Agriculture should be developed and colonies encouraged. + + 9. Necessities should be created for the Moros, providing them + at the same time with means for satisfying them. Children of the + sultan and datus should be educated in Manila, and schools for + the Moro dialect should be established and made accessible to + the public. + + + +PURPOSE OF SPAIN + +A few closing remarks on the purpose and interests of Spain in Sulu and +the resources she had available for carrying out this purpose may not +be out of place in order to give the reader a clear idea of the final +policy which Spain had for Sulu and to enable him to grasp the scope, +complexity, and difficulties of this problem. However, in discussing +these subjects and the changes they were intended to bring about it +must be remembered that every project on the part of the sovereign +nation or Spain calls for consideration from two points of view--the +first is whether the agency employed was sufficient and adequate +to impose the change and carry it through; the second is the amount +of resistance such a project encountered on the part of the subject +nation or Sulu, and in case the resistance could be overcome, whether +or not a nation like that of the Sulus was developed sufficiently +for the requirements of the change and for subsequent adaptation to +the system it was proposed to inaugurate. + +Inasmuch as the treaty of 1878 was not abrogated and no distinct +effort was actually made to disregard it, it should be regarded as the +official and most authentic expression of Spain's relation, rights, +and purpose in Sulu. The terms of this treaty gave Spain indisputable +sovereignty over Sulu, the right to occupy all necessary points and to +establish military garrisons wherever needed, the right to establish +custom-houses at occupied points, the right to limit or control the +importation of firearms, the right to suppress piracy and to demand +the Sultan's coöperation in its suppression. + +The degree or amount of sovereignty Spain was to exercise over Sulu +was very indefinitely stated. The term "indisputable" does not signify +"complete," as some hasty reports on Moro affairs have expressed +it. The aim of the treaty was to exclude Great Britain, Germany, and +other foreign nations from the Spanish sphere of influence over Sulu, +and the word "indisputable" should be interpreted in this sense, which +is clearly expressed in the Sulu text of the treaty. At that time +there was no intention on the part of Spain to assume the control +of Sulu internal affairs and the Sulus endeavored to guard their +complete freedom and right to continue their political organization, +laws, and religion by specifying those powers which Spain had a right +to exercise over them and by declaring emphatically that all their +customs, usages, and religion should not be changed. The Sulu word for +"customs" signifies laws, organization, and administrative methods. It +is the political not the social sense of the word about which they were +so very particular. The treaty did not entitle Spain to interference, +or to institute any measure that tended toward political change or +reform in Sulu. The sultan was left supreme in the exercise of his +authority over Moros. The treaty simply secured undisputed Spanish +control over Sulu's foreign relations and commerce and incorporated +Sulu into the Philippine Archipelago in this sense only. It further +established peace within the Archipelago by checking any possible +revival of Sulu piracy. It appears that both distinguished governors, +Martinez and Parrado, interpreted the treaty in this sense, and the +Sulus certainly so understood it. + +Two important steps were taken by Spain later than 1878 in order to +modify the relations established by the treaty. The first of these +steps was a resolution to appoint the Sultan of Sulu or control the +succession to this office. This occurred in 1886 when Sultan Harun +was declared by the Spanish Government, in answer to the requests +of Governor-General Terrero and Governor Arolas, as the legitimate +sultan. By this act the Madrid Government asserted its right to a +degree of actual sovereignty over Sulu internal affairs and backed its +assertion with the necessary force and partially carried it through +at the hands of Governor Arolas. Jamalul Kiram II finally recognized, +to a certain extent, Spain's authority in this matter and accepted +her right of approval or confirmation of the election. + +The second step was an attempt to exact tribute from the Sulus. This +was done by a decree issued in 1894 by Governor-General Blanco +directing that a census be taken of Sulu and a poll tax of 1 "real" +per capita be collected. Advantage was taken at that time of the strong +desire of Raja Muda Amirul Kiram to become sultan. Sultan Harun was +persuaded to resign, and the measure adopted for the collection of the +tribute resulted in the payment of a sum of money or its equivalent by +Amirul Kiram and the latter's appointment as sultan. The scheme was a +compromise by which Spain attempted to assume more control over Sulu, +and Amirul Kiram secured his appointment as sultan without having +to go to Manila for this purpose. However, the attempt to impose a +tribute on the Sulus appears to have failed completely. No census +was taken and no tribute was asked in later years. + +The purpose of Spain, in accordance with her official declarations, +may therefore be summed up as follows: 1. Complete control of Sulu +foreign relations; 2. Complete control of Sulu commerce; 3. The right +to appoint the sultan; 4. The right to impose tribute on the Sulus. + +The first two propositions were legitimate and proper. Both could be +accomplished and retained by virtue of Spain's naval power, merchant +marine, and friendly foreign relations with the European nations. The +Sulus had no navy and no steam vessels. Their native boats could not +offer any significant resistance and were powerless to oppose the +Spanish navy. Ever since 1844 the latter was in the ascendant and by +1870 it had completely overpowered the Sulu naval forces. Both these +propositions were conceded to Spain in the treaty of 1878 and were +justly held ever since. They strengthened the unity of the Philippine +Archipelago and secured strength and permanent internal peace. + +The third proposition, the right to appoint the sultan, was in effect +defeated. It was poor policy. At the end of the bloody struggle that +arose because if it, Spain retained only the right to confirm the +choice of the nation. Had Governor Arolas confined himself to this +point he would have won without a contest and without engendering +hostility and ill feeling toward his Government. Had a test of arms +been the sole arbiter of the question Governor Arolas might be said +to have won his point completely, for his forces defeated those of the +Sulus in every encounter; but the tenacity of purpose, persistence, and +patriotism of the Sulus outlived his determination, and what was won by +force and cruelty was given up in the end as inadvisable and impolitic. + +The fourth proposition fell through. The best argument that can be +advanced in its favor is that a tribute was actually paid by the +Sultan Jamalul Kiram II in 1894 and that the tax was not imposed in +later years because of the extensive campaign conducted in Mindanao +and the frequent changes of Governor-General, and also because of +the Tagalog insurrection of 1896. Such argument is more in the nature +of an apology than a defense. There is some significance in exacting +tribute from the Sultan of Sulu, but the principal of the tribute was +utterly defeated. The sultan evidently evaded the question entirely as +soon as he felt secure in his office. Such a measure would certainly +have been opposed by the Sulus. They would have risen to a man and +sacrificed more life and treasure in this cause than in the previous +one of the appointment of their candidate for the sultanate. The nation +was somewhat divided in the former case, but in the matter of resisting +the payment of a tribute there was not a dissenting vote. They would +have fought most vigorously and unitedly. Governor Arolas did not +exhaust their fighting powers; they could have fought just as well in +1888 as in 1886-87. One party alone advanced against Jolo in 1895, +and a band attacked landing soldiers in 1897. To pay tribute to a +foreign power meant vassalage in their opinion, and this they could +not tolerate. They would fight, not on the strength of a careful and +intelligent estimate of their power as compared to that of Spain, +but because they would not tolerate the idea and their national honor +would prompt them to exhaust their strength before they would yield +to such a humiliating proposition. Their fighting power was only +one unit of their national resources; their national independence, +national character, unity and stability of organization were other +units which added considerable strength to their resistance. What +they could not defeat they would have left alone; what they could +not tolerate they would have evaded; what they could not evade they +would have run away from. + +An exaggerated degree of honor and self-pride, uncontrolled by +a certain degree of intelligence, culture, and moral courage, is +dangerous. Courage unencumbered by prosperity or wealth and spurred +by abnormal religious sentiment, becomes desperate, reckless, and +fanatical. Moreover the treatment by a highly civilized nation of +another limited in culture and development is under moral restrictions +similar to those pertaining to the treatment by a man of mature age of +a minor. A minor can not be blamed for lack of mature reason, and no +more can be expected of him than he is able to do. He must further be +treated with equity and justice, though he is weak and helpless. It +was impossible for the Sulus to change their character at once. It +was absurd to expect of them any action contrary to their natural +disposition and national character. It was the duty of the sovereign +nation to recognize the national character of her inferior and treat +her wisely and justly. Tact might have been mightier than an army +and wise measures might have worked wonders. Nations can be educated +and can develop like individuals and force is a poor agent where the +carrying out of a certain measure is intended to bring about reform. + +Spain imposed tribute upon the Sulus without being prepared to enforce +its collection and before the Sulus were ready for such a measure +and the relation it involved. Granting that the funds derived from +the tax were to be used for the benefit of the Sulus the principle +underlying the institution of the tax is repugnant to the people and +no means were used to remedy this feeling or train the people for +its tolerance. No savage or semicivilized nation can be reformed and +governed without initial expense, nor can reform be effected in a day, +although forces and funds are available in plenty. + + + +RESOURCES OF SPAIN + +In their bearing on the subject under consideration the resources of +Spain may be divided into three divisions--her fighting power, her +government machinery or system of government, and her racial influence. + +Her fighting power includes all the forces of the army and navy which +she could bring to bear on Sulu and her ability to support them. The +largest Spanish force that ever assembled on the soil of Sulu was +that commanded by Governor-General Malcampo in the expedition of 1876; +this was estimated at from 9,000 to 11,000 troops. In January, 1888, +the military forces of the Philippine Islands numbered 12,800 men, +of whom 1,400 were Spaniards and the rest natives. Governor Arolas +never commanded more than 2,000 troops in his various expeditions +and never needed more than that number. A garrison force of 700 men +proved sufficient to repulse a general attack on Jolo in 1881. We may +therefore safely conclude that a force of 2,000 native troops stationed +in Sulu was sufficient for all purposes and considerations. Such a +force should have been kept in Sulu all the time. The moral effect +of maintaining it would be to suppress any attempt at opposition +and to check the tendency to mischief or rebellion. The fact that +there is a ready force behind an order or request prompts obedience +and conformity, before deceit or plots can have time to grow. Wise +measures are more effective and peace is assured. Besides, the honor +of the sovereign power is constantly maintained and no chances for +disregard or dishonor are allowed. Force back of a wise administrator +is a potent factor for good. It need not be used except rarely and +when absolutely necessary. Force is evil only when it is allowed to +rule the head of the administrator and, like every other agency, it is +good only when it is wisely directed. It was therefore necessary and, +in as far as it was needed to back a competent administration, it +should have been provided. Spain could have easily kept such a force +in Sulu all of the time. She had the troops and the means to support +them. She, however, did not do this, and only part of the time did +the Sulu garrison have the required strength. However, the facility +of transporting troops from Zamboanga to Jolo and the preponderance +of her naval forces reduced this deficiency to a minimum and the +fighting power of Spain may, as far as our purpose is concerned, +be deemed to have been adequate to rule Sulu. + +The chief weakness in the Spanish régime lay in her system of +government. Her government machinery proved ineffective and +inadequate. No competent men were educated into the needs of the +situation and given permanent charge of Sulu affairs. Temporary +military commanders were put in command without the necessary +preparation for the requirements of the office. No special ability was +needed to conduct an office already organized, to execute laws already +established, or to carry out a system of government already laid out; +but it required higher abilities to establish sovereignty over a +new state like Sulu, lay down a definite, settled, and wise policy, +and carry out the regeneration and reform of a nation. Besides too +frequent changes in the office of Governor-General, the governors of +Sulu were also allowed too short terms. More than thirteen governors +ruled Sulu in the course of twenty-three years, from 1876 to 1899. Not +one of these felt that it was his duty to institute a permanent policy +for Sulu, or believed that he was going to stay long enough to carry it +through, and that he was going to be held responsible for its conduct, +whether it failed or succeeded. + +The government of a state is entitled to as much consideration as +any business undertaking and there is no reason why it should not +be conducted on sound and businesslike principles. Such methods as +characterized the government of Sulu would have ruined any business +establishment and could not have done justice to any nation or body +of men it represented. The men in responsible positions trusted the +transmission of all official actions and communications to interpreters +of limited capacity and strength of character. No governor could +speak Sulu and verify the translation of his letters and orders. His +knowledge of Sulu affairs and his ideas and opinions were necessarily +colored by the opinions or designs of his interpreters. The strength of +Spain's assertion and declaration of her rights to rule Sulu, exclude +foreign interests, appoint the Sultan of Sulu, and impose tribute +on the Sulus was based on the meaning of the word "sovereignty" +which does not appear at all in the Sulu text of the treaty of +1878. The Sulu copy of the treaty uses in this connection the word +"agad" which means "follow." In the translation of this document from +Sulu into English a point was stretched and "agad" was interpreted as +"obey." While the Sultans of Sulu felt that they were independent and +free in their administration of Sulu internal affairs, and that they +were only obliged to give Spain preference, and ally themselves on her +side when foreign nations interfered, governors like Arolas read the +word "sovereignty" in the Spanish text and tried to inforce its full +and actual sense. The Sulus felt that the Spanish governors were thus +transgressing the limits of their authority, and the Spanish governors +thought at the same time that the Sulus were unreliable and deceitful, +a most undesirable and unfortunate condition of affairs. + +The missionaries in the northern islands acted differently. They talked +the language of the natives and performed their duties creditably +and with unquestionable success. They understood the people, knew +their real conditions, sympathized with them, and worked out their +religious regeneration admirably. The governors of Sulu did not take +any such view of their duties; they had some zeal, but they lacked that +understanding of human nature and the forces of regeneration that the +missionaries mastered. They had no idea of how a Sulu law or custom +could be modified and reformed, for they never acquainted themselves +sufficiently with the laws and customs of the people and never paid +much attention to the feelings and public opinion of the Sulus. They +trusted every measure to force and could not think of reform without +compulsion. A missionary who observed the intense fear of demons on the +part of some pagan Filipinos converted several of them by means of a +picture of hell and satan, and gradually taught them the principles +of Christianity. But the governors of Sulu could never detect any +relation between Sulu and Spanish laws and could never find a method of +approach from one side to the other. Their form of government failed to +adapt itself to the conditions of the country and could neither merge +into the Sulu organization nor adapt the Sulu organization to its +system. No sympathies bound the two races or the two organizations, +and no foundation for unification and subsequent assimilation could +be laid. Spanish jurisdiction remained within the garrison, and its +machinery could find no application outside the walls of Jolo. + +The amount of force needed to reduce and reform Sulu varies in +accordance with the policy pursued. Considerable light can be thrown +on this subject by a study of the circumstances and causes which gave +rise to Datus Ayunan, Mandi, Piang, Ara, and Pedro Cuevas or Kalun. + +Datu Ayunan lived at Taviran and was much lower in rank and influence +than either the Sultan of Bagumbayan or Datu Utu. Having grievances +against Datu Utu he shrewdly allied himself with the Spanish forces and +rendered them valuable assistance. In a short time he rose to power, +dignity, and fame and died greater in the estimation of the country +than his overlord, the Sultan of Bagumbayan. + +Datu Piang married the daughter of Datu Ayunan and learned his +methods. As soon as Datu Utu's attitude toward him became unbearable +and hostile he offered his services to the Spanish authorities and won +their protection and support. By shrewd tactics he dispossessed his +former master Utu of his best lands, attracted most of his following +and caused his downfall. At the time of the Spanish evacuation he had +become the richest Moro in Mindanao and the most influential chief +in the island. + +Datu Ara had Chinese blood in him. He married his daughter to the +Gugu [224] of Magindanao, won the favor of the governor of Kotabato, +and ruled over all Moros on the southern branch of the Mindanao River +below Tamontaka. He was strong and well respected. + +Datu Mandi married the daughter of a Samal chief of Zamboanga and +through his tact and ability to speak Spanish established for himself +a respectable position over the Samals of Mindanao. He served the +interests of Spain faithfully and bore arms in her behalf against +Bisayans and Lanao Moros. The recognition and support he obtained from +the Spanish Government raised him to the rank of a datu and gave him +supremacy over all the chiefs of the peninsula of Zamboanga. A close +observation of Datu Mandi's ability and attitude toward the government +renders it clear that the influence this man could bring to bear on +his people was immense. It is no exaggeration to state that had his +influence been tactfully utilized, he could have easily, with the aid +of one company of Spanish troops, reduced to submission all Moros and +Subanuns living between Point Flechas and Sindangan on the outskirts +of Dapitan. There never existed a Moro chief more tactful, pliable, +forceful, and favorable to the reorganization of the Moro community +and its system of government along modern and civilized lines. + +With little aid from the governor of Zamboanga, Pedro Cuevas made +himself the real lord of northern Basilan. His power was further well +respected throughout all the Basilan Group of islands. With no more +than two companies of troops at his disposal he could have acted as +the Spanish representative and subordinate ruler or governor of all +the Basilan and Balangingi Groups of islands and could have effected +any reform desired. + +By tact and ability these men obtained Spanish influence and support +and rose from the lowest ranks of the people to positions of great +power and dignity. Had the Spanish Government employed such men to +further its influence by enlarging their following and extending +their territories and spheres of activity, there is no doubt that +a very significant step would have been taken which would have made +clear to the Spanish authorities successful methods of procedure and +new lines of policy that lead to success. + +Similar lines of action could have been adopted in Sulu by taking +advantage of existing parties and factions. Once the sympathy of +one Sulu party was obtained and its forces bore arms on behalf of +or on the same side with Spain, the door would have been opened for +effective influence and wise measures directed along the line of +cleavage would have been bound to produce results. A minimum of force +would then be needed, and strained relations and discord would give +way to friendship and concord. The history of Sulu is not wanting +in proof that wise attractive methods have been more effective than +force and arbitrary rule, and, once we reflect upon Abu Bakr's rule +and the wonderful reformation he worked out, then we realize what +was and what was not a wise policy for Sulu. + +Little attention has, as a rule, been given to race characteristics +as a potent factor in a nation's policy. The racial character of +the sovereign nation bears on the ruled nation in several ways--in +the conduct and demeanor of officials in their official and social +relations with the chiefs and common people, in the demeanor of +soldiers and civilians in their social intercourse with the mass of the +people, and in the industrial or business relations of the two nations. + +The Sulu datus and chiefs are very courteous and polite and +are unusually keen to notice personal discourtesy. Impulsive and +unconciliatory methods are bitterly resented, and an abrupt manner +may in itself be sufficient to defeat any measure. The people in +general have no patience with an impetuous officer and hate to be +discourteously treated even by their datus. Treated with disrespect +by the authorities or disregarded by the ruling race, they become +exclusive, evasive, indifferent, unsympathetic, and discontented. The +ruling race can be polite, courteous, and civil in all its social +relations with those under it and yet retain its racial supremacy +and social position, and win the respect and submission of the ruled +race. If ordinary civil duties require good breeding and good manners, +the duties of the Spanish officer toward the native chiefs certainly +demanded the highest qualities of a gentleman and the most sympathetic, +upright, and firm disposition possible. Many Spanish officers possessed +these qualities and conducted their offices with full dignity and +credit, but it can not be said that all officers were so fully +qualified. Such facts in themselves are sufficient to determine the +quality of the person to whom state affairs in Sulu should be trusted. + +Further, the reform of a nation can never be fully accomplished without +the aid of her chiefs and leaders. The coöperation of the natives is a +very potent factor for good, and a system of government which aims at +the elevation of a conquered nation must find a place in its machinery +for the activities of natives of ability and influence. Hence the +necessity of successful coöperation with natives and the importance +of securing higher qualifications in men holding the highest offices +of government. The fewer such officers are and the abler they are, +the better and safer the result will be. Such men can overcome racial +prejudices and national sentiments and grievances and by the manner in +which they discharge their duties, they can command the approval and +respect of the ruled nation, gain its sympathies to the side of the +government, and maintain peace, prosperity, and good relations between +the governing and the governed nations. However, these results were +not obtained by Spain in Sulu. The religion and racial prejudices of +the two nations were never overcome and the Sulus maintained a feeling +of revulsion and distrust toward Spaniards and Christian Filipinos. + +Great aid is rendered the government when the ruling race is competent +and resourceful enough to utilize the services of the ruled race and +at the same time give it sufficient space and latitude for the exercise +of its energies and the satisfaction of its ambitions. A most favorable +industrial relation can be maintained, if the capital of the sovereign +nation can find opportunities to invest in the conquered territory, +buy up its crude products, and promote its natural resources. The +natives then find work to do, increase in prosperity, and look upon +the existence of the ruling race as favorable for their development +and progress, but in case the subjugated nation is crowded out of its +territories and robbed of its resources by keen competition, greed, +or undue domination on the part of the ruling race, hostilities are +bound to arise and disaffection extends from industrial relations to +politics and may lead to trouble and rebellion. + +Many Spaniards seemed to regard Sulu as a very desirable country for +colonization and offered many suggestions as to the most favorable +sites for factories, the best industries that could be developed, +and the best methods and means of exploitation. Several farms were +started in the vicinity of Jolo, but they were abandoned even before +the evacuation of the islands, and no effective step can be said to +have been taken by Spain to colonize Sulu except the building up of the +town of Jolo itself. This subject has therefore played no important +part in the policy exercised by Spain in Sulu and very little can be +said in this connection. It must, however, be stated that the lands +of the Archipelago of Sulu are extremely limited in area and should +have been reserved for the Sulus. Perfect disinterestedness should +have been exhibited by the Spaniards in this regard. [225] + + + + + + + +APPENDIXES TO PART II + + +APPENDIX I + +THE PACIFICATION OF MINDANAO BY RONQUILLO + + +[Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas, Dr. Antonio de Morga, Mexico, +1609.] [226] + +Shortly after Don Francisco Tello had taken over the governorship, +news was brought of the death of Esteban Rodriguez de Figueroa in +Mindanao by Brother Gaspar Gomez of the Society of Jesus. The latter +brought the body for burial in the college of Manila, of which Don +Esteban was patron. Juan de la Xara wrote that he had charge of +affairs, that he had settled in Tampakan, [227] that he intended to +continue the pacification and conquest of the island as should seem +most advisable, and that reënforcements of men and other things should +be sent him. It was learned that he intended to make an ill use of +the government, and would not remain dependent on, and subordinate +to, the governor of the Philippines; and that he was depriving the +heirs of Esteban Rodriguez of what lawfully belonged to them. It +was learned that, in order to make himself safer in this respect, +he was sending his confidants to the town of Arévalo in Oton where +Don Esteban had left his wife, Doña Ana de Osseguera, and his two +small daughters, with his house and property, to persuade Doña Ana +to marry him. This resolution appeared injurious in many respects, +and the attempt was made to rectify matters. But in order not to +disturb the affairs of Mindanao, the matter was left alone for the +present, until time should show the course to be followed. And so it +happened that when Juan de la Xara left the camp and settlements of +Mindanao, and came hurriedly to Oton to negotiate his marriage in +person--although the widow of Don Esteban had never been favorable +to it--Don Francisco Tello sent men to arrest him. He was brought to +Manila, where he died while his trial was being conducted. + +After the imprisonment of Juan de la Xara, Don Francisco Tello +immediately sent Captain Toribio de Miranda to Mindanao, with orders to +take command of the camp and to govern until some one should agree +to continue the enterprise. When he arrived at Mindanao and the +soldiers saw that Juan de la Xara's schemes had been defeated, and +that the latter was a prisoner in Manila, with no hope of returning, +they obeyed Toribio de Miranda and the orders that he brought. + +In Manila the governor was considering carefully the necessary +measures for continuing the war, since the island of Mindanao was so +near the other pacified islands, and the island itself contained some +provinces that professed peace and were apportioned as encomiendas +and had Spanish magistrates, such as the rivers of Butuan, Dapitan, +and Karaga, so that it was desirable to pacify the whole island and +subject it to His Majesty. The royal treasury was spent and could +not bear the expense; and Esteban Rodriguez had bound himself by a +legal writ to carry the war to entire completion at his own expense, +in accordance with the terms of his agreement. The guardian of his +children and heirs brought the matter before the court, and refused +to fulfill this obligation on account of Esteban Rodriguez's death. In +order not to lose time, for what had been commenced had to be continued +in one way or another, the governor decided to prosecute it, drawing +the necessary funds from the royal treasury, either on its own account +or on the account of Esteban Rodriguez's heirs, if such should be +according to law. The governor then searched for a person to go to +Mindanao, and selected Don Juan Ronquillo, general of the galleys. The +latter was given the necessary reënforcements of men and other things, +with which he reached Mindanao. He took command of the Spanish camp and +fleet which he found in Tampakan. He confirmed the peace and friendship +with the chiefs and people of Tampakan and Lumagan, restored and set +in better order the Spanish settlement and fort, and began to make +preparation for the war against the people of Bwayan. [228] He spent +many days in making a few incursions into their land and attacks on +their forts, but without any notable result, for the enemy were many +and all good soldiers, with plenty of arquebuses and artillery, and +had fortified themselves in a strong position. They had many other +fortifications inland and went from one to the other with impunity, +whenever they wished, and greatly harassed the Spaniards, who were +little used to so swampy a country. The latter found themselves short +of provisions without the possibility of getting them in the country +on account of the war, inasmuch as the camp contained many men, +both Spaniards and the native servants and boatmen, and it was not +easy at all times to come and go from one part to another in order +to provide necessities. + +Meanwhile Don Juan Ronquillo, seeing that the war was advancing very +slowly and with little result, and that the camp was suffering, drew up +a report of it, and sent letters in all haste to Governor Don Francisco +Tello, informing him of the condition of affairs. He wrote that it +would be better to withdraw the camp from Mindanao River, so that +it might not perish; and that a presidio could be established on the +same island in the port of La Caldera, which could be left fortified, +in order not to abandon this enterprise entirely, and so that their +friends of Tampakan and Lumagan might be kept hostile to the people of +Bwayan. Meanwhile he and the rest of the camp and fleet would return +to Manila, if permitted, for which he requested the governor to send +him an order quickly. Upon the receipt of this dispatch, Governor Don +Francisco Tello resolved to order Don Juan Ronquillo, since the above +was so and the camp could not be maintained, nor the war continued +advantageously, to withdraw with his whole camp from Mindanao River. He +was first to make a great effort to chastise the enemy in Bwayan, and +then to burn the Spanish settlement and fort and go to La Caldera, +fortify it, and leave there a sufficient garrison with artillery, +boats, and provisions for its maintenance and service. Then he was +to return to Manila with the rest of his men, after telling their +friends in Tampakan that the Spaniards would shortly return to the +river better equipped and in great numbers. + +Silonga [229] and other chiefs of Bwayan were not neglecting their +defense, since, among other measures taken, they had sent a chief +to Ternate to ask assistance against the Spaniards who had brought +war into their homes. Thereupon the King of Ternate dispatched a +numerous fleet of caracoas and other boats to Mindanao with cachils +[230] and valiant soldiers--more than 1,000 fighting men in all--and +a quantity of small artillery, in order to force the Spaniards to +break camp and depart, even could they do nothing else. When the news +reached Bwayan that this fleet was coming to their defense and support, +they made ready and prepared to attack the Spaniards, who also having +heard the same news were not careless. Consequently the latter turned +their attention more to the main fort, and reduced the number of men +in the smaller forts on Butil [231] River and other posts, mouths, +and arms of the same river. These served to strengthen the garrison of +the main fort and the armed galleys and other smaller craft, in order +to use the latter to resist the expected attack of the enemy. The +enemy having gallantly advanced to the very fort of the Spaniards +with all their vessels and men, attacked and stormed it with great +courage and resolution, in order to effect an entrance. The Spaniards +within resisted valiantly, and those outside in the galleys on the +river assisted them so effectively that together, with artillery and +arquebuses, and at times in close combat with swords and kampilan, +they made a great slaughter and havoc among the men of Ternate and +those of Bwayan, who were aiding the former. They killed and wounded a +great number of them and captured almost all the caracoas and vessels +of the enemy, so that very few boats escaped, and they were pursued +and burned by the Spaniards, who made many prisoners and seized immense +booty and many weapons from the enemy. As soon as possible after this, +the Spaniards turned against the settlements and forts of Bwayan where +some of their results were of so great moment that the enemy, seeing +themselves hard pressed and without anyone to help them, sent messages +and proposals of peace to Don Juan Ronquillo, which were ended by their +rendering recognition and homage, and the renewal of friendship with +the people of Tampakan, their ancient enemy. In order to strengthen +the friendship, they sealed it by the marriage of the greatest chief +and lord of Bwayan with the daughter of another chief of Tampakan, +called Dungunlibur. Thereupon the war was apparently completely ended, +provisions were now to be had, and the Spaniards with little precaution +crossed and went about the country wherever they wished. The people of +Bwayan promised to dismantle all their forts immediately, for that was +one of the conditions of peace. Then the Spaniards returned to their +fort and settlements at Tampakan, whence Don Juan Ronquillo immediately +sent dispatches to Governor Don Francisco Tello, informing him of the +different turn that the enterprise had taken. In view of the present +condition he requested the governor to issue new instructions as to +his procedure, saying that he would wait without making any change, +notwithstanding the arrival of the answer which he expected to his +first report, for conditions had now become so much better than before +that the governor's decision would be different. + +The governor had already answered Don Juan Ronquillo's first dispatch, +as we have said above, when the second dispatch arrived with news +of the successes in Mindanao. Suspicious of the men in the camp who +had constantly shown a desire to return to Manila, and little relish +for the hardships of war, and fearing lest they would return at the +arrival of the first order, executing that order and abandoning the +enterprise which had reached such a satisfactory stage; and thinking +that it would be unwise to abandon the river, the governor made haste +to send a second dispatch immediately by various roads, ordering them +to pay no attention to his first orders, but to remain in Mindanao, and +that he would soon send them what was necessary for further operations. + +It seems that this message traveled slowly; for, the first having +arrived, they obeyed it without any further delay, and camp was +raised and the country abandoned. To their former enemy of Bwayan +they gave as a reason that the governor of Manila had summoned them; +and to their friends of Tampakan they said that they would leave +men in La Caldera for their security, and that assistance would be +sent them from Manila. This news caused as much sorrow and sadness +to the latter as joy to the people of Bwayan. Then, after burning +their fort and settlement, the Spaniards embarked all their forces as +soon as possible, left the river, and went to La Caldera, 24 leagues +farther down in the direction of Manila. Having entered port, they +built a fortress and left there a garrison of 100 Spaniards, with +some artillery, provisions, and boats for their use. + +At this juncture the governor's second message to General Don Juan +Ronquillo arrived, to which the latter replied that he was already +in La Caldera, and could not return to the river. Then, without any +further delay, Don Juan Ronquillo went to Manila with the balance of +his fleet, by way of the Provinces of Oton and Panay. The governor, +having heard of his coming, sent to arrest him on the road before +he entered the city, and proceeded against him by law for having +withdrawn the camp and army from Mindanao River, without awaiting the +orders he should have expected after the favorable turn that affairs +had taken. Don Juan Ronquillo was set at liberty on showing a private +letter from the governor, which the latter had sent him separately +with the first instructions, to the effect that he should return +to Manila with his troops in any event, for they were needed in the +Islands for other purposes; and because of this letter Don Juan had +determined not to await the second order. + + + + + + +APPENDIX II + +THE PACIFICATION OF MINDANAO [232] + + +[Concerning the pacification of the Island of Mindanao in the +year 1600.] [233] + + +In the relation of the last year you will have learned how occurred +the death, in the pacification of the Island of Mindanao, of Esteban +Rodriguez de Figueroa, who offered to carry out this pacification +under the conditions which he stipulated with Gomez Perez Dasmariñas, +formerly governor of these islands, copies of which were sent +to His Majesty and to Master-of-Camp Juan de Lajara, formerly of +the said expedition, who succeeded to his place when the camp was +abandoned, and came to Manila. Don Francisco Tello, Governor and +Captain-General of the said Philippine Islands, who at that time +had taken possession of the government, was considering how to aid +and stimulate the said pacification at the expense of the heirs +of Esteban Rodriguez, and with the agreement of the captains and +persons who were long resident and experienced in war in the said +islands. Don Juan Ronquillo was appointed commander of the galleys +to prosecute the said pacification, and in the meantime, in order to +be present and continue the expedition, Capt. Toribio de Miranda was +sent forward to encourage and animate the troops, under orders to +keep them in his charge; and in case the post should be abandoned, +and a retreat made to Manila, he should detain the troops and return +to Mindanao. The said Capt. Toribio de Miranda having arrived at the +Island [234] of La Caldera, which lies 40 leagues from the river of +Mindanao, there found the whole camp, which was returning from the said +islands. Conformably to the orders which he had, he turned back and +fortified the site where they had first been, which was on the river, +4 leagues from the forts of the enemy. Juan Ronquillo, having been +dispatched to Mindanao, had taken the camp in his charge, and begun +to achieve some success. He achieved a victory in the battle which he +fought with the Ternatans, who had entered with 800 men to give aid +to the people of Mindanao. Before these successes, he had written a +letter in disparagement of that country (a copy of which was sent to +His Majesty), on account of which, in a council of war which had been +held, the General Don Ronquillo had been ordered to make a last effort +against the Mindanaos, doing them all possible damage. He was then to +come to the Island [235] of La Caldera and there build a fort, to be +garrisoned with a hundred Spanish soldiers, with artillery, arms, and +munitions, and leave them there as a check upon Ternate and Mindanao, +in charge of a good soldier, one of the captains of the camp, and +with the rest return to Manila. Although Don Juan Ronquillo received +this order, after having won considerable victories, he again wrote +that he would not abandon that place, even if such were the order, +because it would not be expedient to retire from the camp and comply +with what had been ordered, when he was leaving the Island of Mindanao +already pacified, the chiefs, with whom he had used gentle means, that +they might all be more contented, having again rendered submission to +His Majesty, and likewise as the King of Sulu again rendered obedience +and submission. Confiding in this, Capt. Cristobal Villagra, whom Don +Juan Ronquillo had appointed commander of the garrison of La Caldera, +had sent 30 soldiers to the Island of Sulu for supplies. They found at +this time in Jolo a Mindanao chief, an uncle of the King of Mindanao +and a brother-in-law of the King of Sulu, who had been driven out +of Mindanao because he was rebellious. He treacherously killed 13 +Spanish soldiers. When news of this was brought, Juan Pacho was +sent to take the troops of La Caldera in charge, and, when it should +seem best to him, to try to inflict punishment with 600 Spaniards; +the enemy unfortunately killed the said Juan Pacho and 29 Spaniards, +the rest of them retiring without any success. This news having come +to the governor, he sent in place of Juan Pacho, Capt. Toribio de +Miranda, a person in whom he had entire confidence, with an order not +to attempt any punishment until he had force enough for it. After +this Capt. Toribio de Miranda arrived at La Caldera on the 26th of +August, 1599. When the garrison was given into his charge he put +the defensive works in order, and with the arms which he brought, +and those which he found in the fort, he armed all the troops, +amounting to 114 soldiers. As directed by an order of the governor, +he sent a chief of the Pintados [Bisayans] to Mindanao with letters to +the chiefs of the island, in which he informed them that they would be +protected, favored, and upheld in justice, as vassals of His Majesty, +and that with this object a garrison had been placed in La Caldera; +and that to aid in maintaining it, and in covering the expenses which +they had caused in the war by their disobedience, the largest possible +quantity of tributes would be collected for His Majesty, and that he +would send for them shortly, which had not been done earlier because +the Mindanaos had been so spent and afflicted. Having arrived on the +2d of September at the river of Mindanao, and delivered his dispatch, +this chief was well received, and found the people in the settled +state in which Gen. Don Juan Ronquillo had left them. Raja Muda, +the main chief of Mindanao, in the name of them all, sent him back +on the 15th of the said month, offering to give to His Majesty all +the tribute which they could collect. + +At this time news from the chief captain of Malacca having reached the +governor, to the effect that in the Sunda, [236] 150 leagues from that +port, there had been seen a number of English ships, whose designs were +not known; and, a little later, word from the commander of the fort of +Maluco that there were at Ternate, within the port, two English ships +with 400 men and 50 pieces of artillery; a council of war was held +as to what was best to do. The said council decided to withdraw the +garrison from La Caldera to Cebu, so that the enemy should not take +that place; and, if they should attempt to do damage to that province, +they would find it in a state of defense. Accordingly an order was +sent to Capt. Toribio de Miranda to withdraw with the troops, arms, +artillery, and munitions, dismantling the fort; he was also told that +he could return shortly to the island; with more troops and arms, in +order to assist in its defense. On the 9th of September Capt. Toribio +de Miranda arrived at Cebu, with all the troops, artillery, arms, +and munitions; and at the same time Gen. Don Juan Tello arrived at +Cebu with a hundred men, who came as reënforcement from the city +of Manila. Having spent six months there and commenced to build a +fort of stone, the governor, as they had no more news of the English +referred to, sent an order to the said Don Juan to come to the city +of Manila--which he did with the hundred men. leaving the Province +of Cebu in a prosperous condition, with the troops which are usually +kept there, and those of the garrison of La Caldera, which in all +amounted to 250 Spaniards. + +After all this, in June of 1600, the governor received news, by way +of Malacca, that the ships which had passed to the South Sea belonged +to Dutch merchants, who had come to load with spices in the Maluco +Islands. Having transacted their business, they had returned to their +own country by way of India, without doing any damage to the islands +of the west; it therefore seems that we are safe, notwithstanding +the news received of those enemies. + + + + + + +APPENDIX III + +THE MORO RAIDS OF 1599 AND 1600 + + +[Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas, Dr. Antonio de Morga, Mexico, +1609.] [237] + + +The Spanish garrison left in La Caldera, at the withdrawal of Don +Ronquillo's camp from the river of Mindanao, passed into command +of Captain Villagra at the death of Capt. Juan Pacho in Jolo, and +was suffering for lack of provisions; for neither the people of the +river could give them to the Spaniards, nor would the Sulus furnish +any on account of the war declared upon them. Therefore the garrison +urgently requested Governor Don Francisco Tello either to aid their +presidio with provisions, soldiers, and ammunition, or to allow them +to retire to Manila--a thing of which they were most desirous--since +there they gained no other special result than that of famine, and +of incarceration in that fort, and of no place wherein to seek their +sustenance. The governor, in view of their insistence in the matter, +and having but little money in the royal exchequer, with which to +provide for and maintain the said presidio and for the same reason +the punishment that was to be inflicted upon the Sulus for their +outrages upon the Spaniards, and their insurrection was deferred--and +thinking that the return to Mindanao matters would be a long question, +he was inclined to excuse the difficulty and anxiety of maintaining the +presidio of La Caldera. In order to do it with a reasonable excuse he +consulted the Audiencia and other intelligent persons, and requested +them to give him their opinion. But he first communicated his wishes +to them and gave them some reasons with which he tried to persuade +them to give him the answer that he desired. The Audiencia advised him +not to remove or raise the garrison of La Caldera, but to reënforce +and maintain it, and to attend to the affairs of Sulu and the river +of Mindanao as soon as possible, even if what was necessary for those +two places should be withdrawn from some other section. They said that +this was the most urgent need, and the one which required the greatest +attention in the islands, both in order to pacify those provinces and +to keep them curbed; lest, seeing the Spaniards totally withdrawn, +they should gain courage and boldly venture still farther and come +down to make captures among the Pintados [Bisayans] and carry the +war to the very doors of the Spaniards. Notwithstanding this reply +the governor resolved to raise and withdraw the garrison, and sent +orders to Captain Villagra immediately to burn the fort which had +been built in La Caldera, to withdraw with all his men and ships, +and return to Manila. This was quickly done, for the captain and the +soldiers of the garrison waited for nothing more than to dismantle +the fort and leave. When the Sulus saw the Spaniards abandoning the +country, they were persuaded that the latter would return to Mindanao +no more, and that they had not sufficient forces to do so. Thereupon +they gained fresh resolution and courage, and united with the people +of Bwayan on the river, and equipped a number of caracoas and other +craft, in order to descend upon the coast of Pintados (Bisayas) +to plunder them and make captives. The people of Tampakan, who +lost hope of receiving further help from the Spaniards, and of the +latter's return to the river, since they had also abandoned the fort +of La Caldera and left the country, came to terms with and joined +the people of Bwayan, their neighbors, in order to avoid the war and +injuries that they were suffering from the latter. Then all turned +their arms against the Spaniards, promising themselves to make many +incursions into their territory and gain much plunder. Accordingly +they prepared their fleet and appointed as leaders and commanders of +it two of the experienced chiefs of the river of Mindanao, called +Sali and Silungan. [238] They left the Mindanao River in the month +of July of the year 1599, in the season of the vendabals, [239] +with 50 caracoas, containing more than 3,000 soldiers armed with +arquebuses, kampilan, carasas, [240] other weapons with handles, and +many culverins, and steered toward the islands of Oton and Panay, and +neighboring islands. They passed Negros Island and went to the river +of Panay, which they ascended for 5 leagues to the chief settlement, +where the alcalde-mayor and some Spaniards were living. They sacked +the settlement, burned the houses and churches, captured many native +Christians--men, women, and children--upon whom they committed many +murders, cruelties, and outrages. They pursued these in boats more +than 10 leagues up the river, and destroyed all the crops. For the +alcalde-mayor, and those who could, fled inland among the mountains, +and accordingly the enemy had a better opportunity to do what they +pleased. After they had burned all the vessels in the river, they +left the river of Panay with their boats laden with pillaged goods +and captive Christians. They did the same in the other islands and +towns which they passed. Then they returned to Mindanao, without +any opposition being offered, with a quantity of gold and goods and +more than 800 captives, besides the people whom they had killed. In +Mindanao they divided the spoil, and agreed to get ready a larger +fleet for the next year, and return to make war better prepared. [241] + +This daring attack of the Mindanaos worked great injury to the Pintado +Islands [Bisayas], both on account of their deeds there and also on +account of the fear and terror with which they inspired the natives; +because of the latter being in the power of the Spaniards, who kept +them subject, tributary, and disarmed, and neither protected them from +their enemies, nor left them the means to defend themselves, as they +used to do when there were no Spaniards in the country. Therefore many +towns of peaceful and subjected Indians revolted and withdrew to the +tingues, [242] and refused to descend to their houses, magistrates, +and encomenderos. [243] As was reported daily, they all had a great +desire to revolt and rebel, but they were appeased and reduced +again to subjection by a few promises and presents from their +encomenderos and religious who showed great pity and sadness over +their injuries. Although in Manila people regretted these injuries, +and still more those which were expected in the future from the enemy, +they did nothing but regret them--since the governor was ill provided +with ships and other necessities for the defense--and reckon them +with the loss which they had suffered for having raised the camp on +the river of Mindanao and dismantled the presidio of La Caldera. + +As soon as the weather permitted, the Mindanaos and Sulus returned +with a large fleet of more than 70 well-equipped ships and more than +4,000 fighting men, led by the same Silungan and Sali, and other +Mindanao and Sulu chiefs, to the same Islands of Pintados [Bisayas], +with the determination of taking and sacking the Spanish town of +Arévalo, which is situated in Oton. Capt. Juan García de Sierra, +alcalde mayor of that province, having heard of this expedition and +of the designs entertained by the enemy, took the most necessary +precautions, and gathering into the town all the Spaniards who +lived there and in its neighborhood, shut himself up in it with +all of them. Then, having repaired, as well as possible, a wooden +fort there, he gathered there the women and their possessions. He +and the Spaniards--about 70 men--armed with arquebuses, awaited the +enemy. The latter, who intended to attack the river of Panay again, +passed Negros Island and made for the town of Arévalo, where they +anchored close to the native settlement. Then they landed 1,500 men +armed with arquebuses, kampilan, and carasas, and, without stopping +on the way marched against the Spanish town which was the object of +their attack. The Spaniards, divided into troops, sallied forth and +opened fire with their arquebuses upon the enemy with such vehemence +that they forced them to retreat and take refuge on board their +caracoas. So great was the enemy's confusion that many Mindanaos +were killed before they could embark. Capt. Juan García de Sierra, +who was on horseback, pursued the enemy so closely to the water's edge +that the latter cut off the legs of his mount with their kampilan and +brought him to the ground, where they killed him. The enemy embarked +with a heavy loss of men, and halted at the Island of Gimarás, [244] +in sight of Arévalo. There they counted their men, including the dead +and the wounded, who were not a few, and among whom was one of the +most noted chiefs and leaders. Then they sailed for Mindanao, making +a great show of grief and sorrow, and sounding their bells [245] +and tifas. [246] They made no further delay at Pintados [Bisayas], +deriving little profit or gain from the expedition but much injury, +and loss of men and reputation, which was felt more deeply upon their +arrival in Sulu and Mindanao. In order to remedy this disaster, it +was proposed to renew their expedition against the Pintados at the +first monsoon with more ships and men, and it was so decided. + + + + + + +APPENDIX IV + +GALLINATO'S EXPEDITION TO JOLO + + +[Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas, Dr. Antonio de Morga, Mexico, +1609.] [247] + + +The daring and audacity of the Mindanaos and Sulus in making incursions +with their fleets into the Islands of Pintados [Bisayas] had reached +such a state that it was now expected that they would come as far as +Manila, plundering and devastating. In order to check them, at the +beginning of the year 1602, Governor Don Francisco Tello, deriving +strength from weakness, determined that the expedition against Sulu +should be made at once, without more delay, in order to punish and +pacify it, with the forces and men whom Capt. and Sargento-mayor +Juan Xuarez Gallinato held in Cebu and in the Pintados [Bisayas] +together with more men, ships, and provisions, which were sent him, +accompanied by the necessary documents and instructions for him +to enter the island, chastise its king and inhabitants, and pacify +and reduce it to the obedience of his Majesty. By this means, until +there should be an opportunity to settle the affairs of Mindanao, +which is quite near Sulu, the audacity of the enemy would be checked; +and by bringing the war into his own country, he would not come out +to commit depredations. Captain Gallinato set out on this expedition +with 200 Spanish soldiers, ships, artillery, enough provisions for four +months--the time which it was thought the expedition would last--and +with Indians as rowers for the ships and for other services that might +arise. When he arrived at Sulu, at the bar of the river of this island, +which is 2 leagues from the principal town and dwellings of the king, +he landed his men, artillery, and the necessary provisions and left +his ships under a sufficient guard. The islanders were all in the town +and dwellings of the king, which are situated on a very high hill above +some cliffs, and have two roads of approach through paths and roads so +narrow that they can be reached only in single file. They had fortified +the whole place, intrenched it with palms and other woods and a number +of culverins. They had also collected provisions and water for their +sustenance, besides a supply of arquebuses and other weapons. They +had neither women nor children with them, for they had taken them out +of the island. They had requested aid from the people of Mindanao, +Bruney, and Ternate, and were awaiting the same, since they had been +informed of the fleet which was being prepared against them in the +Pintados [Bisayas]. Gallinato determined to pitch his camp near the +town before this aid should arrive, and to attack the fort. After he +had quartered himself at a distance of one-half league, in a plain +facing the ascent, he sent interpreters with messages to the king and +chiefs of the island, calling on them to surrender, and telling them +that good terms would be given them. While waiting for an answer, +he fortified his quarters in that spot, intrenching himself wherever +necessary. He mounted the artillery in the best position for use, +and kept his men ready for any emergency. A false and deceptive answer +was returned, making excuses for the excesses that had been committed, +and for not complying just then with what had been asked of them, and +making loud promises to do so later. All this was with the object of +detaining the captain in that place, which is very unhealthy, until the +rains should set in, his provisions run short, and the arrival of the +expected aid. After this answer had been received the Sulus, thinking +that the Spaniards had become more careless on account of it, swarmed +down quickly from the said fort in a large body of probably somewhat +over one thousand; and armed with arquebuses and other weapons with +handles, kampilan, and caraças, attacked and assaulted the quarters +and camp of the Spaniards. This could not be done so secretly as not +to be seen by the Spaniards and allow them opportunity to prepare +to receive the Sulus before their arrival. This the Spaniards did, +and having permitted the natives to come all together in a body to +the very inside of the quarters and trenches, as soon as the Sulus +had discharged their arquebuses the Spaniards opened fire upon them, +first with their artillery, and then with their arquebuses, killing +many, and forcing the rest to retire in flight to the fort. The +Spaniards pursued them, wounding and killing to the middle of the +hill. But seeing that farther on the paths were so narrow and rough, +they retreated before the heavy artillery fire from the heights +and the large stones hurled down upon them and returned to their +quarters. Upon many other days efforts were made to reach the fort, +but without any result. Thereupon Gallinato, in consideration of the +war being prolonged beyond what had been expected, built two forts, +one where he kept his ships in order to defend them and the port; +and the other one-half league farther on in a suitable place where +they could take refuge and communicate with the camp. The forts were +built of wood and fascines and fortified with the artillery from the +ships. The Spaniards shut themselves up in these forts, whence from +time to time they sallied, making incursions as far as the enemy's +fort. The latter always remained shut up in their fort without ever +choosing to come down or to yield; for he was convinced that the +Spaniards could not remain long in the island. When Gallinato saw that +the rains were fast setting in, that his men were becoming ill, and +that his provisions were failing without his having accomplished the +desired task, and that it could not be accomplished with his remaining +resources, and that the enemy from Mindanao with other allies of theirs +were boasting that they were gathering a large fleet in order to drive +the Spaniards from Jolo, he sent news of all that had occurred to the +governor of Manila, with a plan of the island and fort and a relation +of the difficulties which the enterprise presented. He sent this in a +vessel, by Capt. and Sargento-mayor Pedro Cotelo de Morales, toward the +end of May of the year 1602, in order to obtain instructions as to his +procedure, and the necessary reënforcement of men and provisions. The +captain was charged to return quickly with the answer. * * * + +At the same time that Governor Don Pedro de Acuña entered upon +his administration, the captain and sargento-mayor, Pedro Cotelo +de Morales, arrived from Jolo with the advices and report of Juan +Xuarez Gallinato concerning the state of affairs in that island, +whither he had gone with the fleet at the beginning of that same +year. The governor, on account of the importance of the matter, +wished to make every effort possible, and determined to send him +supplies and a reënforcement of some men, which he did as soon as +possible. He was ordered to at least make an effort to punish that +enemy, even if he could do nothing more, and whenever the opportunity +presented itself, to go to do the same thing in the river of Mindanao, +and return to the Pintados [Bisayas]. When this commission reached +Jolo Gallinato was already so worn out, and his men so ill, that the +reënforcements only made it possible for him to get away from there; +accordingly without seeing to another thing, he broke camp, burned the +forts which he had built, embarked, and went to Pintados, leaving the +people of that Island of Sulu and their neighbors, those of Mindanao, +emboldened more than ever to make raids against the Pintados, and +the islands within, which they did. + +The governor, without delaying any longer in Manila, hastily started +for the Island of Panay and the town of Arévalo, in a galliot and +other small vessels, to see their needs with his own eyes, in order to +provide for them. He left war matters in Manila, during his absence, in +charge of Licentiate Don Antonio de Ribera, auditor of the Audiencia. + +As soon as the governor left Manila, the auditor had plenty to look +after, because a squadron of 20 caracoas and other vessels from +Mindanao entered the islands as far as the Island of Luzon and its +coasts, making captures. Having taken some ships bound from Cebu +to Manila, they captured 10 Spaniards in them, among them a woman +and a priest and Capt. Martin de Mandia, and they took them off with +them. They entered Calilaya, burned the church and all the town, and +captured many persons of all classes among the natives. Thence they +passed to the town of Balayan to do the same, but the auditor, having +received news of the enemy in Manila, had it already in a state of +defense with 50 Spaniards and a captain and some vessels. Consequently, +they did not dare to enter the town or its bay, but crossed over +to Mindoro, where, in the principal town, they captured many men, +women, and children among the natives, seizing their gold and +possessions, and burning their houses and church, where they captured +the prebendary Corral, curate of that doctrina. They filled their +own ships, and others which they seized there, with captives, gold, +and property, staying in the port of Mindoro as leisurely as though +in their own land, notwithstanding that it is but 24 leagues from +Manila. Capt. Martin de Mendia, prisoner of these pirates, offered, +for himself and the other Spanish captives that, if they would let +him go to Manila, he would get the ransom for all, and would take +it, or would send it within six months, to the river of Mindanao, +or otherwise he would return to their power. The chief in command of +the fleet agreed thereto, with certain provisions and conditions, +and caused the other captives to write to the effect that what had +been agreed upon might be fulfilled, and then he allowed the captain +to leave the fleet. The latter came to the city, and upon receiving his +report, the auditor sent munitions, ships, and more men to Balayan than +there were there already, with orders to go in pursuit of the enemy +without delay, saying that they would find him in Mindoro. Capt. Gaspar +Perez, who had charge of this in Balayan, did not start so quickly as +he should have done in order to find the enemy in Mindoro, for when +he arrived he found that he had left that port six days before, laden +with ships and booty, to return to Mindanao. Then he went in pursuit +of him, although somewhat slowly. The enemy put into the river of a +little uninhabited island to get water and wood. Just at that time +Governor Don Pedro de Acuña, who was hastily returning to Manila, +from the town of Arevalo, where he had learned of the incursion of +those pirates, passed. He passed so near the mouth of the river, in +two small champanes [248] and a virrey, [248] with very few men, that +it was a wonder that he was not seen and captured by the enemy. He +learned that the enemy was there, from a boat of natives which was +escaping therefrom, and then he met Gaspar Perez going in search of +the enemy with twelve vessels--caracoas and virreys and some large +champanes. The governor made him make more haste and gave him some +of his own men to guide him to where he had left the pirates the day +before, whereupon they went to attack them. But the latter espied +the fleet through their sentinels whom they had already stationed in +the sea, outside the river. Accordingly they left the river in haste, +and took to flight, throwing into the sea goods and slaves in order +to flee more lightly. Their flagship and almiranta caracoas protected +the ships which were dropping behind and made them throw overboard what +they could and work with all the strength of their paddles, assisted by +their sails. The Spanish fleet, the vessels of which were not so light, +could not put forth enough strength to overtake all of them, because, +furthermore, they went into the open without fear of the heavy seas +which were running, inasmuch as they were fleeing. Yet some of the +ships of Capt. Gaspar Perez, being lighter, got the enemy's fleet, +sunk some caracoas, and captured two, but the rest escaped, although +with great danger of being lost. Without accomplishing anything else, +the fleet returned to Manila where the governor had already entered, +very much disturbed that things should have come to such a pass that +these enemies, who had never dared to leave their houses, should have +been so daring and bold as to come to the very gates of the city, +doing great damage and making captures. + + + + + + +APPENDIX V + +OLASO'S EXPEDITION IN 1629 [249] + + +[Relation of events in the Philippine Islands and other surrounding +regions, from the month of July, 1629, until that of 1630.] [250] + + +I shall commence the affairs of these islands with the expedition to +Jolo. It is an island of the Archipelago, rebellious for years past, +and its natives, who are Mohammedans, have made a thousand incursions +against us in these islands, pillaging whenever opportunity arises, +burning villages and churches, and capturing numerous people. + +In order to remedy all these evils, Governor Don Juan Niño de Tabora +determined to equip a powerful fleet in order to destroy that enemy and +conquer a stronghold which nature has made in their island so lofty +and so difficult of approach that there is no better stone castle, +for the approach to it is by one path, and it has some artillery +which defends it. The people are courageous and warlike. For our +fleet were collected 1 galley, 3 brigantines, 12 freight champanes +(which are like small pataches) [251] and about 50 caracoas. The last +named are the usual craft of these islands, and generally have thirty +or forty oars on a side. All these vessels together carried about 400 +Spaniards and 2,500 Indians, and they had considerable apparatus and +war supplies. It was quite sufficient for another conquest of greater +importance than the one on which they were going. + +All that fleet departed, then, from the port of Dapitan on March +17. Dapitan is the port nearest to the enemy, and the Island of Sulu +was reached in [blank space in the Ventura del Arco MS.] days. At +dawn our men were landed, and began the ascent to the stronghold. The +master-of-camp, Don Lorenzo de Olaso, who was commander in chief +of the fleet, preceded the men. The Sulus defended their stronghold +with valor. They killed some of our men and wounded eight, among them +the master-of-camp himself. He was overthrown, as if dead, and went +rolling down the hill. However, he was not dead, but only wounded, +nothing more. Our men retired on the run, and to speak plainly, such +terror entered into them that they did not dare to attack again. They +skirted the island in their craft, entered the villages, burned, +wrecked, destroyed them, and killed a few people. They brought back +some captives with them whom the Sulus had taken from us. A violent +storm overtook them, which compelled them to weigh anchor, and they +retired stealthily. Thus so powerful a fleet as that was lost. It was +such a fleet that never has one like it been made for the Indies in +these islands. The Sulu enemy were left triumphant, and so insolent +that we fear that they will make an end of the Islands of the Pintados +[Bisayas] which are the nearest ones to them, and which they infest +and pillage with great facility. + + + + + + +APPENDIX VI + +CORCUERA'S CAMPAIGN IN JOLO [252] + + +In my last letter I wrote to your Reverence of the result of the first +attack, which was unfortunate, because the Moros repulsed us, as I told +your Reverence. Not less unfortunate will be the news that I shall +now relate, [253] which it is yet necessary for me to tell, in order +to fulfil my duty and to remove the clouds arising from rumors and +letters that will go there. I am here and see everything; and there is +never a lack of those who tell many new things and exaggerate matters +that are not so great as they will relate and descant there, where +no one can report and declare what has happened. It is as follows: + +Since that attack, we have made two others. The first was with five +mines which we had made, with which we expected to blow up a great +part of those walls. All of the mines were fired, and thinking that +they would cause the same effects as the others our men retired +farther than they ought to have done. Four of the mines exploded, +and did not a little damage among the enemy. They, full of fear, +fled down from their position; but, as the mines did not make the +noise that we expected, we did not, accordingly, get there in time, +as we were quite distant because of our fear lest the mines do us +harm. The Moros retook their position, so that we were repulsed this +time, as we had been the other, with the death of a captain, while some +men were wounded. The fifth mine was left, and did not explode that +time. Hence its mouth was looked for, and having found it, we tried +two days after that to make another assault. The assault was made after +the mine had exploded. That mine was larger than the others had been, +and caused much damage. But the Moros fortified themselves again, +with greater strength than they had the last two times, and defended +themselves in their trenches, which had been fortified with many +stockades and terrepleins, so that we could not enter. We lost some +soldiers on that occasion, who tried to show that they were bold and +valiant. Among them was the sargento-mayor, Melon, who was struck by +a ball which passed through him and carried him off in two days. May +God rest his soul! Thereupon, we retired to our posts and endeavored +to collect our men and carry away the wounded, who were many. We +have lost four captains of renown in these three assaults--namely, +Captain Pimienta, Captain Juan Nicolas, Captain Don Pedro de Mena, and +Sargento-mayor Gonzales de Caseres Melon. Besides these three assaults, +another misfortune happened to us on St. Matthew's day, which was as +follows: Captain Rafael Ome, going with forty-six men and two hundred +Indians to make a garo [254] (as we say here), and having taken up +quarters in a field, where there was a fortified house, arranged +his posts at intervals and ordered his men to be on their guard. But +since man proposes and God disposes, the posts were either careless, +or God ordained it thus; for suddenly the enemy rushed upon our men, +who could not unite, as they were by that time scattered through the +forest. The enemy, having caught them off their guard, made a pastime +of it, killing twenty-six men, and carrying off arms, powder, balls and +fuses. I regard that event as the greatest of all our losses. Among +those of our men killed there by the enemy was Captain Lopez Suarez, +a fine soldier. Our men were not disheartened by these reverses, +except such and such men. The governor well sustains the undertaking +with [all his powers of] mind and body. He has surrounded the entire +hill with a stockade and a ditch, and has sown the ground with sharp +stakes so that the enemy may neither receive aid nor sally out from +it. At intervals there are sentry-posts and towers, so close that they +almost touch. There were six barracks along it, so that if any tower +should be in need the soldiers in them could go to its defense. Some +of them have six men, others four, and those which have least three +men, as a guard. The enclosure is one league long and surrounds the +hill. I do not know which causes the more wonder, the fort of the +Moros or the enclosure of the Spaniards which restrains the Moros, +so that they issue but seldom, and then at their peril. We are day +by day making gradual advances. Today a rampart was completed which +is just even with their stockades, so that we shall command the hill +equally [with the enemy]. God helping, I hope that we shall reduce +their trenches, and then we shall advance from better to better. May +God aid us; and si Dominus a custodierit civitatem frustra vigilat qui +custodit eam. [255] Father, prayers and many of them are needed. Will +your Reverence have them said in your holy college, and excuse me and +all of us for what we can not do. I forward this letter, [hoping] for +its good fortune in the holy sacrifices of your Reverence, etc. Jolo, +March 31, 1638. To the father-prior of Manila. + + + +PAX CHRISTI, ETC. + +I would like to be the bearer of this letter, and to fulfil my desires +of seeing your Reverence and all the fathers and brothers of your +Reverence's holy college. That is a proposition for which credit +may be given me, but the time gives space only to suffer; and thus +do we have to accommodate ourselves to it, and to check our desires, +drawing strength from weakness. I must content myself with writing, +which would be a pleasant task, if I could do it at my leisure, and not +so hastily as I have made known in certain letters that I have sent +to your Reverence--not losing or neglecting any occasion at which I +could write. And so that this opportunity should not pass without a +letter from me, I have hastened my pen beyond my usual custom, and +have written very concisely and briefly--although I could write at +greater length, and give account of many things which I leave for a +better occasion. That will be when it is the Lord's pleasure for us +to see each other. Moreover, I have no pleasant news to write, since +that which I could write would all be to the effect that we have not +gained this enchanted hill; and that, at the times when we have tempted +fortune, we have retired with loss of some men and many wounded. + +Continuing, then, in the same style as the last letter, I declare +that since the first assault, in which we were driven back with the +loss of Captain Don Pedro Mena Pando, Adjutant Oliva, and Alférez +Trigita, we have made two other assaults. One was on the twenty-fourth +of March, the eve of our Lady of the Assumption. The second was on +the twenty-eighth of the same month. In the first, we trusted to the +mines that had been made, by means of which we expected to make a safe +entrance. We would have made it had our fear of receiving harm from +them matched the little fear of the enemy--who, as barbarians, did not +prepare for flight, although they knew our designs. Of the five mines, +four blew up; and as was seen, and as we afterward learned here from +some captives, there was a great loss to the enemy. As soon as they +saw the fire, they took to flight; but our men, being at a distance, +could not come up to seize the posts that the enemy abandoned, +until very late. That gave the Moros time to take precautions, so +that when we had come up, it was impossible to gain a single thing +which the mines had given us. On that occasion both sides fought very +valiantly. The wounded on our side were not many, and our dead even +fewer; among the later was Captain Pimienta. We were forced to return +to our posts without having gained more than the damage wrought by +the mines. The loss of those people was considerable, while not few +of them perished because of the severity of our fire. But with the +opportunity of the fifth mine which remained (which could not have +its effect, because the fire-channel of the others choked it), the +third attack was made inside of two days, by first setting fire to +that mine, and by arranging the men better than on the day of the +previous assault. They were set in array by the governor, who in +person came up to these quarters on that occasion. They set fire to +the mine, and more was accomplished than on the preceding days. Many +of the enemy were killed; but, as the entrance was so deeply recessed, +it could not be forced so freely by us, for the Moros were able to +defend it from us, with so great valor that we could not take it. Our +men fought with so great spirit and courage that it was necessary for +the leaders to use force with them in order to get the men to retire, +when they saw the so superior force of the enemy. On that occasion +they killed seven of our men, besides wounding many. Among the latter +was Sargento-mayor Melon, who was shot through the lung by a ball. He +died on the second day, to the grief of all this army. Thereupon his +Lordship made his men retire to their quarters, and commanded that the +fort should not be attacked, but that they should proceed to gain it by +the complete blockade of the enemy, as we are doing. By this method, +I think that we shall make an entrance into the fort. Already we +have one bulwark, which we have made level with their entrenchments; +and we are raising our works one and one-half varas [256] above them, +so that we are dislodging them with our artillery. They are retiring +to the interior of their fort. By this means we hope to gain entrance +into all their forts; and, once masters of them, I trust by God's +help that we shall conquer their stronghold, and that they will humble +themselves to obey God and the king. + +Before those assaults, on St. Matthew's day, Captain Raphael Ome went +out to make a garo, as they say here, and to overrun the country. In +this island the level country is heavily wooded as nearly all of it is +mountainous. He took in his company about fifty men (i.e., Spaniards) +and two hundred Karaga Indians. The captain reached a field, and having +lodged in a fortified house, such as nearly all those houses are +(for those Indians of the mountain, who are called Guimennos, [257] +build them for their defense), he placed his sentries and seized the +positions that he judged most dangerous. But since non est volentis +neque currentis, etc., either because of the great multitude and the +wiliness of the enemy, or (as is more certain) because the sentries +were careless, and the other men asleep, the enemy came suddenly and +attacked our soldiers--with so great fury that they killed twenty-six +men, among whom was Captain Lopez Suarez, a brave soldier. The leader +and captain, Ome, was in great danger. He fought in person with so +great valor that, although run through with a spear, he attacked and +defeated his opponent, laying him dead at his feet. Few of our men +aided him, and many of them retreated immediately, thus allowing +the enemy to capture from us twenty firearms, with fuses, powder, +and balls. That was a great loss, and it is certain that we have not +hitherto had a greater. And if any loss has occurred, it has been +due to the neglect and confidence of the Spaniard. + +Today two Basilan Indians came down from the hill to ask for mercy, +and for passage to their own country. They say that they are sent by +the datus in the stronghold who came from that island of Basilan or +Tagima; and that, if permission and pardon were given to them by the +pari [i.e., Corcuera], one hundred and thirty of them would come down +in the morning. We regard this as a trick of that Moro; and, although +it may be as they say, we are taking precautions, and are watching for +whatever may happen. If they should come, they will be well received; +and that will not be a bad beginning to induce others to come from +the hill. I shall advise your Reverence of such event on the first +occasion. What we know that they are suffering within [the fort] is +the disease of smallpox and discharges of blood, together with great +famine; because we have surrounded the entire hill with ditches and +stockades, set with sharp stakes, which run around it for more than +one and one-half leagues, and within musket-shot [of their fort] is a +sentry-post [garita] or tower in which three men and three Bantayas +are staying. By that means the enemy cannot enter or go out without +being seen; and, when they do that, they are given such a bombardment +that scarcely does any one dare to go outside of their walls. The +hill is a beautiful sight, and if it were enjoying holy peace instead +of war, it would be no small matter of entertainment and recreation +to survey the landscape at times. The Moro does not like to see us, +and is looking at us continually from his stronghold and yelling and +scoffing at us--as they say sometimes that the Spaniards are chickens; +again, that they are sibabuyes, [258] and again, that they will come +to set fire to us all, and kill us. The Moro is a great rascal and +buffoon. I trust in God that in a little while He will be ready for +our thanksgivings [for the defeat of the Moros]. Will your Reverence +urge His servants to aid us with their sacrifices and prayers. Those, +I believe, it will be that must give us the victory, and that must +humble the arrogance of this Mohammedan. His Lordship is displaying +great firmness and patience, as he is so great a soldier. Already has +he almost raised a stone fort on the beach, for he intends to leave +a presidio here, and I think that it will be almost finished before +he leaves. Nothing else occurs to me. Of whatever else may happen, +your Reverence will be advised on the first occasion. If I have gone +to considerable length in this letter, it is because I have known, +one day ahead, of the departure of this champan. I commend myself +many times to the holy sacrifices of your Reverence. This letter +will also serve for our father provincial, etc. Jolo, April 5, one +thousand six hundred and thirty-eight. + +The Moro has returned today with a letter from the queen and all the +stronghold, in which they beg pardon and humiliate themselves. May +God grant it, and bring them to His knowledge. I shall advise you of +the result. I hear that Datu Ache is dead. If that is so, then the +end has come. Today, the sixth of the above month. + + + +PAX CHRISTI. + +Deo gratias qui dedit nobis victoriam per Jesum Christum Dominum +nostrum. [259] I have written your Reverence another letter, by way of +Oton, telling you that it was our Lord's pleasure to give us a joyous +Easter-tide, the beginning of what has happened. His Divine Majesty +has chosen to bestow upon us an overflowing blessing, by the reduction +of these Moros so that they should come, abased and humiliated, to +beg His governor for mercy; for, whether it was the latter's plan +to go to treat for peace at Basilan for their men, or whether they +should send them all, that they might see how the governor viewed their +petition, the following day they came with letters from the queen [260] +for Father Pedro Gutierrez and his Lordship. Therein she begged the +father to protect her, for she wished to come to throw herself at the +feet of the hari of Manila, and to beg his pardon for the obstinacy +that they had shown hitherto. The father answered for his Lordship, +in regard to the pardon, that if they agreed to do what was right, +they would be very gladly pardoned; but that in regard to their coming +it was not time, until they would humbly give up the arms which they +had taken from us, and the captives, vessels, and holy ornaments; +and that, even though the queen had so great authority, so long +as the king did not come, he must declare and show his willingness +to accept what the queen had written. Accordingly, the king wrote +to the same father and to his Lordship next day, begging the same +thing and more earnestly. But he was not allowed to come--which he +urgently entreated--until they should have given up the arms and +other things of which they robbed us. Difficulties arose over this +point, as to which of the two things was to be done first. The Moro +declared that he wished to treat first of the peace, and the points +on which they were to agree; and therefore it was necessary to see +the hari of Manila first of all. But Don Sebastian, as he was so +experienced in these matters of war (in which God has inspired him +with so wise resolutions, and given him even better results) held firm +to his proposals. Two days passed, but at last the king agreed to the +terms, by giving up the pieces of artillery which he had captured from +us. There were four iron pieces; and, in place of one which had burst, +one of bronze was requested, which many mines had buried. Afterward +we found the broken piece, by opening the mouth of one of the mines: +and he gave it to us willingly--saying that he had thus brought the +broken piece, and that he ought not for that reason to give another in +its place; and that which had been asked from him had been bought for +forty basines of gold at Makassar. In order that the Spaniards might +see what an earnest desire for a permanent peace was in his heart, +and that he was greatly inclined to it, he sent also some muskets, +although few and poor ones. In what pertained to the captives, he +said that he would surrender those that he had, but that he could not +persuade his datus to give up theirs; still he would ask them to give +their captives. At most, he sent eleven Christian captives, counting +men, women, and children. He had already spent the holy vessels, for, +since it was so long a time since they had been brought, he had sold +them to the king of Makassar; but he said that he and all his property +were there, to satisfy the Spaniards for any injury that they had +received. The king petitioned his Lordship to allow him to visit him; +and his Lordship granted such permission for Quasimodo Sunday. + +The datus [sic] were very angry that the king was so liberal, and +because he humbled himself so deeply; accordingly, they opposed his +leaving the hill to talk with the governor. They tried to prevent it, +but the king overruled by the reasons which he gave to the datus, and +which father Gregorio Belin gave to him. His Lordship gave hostages +for the king, and ordered Captain Marquez and Captain Raphael Ome to +remain as such. They asked for Admiral Don Pedro de Almonte and two +fathers, but that was not granted to them. Finally they were satisfied +with the two said captains, persons of great esteem and worth; and the +king came down to talk with his Lordship, accompanied by many chief +men. His Lordship received him with such display as he could arrange at +short notice, under a canopy of damask, and seated on a velvet chair, +with a cushion of the same at his feet. Another cushion was placed +at his side upon a rug. As the king entered the hall, his Lordship +rose from his seat, and advancing two steps, embraced the Moro king; +then he made him sit down on the cushion that had been prepared. Then +his Lordship also seated himself beside the king in his chair, while +at his right side was his confessor, and at his left stood a captain +of the guard and the sargento-mayor. Grouped behind the confessor +were the fathers who were in the quarters on that occasion. There +were two Augustinian Recollects, and one Franciscan Recollect, and +a secular priest. Then came Father Gutierrez, and Father Gregorio +Belin. The king requested permission to rest a little first, for he +came, one of his servants fanning him (haciendole paypay), lifting +up from time to time the chinina which he wore--open in front, +in order to catch the breeze, and to enable him to shelter himself +from the heat, or to get rid of the fears with which he had come. His +chief men seated themselves after him on that open floor, a seat very +suitable for such nobility, who esteemed it as a great favor. Then when +the king was rested, or reassured from his fears, they began their +discourses or bicharas, talking, after the manner of these people, +by the medium of interpreters--namely, Father Juan de Sant Joseph, +an Augustinian Recollect, and Alférez Mathias de Marmolejo, both good +interpreters. The governor set forth his conditions. The agreement +made was: first, that the banners of the king, our sovereign, were +to be hoisted on the stronghold; second, that the men from Basilan +were to be permitted to leave the stronghold and go to their country; +third, that the Macassars and Malays were also to leave and return to +their own lands; and fourth, in order that the first condition might +be fulfilled without the rattle of arms and the shedding of blood, +all the enemy were to come down to our quarters, while the king and +queen and their family could come to that of the governor. The Moro +king did not like this last point; but, as he saw that matters were +ill disposed for his defense, he had to assent to everything. But, +before its execution, he begged his Lordship to communicate the +terms with his men and datus, saying that he would endeavor to get +them all to agree to the fulfilment of what his Lordship ordered; +and that in a day and a half he would reply and, in what pertained +to the other conditions, they would be immediately executed. This +happened, for the Basilans descended in two days with all their men +and families--in all, one hundred and forty-seven. Some fifty or sixty +did not then descend, as they were unable to do so. The Macassars +refused to descend until they received pardon from his Lordship, +and a passport to their own country. Therefore their captain came to +talk with his Lordship, who discussed with him what was to be done +with him and his men. The latter are very humble and compliant to +whatever his Lordship should order. His Lordship answered that he +would pardon their insolent and evil actions, and they could descend +with security of life; and that he would give them boats, so that they +could go away. Thereupon the captain, giving a kris as security that +they would come, returned, and immediately began to bring down his +property and men. The Malays came with them, for all those peoples +had united against the Castilians. They are the ones who have done +us most harm with their firearms, and have furnished quantities of +ammunition for all the firearms of the Sulus. At the end of the time +assigned to the king for answering his Lordship in regard to the +matters which he had discussed with him, he was summoned, in order +that what had been recently concluded might not be hindered, as his +Lordship had many matters to which to attend. If he would not come, +his Lordship was resolved immediately to continue his bombardment +and fortifications, saying that he would make slaves of all whom he +captured. With this resolution, the queen determined to come to visit +his Lordship; and, so saying and doing, she summoned her chair, and +had herself carried down to the quarters of Don Pedro de Almonte, +which is the one located on their hill, and which has given them +so much to do. She sent a message to the governor, begging him to +grant her permission, as she wished to see him. His Lordship sent a +message to her, to the effect that he would be very glad to see her, +and that she would be coming at a seasonable time. She came to the +hall borne on the shoulders of her men, accompanied by some of her +ladies and by her kasis, who was coming with pale face. She alighted +at the door of his Lordship's hall. He went out to receive her, +and with marked indications of friendship and kindness led her to +her seat, which was a cushion of purple velvet; and his Lordship, +seated in his own chair, welcomed her through his interpreter, +Alférez Mathias de Marmolexo. She responded very courteously to the +courtesies of the governor; for the Moro woman is very intelligent, +and of great capacity. She did not speak directly to the interpreters, +but through two of her men, one of whom was the kasis; and often he, +without the queen speaking, answered to what was proposed. The queen +petitioned and entreated the governor to desist from entering the +stronghold, for the women, being timid creatures, feared the soldiers +greatly. And if his Lordship was doing it to oblige her and the king +her husband to descend, she said that they would descend immediately, +with all their people. Thus did she entreat from him whom his Lordship +represented; and I desired that she should obtain this favor. His +Lordship answered her that he would do so very willingly; but that he +had an express mandate for it [i.e., to gain the fort] from his king, +and that, if he did not obey it, he would lose his head. "I do not +wish," said Tuan Baluka (for such is the name of the queen), "that +the favor which I petition be at so great a price and danger to your +Lordship. Consequently, will you kindly grant me three days? and in +that time I, the king, and our people will descend without fail." His +Lordship thanked her anew, and added that with this she obliged him +to fulfil strictly what he had promised her. "Indeed," said the queen, +"I have no doubt of it; for, being in the gaze of so many nations that +your Lordship has to conquer, it is clear that you must fulfil what +you have promised me; for your Lordship's actions toward me would +be understood by all to be those that you would have to perform +toward all." This terminated the discussion. His Lordship ordered +a collation to be spread for the queen and her ladies; and then his +Lordship retired, so that they might refresh themselves without any +embarrassment. Then, having dined, the queen returned to her stronghold +with the retinue that she had brought. Before she left the quarters +she was saluted by the discharge of two large pieces of artillery, +which had been made ready for that purpose. She was greatly pleased +by that, and the next day began to carry out her promises, by sending +down a portion of her possessions. The Makassars and Malays also +brought down their property with her, and immediately embarked. I +had written up to this point to this day, Saturday, the seventeenth +of this month of April, hoping for the end of all these incipient +results and expected events regarding this stronghold; the issue has +been such as we could expect from Him who has also been pleased to +arrange and bring it to pass. Last night the queen came down to sleep +in our camp or quarters, with some of her ladies. In the morning she +went to report her good treatment to her people; for she was received +with a salute of musketry and large artillery, and a fine repast. All +that has been done to oblige her to encourage her people, for they +were very fearful, to descend immediately. More than two thousand +have now descended, and our banners are flying on the hill, and our +men are fortified on it. May God be praised, to whom be a thousand +thanks given; for He, without our knowledge or our expectations, has +disposed this matter thus--blinding this Moro and disheartening him, +so that, having been defeated, he should surrender to our governor, and +give himself up without more bloodshed. We are trying to secure Datu +Ache; if we succeed in this, I shall advise you. Now there is nothing +more to say, reverend Father, except to give God the thanks, for He +is the one who has prepared and given this victory to us; and to beg +all in your Reverence's holy college to give thanks that the college +has had (as I am very certain) so great a share in the achievements +[here]. The governor is very much pleased and we all regard him in the +proper light. The men are full of courage, and even what was carefully +done is now improved. I am the humble servant of your Reverence whom +I pray that God may preserve as I desire, and to whose sacrifices I +earnestly commend myself. Jolo, April 17, 1638.--Juan de Barrios. + +All the Sulus descended, in number about four thousand six hundred, +to the sea. Finding themselves down and outside the enclosure, they +all fled, under cover of a very heavy shower of rain--leaving all +their possessions, in order not to be hindered in their flight. Many +mothers even abandoned their little children. One abandoned to us a +little girl who had received a dagger-stroke, who received the waters +of baptism and immediately died. There is much to say about this, and +many thanks to give to God, of which we shall speak when it pleases +God to let us see each other. Today, the nineteenth of this month of +April, 1638.--Barrios. + +The governor sent messages to the king and queen by two kasis, +asking why they had fled. They replied that since all their people +had fled, they had gone after them for very shame, but that they +would try to bring them back and to come, and this was the end of the +matter. The result was exceedingly profitable for our soldiers and +Indians; for the Sulus, fearful because they thought that, if they +became scattered, they would all be killed, abandoned whatever they +were carrying--quantities of goods, and chests of drawers--which our +soldiers sacked. Above, in the stronghold, they found much plunder. It +is believed that the king and queen will return, but not Datu Ache; +but this is not considered certain. + + + +LETTER FROM SANBOANGAN [261] + +PAX CHRISTI + +I am not writing to anyone [else], for the lack of time does not allow +me to do so. Therefore will your Reverence please communicate this to +the father provincial, Father Hernandez Perez, Father Juan de Bueras, +and the father rector of Cavite. + +When our men were most disheartened at seeing that the fortress on +the hill was so extensive, and that it was becoming stronger daily; +that the mines and artillery had seemingly made no impression on it; +that we had been repulsed four times; and that our men were falling +sick very rapidly: in order that it might be very evident that it +was [all] the work of God, ambassadors came from the hill to beg his +Lordship for mercy. He received them gladly, and asked them for the +artillery that they had plundered from the Christians, etc. They +brought down four pieces, which they had taken from the shipyard, +and brought to us some Christians. Next day, more than one hundred +and fifty people from Basilan descended, who surrendered their arms, +and then about fifty Makassars, who did the same; and all were embarked +in the patache. + +Next day the king and queen went down and slept in the camp of Don +Sebastian. On the following day (which was the day agreed upon when +all were to descend from the hill), seeing that it was already late, +the king and queen said that they would go to get their people. The +governor granted them permission, and went to a camp that was located +opposite the gate of the stronghold. All the Sulus descended, carrying +their goods, arms, etc., to the number of about four hundred soldiers, +and more than one thousand five hundred women, children, old men, +etc. They reached the governor's camp and Don Pedro de Francia told +the king that they must surrender their arms. The latter replied that +he would surrender them to none other than to the governor. Thereupon, +they went to summon his Lordship; but the Sulus, seeing that they were +going to summon him, fled, under a heavy shower that was falling, +and abandoned all their goods. A vast amount of riches, many pieces +of artillery, and versos, [262] falcons, muskets, arquebuses, etc., +were found. The cause of the Moros fleeing was their great fear that +they were to be killed. On our part, since Don Sebastian Hurtado held +all their stronghold, and had left only thirty men in his quarters +(in order that Datu Ache might not escape), and as that number could +not resist so many people, the Sulus were, on the contrary, allowed +to go without any firearms being discharged. + +More than two hundred and fifty of the Sulus have died, and they +were perishing in great numbers from dysentery because the women and +children were placed under ground for fear of the balls. That and the +fear of the mines caused their surrender; for it was impossible to +take their fort by assault. The interior strength of that stronghold +is so great that the Spaniards were surprised; and all recognize +that it has been totally the work of God, and [a result of] the +perseverance of Don Sebastian, who ever said that all must die or +capture the stronghold. Somewhat more than two hundred Christian and +more than one hundred Moro women have come from the stronghold during +this time. All the Moro women are fearful. Up to date eighty-three +Spaniards have died from wounds, and many of them from disease. + + + THE KILLED + + Sargento-mayor Melon + Captain Don Pedro de Mena + Captain Don Juan Nicolas + Captain Don Pimienta + Captain Don Lope Suarez + + + DIED OF DYSENTERY + + Captain Don Aregita Martin de Avila + Adjutant Oliba + Adjutant Calderon + Alférez Concha + Alférez Alonzo Gonzalez + + +I shall not name others, as they are not so well known, and it will be +known later. Up to date about two hundred Bisayan Indians have died, +most of them from diseases. Don Pedro Cotoan died while en route from +Jolo to Samboanga, in order to take back the Bisayans, who are a most +cowardly race. Those who have done deeds of valor are the Karagas, +and the Sulus tremble at sight of them. Don Pedro Almonte remains as +governor and lieutenant for the captain-general at Samboangan, with one +hundred and fifty Spaniards, as has been reported. Captain Jines Ros is +to stay as castellan in Jolo with one hundred and eighty men--Captain +Sarria being fortified in the stronghold with eighty men, and Jines +Ros on the beach in a stone tower that is already eight stones high, +with one hundred men. Captain Marquez is going to Buaren with fifty +Spaniards, although no succor had been sent to Don Sebastian from +Manila. All that has been supplied to excess is truly wonderful, +for the winds have brought (and it is incredible) many champanes, +with more than twenty thousand baskets of rice, innumerable fowls, +and pork, veal, beef, and cheeses from Cebu, which have made a very +excellent provision. + +They ask for Father Martinez [and] Alexandro at Jolo [and] Father +Carrion at Buiaon, but without an associate. I say that, following +even to the end of the world, I do not know to what to compare these +Moros of Samboangan. They have paid all their tributes. This is a brief +relation. I pray your Reverence to pardon me and commend me to God, +for indeed what I desire is necessary. + + +Samboangan, April 23, 1638. [263] + + + + + + +APPENDIX VII + +OBANDO'S REPORT ON THE PREPARATIONS TO BE UNDERTAKEN TO RETURN ALIMUD +DIN TO SULU, JULY 15, 1751 [264] + + +Sire: Your Majesty will find in the enclosed report the resolutions +adopted by the Committees of the War and Treasury Departments for +the purpose of reinstating the king of Sulu, Fernando the First, +whom I found in this capital, baptized and protected by Royal briefs +insuring him the continuation of the same Royal goodwill as long as +he remained a Christian and a friend of the nation, which seems to be +his intention hitherto, with the help of 3 galleys, 3 barges, 1 galiot, +2 large champanes and other craft for war and transportation, under the +orders of the Master-of-camp of your Majesty's infantry here, to whom +I have given the instructions and orders contained in said report, +to the effect that he should make port at Zamboanga, and from there +try to subdue the rebel vassals, blockade the island of Sulu by sea, +cut it off from all communication with its neighbors, prevent food from +being introduced, prevent and punish all depredations, acts of piracy +and insults on the part of that barbarous nation against the town and +vassals of your Majesty of which I receive pitiful complaints every +day, and see that the captives are returned and that due observance +is given the treaties of peace and other agreements which were made +by my predecessor but have not proved to be as satisfactory as might +have been hoped, on account of the inconstancy which characterizes +that nation. + +Before undertaking such an important operation, I decided to order +the construction of three average sized galleys, and other small +vessels, of which there were none in these Islands; and to arm them +I ordered to be cast 100 perrier cannon of calibre 2, with three +chambers each, ordering the transfer to the province of Iloilo of +General Francisco Domingo Oscoti, as Lieutenant-Intendant-General, +with instructions to prepare provisions at the smallest cost for the +Treasury, and directing him to issue a proclamation (as he did) calling +for volunteers, who would be rewarded according to their merits on the +ships plying between Manila and Acapulco, and authorizing the natives +to arm boats at their expense, exempting them of all taxes during +the expedition. As I was in possession of a rescript of your Majesty +addressed to his Field Marshal my predecessor Gaspar de la Torre, +ordering him to reconnoiter the island of Balabak, and Ipolote Bay, +and other places of Palawan Island for the purpose of building a fort +for the protection of the inhabitants against the people of Sulu, +Tiron and Borneo, and to build six galleys with which to fight the +Moros, with a report on the same object presented by the Province +of Saint Nicholas of these Islands, [265] both of which have been +communicated to said Committees of the War and Treasury Departments +and to persons who had knowledge by experience of the said province +and regions; also, in view of the poor condition of the Royal treasury +which precluded the possibility of greater expenses it was decided, +in accordance with the opinion of your Majesty's Fiscal [Attorney +General] in regard to the above mentioned instruments, to incorporate +them to said report (or record), [266] as they are of the same nature, +to take, when there was a better opportunity, the proper measures for +reconnoitering the most favorable position for the intended fort, +and to await the result of the expedition for the reinstatement +of the king of Sulu, so as to request him, if the result should be +favorable, to withdraw his vassals from the fort of Ipolote, and, +if not, to secure the safety of the people of the said island by +driving them out; and having already ordered, as I have said, the +construction of the galleys, which were necessary and made more so +by your Royal order, to continue the work until the six were built, +said work being carried on with the utmost care and economy, which +I always bear in mind in my zeal for the service of your Majesty. + +I will send your Majesty full reports on the progress of these +different undertakings, so that your Royal orders may let me know +your Royal pleasure, which will always meet with my humble obedience. + +God give the Royal and Catholic Person of your Majesty the many years +of life which are required by Christendom for the happiness of your +vast dominions. + + +Manila, July 15, 1751. + + + + + + +APPENDIX VIII + +OBANDO'S REPORT ON THE CIRCUMSTANCES ATTENDING THE ATTEMPT TO RETURN +ALIMUD DIN TO SULU, JUNE 18, 1752 [267] + + +Sire: In a letter addressed to your Majesty last year, 1751, +I forwarded a report and vouchers to the effect that I had sent, +with the King of Sulu, Fernando the First, to the fortified station +of Zamboanga, a fleet of 3 galleys, two feluccas, two galiots and two +large champanes, with other craft, under the Master-of-camp [268] of +the Royal troops here, for the purpose of restoring said king to his +throne and forcing his rebel vassals to submit, by means of a blockade +of the island of Sulu, which would cut it off from all communication +with its neighbors and prevent the importation of food to the island, +other provisions being made for the purpose of protecting the Christian +communities against any further harm on the part of the Sulu people +and the Tirons. [269] I have the honor to report now that the said +Master-of-camp arrived at Zamboanga with most of the fleet, ahead of +the Sultan of Sulu, who had been delayed by various accidents, and +sailed at once, in order to avoid the monsoon, for the Bay of Jolo, +where he anchored on the 26th of June of that year, at about one mile +from the forts. He formed a line of battle, and, noticing two Chinese +champanes without flags, that were stationed near the river mouth and +were stretching two lines to go up stream, he ordered two long-boats +to go and remove them from under the artillery of the enemy; the Jolo +forts, four in number, displayed red banners and opened fire with +cannon of calibre 8 to 18 on the boats towing the champanes; our fleet +answered, and the fire was kept up some time on both sides, until the +enemy hoisted the white flag in order to gain time for reënforcing his +trenches; the Master-of-camp sent a letter to Prince Asin, informing +him that his only purpose was to restore the legitimate king of Sulu +to his dominions, and to have the captives delivered; the prince +answered that he had no captives to deliver; that he was waiting for +the return of the king, who would do as he wished with them, that he +was begging the Prophet to send back the king * * *. Finding such an +answer vain and impertinent, our ships opened fire again; a suburb +was stormed and burned, and our men found out that the negotiations +were a pretext to gain time to place artillery behind the palisades; +the Moros accomplished this purpose and again requested a truce in +order to hold a meeting of their leaders and to deliberate as to +what should be done. This was granted, and in a second letter signed +by the Datus Prince Asin insisted that the Master-of-camp should +retire to Zamboanga, promising to bring over the captives; as the +south-west monsoon was blowing hard and he was short of provisions, +the latter decided to go back to Zamboanga; the Datus informed their +king Fernando in a letter addressed to him at Zamboanga of what had +been agreed; Prince Asin also stated verbally that he would bring to +Zamboanga some captives whom he was going to seek in the woods, and +asked the Master to leave the port, while he went after the wives and +children of the followers of King Fernando, who had been frightened and +scattered by the artillery. After a few more answers and objections +which showed an utter lack of sincerity, the Master-of-camp sailed +back to Zamboanga. The King of Sulu had arrived there on June 22, +and as soon as he heard about the truce requested by his brother +Asin, and other affairs of the fleet, he declared that the prince +was his enemy. This statement was believed at the time, but soon +afterwards good-sized boats began to arrive one after the other +with many of his principal people on the pretext of Prince Asin's +visit to the King, until there were 180 persons, including 32 women +between concubines and servants. When the Master-of-camp, Governor +of Zamboanga, remarked that all these boats were full of firearms, +powder, ball, coats of mail, helmets, and other warlike equipment, +that the King of Sulu had secretly sent to his brother Asin, at +Basilan, golden buckles and epaulets, and embroidered stockings to +make a brilliant appearance at landing in Zamboanga, while he feigned +to be his enemy; that Prince Asin had failed to keep his word, since +he said that he had been unable to get hold of the captives he was to +bring to Zamboanga, when it was known that he was keeping the said +captives in a secret place, six of them, including a woman, having +escaped by swimming over to the fleet when the latter was at Jolo, +and reported that the Moros had many captives concealed in the woods; +that Prince Asin had written to the King that all the captives seized +during the latter's stay in Manila were still in their power, not +one having been sold while awaiting the royal commands; and finally, +that the King and his brother were secretly dismissing the concubines +only, telling them that the Master-of-camp was sending them away with +contumely; he inferred that the King was preparing to surprise the +fort. This surmise was strengthened by the face that armed men were +steadily coming in each day, despite the Master-of-camp's friendly +admonition to the King that his followers enter the fort unarmed. The +lying and disingenuousness of the King, which all these indications +were making plainer every moment, were finally betrayed by a letter, +written in Arabic characters, to the King of Mindanao, in which he +stated that he had been compelled, by those in whose power he was, +to write the letter he had previously sent him from Manila,--whereas +he had enjoyed complete freedom in this capital, so complete, in +fact, that he did not perform, during the voyage hence to Zamboanga, +a single rite of the Christian religion, as far as known, while he +was seen to perform various Moro religious acts, and took with him +the Quran in his own language, instead of the numerous Catholic +books which had been given him for his instruction. In view of all +the foregoing evidence of bad faith, the Master-of-camp, Governor of +Zamboanga, and the captains of the fleet decided to arrest at the same +time the King, the datus and their men, to seize their boats, arms, +and concealed ammunition, and to keep the whole under careful guard, +the men being detained in decent quarters, pending the decision of +the Captain-General. + +In reflecting on this important and critical change in the situation, +I bore in mind that the said King of Sulu had been a false friend +and a consummate Machiavellian, who had deceived your Majesty's +Governor Fernando Valdes Tamon with his feigned promises of peace, +which he never kept, and that, instead of releasing the captives and +preventing the cruel outrages of his vassals the Moros and Tirons, +he had used the considerable supply of arms, which he received +from the said Governor and Governor Gaspar de la Torre under the +pretence of suppressing supposed rebellions of his vassals, to keep +our forces busy in Sulu, so that his vassals the Tiron pirates might +ravage the provinces, while our forces were engaged in the Sulu +kingdom. He also deceived your Majesty's Governor and Bishop when +a fleet was sent against the Tirons; he went as an ally and a pilot +for the fleet among the shallows, and the small islands belonging to +the enemy, and prevented the destruction of the principal towns, by +misrepresenting to the commander of the expedition that said towns +belonged to peaceful people who were friends of his, and pledging +himself to have the prisoners returned, so that the fleet retired +after burning only nine villages without importance, thanks to the +cunning of the king. The trouble caused by all these Moros, thanks +to his influence, is really astounding, and has nearly drained the +Royal treasury, as, since the last peace agreement made by Governor +Tamon, 89,744 pesos have been spent from 1736 to 1740, and since then +the war expenses have far exceeded that amount. All these criminal +and astute antecedents fully justify my distrust in giving careful +instructions to the Master-of-camp to avoid a surprise of the fort +under the veil of feigned friendship; I really expected this new act +of treason on account of what I already knew about the said King of +Sulu, and was only held back by the fact that he had been baptized, +and the information about him which my predecessor had given me in +good faith. As it is, all the members of the Government were glad +that the treachery of the King had been foreseen and that he had been +arrested. * * * + +In Zamboanga, after his arrest, 12 krises, each in six pieces, +were found hidden in two cushions belonging to him. * * * Urged +by the members of the ministry, I proceeded at once to explain to +the Real Acuerdo [270] and the council of war all the difficulty of +inflicting the condign punishment that was deserved, and, supported by +a majority of votes, I decided to declare war on all the Sulus, Tirons +and Kamukons, with the understanding that no capitulations or treaties +of peace would be considered, but that they would be treated as rebels, +in their persons, their property and their land, and put to the sword +in case of resistance; that all their towns would be destroyed and +burned; and that the mission of our fleet was not to make conquests, +but to punish the rebellion and to blockade the island of Sulu so as +to prevent any attempt to bring in food or any other help. I also +directed that the King of Sulu, who was under arrest at Zamboanga, +should be sent to Manila, there to be kept in confinement until the +pleasure of your Majesty be known. The Datus and other Moros were +declared to be slaves, and I ordered that they should be branded and +marked, not so much for the purpose of guaranteeing the ownership of +their masters or punishing their obstinacy, as for that of avoiding +all confusion between them and the numerous Indians of these Islands, +whom they resemble in color, bearing and language, of crushing their +pride, their daring and their evil spirit, experience having shown +that 8 Sulus suffice to subjugate a whole town, and principally +of preventing the clandestine introduction of the sect of Mohammed, +which would easily spread among the Indians, if the brand did not mark +them as enemies from Sulu, it being known that the sect of Mohammed +is daily extending its darkness over these regions. * * * + +The declaration of war against the Moros was published in all the +provinces, which were instructed to be constantly ready for attack +or defense; to organize companies of militia, with their officers, +in all the pueblos, and have them frequently drilled and reviewed, so +as to become skilful in the use of their arms; to send a list of all +the arms and ammunition on hand to the Captain-General, who will thus +be able to supply them with all he may deem necessary. I furthermore +ordered that no boat should leave Manila or any other port without +being well provided with men and arms, and issued proclamations calling +for privateers, several of whom have already been given letters of +marque and have sailed with the hope of doing good service for your +Majesty; I issued new instructions on every subject, to be followed +in their respective parts according to circumstances; I reserved for +my future action the disposal of our prisoners at the best terms, +one fifth of the profits going to the Royal treasury; the right of +plundering was declared to be free for all, all privateers from the +Bisayas were exempted from tribute, and I promised them in the name +of your Majesty 6 pesos for each Moro, as an encouragement to pursue +and exterminate them. As soon as I heard the news from Zamboanga, +I sent there a supply boat with plenty of food, arms and soldiers, +in view of the next campaign; I took on myself the care of relieving +from time to time the officers and soldiers * * * and I can sincerely +assure your Majesty that I have been so provoked and exasperated +by the untamable fierceness and the bad faith of the Moros, that I +am decided to spare neither work nor efforts in order to punish them +thoroughly and to deliver from oppression the Christian communities, so +that the glorious name of your Majesty may be feared and respected all +through my Government, in compensation for the gross deceit practised +by said Moros upon my predecessors. I trust, with the help of God, +to punish them as they deserve, and will report to your Majesty the +progress of the expedition. + +God keep the Catholic and Royal Person of your Majesty many years, +as Christendom and the Monarchy have need. + + +Manila, June 18, 1752. + + + + + + +APPENDIX IX + +REPORT ON THE OCCUPATION OF PALAWAN AND BALABAK, APRIL 30, 1753 [271] + + +Sire: By letter forwarded to your Majesty through confidential channels +under date of * * * I reported that I had despatched an embassador to +the King of Bruney, informing him of the arrest of the King of Sulu for +his inveterate faithlessness, and pressing him to continue our long +standing friendship and to form a new alliance against the said king +as a usurper of part of his dominions, and against all his enemies, +and to cede to your Majesty the Island of Balabak and the territory +of Palawan, for the purpose of better waging war against the Sulus, +Tirons and Kamukons; and that, the desired end having been obtained, +I found it necessary to use the new rights acquired by the cession +referred to. Consequently, with the view of best promoting your +Majesty's interests, I resolved to put into execution the idea of +an armament composed of our galleys, a tender, three feluccas, and +two champanes, supplied with two Spanish companies of one hundred +men each, together with another company of Pampanga Indians, which, +with the crews, the convicts and the military officers, number nearly +a thousand persons, for the glorious object of taking possession of La +Pampanga in the ceded part of Balabak and the other adjacent islands, +forming this new district into a province called Trinidad, with a +separate government from that of the Kalamians; for I have appointed +a governor to take charge of nourishing this new plantation with the +political regulations and Royal ordinances which the prudent zeal of +your Majesty has provided for similar cases, and which, on my part, +have been furnished him in the form of brief and clear instructions +directed towards civilizing those barbarous natives, so as the better +to facilitate the spread of the holy Gospel. + +With this in view I am sending two reverend Jesuit priests, persons +distinguished in politics and mathematical learning, and the military +engineer of this place, for the purpose of making an inspection of +the capital of Palawan, as well as of the Island of Balabak, and its +adjacent islands, and of examining their bays, ports, inlets, rivers, +anchorages and depths, in order to construct a fort--which will be +named after Our Lady of the Good End--in the most healthful location, +secure by land as well as by sea, for the garrisoning of which an +adequate force of artillery has been despatched. It will be kept +guarded for the present by a small galley, two feluccas, a company of +Spaniards, and another company of Pampanga Indians, besides the galley +slaves [272] and the suite of the governor, and officials--all rationed +for one year--who will number three hundred, the rest being returned to +this capital when possession is once established. And that the taking +of possession may be unopposed, useful, and lasting, I have planned for +the strengthening of the said fort, with the primary object of having +our troops sally from its walls to pacify the Sulu rebels who have +been dwelling in certain districts of Palawan, or to exterminate them +completely by fire and sword, preventing by means of the new fortress +and the little flying squadron, the Kamukons, Tirons, and others, from +laying waste the province of the Kalamians, and the adjacent islands; +for, there being access to the entire chain of places and all the +islands, facilitating attacks, and our vessels being on a constant +cruise through those regions, their expulsion will be secured. But +the greatest gain of all will lie in becoming acquainted with their +lands, rendezvous and places of refuge, in view of the fact that the +greatest defense which they have had up to the present time has been +our own ignorance and negligence in the premises, they scorning our +arms without fear, in the belief that they are unconquerable because +the places of their abode are unexplored; wherefore the King of Sulu, +pretending to serve us as a pilot among the Tiron Islands laughed at +our expedition under the command of your Majesty's Reverend Bishop of +Nueva Segovia, leading the Spaniards about with a halter wherever he +wished, and wherever he thought they would suffer most fatigue. In +view of all this, and of our present experience of the unbridled +audacity with which they ravage almost all the provinces, I felt +compelled to project this campaign of reconnaissance so as to test, +by the favorable results secured, the surest means of benefiting these +Christian communities, for I am in hopes of establishing, through this +new colony, an impregnable bulwark against the whole Moro power and +a source of reciprocal assistance to the fortress at Zamboanga. And +I likewise propose to introduce into those parts, by reason of their +proximity, commerce with Borneo, Siam, Cambodia, and Cochin-China, +so that, through intercourse, the inhabitants of Palawan may become +pacified and tractable and their towns become opulent; so that with +the families which in due time will be drafted from the outskirts +of this capital, a province of substantial usefulness may be formed, +having greater respect for both Majesties; for, by erecting churches +to God, a new gem will be added to the Royal crown, namely the glory +of giving many souls to the Lord, while the savings of the Royal +treasury will in time be appreciable. + +Although I intended to make this journey personally, the noble city +[273] and the majority of the committee on war opposed this course, +and with the sanction of the Audiencia convened in executive session +I decided to delegate my authority for this act, in view of the +necessity of my remaining in the capital for the despatch of the +urgent and arduous affairs which frequently present themselves. + +God guard the Royal Catholic Person of your Majesty the many years +that Christendom needs him. + + +Manila, April 30, 1753. + + + + + + +APPENDIX X + +BRIEF REPORT ON THE EXPEDITION TO TAKE POSSESSION OF PALAWAN, JULY 17, +1753 [274] + + +Sire: When the galleon was on the point of sailing for New Spain, +the Palawan expedition returned to the port of Cavite, from where +the commander of the expedition informs me that he has made a careful +and exact survey of the Islands of Palawan and Balabak, beginning on +the outward coast, from 9 degrees to Labo. On all that coast he has +only found mangrove swamps and reefs, the inhabitants being hostile +to everyone and obeying no king; the land is miserably poor; there is +no drinking water from Balabak to Ipolote; the climate is so bad that +in two months and a half 116 men of the expedition died and 200 were +sick, and he finds that all that has been said about Palawan is false. + +I have also been informed by the Alcalde Mayor of the Kalamians of the +arrival there of one galley, and three feluccas, which had left the +fleet since it sailed from Manila, as the Commander also now reports; +after the galley had been careened and food provided, one felucca +sailed on its course convoying the joanga [275] of the father prior +in charge of that district and two small vessels which had been sent +by the Alcalde of Komboy and had suffered the misfortune of being +captured by the Sulu Moros, most of the people, however, escaping, +as explained in the enclosed letter from the Alcalde. + +The commander of the expedition has sent me from Cavite a report of +the councils of war held by him for the purpose of carrying out his +instructions, the most important of which was to take possession +of Palawan and adjacent islands in the name of your Majesty, said +islands having been ceded by the King of Bruney; accordingly, our +fleet took possession of the land with due solemnity, with the express +knowledge and consent of the inhabitants; I also received a log of +the whole route which seems to have been well kept, with maps and +a full explanation of the examination made of the said islands and +the operations in connection therewith. A new map of the islands is +being made, on account of the errors contained in the former one; as +the log and the report of the commander refer to the new map, which +is unfinished, and I cannot delay the departure of the galleon, I +cannot forward a full report to your Majesty; I wish to make a serious +and careful examination of all that has been done, so as to take +such action as may be the best for the benefit of the Royal service, +and to be able to send your Majesty a full report of the expedition, +with my opinion based on a complete knowledge of the facts. This is +all the information I can give your Majesty for the present. + +God keep the Catholic Royal Person, of your Majesty many years, +as Christendom has need. + + +Manila, July 17, 1753. + + + + + + +APPENDIX XI + +LETTER OF THE KING OF SPAIN TO SULTAN ISRAEL, DECEMBER 2, 1774 [276] + + +To the Captain-General of the Philippine Islands. + + +Most illustrious Sir: In letters Nos. 322 and 325, your Excellency sets +forth the ideas of the English settled in the island of Balambangan, +who are displeased with the unhealthfulness of the country and petition +that the Sultan of Sulu allow them to settle within his dominions. + +With No. 325, the letter of the Sultan was received, and the King, thus +informed of the attempts of the Englishmen, and also of the favorable +inclination of the Sulu Sultan to establish with our nation friendship +and alliance, commands me to direct you to listen to his proposals, +to accede to them whenever they are reasonable, and to grant him aid +and favor as far as possible, assuring him of Royal protection, and +delivering to him the enclosed communication in answer to his own, in +which his Catholic Majesty declares his entire satisfaction with his +reasonable conduct and promises to reciprocate his friendship as you +may understand through the copy of that letter which I enclose. God +preserve your Excellency many years. + + +Madrid, December 5, 1774. + +Dr. Julian de Biriaga. + + + +[Copy of the communication referred to in the foregoing letter.] + +Most illustrious and excellent prince Mohammed Israel, Sultan +of Sulu. Most gratifying has been to me the announcement, which +you conveyed to me in your letter of January 20th, of your happy +accession to the sovereignty of Sulu, on account of which I offer +you many congratulations, wishing you happiness in all things. + +The disposition which inclines you to seek my friendship and +assistance, as also the friendly relations which you maintain with +my Governor of the Philippines, which you desire to establish and +perpetuate by means of a mutual agreement, which may secure for the +future firm peace and a perpetual alliance between your states and +mine, increase my just gratification, especially as my Governor has +informed me of the sublime natural gifts which are united in your +person, with many and most expressive eulogies thereof. + +In view of this, and of the constant fidelity which you promise in +your letter, I command my good vassal, Don Simon de Anda y Salazar, to +listen to your proposals, to accede to them whenever reasonable, and to +grant you all the favor and assistance which the forces and facilities +to be found there may allow assuring you of my Royal protection, which +I extend to you from now on, confiding in your reciprocal friendship, +and noble conduct, and desirous of opportunities of favoring you and +of proving the interest which I feel in your good fortunes and the +earnestness with which I pray God to preserve you many years. + + +Madrid, December 2, 1774. + +I, the King. + + + + + + +APPENDIX XII + +LETTER FROM THE CAPTAIN-GENERAL OF THE PHILIPPINES FORWARDING A COPY +OF THE TREATY OF PEACE, PROTECTION, AND COMMERCE WITH SULU, DECEMBER +25, 1836 [277] + + +Superior Government of the Philippines + +Most Excellent Sir: After having reported to your Excellency in my +three former communications, the opinion which I have formed with +regard to the countries in the vicinity of our possessions in the +southern part of the Philippines, of the relations which we ought +to sustain with their governments and the policy we should follow +until we shall obtain the immense advantages which our position +offers us, I have the honor to deliver to your Excellency a copy of +the Capitulations of the Treaty of Peace, Protection, and Commerce, +which I have concluded through the captain of frigate, Don José María +Halcon, with the Sultan and Datus of Sulu. + +The articles which need some explanation, are the 1st, 3rd and +4th. With reference to the 3rd and 4th, I mention them in my former +communication and indicate their intent; and with respect to the 1st, +I copy herewith what has been reported to me by the commissioner, +D. José María Halcon, which is as follows: + + + I must make clear an important point relating to the text of the + Capitulations, in the wording of which your Excellency has noted + perhaps some ambiguities and omissions in Article I, which while + intended to make the Datus and Sultan of Sulu acknowledge and + declare the extent of our rights, seems indefinite on certain + points which many irresponsible writers have asserted with + confidence. + + While considering the protection granted the Sultan, I recognized + the inexpediency of making the same include the lands which he has + lately acquired in Borneo, and of determining definitely the line + of the boundary in Palawan, the title to which island, as also that + to Balabak and Balambangan, is very disputable, though at present, + the lands where we have not established our settlements of the + province of Kalamians are included de facto in his possessions. + + Palawan was ceded to the Crown of Spain by the King of Bruney, + and Balabak is likewise ceded by an instrument brought back by + D. Antonio Fabean when he went there as Embassador under the + administration of the Marquis of Obando, which should be in the + archives of the Philippine Government; but since these cessions + were made on an occasion when the Sultan of Sulu found himself + in possession of the lands by virtue of a former cession made in + his favor by another King of Bruney, such documentary testimony + cannot serve as the basis of our arguments, especially since we + did not proceed to found any settlements. + + This matter of the cession of Balabak occurred upon the occasion + of a visit to Manila, of Sultan Mohammed Alimud Din (Fernando I) + who, asserting his right to the island, executed and ratified upon + his part the gift, at least in word, through D. Manuel Fernandez + Toribio, afterward Governor of Zamboanga, and the Secretary of + the Government. + + Our writers have misrepresented the subsequent conduct of the + said Sultan, and concealed very important facts, but at any rate, + the very concealment of the reasons for his fleeing from Manila + betokens the lack of liberty in all of the instruments he granted + during his stay in that place; moreover the facts in the case + justify his later actions, which gave occasion for casting a doubt + over the legitimacy of our title to the lands under consideration. + + The true reason for the actions of Mohammed Alimud Din, beginning + with his flight from Manila, was the fact that he had purchased + the secret in a copy of the confidential letter which the First + Minister of the Monarchy, Marquis de la Ensenada, wrote to the + Captain-General of the Philippines on August 28, 1751, discussing + the states of Sulu; which document, when brought to his knowledge, + could not fail to ruin all of our political moves, and to dispose + him to take every defensive measure against our power, for Mohammed + Alimud Din was a man of no mean understanding. + + This was the origin of the letters which, on September 17, 1763, + the said Sultan wrote from Sulu to the King of England and to + the English company, [278] ratifying in favor of the latter + the concession of the lands which form the strait of Balabak, + in which is comprised the southern part of Palawan from Point + Kanipaan to Point Bulilaruan, and this was the origin of their + settlements in Balabak and Balambangan which have been abandoned + since later events. + + Such are the antecedents which induced me to draw up the said + article with such ambiguity that it may be construed to the + advantage of the Crown without giving occasion to embarrassing + objections. + + My aim throughout, most illustrious Sir, has been to promote + the national welfare by carrying out the high designs of your + Excellency, who by promoting this enterprise has attempted to open + up one of the most abundant sources of wealth in the Philippines. + + +I also deliver to your Excellency a copy of the Capitulations, in +which, in consequence of Article 2nd, it has been agreed to determine +the duties to be paid by the Sulu vessels in Zamboanga and Manila, +and ours in Sulu. For the better understanding of these stipulations, +I have thought it expedient to inclose a copy of the explanation with +which the said commissioner forwarded them to me. + +The present tariff rates have served as a basis for the duties +imposed upon the Sulu vessels, it being beyond my authority to +alter them. With reference to those which shall be paid by our +vessels in Joló, although they may appear to be excessive, it will +be sufficient to inform your Excellency that all of the ship-owners +who are accustomed to make voyages to Joló, have been satisfied with +the very favorable terms we have secured in the agreement, not only +because of the high valuation set on the articles in which payment +will be made, but because of the regulation and reduction to fixed +rules of the charges, that until now have been arbitrary and never +less than the stipulated rates. It is true that they have desired not +only a greater reduction but still more their complete abolition, +as is natural, but it was necessary to conciliate the two parties, +as the commissioner says. + +Above all, one of the advantages of importance which our merchants +recognize in the relations now established, the benefits of which +they have begun already to experience, is that the Sultan and Datus +together guarantee the credits left in Sulu as a result of commercial +operations, which advantage they have not heretofore enjoyed, +but waited on the will and good faith of the debtor, who paid if he +pleased and when he pleased, or perhaps never, and there existed no +means of compelling him as there now is by recourse to the Government. + +Likewise through the preference they are now accorded, our merchants +have gained greatly, as your Excellency will comprehend. In short, +there is not one of them who is not well satisfied with the results +of the negotiations, and all appreciate the skill and prudence with +which Halcon has conducted himself upon a mission all the more delicate +and difficult since he has had to treat with a Government whose lack +of enlightenment and poorness of organization equal the barbarism of +its people. + +Finally, in the answer given by the Chamber of Commerce of which I +inclose a copy, your Excellency will perceive the appreciation which +the Capitulations have brought him, by having settled the duties to be +paid by our vessels in Sulu, as also by having established relations +with the Government of that island. + +I trust that your Excellency will condescend to bring all this to +the notice of her Majesty that she may grant her Royal approval. + +God preserve your Excellency many years. + + +Manila, December 25, 1836. + +Most excellent Sir, + +(Sgd.) Pedro Antonio Salazar.--Rubricated. + +The most excellent the Secretary of State and of the Office of +"Gobernación" of the Kingdom. + + + + + + +APPENDIX XIII + +ROYAL DIRECTIONS RELATIVE TO A GENERAL POLICY AND THE REGULATION OF +COMMERCE WITH SULU, AND THE ADVISABILITY OF MAKING ZAMBOANGA A FREE +PORT, JUNE 23, 1837 [279] + + +Ministry of the Navy, Commerce, and Colonial Administration + +Most Excellent Sir: Your Excellency's predecessor, Don Pedro Antonio +Salazar, when he reported in detail, in letters of last December, +all that he had done in the treaty of friendship and commerce +entered into with the Sultan of Sulu, of the mercantile relations +which it behooves us to maintain with the Mohammedan possessions to +the south of the Philippines, of the opinion which he had formed +concerning the war of enslavement, and other matters upon which +your Excellency will receive due instructions under Royal order +of this date, forwarded separately and privately, in a very secret +manner, a communication dated the 17th of the same month, in which +he set forth the policy, which, according to his belief, should be +adopted toward the said Kingdom of Sulu in consequence of the said +treaty. Her Majesty the Queen Regent, having been informed of all +this, and having in mind the remark made in the said communication, +that the Spanish possessions in the southern region are frequently +oppressed by the alcaldes, on account of the present defective system +of administration, has decided to direct your Excellency to suppress, +with strong hand, these excesses of the alcaldes, that they may not +disturb the peace happily established with Sulu; exhorting them to +moderation and peaceableness, in order that the odium which the Moro +race feels toward us may vanish. Noting also among his remarks, his +conclusion that while the war of enslavement is undoubtedly an evil, +it produces nevertheless the advantage that those provinces are united +more closely to the Government because of their greater need of the +same against their enemies; and that by becoming used to a life of +freedom and license, those people become also inured to captivity, +from which they could sometimes escape but do not, many preferring to +turn to piracy, Her Majesty holds these views erroneous and harmful, +since no just and paternal government should promote misfortunes among +its subjects in order to make itself more necessary, and thus keep +them dependent; and because, though there may be some who are content +with slavery in Sulu because it affords them a life of unrestraint, +it can not be ignored that their families and the Government suffer +a great injury from their situation, nor that morality would be +greatly outraged, if, for these reasons, countenance were given to +slavery, which should be attacked and exterminated at all costs. The +idea is advanced in the same communication, that in the countries +of the southern part of the Philippines, the system of protection, +carried to the point of establishing trading houses, will be almost +equivalent to possession and control, when once commercial interests +are held to be the chief interests, and there is set forth a plan to +diminish or even cut off the trade [280] with Mindanao, in order to +confine the commerce to our channels. Her Majesty, on being informed +of this policy of a protectorate, approves of the same, but desires +that it be carried out frankly and faithfully with the Sultan of Sulu, +in order that he be convinced, through experience, that the Spaniards +are his loyal friends, our authorities keeping it in mind that the +conquest of those countries is not to the interest of the nation, but +rather the acquisition of isolated military and mercantile stations, +which may control indirectly without the disadvantages of great expense +and of arousing the hatred of the natives. This alliance or friendship +with the Sultan should be such, that in whatever war he may be engaged +with his rebellious subjects, he shall be aided in good faith, unless +his adversary should be of such strength as to insure his triumph, +for then the useless defense of the vanquished would subject us +to the contempt of the conqueror and we should lose the benefits +already acquired. In such cases we should remain neutral, under some +plausible pretext of impracticableness or other honorable reason. In +other wars, waged by the Sultan with other princes, we should attempt +to mediate, with the purpose that, by settling new discords, we may +obtain advantages from the two or more belligerents, as rewards for +the services rendered them; but in the event of having to oppose some +one of them, it should be that one who offers us the least advantages, +and has the best chances of triumph, because with our ally victorious, +the latter may in the treaty of peace execute articles favorable to our +commerce,--trying always, above all things, so to act that the victor +shall not become too strong nor the vanquished brought too low. With +regard to the policy which it is best to adopt as a general rule in +regard to commerce, your Excellency should remember that the best +system consists in the greatest possible liberty for our merchandise, +and in securing, directly or indirectly, for our own merchandise, +or foreign goods carried by the national vessels, the enjoyment of +greater privileges than those of any other country, in order that +they may be preferred and produce greater profits on the markets. + +In the same letter he submits the opinion that the lack of +communication of the countries to the south with the Philippines, is a +most favorable political measure for Spanish commerce, and recommends +that our relations with the Government of Sulu should be strengthened +in order to include the same under our dependence at some future +time, it being necessary to act with cunning in order to separate +it completely from the piratical warfare. Her Majesty commands me +to state to you concerning these matters, that the communication +of Sulu with the Philippines being purely commercial, should not +be restricted, but on the contrary, should be increased in every +way possible, encouragement should be given to the establishment of +traders and Spanish trading houses in Sulu, where our good conduct and +benevolence toward the natives may bring us profit. But it is always +to be borne in mind that the Government of Her Majesty does not desire +the subjection of other states to itself, but a sincere friendship +and a close and useful alliance, and that a just and discreet policy, +not crafty nor artful, will accomplish most in withdrawing the Sultan +from the interests of the leaders of the pirates. + +Your Excellency will note in the draft of the communication from +your predecessor, to which I make answer, the proposal of various +schemes for establishing ourselves securely in Sulu. Such would be +the establishment of a trading house there, already agreed upon in +the treaty, and posting there a garrison, under the pretext that it +is for the safety and greater state of the person of the Sultan. Her +Majesty deems indispensable the establishment of the trading house, +but it should be done in such a manner as not to cause distrust, +and fortified and protected from any sudden attack, using in this the +greatest prudence, and remembering that a garrison there, though it +might be acceptable to the Sultan, might wound the self-love of the +people of the country, and so render odious both the Sultan and his +protectors. The most essential thing for the Spaniards, in order to +become firmly established, is to make themselves popular, to respect +the customs of the people, even with veneration, not offending any +one for any reason, treating all with courtesy and decorum; not +showing themselves domineering nor covetous, not insulting any one, +but being very respectful to women, the old and children, not scoffing +at anything in their public amusements, nor religious affairs, nor +in their meetings. It seems to her Majesty that through these means +would be secured a consistent friendship between both countries, +and that the most adequate plan for the support and defense of the +trading house would be to maintain in the safest harbor a permanent +maritime force, in which should be stored all arms and munitions, +and sufficient soldiers, in case it should be necessary to defend +the building, without arousing the suspicions that would be caused +by placing these preparations, concealed or openly, in the house +itself; and since for this purpose, for the defense of the country +against the pirates, and for maintaining the respect of the people +and Government of the protectorate, it is indispensable to keep a +well organized sea force, her Majesty had determined that you decide +the manner of organizing this maritime force, without losing sight +of the great economy which it is necessary to observe on account of +the embarrassed condition of the Peninsula, which needs now more than +ever before the assistance of her colonial provinces. + +Finally, the predecessor of your Excellency further stated that +he was attempting to extend his efforts to the establishing of the +protectorate over the countries subject to the Sultan of Mindanao: +her Majesty approves this policy on condition that in its execution the +purposes and measures, which are mentioned above for Sulu, be adopted. + +Her Majesty, by whose Royal order I communicate to your Excellency +the foregoing, trusts in your zeal to realize the importance of this +matter, and, regarding the principles of justice and right which +direct the resolutions of her Majesty, to direct all your efforts +to the accomplishment of the results desired; carefully reporting +your progress in the affair, for the information of her Majesty and +further action. God preserve your Excellency many years. + + +Madrid, June 23, 1837. + +Mendizabal.--Rubricated. + +The Governor Captain-General of the Philippines. + + + +Ministry of the Navy, Commerce, and Colonial Administration + +Most Excellent Sir: The predecessor of your Excellency, convinced of +the important advantages to be derived by the Philippines, in making +more intimate and more secure our few and doubtful relations with +the island of Sulu, determined immediately upon assuming command, +to negotiate with the Sultan of the said place, a treaty of peace +and commerce which he considered, in every respect, not only useful +but indispensable to the prosperity of the country. After having +announced this project in various of his communications, he reported +in December of last year, having accomplished the same, and furnished +in several communications, an exact and detailed account of the +history of his labors in the affair, the reasons which he had for +undertaking the same, the benefits which he expects as results, and +the measures whose adoption he deems necessary in order that these +results may be more certain, and at the same time profitable. There +were received from him seven letters, all marked with the letter "A," +numbered from 14 to 23, and dated from the 15th to the 29th of the +said month; with so many points of analogy and similarity between +them, that they should be considered as one only. The first, number +14, is intended to furnish information and data relative to Sulu, +and the other Mohammedan islands of the south (without which it would +be impossible to know their importance) and to detail the relations +which we should have with them, considering them both in relation to +commerce and with respect to the war of enslavement. In the second, of +a confidential nature, he outlines the policy, which, in his opinion, +should be adopted in order to obtain all the advantages which our +position affords. In the third, number 16, he states the measures +which should be adopted for the benefit of the national commerce +in those countries. In the fourth, number 20, he transmits a copy +of the treaty of peace, protection and commerce concluded with the +Sultan of Sulu, and of the stipulations made for the determination +of the duties which our vessels should pay in Sulu, and the Sulus +in Manila and Zamboanga. In the fifth, number 21, he relates the +motives which have led him to direct these matters as he has done, +transmitting to her Majesty all the plans referring to it, through this +Ministry only. In the sixth, number 22, he gives account of some of +the advantages which have been derived from our expedition to Sulu, +and amongst others, a treaty of peace concluded between the pueblo +of Malusu and the Governor of Zamboanga. And finally, in the seventh, +number 23, he sets forth the necessity of retaining at that station, +the frigate-captain, Don José María Halcon, who performed the duty +of commissioner for the negotiation of the treaty. + +I have informed her Majesty, the Queen Regent, of the contents of +all these communications, and in this knowledge she has seen fit +to approve, in a general manner, all the measures adopted by the +aforementioned predecessor of your Excellency, giving suitable orders, +that the proper Ministry provide the special approval which some of +them deserve, on account of their weight and importance, concerning +which your Excellency will soon be informed, and deigning to command +me to submit in a separate and particular communication the following +advice on the special subject of the letters referred to above. + +Her Majesty, feeling assured that conquests in themselves, and later +their maintenance, absorb the profits which accrue from the countries +already acquired, prefers to any conquest advantageous trade and +commerce. Convinced, therefore, that the most profitable and lucrative +policy is to conquer or secure such places as on account of their +fortunate location may prove to be at the same time strong military and +mercantile posts and so both promote and protect commerce, she cannot +but approve the ideas your Excellency's predecessor expresses in his +communication numbered 14, and desires, that upon adopting the system +in accordance with those ideas, you confine yourself solely, in all +enterprises of conquest, to occupation of territory either abandoned +or uninhabited, or to that which, notwithstanding its being settled, +would cost little and would not give occasion for a costly war. In +order to increase our commercial advantages in Sulu, and to raise up +rivals to the Portuguese, it would be well to grant protection and +reduction in duties to the Chinese junks [281] under the specific +condition that they do not sail under the flag of any other nation +(without mentioning the Portuguese by name in order not to occasion +the resentment of this power) and to secure in Sulu for those who +adopt the Spanish flag, a reduction of duties although not as much +as that which should be granted to Spanish vessels. Thus it is the +will of her Majesty that you be directed, commanding, with the same +purpose in view, that your predecessor state to you explicitly, which +are the measures that he would have adopted, had he been authorized +to do so, in order to avoid the blow to our commerce threatened by +the Portuguese, depriving us with the double expedition from Macao and +Singapore to Sulu, of the advantage over all other nations which still +remained to us in this traffic; and that your Excellency obstruct, +by all the means in your power, the association of interests between +the commercial houses of Manila with those of Macao and Singapore, +if the same were intended to secure special privileges in the island +of Sulu to the products of the Philippines to the injury of the +national commerce. + +With respect to the matter of the war against piracy, referred to also +in letter number 14, her Majesty approves all the purposes expressed +therein by the predecessor of your Excellency, and commands me to +direct your Excellency that, without ever recurring to war or the +interruption of traffic with Sulu as means of destroying or diminishing +piracy and traffic in slaves, you exert yourself to suppress the same +and remedy the evil which it inflicts on the Philippines, by the +various means at hand, to-wit; 1st, through negotiations with the +Sultan of Sulu; in which measures suitable for the accomplishment +of the purpose may be concerted; 2d, securing the increase, by the +Sultan, of import duties on slaves who are Spanish subjects, and the +lowering of duties on slaves of other countries; 3d, requesting of him +assistance in driving out the pirates from their haunts of Balangingi +and other places; 4th, watching the rendezvous of these pirates in +the Bisayas also, in order to destroy them. In this manner and with +hard lessons, with the energetic and continuous warfare spoken of by +the predecessor of your Excellency, the extermination of piracy will +be accomplished without the evils which would follow upon an unwise +and useless war against Sulu, and without the more serious result to +which the same would expose us, and which her Majesty desires your +Excellency to avoid at any cost, the result referred to being the +removal of the Sultan to some other point, which removal England and +Holland might turn to great advantage against our trade. + +As to the measures proposed in letter number 16, for the benefit +of the national commerce, her Majesty will determine which is fit, +notifying your Excellency in due season. Meanwhile you should keep +in mind, that as long as the Sulus man their ships with slaves, +your Excellency should prohibit them from trading in Zamboanga and +all other places within the dominions of her Majesty, whenever the +ships which they use shall be manned in whole or in part with slaves +who are subjects of Spain. + +Concerning the treaty of peace, protection and commerce, a copy of +which is inclosed in letter number 20, her Majesty has been pleased to +resolve, after careful examination, that it be forwarded with favorable +comment to the Ministry of State for the approval of the Cortes and +the ratification of her Majesty, all of which will be communicated +to your Excellency in due time, its policy being carried out and +its intent carefully observed in the meanwhile, for the purpose of +determining whether there is anything to amend or correct by means +of further negotiation, which would be considered as an appendix to +the treaty. In view of the explanations concerning the first article +of the aforementioned treaty furnished by the commissioner of the +negotiation, her Majesty commands me to repeat to your Excellency +the necessity for carrying out the policy which is prescribed to +your Excellency with regard to acquisition and conquest; in order to +claim those lands referred to in the explanations, if perchance such +claim should be advisable for the purpose of acquiring some point of +military or mercantile value: or in order to set up the claim of the +Kingdom of Spain to those countries, in order that by giving it up, +we may secure other things which may be of real importance to us, such +as reduction in duties, some exclusive privilege, or the possession +of some isolated point of great importance. + +The predecessor of your Excellency by addressing to this Ministry all +communications bearing on this matter, has merited the approbation +of her Majesty, because he has avoided many unnecessary steps and +useless delay, and thus your Excellency will continue to do, in the +manner herein indicated. + +And finally, her Majesty having noted with satisfaction the favorable +results produced already by the expedition to Sulu, and approving +the idea of not using the fifteen hundred dollars sent by the Bishop +of Nueva Segovia for the redemption of slaves, she commands me to +direct your Excellency to cultivate the friendship of all the chiefs +who, like the Orankaya of Malusu, abandon the pursuit of piracy, +and that suitable orders be issued by the Division of the Marine +of this Ministry, not only that the captain of frigate, Don José +María Halcon, who has so well discharged the duty of negotiating the +treaty, be assigned to that station, but that he also be duly rewarded +for his services as such commissioner; her Majesty not failing to +express the gratitude with which she declares her appreciation to the +predecessor of your Excellency, the aforementioned Don Pedro Antonio +Salazar. All of which is communicated to your Excellency, by Royal +order, for your due information and guidance, instructing you with +regard to the confidential letter, that you carry out the directions +forwarded you separately under this date. God preserve your Excellency. + + +Madrid, June 23, 1837. + +Mendizabal.--Rubricated. + +The Governor Captain-General of the Philippines. + + + + + + +APPENDIX XIV + +CAMBA'S REPORT ON THE CIRCUMSTANCES ATTENDING THE TREATY OF 1836 AND +ITS BASES, NOVEMBER 16, 1837 [282] + + +Superior Government of the Philippines + +Excellent Sir: In compliance with the provision of the Royal order of +the 24th of April last, requesting, for the information of her Majesty +the record of the correspondence exchanged in regard to the treaty +of commerce made by my predecessor with the Sultan of Sulu, and the +bases of said treaty, I forward the same to your Excellency, with a +few personal observations suggested by a reading of the said papers. + +On the 31st of January, 1835, the Tribunal of Commerce forwarded to the +Captain-General, approved by it, a report presented by several business +men who traded with Sulu, setting forth the deceitful methods of the +Datus, or principal people of the island, in their agreements and +contracts, and requesting, in order to restrain and intimidate them, +that the naval division of Zamboanga, or part of it, be stationed in +the port of Jolo during the time the national merchant vessels remain +there for the purpose of making their sales and purchases. A decree was +issued on the 9th of March of the same year, concurring in the opinion +of the Assessor, and declaring that the request could not be granted at +that time, but that it would be taken into consideration as soon as the +circumstances allowed. This is a brief of the document marked Number 1. + +On the 9th of February, 1836, José Dugiols, who had sold goods on +credit to the amount of 8000 pesos to the Jolo people, and despaired +of getting paid, presented a new petition, similar to that which +had been sent 11 months before. The Chamber of Commerce approved it, +and requested that a fleet of launches be stationed at Jolo during +the business season, there to gather information which would allow +the Government to take proper action in the matter; it also insisted +that the commander of the fleet be a capable person, who, without +compromising the flag, would know how to conciliate the purpose of +the naval demonstration with the spirit of peace and concord which he +ought to maintain between the crews of our ships and the people of +Jolo. This suggestion, which had already been made in the petition +presented the year before, was favorably endorsed one after the +other by all who intervened in the papers in the case and resulted +in the final resolution of May 31st, which contains 14 articles. The +first provides that it shall be one of the duties of the commander +of the naval division of Zamboanga to protect the Spanish ships while +they are at Jolo, and instructions are given him to that effect. The +second appoints captain of frigate José María Halcon to take charge, +temporarily, of the command of the Division of Zamboanga, and establish +relations of friendship and commerce with the Sulu people. The third +directs him to inform the Sulu Sultan of his visit in the way he may +deem most likely to convince him of the peaceful intentions of this +Government. The fourth directs him to make himself recognized by the +officers and men of our ships, as the commanding authority who shall +maintain them in peace and good order. The fifth charges him not to +allow his men to land, so as to avoid disorder. The sixth directs him +to take action in regard to any excess, as provided by the Code. The +seventh, to hold in check the crews of our ships, so as to give the +Sulus neither reason nor pretence for showing their bad faith. The +ninth forbids the commander of the division and all those under his +orders to enter into any business speculation whatsoever. The tenth +directs the commander to be ever careful to keep all his men within +the bounds of duty. By the eleventh he is directed to see that all +contracts are religiously fulfilled, and, if necessary, to complain +energetically to the Sultan, and by the twelfth to see that our people +fulfil their own. Articles thirteen and fourteen direct the commander +to obtain information about the political and civil conditions of +Sulu and its topographic situation. + +After acquainting himself with the foregoing, Captain José María +Halcon inquired what would be the minimum importation duty in Manila +for articles proceeding from Sulu, and asked for instructions in +regard to the importation of arms and ammunition into Sulu by our +ships. In answer to the first question, the Board of Tariffs fixed +at 2 per cent the duty on all articles imported from Sulu to Manila +in its own vessels, [283] except wax and cacao, which would have to +pay 14 per cent under a foreign flag and half that amount under the +national flag; in regard to the second the importation of arms and +ammunition into Sulu by our ships was prohibited. + +A letter to the Sultan of Sulu was furthermore given the commander, +accrediting him and explaining his mission, the petition presented by +Dugiols and endorsed by the Chamber of Commerce, requesting that our +business relations with Sulu be granted a protection which experience +made each day more necessary, being thus complied with. + +On April 15, 1836, Halcon forwarded the capitulations of peace and +the commercial agreements made by him in the name of this Government +with the Sultan of Sulu. The first consists of 6 articles, by which +the Spanish Government grants the Sultan its protection, which is +accepted by the latter, with a mutual assurance of coöperation between +them against any nation not European. Spanish boats are to be admitted +freely in Sulu, and Sulu boats in Zamboanga and Manila. It is agreed +that a Spanish factory shall be established in Jolo, so as to avoid +damages and delays to our commerce, the same right being given the +Sulus in Manila. Certain rules are established in order to distinguish +friendly from hostile boats. The Sultan is pledged to prevent piracy on +the part of those who recognize his authority; and it is furthermore +agreed that in case of any doubt as to the meaning of any article, +the literal Spanish text shall be followed. In accordance with the +opinion of the Government assessor, these capitulations were approved +by decree of January 20 of this year. The commercial agreements +contain 9 articles. The first establishes a duty of 2 1/2 per cent on +all products brought by the Sulus. The second excepts wax and cacao, +as recommended by the Board of Tariffs. The third provides a duty of +1 per cent for the importation in Zamboanga of products brought by +the Sulus. The fourth provides that the payment of the duties shall +be made in cash in silver. The fifth establishes the dues to be +paid by our boats at Sulu. The sixth fixes the value, in products, +of those dues. The seventh, in its first part, declares, that all +Sulu boats trading without a license shall be treated as smugglers, +under the law of the Kingdom; in its second part it also requires +our boats to show a bill of lading in accordance with the cargo, +on pain of a fine of P500, two thirds to go to the Sultan and one +third to our exchequer. The eighth provides that if the duties are +reduced in Manila and Zamboanga on the articles coming from Sulu, the +same shall be done in Sulu, and that if the Sultan reduces the dues on +foreign ships, he shall do the same for ours. The ninth provides that +in case of doubt the literal Spanish text shall be followed. After +hearing the opinions of the Boards of Commerce and Tariffs, and in +accordance with that of the assessor, the foregoing was approved by +decree of the 20th of January of this year, with a small reduction +of 1/2 per cent on the duties to be paid by the Sulus in Manila, and +an explanation of the proceeding to be followed for the appraisement +of their cargoes in Zamboanga and in Manila. + +Shortly before this ratification by the Government, it was decreed on +the 13th of January, at the request of Commissioner Halcon, that in +order to avoid trouble between this Government and that of Sulu, the +captains and supercargoes of the Spanish ships should give no credit +to the Sulus, except with the authorization of the Sultan, under the +penalty of being barred from claiming his protection or that of the +Spanish Government for the collection of such credits; and that all +settlements of the pay of the crews of our ships should be so made +as to avoid the abuse of paying them in kind, instead of currency. + +Such is the information which I have found, and am forwarding to your +Excellency in regard to the treaties mentioned. The leading idea in +said treaties is one of distrust towards the people of Sulu, on account +of their treacherous, cruel and perfidious nature. As this is the +only idea which prevails in all our relations with the island, as well +as in the Royal order of August 28, 1751, and the documents attached +thereto, without referring to older time, I can not be persuaded that +the policy of peace and alliance adopted with the Sultan of Sulu can +give our shipping and commerce any substantial and permanent advantage. + +Several Royal decrees find fault with such treaties and even order them +to be revoked in case they have been made; and to justify departure +from these sovereign instructions, given with a true knowledge of the +facts, and in accordance with the opinion of the illustrious members of +the Cabinet, there must now be some powerful political reason which I +can not discover. If we take into consideration the very weak authority +of the Sultan over his subjects, and the scarcity of his means in the +midst of datus or chieftains who, with their families and slaves, +constitute distinct communities which are haughty, ambitious and +dangerous to him, we find that there is in Sulu no moral force on +which to rely for the execution of a treaty, even should there be +the best faith and good will on the part of the Sultan. + +Furthermore, Sulu and the small adjacent islands produce nothing; even +the rice and fish which the people use for their food come from our +neighboring possessions: what business reasons are there therefore, +capable of calling our attention, or whose profits would pay the +expenses of a fleet placed in observation there? All the produce of +the islands consists of bêche-de-mer and shell which are gathered by +the slaves; [284] the clothing and foodstuffs are furnished them, +on credit, by our own ships; gold, wax and edible nests come from +Mindanao. Hence commerce is confined to a season outside of which +our ships never go near Sulu. + +There is therefore little advantage to be derived by our commerce +from these treaties, and this is confirmed by the communication just +received by me from the commander of the Zamboanga division, which I +enclose as number 6. It betrays complete disappointment, and shows the +wisdom of the instructions given in the above mentioned Royal decrees. + +The policy which we ought to follow with the Sulus is one of continual +and perspicacious caution, with well conditioned, well situated and +well commanded naval forces, ready to obtain at once satisfaction +for any offense to our flag; and I believe that this could be done +without much trouble, by using steamships, as the Dutch have done +in their settlements in the Moluccas, where they suffered from the +piracy of the Moros much as we do in the Philippines. + +The foregoing information covers, I believe, all the points mentioned +in the Royal order of April 24th, last, and which are the object +of the present communication and of the documents which I enclose +therewith. May God keep your Excellency many years. + + +Manila, November 16, 1837. + +Andrés G. Camba. + +His Excellency the Secretary of State and of the Department of the +Navy, Commerce, and Colonies. + + + + + + +APPENDIX XV + +CAMBA'S REPORT TO THE COLONIAL OFFICE DISCUSSING THE DIFFICULTIES OF +COMMERCE WITH SULU AND THE ADVISABILITY OF MAKING ZAMBOANGA A FREE +PORT, FEBRUARY 23, 1838 [285] + + +Superior Government of the Philippines. + +Excellent Sir: I acknowledge to your Excellency the receipt of two +Royal orders dated the 23d of June of last year, which, with reference +to the treaties made with the Sultan of Sulu, have been transmitted +by your ministry; one replying to the seven communications marked "A" +which my predecessor made in connection with the same subject; the +other confidential, and indicating the policy and measures that should +be carried out with the said Sultan of Sulu and the Sultan of Mindanao. + +In communication numbered 5, and dated November 16th last, in +compliance with one of the provisions of Royal order of last April, +I made a minute report accompanied by documentary evidence, of the +antecedents which I encountered relative to Sulu affairs, and at the +same time, could not but intimate in this connection how little I +expected as a result of our treaties, because experience had already +caused me to be suspicious, and also because the various Royal orders +toward the close of the past century confirmed me in this idea; +[286] and indeed the losses which all our commercial expeditions +experienced during the first year of these treaties, the vexations +they suffered and the risks to which the crews as well as the vessels +and their cargoes were exposed during their stay in Jolo, have fully +borne out this view. + +Many are the measures and documents which we have here, in which +this same fact is laid down; many are the Royal decrees in which, +in recognition of this fact, the Governors of the Philippines have +even been authorized, by every means in their power and without +counting cost or difficulty, to punish severely the intrepidity of +those infidel barbarians. + +In order to arouse and interest the Royal conscience on that point, +it was requisite that there should be repeatedly presented through +various channels and at distinct times substantiated accounts, +non-conflicting and extremely painful, of the various piracies, +cruelties, and vexations, with which those barbarians have kept the +Philippine Islands in the south in a state of fear and depression; +and needful also was it that there should have been employed, in +vain, on account of the religion and the policy of our ancestors, +those gentle measures of peace and union which no civilized people +could resist; but which are ineffectual with barbarous nations who +know no other right than that of force. + +From the 14th of April, 1646, when we abandoned possession of Sulu, +which our arms had so gloriously conquered, making a treaty of peace +whereby the Sulus bound themselves to pay us annually, as tribute, +three boatloads of unhulled rice, until the day the Government +again entered into a treaty with them, neither have the Filipinos +succeeded in freeing themselves from their harassments, nor has +the Government reaped any fruit other than continual menace. The +English have had the same experience with the perfidy and bad faith +of those islanders. After having formed, in the island of Balambangan +by a concession made by the Sulus, a settlement destined to be the +emporium for the products of the East in connection with their China +trade, for which this island offers two good ports, they were two +years afterwards surprised by the Sulus themselves, who, knowing the +English had despatched their vessels, took advantage of their absence +by taking possession of the island and the fort constructed therein, +also a great deal of booty, which cost the English East India Company +a loss of more than three hundred thousand dollars. In narrating +this event, Mr. J. H. Moor, who published last year a brief review +of interesting events concerning the islands and lands bordering on +the China Sea, agrees with the views I have expressed, namely, that +these acts of treachery and cruelty on the part of the Sulus are the +offspring of their innate love of robbery and their natural perfidy. + +All these facts then will convince your Excellency that the +expectations based by my acting predecessor upon the latest treaties +referred to are too sanguine. They would produce no illusions on +my part, in view of the experience of the past, neither does it +seem to me that their results, looked at with calmness and in the +light of the most exact data, could be of any great advantage to +our commerce. Allowing that the treaties should be religiously +complied with, never would they be of any value, in themselves, +to improve the brutal condition of those islanders. This condition +will always constitute, not only for the Spaniards but also for all +civilized nations, a great drawback to mercantile relations, which, +although founded on principles of utility and mutual advantage, +cannot continue nor be developed except under the most favorable +guaranties. How would our merchants, or the foreign merchants of Sulu +obtain them, where there is neither good faith nor justice, and where +cunning fraud makes even the Chinese dangerous traders? Commerce +is the movement and circulation of wealth. The latter results from +production, and production from the full and unrestricted utilization +of property. Moreover, when property is insecure, when the laws do +not protect it, when the agents of the Government are the first to +disregard it, the mercantile spirit is the first to become alarmed +and, when defrauded, to flee as far as possible from the place where +it does not find that safe haven it requires to expand and to pursue +with skill and perseverance the objects of its calling. Thus it is +that during the period elapsed since the year cited, 1646, up to the +present time, no Spanish merchant has himself had direct dealings with +the inhabitants of Sulu, the Chinese alone being engaged in this trade, +they being the only charterers of our vessels, so that we do not obtain +from said commerce more than interest on the capital invested, subject +to great exposure and risk, which has made and always will make, +this commerce uncertain and of little value. While lack of security +still sets a limit to the extent of our speculation in commerce with +Sulu, lack of advantageous reciprocity adds another factor no less +appreciable. At the time the Spaniards came to the Philippines, Sulu +seems to have been rich in her own natural and industrial products, +and richer still through the large commerce which their exchange +enabled her to carry on with the Chinese vessels which in large numbers +frequented her coasts. Situated almost midway between the Philippines +and the Moluccas, close to two rich islands so fertile and densely +populated as Mindanao and Borneo, it seemed destined by nature to be +the emporium of the commerce of the south. Converted to Islamism by +the Arab Sayed Ali, [287] who landed there from Mecca, how much ought +this principle of civilization in the midst of barbarous nations +have tended to their advancement! But times have changed greatly +since then, and brought their always accompanying vicissitudes. As +Spanish dominion was extended in the Philippines and the Portuguese +penetrated into the Moluccas, they began attracting to their capitals +the wealth and traffic that was accumulating in Sulu, and here begins +a new era. War and desolation, which for a period of eighty years we +inflicted on them, followed, and put in our power this island and its +dependencies, and though independence was later restored, it could not +divert this rich commerce from the trend it had taken. Meanwhile, their +wars and internal dissensions resulted in corrupting their customs, +and there only remained for them the habit of piracy, which ever since +our appearance, they had embraced for the purpose of harassing us. + +Since then Sulu has been converted into a refuge for pirates allured +by its favorable position, and these barbarians, being more solicitous +of carrying on their devastations than of cultivating their land, +have not ceased to be the greatest scourge of our inhabitants of +the south. This explains the impossibility of obtaining from them by +entreaty anything in the way of peace and tranquillity, which to them +as well as to us would be so beneficial. + +For this reason, Sulu, which contains a population of pirates and +slaves, is nothing more than a shipping point where certain products +are collected from the other islands of the south. It is surrounded by +islands and islets, which form the archipelago bearing its name, and +has a length from east to west of about ten leagues, a width of four +and a half, and a circumference of thirty-two. The total population +credited to the Archipelago is from 149,000 to 150,000 souls, 6,800 +of which inhabit Jolo, and in this number are included 800 Chinese. + +The houses, or rather huts, of the principal place, are estimated to +number 3,500, and that of the petty king, called Sultan, cannot be +distinguished from the rest except for its greater size; all of bamboo +and nipa, weak and poor as their owners, but with cannons of various +calibers which mark the residences of the datus, descendants of the +petty kings, and who themselves constitute the oligarchy of their +Government. I have already stated that the Sultan can do nothing, all +matters being decreed by the convention, or Rum Bichara of the datus, +where the owner of the greatest number of slaves always decides the +questions. [288] Wealth, influence and power, are measured among +them solely by the number of slaves, and this is why they cannot +but be pirates, in order to acquire this wealth, nor can they offer +any guaranty, if it must be accompanied by the renunciation of this +pursuit. + +By this picture, which is corroborated by the Englishman Moor in +his description of Sulu, it will be seen that we can expect nothing +from our present relations with Sulu in the way of securing the +tranquillity and prosperity of our islands of the south. Neither +is a system of continual hostility the best way of procuring these +precious gifts, but the promotion and throwing open of avenues of +commerce, directing it to one of our ports, which, in view of its +position, ought to be Zamboanga; and in this I coincide with the +views of my predecessor. Zamboanga, with a different organization, +the concession of a free port for all the products from the south and +those brought in champanes from China, and the free admission of the +exiles who seek refuge there as well as the Chinese traders, aiding +the former in establishing themselves, and exempting the latter from +all taxes for the first ten years, would be, in all probability, the +most suitable point to which to divert from Sulu the little transit +business which remains, to guard, from a shorter distance, against the +piracy of its inhabitants, and to bring them in the course of time, +perhaps, to a more humane mode of living. + +But all this requires first the planning of a suitable and adequate +system which, bringing nearer to the islands of the south the +protection and vigilance of the Government of the capital by means +of a subordinate Government embracing its chief characteristics, +would relieve those precious islands from the calamities which up +to the present time they have suffered by reason of their remoteness +and possibly also because of our neglect. + +This plan, which I desire to combine with a forward movement in the +great and rich island of Mindanao, a large part of whose coast is +surrounded by the districts of the corregidors [289] of Karaga and +Misamis, will bring about without doubt a new and happy era for the +Filipinos of the south, and place, without the sacrifice of people +or money, a large number of faithful subjects under the illustrious +Government of her Majesty, furnishing the same also with a greater +abundance of resources. + +To this end I shall hold in view and faithfully observe the policy +which her Majesty outlines in her confidential Royal order, to which +I reply; its application will be the constant object of everything I +decree and execute. And very happy shall I be thus to make suitable +return for the many proofs of co-operation and esteem, which, for the +past thirteen years I have received from the Filipinos; infinitely +more so, because working at the same time for the better service of +her Majesty in accordance with her Royal plans in which these people +have always found their greatest and surest well-being. + +Your Excellency being convinced, then, that these are the sentiments +which impel me and the plans I contemplate for the fulfillment of the +important duties her Majesty has deigned to confer upon me, can from +this reply assure her that as far as I am concerned, nothing shall be +left undone to carry out to the letter the policy she has been pleased +to outline to me, and to merit thereby her august confidence, which +I so earnestly desire. May God preserve your Excellency many years. + + +Manila, February 23, 1838. + +Andrés G. Camba. + +The most excellent, the Secretary, Office of Colonial Administration. + + + + + + +APPENDIX XVI + +COMMUNICATION FROM THE GOVERNOR OF ZAMBOANGA TO THE SUPREME GOVERNMENT +OF THE PHILIPPINES RELATIVE TO THE TREATY OF SIR JAMES BROOKE WITH +THE SULTAN OF SULU, TOGETHER WITH OTHER COMMUNICATIONS RELATING TO +THE TREATY, 1849 [290] + + +Office of the Secretary of the Governor and Captain-General of the +Philippines. + + +Jolo, May 28th, 1849. + +Sr. Don Cayetano Figueroa, Zamboanga. + + +Dear Sir:--I think proper to inform you that yesterday, at three +o'clock in the afternoon, the English war steamer "Nemesis" cast +anchor at this port, coming from Singapore. She brought on board Sir +James Brooke, commissioned to make a treaty of peace and friendship +between Great Britain and the Sultan. This treaty was presented to +the Sultan to-day in the presence of the Datus and a majority of +the people, and after being read in a loud voice it was immediately +approved and ratified. I do not think it necessary to inform you +as to the tenor of said treaty, as Mr. Brooke has told me that he +would go from here to your city for the purpose of communicating to +you everything regarding this matter so that you will be thoroughly +acquainted with all the details. I understand that they have hastened +this matter in view of the recent advices concerning the destruction +of Bali by the Dutch troops and their declared intention of taking +possession of the entire coast of North Borneo, Sulu, and all its +dependencies. In letters received from my partner at Singapore he +tells me that it is certain they are coming, and with a large force, +but it may be not for a month or two. The people here, in view of this +news, have carried everything they have to the interior, and are ready, +whenever the Dutch arrive, to leave the town. We shall see where these +things will stop. Possibly we shall have another case like that of +the French before you leave Zamboanga. Whatever you may decide to +do when you receive this communication, you know that my services +are always at your disposal, and in the event of your determining to +come, there is a house here at your disposition; and I promise you a +friendly reception on the part of the residents. It is my opinion they +are in such a fright that they do not know what to do and business, +of course, is entirely neglected. My brother-in-law, who is the bearer +of this, will inform you in regard to what is going on. He goes to +your town to purchase rice for our house, to provide against a siege; +for rice is dear and scarce here. I remain, your obedient servant, +who kisses your hand.--Guillermo Windham. + + + +Batavia, March 20, 1849.--It appears that the expedition against Jolo +is a matter fully determined upon. It is said that two steamers, two +frigates, and a corvette, operating at the present time against Bali, +are in readiness to set sail the first part of July. I expect that the +publishers of the Singapore paper will publish an article entitled, +"Labuan, Sarawak, the northeast coast of Borneo and the Sultan of +Sulu," by Baron Hoeveel, published in Holland in the first number +of the "Journal for Netherlands India," during the month of January +last, in which he informs his compatriots that if the Government of +Java had followed the counsels of Resident Gronovius of Sambas in +1831 or those of Resident Bloem of Sambas in 1838, they would long +ago have had treaties with the Sultan of Bruney which would have +closed Sarawak and the northern coast to all flags except the Dutch, +and that the questions with the English Government would not have +arisen, but that now it is not worth while to discuss it with the +court of St. James. England is in possession, and she will stay in +possession if she considers it to her advantage. He tells them to +be on their guard, because if they do not have a care the English +will make another move; and he indicates the point which calls for +immediate and indispensable protection, namely, the northeast coast +of Borneo: that is to say, from Sampan Manjee Point to the Cape of +Kamongan (the Straits of Makassar), which he says are tributary to the +Sultan of Sulu. He gives information concerning the different stations +for the principal departments: Malsedu (or Kinabalu), Manjedore and +Tiroen, designating the bay of Sandakan for the first establishment, +as soon as they have taken possession of this side. He enumerates +the products of this part of the world: the pearls, the diamonds, +the iron and gold mines, the birds'-nests, the trepang, etc.; so that +he has strongly influenced the minds of the Dutch. And he concludes +by stating that in the next article of his paper he will discuss the +Sultan's possession in relation to the government of the Dutch Indies, +offering some suggestions as to how his countrymen may avail themselves +of the advantages of this rich territory. It is a truly interesting +article and appears to me no less curious than reasonable. The editor +of the Journal of the Eastern Archipelago will do a good service to +his countrymen by making a translation of it, but it must be done +very soon. I am too busy to write a paper of such length, otherwise +it would have given me pleasure to send you one for your own use. I +reiterate the necessity for despatch, for I really believe that +the Dutch government will work for its own interests in accordance +with the plans which the Baron has marked out. The English will not +relish the idea of their oriental Government sleeping and permitting +the Sultan to make, under coercion, a treaty such as must be made in +order to forward the plans of Van Hoeveel. The vessels of the King +of the Low Countries, the "Prince of Orange," "Sambi," and "Argo," +with five others, set sail on the 15th of this month, transporting +1,800 men in the direction of Bali. Afterwards they are to carry to +Surabaya, on the 25th proximo, 5,000 men more, besides from 2,500 to +3,000 coolies, 12 cannon, 2 mortars, etc., etc. Receive, etc. + +These are notices taken from a letter to hand, from a trustworthy +person in Singapore.--Figueroa. + + + +Military and Civil Government, Plaza de Zamboanga.--No. 101.-- +Department of Government.--Excellent Sir:--Notwithstanding the fact +that the lieutenant governor of this province informs me that he +transcribed and forwarded to your Excellency, while he was in charge +of the civil government during my absence in Malusu, the letter which +Mr. William Windham, a merchant of Jolo, sent me under date of May +28th, it seems to me well to send the original to your Excellency, +which I now do, retaining a copy of it for the purpose of reference +at any time. As your Excellency may note if he will compare its +contents with the text of the treaty of the 29th of the same month +of May, made with the Sultan of Sulu by the English Consul-General +to Borneo, Sir James Brooke, there is, between the terms of the former +and the spirit of Article 7 of the latter, a notable lack of agreement; +wherefore it has not seemed to me well to place entire confidence in +the offer of Windham, who may be suspected of partiality, and I have +concluded, therefore, to move in such a delicate matter with all +possible tact and foresight and in accordance with developments, which +may become extremely complicated. Considering the great interest +which the agents of the English Government show in these questions +concerning Sulu and the part of Borneo subject to the Sultan, I +immediately suspected that the announcement of the imminent arrival +of a considerable Dutch force in the archipelago was only a strategem +to obtain, through surprise and fear, the realization of the agreement +or treaty referred to; but it having been possible for me to secure +fresh data through a different channel, confirming those which Windham +furnished me,--which latter I obtained through Mr. Brooke and the +captain of the "Nemesis," and herewith transmit to your Excellency,-- +I am of the opinion now that the expedition of the Dutch to Jolo is an +enterprise fully determined upon, although it may very well be delayed +or postponed by fortuitous circumstances difficult to foresee. In the +event of the appearance of the Dutch expedition, I shall never believe +that it is with the object of confining its field of action to +punishing the place of residence of the Sultan in a more thorough +manner than was done in the attempt made in April of last year; but +that they intend to conquer and occupy the Island and its dependencies. +If this should be so, I am equally of the opinion that the Government +of your Excellency, notwithstanding its conspicuous firmness and +well-known energy, will not succeed in getting them to recede from +their purpose, as everything goes to show they have determined to +carry it out in the face--most assuredly--of our known and declared +rights and claims to the rule of that land. I venture, therefore, to +believe that the only way to prevent the serious detriment which would +result to this colony, under the wise and worthy government of your +Excellency, from the occupation of Sulu, avoiding at the same time a +conflict between the Spanish and Dutch Governments, respectively, would +be, by means of persuasion and by taking advantage of the state of +extreme alarm now existing in Sulu, to anticipate them by a recognition +of the sovereignty of Spain, floating our national flag under +guaranties which would make impossible (without manifest violence) this +proposed unprecedented aggression. I am convinced that besides flying +the national flag and having the sovereignty of Spain recognized in a +formal manner, the principal guaranty must be--and I shall require it +unconditionally--that they shall agree to let us garrison with Spanish +troops the principal fort of Sulu, the residence of the Sultan. To this +end I have decided to embark in the pilot boat "Pasig" and make my way +to Jolo without delay, where, if I do not obtain the results which I +have here set forth, it will certainly not be through lack of zeal and +activity, but through encountering obstacles beyond my control or +influence, and owing to difficulties incident to the temperament of +those people and the ancient prejudices which, owing to a series of +events stretching through centuries, they feel towards us, as is only +too well known to your Excellency. To aid me in these operations and +to meet possible contingencies--since there will be needed there, in +case of success, an expert and trustworthy officer--and to carry out +reconnaissances and make plans which cannot fail to be always of the +greatest usefulness to the government at Manila, I shall invite the +chief of engineers of this place, Don Emilio Bernaldez, to accompany +me, if the exigencies of the service do not demand his presence here +and at Pasanhan. All of which I have the honor to lay before your +Excellency in the hope that it may merit your entire approval. May God +preserve your Excellency many years. + + +Zamboanga, June 8, 1849. + +Cayetano Figueroa. + +His high Excellency the Governor and Captain-General of these +Philippine Islands. + + + +Office of the Secretary of the Governor and Captain-General of the +Philippines. + +Zamboanga, June 5th, 1849.--Mr. Consul-General:--I have the honor +to inform you that from notices received from Jolo, it has come to +my knowledge that during your stay there with the steamer "Nemesis" +you negotiated a commercial treaty with the Sultan Mohammed Pulalun; +and as I am entirely ignorant of its essential clauses, and as my +Government has for a long time past, and especially of late, been +in possession or enjoyment through solemn treaties, the first made +with the Malay chiefs, masters of the coasts of Sulu, of the right +that our commercial flag be at least as privileged as any other; and +in view of the indisputable rights which Spain has to the territory +in question, rights not merely of prescription; I have the honor to +request, in view of the close friendship which unites our respective +Governments and which I honor myself in maintaining, that you have +the kindness to give me, officially, knowledge of the said treaty and +a copy thereof in order that I may forward it to the most excellent, +the Governor-General of these Philippine Islands, without prejudice +to my making before you, if the spirit of any of these articles +so requires, the remonstrances that may be necessary to uphold the +rights of Spain.--Receive, Mr. Consul-General, the assurance of my +consideration, etc. + +C. de Figueroa. + + + +To Sir James Brooke, Consul-General of her Britannic Majesty in Borneo +and Governor of Labuan. + + +H. M. S. "Nemesis," June 3rd, 1849.--Sir:--I have the honor to reply +to your communication of this date; and as the quickest way to furnish +your Excellency with the information desired, I enclose herewith a copy +of the agreement recently made with the Government of Sulu. It would be +unprofitable to discuss at this time the rights of Spain to which you +make allusion, and the interests of Great Britain, which are involved, +but as the best means of preserving the cordial relations which should +always exist between the public servants of our respective governments, +I propose to forward our present correspondence to the Secretary of +Foreign Affairs of her Britannic Majesty. Nevertheless, permit me to +say that my opinion is that the interests of Spain and of Great Britain +in these seas should be considered entirely harmonious and equally +opposed to any system of oppression or of monopoly.--I have the honor +to be, with the greatest consideration, Sir, Your obedient servant. + + +Brooke, Commissioner and Consul-General. + + + +To His Excellency C. de Figueroa, Governor of Zamboanga. + + +Her Majesty, the Queen of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and +Ireland, desirous of encouraging commerce between her subjects and +those of the independent princes in the Eastern seas, and of putting +an end to the piracy which has up to this time hindered said commerce: +and his Highness the Sultan Mohammed Pulalun who occupies the throne +and governs the territories of Sulu, animated by like sentiments +and desirous of co-operating in the measures which may be necessary +for the achievement of the objects mentioned; have resolved to place +on record their determination on these points by an agreement which +contains the following articles: Article 1. From now on there shall +be peace, friendship, and good understanding between her Majesty +the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland and his Highness Mohammed +Pulalun, Sultan of Sulu, and between their respective heirs and +successors, and between their subjects. Article 2. The subjects of +her Britannic Majesty shall have complete liberty to enter, reside, +carry on business, and pass with their merchandise through all parts +of the dominions of his Highness the Sultan of Sulu, and they shall +enjoy in them all the privileges and advantages with respect to +commerce or in connection with any other matter whatever which are +at this time enjoyed by, or which in the future may be granted to, +the subjects or citizens of the most favored nation; and the subjects +of his Highness the Sultan of Sulu shall likewise be free to enter, +reside, carry on business, and pass with their merchandise to all parts +of the dominions of her Britannic Majesty, in Europe as well as in +Asia, as freely as the subjects of the most favored nation, and they +shall enjoy in said dominions all the privileges and advantages with +respect to commerce and in connection with other matters which are now +enjoyed by, or which in the future may be granted to, the subjects or +citizens of the most favored nation. Article 3. British subjects shall +be permitted to buy, lease, or acquire in any lawful way whatever all +kinds of property within the dominions of His Highness the Sultan of +Sulu; and his Highness extends, as far as lies within his power, to +every British subject who establishes himself in his dominions, the +enjoyment of entire and complete protection and security to person +and to property--as well any property which in the future may be +acquired, as that which has already been acquired prior to the date +of this agreement. Article 4. His Highness the Sultan of Sulu offers +to allow the war vessels of her Britannic Majesty and those of the +India Company to enter freely the ports, rivers, and inlets situated +within his dominions and to permit said vessels to supply themselves, +at reasonable prices, with the goods and provisions which they may +need from time to time. Article 5. If any English vessel should +be lost on the coasts of the dominions of his Highness the Sultan +of Sulu the latter promises to lend every aid in his power for the +recovery and delivery to the owners of everything than can be saved +from said vessels; and his Highness also promises to give entire +protection to the officers and crew and to every person who may be +aboard the shipwrecked vessel, as well as to their property. Article +6. Therefore, her Majesty the Queen of the United Kingdom of Great +Britain and Ireland, and the Sultan of Sulu, bind themselves to adopt +such measures as lie within their power to suppress piracy within +the seas, islands, and rivers under their respective jurisdiction +or influence, and his Highness the Sultan of Sulu binds himself not +to harbor or protect any person or vessel engaged in enterprises of +a piratical nature. Article 7. His Highness the Sultan of Sulu, for +the purpose of avoiding in the future any occasion for disagreement, +promises to make no cession of territory within his dominions to any +other nation, nor to subjects or citizens thereof, nor to acknowledge +vassalage or feudality to any other power without the consent of her +Britannic Majesty. Article 8. This treaty must be ratified, and the +ratifications will therefore be exchanged in Jolo within two years +from date. Home Copy.--Brooke.--Approved, etc.--Signed and sealed +May 29, 1849. + + + +Zamboanga, June 5, 1849.--Mr. Consul-General:--I have received the +letter which you have done me the honor to send under date of the day +before yesterday in reply to mine, and I acknowledge receipt of copy of +the treaty which you negotiated with his Highness the Sultan of Sulu +on the 29th May last. I have no remarks to make, Mr. Consul-General, +with respect to the first six articles of the treaty, for the +clauses they contain are not of such an urgent character that my +Government cannot postpone their discussion if it so deems advisable; +but I might perhaps create in the future serious embarrassment to our +respective Governments should I allow Article 7 to pass unnoticed. It +establishes two principles of the most vital importance: (1st) His +Highness the Sultan binds himself to recognize the sovereignty of no +power without previously notifying her Britannic Majesty; and (2nd) +to make, likewise, no cession of the least portion of the territory +of his dominions to any State, person or corporation. With relation +to the first point, and waiving for the moment the question whether, +because the Sultan is in possession, with slight exceptions, of the +coast of Sulu, this island must be regarded as his exclusive domain, +it is my duty, Mr. Consul-General, to inform you that for a long time +past the said Sultan of Sulu has admitted and acknowledged himself +to be under the protection of her Catholic Majesty, recognizing the +sovereignty of Spain in a public way and in official documents which +his Excellency the Governor-General of these Philippine Islands will +be able to produce at the proper time and place. As regards the second +point: I find no objection to the pledge of his Highness having all the +force of free right with respect to those parts of his dominions lying +outside of the island of Sulu, namely, the north and northeast part of +Borneo, now under the rule of the Sultan; but under no circumstances +with respect to the said island of Sulu and its neighboring islands; +for not only can Spain not recognize in any power the right to +intervene in the matter of ceding or not ceding the island of Sulu +and its surrounding islands, as it is claimed can be done according +to the terms of Article 7 of the Treaty; but Spain does not recognize +this right even in the Sultan and Datus of Sulu, because, as I have +had the honor to inform you, Mr. Consul-General, these territories +belong to Spain, by a right not prescribed, by a right in no way +established by the conquest of this archipelago, but positively +through the willing submission of the real natives, the Gimbahans, +who do now, and who at the end of the 17th century did, constitute +the most numerous portion of its population, whose oppressors were +then and are now the Sultan and Datus, Malay Mussulmans. At this very +time the chief of the Gimbahans, this unfortunate and enslaved race, +cherishes with respect and veneration his loving remembrance of Spain +and holds in his possession the proofs of what I assert. This fact +established, Mr. Consul-General, I am forcibly constrained to protest, +which I accordingly do, against every claim in its favor by your nation +on the terms of the said Article 7 of the treaty referred to of May +29th of the present year, since it prejudices the incontestable and +recognized rights of the crown of Spain to the sovereignty of the +territory of the island of Sulu and its surrounding islands, and to +its sovereignty over the present possessors of the coasts of this +archipelago, begging that you will kindly acknowledge receipt of this +letter in order to cover my responsibility to my Government. Receive, +again, Mr. Consul-General, the assurances, etc. + + +C. de Figueroa. + +To Sir James Brooke, Consul-General for her Britannic Majesty in +Borneo and Governor of Labuan. + + + +H. M. S. "Nemesis," June 5, 1849.--Sir: I have the honor to acknowledge +receipt of your communication; and as the matter in question will +probably have to be discussed between our respective Governments, +I think it better not to take up the objections raised by you in +connection with Article 7 of the treaty recently negotiated with +his Highness the Sultan of Sulu. I have the honor to be, with great +consideration, Sir, Your obedient servant. + + +Brooke, Commissioner and Consul-General. + +To His Excellency, Col. C. de Figueroa, Governor of Zamboanga. + + +Military and Civil Government, Town of Zamboanga, No. 100, Government +Department.--Most Excellent Sir:--On reëmbarking at Malusu, March +31st last, returning from the operations which I had conducted against +the same on that same day, following instructions received from your +office in a communication of the 17th of the said month of May, the +result of which I reported to the most Excellent the Captain-General +in an official letter of the 2nd instant, No. 209, the war vessel of +the English East India Company, the "Nemesis" was sighted and soon +afterwards cast anchor in our vicinity. Aboard the vessel was Sir +James Brooke, Consul-General for his country in Borneo and Governor +of Labuan; and as a result of a long conference I had with the latter +gentleman in regard to recent events in Sulu--which conference it +was agreed to continue in this place immediately upon my arrival +here--I gave him, successively, the two communications of which I +attach copies; with them I send to your Excellency letters dated the +3rd and 5th instant replying to mine in terms that your Excellency +will see embodied in the two original letters of corresponding dates, +which I likewise enclose herewith, retaining copies of them, as also +an authorized copy of the treaty or agreement of the 29th of last +May, also enclosed; feeling confident that the indulgence of your +Excellency will approve my action in this delicate matter. May God +preserve your Excellency many years. + + +Zamboanga, June 6th, 1849. + +Cayetano Figueroa. + +The most Excellent, The Governor and Captain-General of the +Philippines. + +Copies.--José María Peñaranda: (his flourish). + + + + + + +APPENDIX XVII + +COMMUNICATION FROM THE SUPREME GOVERNMENT OF THE PHILIPPINES TO THE +SECRETARY OF STATE, RELATIVE TO THE TREATY OF SIR JAMES BROOKE WITH +THE SULTAN OF SULU; AUGUST 16, 1849 [291] + + +Office of the Captain-General and Governor of the Philippines. + +To his Excellency, The Secretary of State and of the Office of +Gobernación of the Kingdom, I have the honor to state the following, +on this date, and under No. 499. + +By the communications which I had the honor to send your Excellency +from Zamboanga on the 23rd of June and 4th of July last, and that of +the General second in command, No. 482, your Excellency must have been +informed of the treaty which has been made in Jolo by the Englishman +Sir James Brooke, of the answer of the Governor of Zamboanga to the +latter and his negotiation with the Sultan and Datus to have the +treaty left without effect, without obtaining the least satisfaction. + +It will therefore be necessary that the question be settled between the +two Cabinets, and I believe that Holland will take our part, as she has +an illfeeling against England on account of the latter's usurpations +in Borneo, contrary to the spirit of the treaty of March 17, 1824, +between the two countries, and must fear to see her rich possessions +surrounded by those of so powerful a rival. The communications of her +Majesty's Consul in Singapore and his confidential correspondence with +the Governor-General of Java, which he has forwarded to the Secretary +of State, show that the Dutch Government wishes to maintain the most +friendly relations with Spain. Although the English press in Singapore +and Hong-Kong are still speaking of a Dutch expedition against Jolo, +nothing has been done hitherto, and the favorable season for such an +expedition has passed. + +As the correspondence between Brooke and the Governor of Zamboanga will +probably play an important part in the future correspondence with the +British Government, I believe it is my duty to submit a few remarks in +regard to the action taken by the said Governor. Notwithstanding that +the objections, which he submitted to Brooke in regard to Article 7 +of the treaty, were well founded, he ought not to have entered upon +such a discussion, and much less to have particularized it in such +a way: he ought to have protested against the treaty as a whole, +and to have declared it null, as made without the consent of Spain, +which holds not only a protectorate, but sovereignty or dominion over +the territory. The second defect that I find in the same letter to +Brooke, is his basing our right to the sovereignty over Sulu on the +"free submission of the true natives of the Gimbahan race, who live +in the interior of the island and are oppressed by the Sultan and the +Datus." Although there is some truth in that statement, and we might +take advantage of this element in case of a war with the Sultan, +I believe that it ought not to have been made under the present +circumstances, as, on the same principle, we would invalidate the +rights founded by us on the different treaties made by Spain with the +Sultan and Datus of Sulu. The acknowledgment made by the latter of the +sovereignty of Spain during over two centuries and more especially in +the treaties of 1646, 1737 and 1836, by the first of which they pledge +themselves to pay, as vassals, a tribute of three boatloads of rice, +as recorded in the Archives, is a powerful argument in favor of our +rights, which the Sultan has often confirmed in his communications +to this Government and in the passports which he gives his subjects, +on printed forms supplied by my predecessor;--I enclose herewith a +copy of one of said passports. + +The British, who doubtless do not feel very certain about their rights, +try to excuse their conduct through the press, as they did when they +occupied Labuan by force. The Singapore Free Press of the 6th of July +published an article in which it alleges, for the purpose of proving +that Sulu has always been considered as a sovereign independent power, +that we said nothing to England when she accepted the cession of the +island of Balambangan, between Borneo and Palawan. Even supposing +the fact to be true, there would be nothing astonishing about it, +considering the distress and the lack of means of the Government +at that time, after the war which, but a few years before, it had +miraculously carried on against the English who held Manila and many +other places in the islands, and the work it had to do in order to +put down interior rebellions, to reorganize the administration and to +reëstablish normal conditions in the provinces which had been left +uncontrolled during four years and had suffered the consequences of +circumstances so unfortunate. Furthermore, the cession of Balambangan +cannot be considered as an act of free will on the part of the Sulus, +since they took advantage of the first opportunity to drive the British +off the island, when they had hardly started to firmly establish +their trading posts. The newspaper also mentions the doctrine +of Walter, which says that an agreement similar to that existing +between the Spanish and Sulu Governments does not entirely derogate +the sovereignty of the protected state, which can make treaties and +contract alliances, except when it has expressly renounced its right +to do so; and that if the first state fails to protect the other, the +treaty is invalidated; the author of the article adds that this is our +case, since we allowed the Dutch to attack Sulu without interfering, +or, as far as known, requiring a reparation or the assurance that +such an attack would not be renewed. + +With regard to the first point, the reference to Walter is correct, +but Walter adds in the same paragraph that "the protected nation is +bound forever by the treaty of protection, so that it can undertake +no engagements which would be contrary to said treaty, that is to say, +that would violate any of the express conditions of the protectorate, +or be inconsistent with any treaty of the said class:" how then +could Article 7 of the treaty made by Brooke be valid, when by said +article the Sultan pledges himself to recognize the sovereignty of +no power without the previous consent of her Britannic Majesty, and +not to cede the smallest part of the territory of his dominions to any +state, person or corporation, said Sultan having already recognized the +sovereignty of Spain and the rights of the latter over the greater part +of his territory, in which the island of Palawan, which was ceded to +us in the last century by the kings of Bruney is included by mistake. + +In regard to the second point, the author of the article is also in +the wrong: for this Government was neither aware of the intentions +of the Dutch, nor was its assistance requested by the Sultan; and +your Excellency knows in what terms I wrote to the Governor-General +of Java about that matter.--If I have given so many details, despite +their not being new to your Excellency it is because the article of the +Singapore Free Press may have been inspired by the British Government, +and deserves therefore not to be left unnoticed. + +In the event of which I am writing, your Excellency will see the +fulfilment of my predictions, and it may perhaps be only the prelude +of events of still greater importance. + +Thus I cannot but earnestly recommend to your Excellency's notice +the necessity that the Governor of the Philippines have very +detailed instructions or very ample powers to proceed as regards +the Southern regions in accordance with what he believes best +suited to her Majesty's interests and to the security of these rich +possessions. In this connection I take the liberty of recommending to +your Excellency such action as our Sovereign the Queen may deem most +wise on my communication (consulta) number 359 and others relative +to the same subject. + +Perhaps, as I mentioned in my communication of the 4th of July last, +the only advantageous issue for us would be to send a strong expedition +and to occupy Jolo, our action being warranted by the piratical acts +committed by several small boats of Bwal, Sulu; the Dutch may avail +themselves of the same excuse and send an expedition before us, if, +as is possible, other pancos [292] [Moro boats] have gone south for +the same purpose; but anyhow the behavior of the Sultan and Datus of +Sulu would give us excellent reasons for taking action against them +at any time. + + +God keep your Excellency many years. + +Manila, August 16, 1849. + +The Count of Manila. + +His Excellency, the Secretary of State and "Gobernación." + + + + + + +APPENDIX XVIII + +REGULATIONS RELATIVE TO TAXES AND IMPOSTS ON NATIVES AND IMMIGRANTS +IN SULU [293] + + +General Government of the Philippines, Treasury Department, Manila, +February 24th, 1877. + + +In view of the communications of the politico-military governor +of Sulu of October 6th of last year, in which he suggests to this +general government the concession of various exemptions in favor of +the natives of these islands and of any Chinamen who shall establish +themselves in the said place, to the end that by this means there may +be promoted the immigration which the interests of that island demand: + +In view of the reports issued in the premises by the central +administration of imposts, the office of the insular auditor, [294] and +the insular departments of civil administration and the treasury: and + +Deeming it expedient, for the realization of the high purposes that +required the military occupation of Jolo and for the progressive +and efficacious development of the moral and material interests of +this young colony, that there should be granted certain exemptions +for the encouragement of the immigration thereto of the greatest +possible number of inhabitants: this office of the general government +in conformity with the suggestions made by the treasury department, +and in accordance with the statements made by the department of civil +administration, disposes the following: + +1. All immigrants to the island of Sulu, of whatever class, race, +or nationality, who shall establish themselves definitively in the +same, engaging in agricultural, industrial, or commercial pursuits, +or in any art, trade, or occupation, shall be exempt during ten years +from all the contributions or taxes imposed, or which in the future +may be imposed, upon the inhabitants of the Philippine Archipelago. + +2. The children of immigrants to Sulu, born in said island or who +establish themselves there before becoming taxpayers in the pueblos +of their birth, shall commence to pay taxes at the age of twenty-five +years, but shall be exempt from military service so long as they +reside in the said island. + +This decree shall be published in the Official Gazette and communicated +to the council of administration, the office of the captain-general, +and the insular department of civil administration; and shall be +returned to the treasury department for such further action as may +be proper. + + + Malcampo. + + + +General Government of the Philippines, Treasury Department, Manila, +August 10, 1887. + + +In view of the investigation conducted by the intendant-general +of the treasury with the object of determining whether it would be +expedient to prolong the term of exemption from all kinds of taxes +and imposts in favor of natives and of immigrants of whatever race or +nationality who are established, or who shall establish themselves, +in Sulu for the purpose of engaging in any kind of industry, commerce, +profession, art, or trade, or in agriculture: + +In view of the reports issued by the said directive bureau of the +treasury and the politico-military governor of Sulu: + +And considering that exemption from all burdens constitutes one of +the most efficacious means of encouraging the immigration demanded by +the interest of the archipelago in question; this general government, +in conformity with the suggestions made by the office of the intendant +of the treasury and the politico-military governor of Sulu, disposes +that the term of exemption granted by superior decree of this general +government of February 24th, 1877, shall be understood as extended +for another term of ten years, the said extension to be reckoned +from the day following that on which the first term expires, that is, +from the 25th day of February of the current year. + +This decree shall be published in the Official Gazette; the Government +of his Majesty shall be informed thereof and a copy of the records +transmitted; it shall be communicated to the council of administration, +the tribunal of accounts, the office of the Captain-General, and the +insular department of civil administration; and shall be returned to +the office of the intendant of the treasury for any further action +that may be proper. + + + Terrero. + + + +Office of the Governor-General of the Philippines. + +Most excellent and most illustrious Sir: The politico-military governor +of Sulu, in a communication dated the 9th instant, states as follows: + + + Most excellent Sir: As the time expiration of the exemptions + granted to Sulu and its port by decree of the general government + under the able direction of your Excellency, dated February 24th, + 1877, and extended by superior order issued from the same office + for another term of ten years, on August 23rd, 1887, is drawing + near, the person who has the honor to sign hereunder believes + that the moment has come to call the attention of your Excellency + to the matter, and he takes the liberty to set down some remarks + in the premises, to the end that when your Excellency determines + what is deemed most expedient, they may be taken under advisement. + + In the exemptions granted to Sulu, it must be borne in mind that + they affect two distinct elements, which constitute the life + and favor the development of this locality. Some have reference + to the exemption from all taxes, tributes, and gabels imposed, + or to be imposed, in favor of natives or foreigners taking up + their abode in the Sulu archipelago. Others refer exclusively + to the declaration of a free port, with exemption from all taxes + and customs formalities in favor of the capital of the island. + + In treating this question and in considering what ought to be done + in the future, when the moment arrives for determining whether + a fresh extension is expedient, or whether, on the contrary, + this territory must enter upon the normal administrative life + general in other localities of the Philippine Archipelago, + the subject must be dealt with under the two aspects above + set forth. In regard to the declaration of freedom of the port + granted to Jolo, it is undoubtedly expedient to continue it for + the present without change. So long as the protocol entered into + with the other nations who are parties thereto, continues in + force--in which protocol our incontestable right of sovereignty + over this archipelago, with the limitations therein stipulated, + is declared--it would be highly impolitic to close the period + of franchise granted to this port. Should there be established + the embarrassing obstacles and difficulties to commerce entailed + by the formalities of customs regulations, the English steamers + which now carry on the trade with Singapore, would immediately + cease to visit this port and would make their destination some + other port of the island, where, under the provisions of the + protocol above referred to, no one could lawfully obstruct them + until after the effective occupation of the new port selected for + trading operations, and until after having allowed to elapse the + requisite time subsequent to publishing this resolution in the + official papers of the Peninsula. The distinguished intelligence + of your Excellency will perceive easily that after this had been + repeated several times, we should find ourselves compelled either + to occupy effectively all the islands of the Sulu archipelago where + English steamers might attempt to establish their business, or, + in the end, to allow them to carry on their commercial operations + at any place that suited them, which, without doubt, would be much + more prejudicial than what happens at the present time; for, at + any rate, so long as steamers come exclusively to this port or to + that of Siasi, as is the case at present, the trade can be watched + easily and conveniently and without the commercial operations which + are carried on giving rise to diplomatic questions; it is easy, + also to prevent the traffic of arms and war supplies, which would + not be the case if they touched at other points where our sphere of + action is not so direct and effective. Furthermore, the advantages + of the present situation must also be taken into account. So long + as these steamers touch only at Jolo and Siasi, as happens now, + these two points are the only markets, whither all the people of + the archipelago must necessarily go to trade, not only to supply + themselves with the effects which they import and are necessary + to life, but also to sell all the products they gather in their + fields and in the seas, which constitute the element of commerce + that justifies English vessels in visiting these regions, making it + possible to collect sufficient freight to maintain the two regular + lines now established. It is obvious that, since we are masters + of the towns of Jolo and Siasi--the only points of distribution + for effects necessary to the life of the natives here--we can, + when we consider it expedient, prevent the sale of these effects + to the villages hostile to the city, a most momentous advantage + resulting therefrom and a means of government of inestimable + value. So long as the Moros have to supply themselves from these + markets, our importance is incontestable; all their outbreaks + are easily checked without appeal to violent methods; and the + civilizing effect which results from the constant intercourse + which is necessitated by their coming to the occupied ports, is + extended, thereby modifying the sanguinary and turbulent habits of + this race. If the revenues from the duties which would be imposed + were of sufficient importance to cover the expenses entailed by + the occupation of Sulu, the arguments supporting the opinion + above expressed could easily be set aside. But unfortunately + there can not be expected from the custom house of Jolo, in the + event of its establishment, even the expenses necessary to cover + the salaries of the personnel engaged therein. For, the foreign + steamers which now visit this port would immediately discontinue + their voyages, and even though it were possible to prevent them + from making port at some other place for the purpose of carrying + on their mercantile operations--a thing which would not be easy so + long as the treaty is in force--what would happen? Why, that the + trade would be continued by means of smaller boats which would + come from Borneo, and it would not be feasible to prevent this + except by the posting of a very large number of coastguards along + the shores of the innumerable islands of Sulu, a method which + it would be altogether impossible to adopt. It is, therefore, + unquestionably expedient to maintain the present status, whether + the matter be considered under its economic aspect or under that + of the policy it is necessary to develop in this territory. A + very different course must, in the opinion of the undersigned, + be followed in the matter of the exemption from taxation granted + to the inhabitants of Sulu. These exists here a numerous Chinese + colony, which is the element that really enjoys the benefit of + the advantages flowing from the present free-port conditions, + and it is neither just nor equitable that, while the Chinese find + in us the support and protection which enable them to carry on + and develop the trade in which they alone engage, they should not + contribute in any way towards the expenses of the Government which + furnishes them so many advantages. It is, therefore, expedient + to impose upon all Chinaman residing in the Sulu territory the + obligation to pay the same taxes as are paid by those of the same + race in other parts of the Philippines. The establishment of this + system promises not only the profit of the sums which would be + collected as a consequence thereof, but also the desideratum of + introducing order into the anarchical manner of life obtaining + among the Chinese here. As soon as the obligation to pay taxes + is imposed upon all and the lists of tax-payers are made up, + individual interest will see to it that all persons living in + the country are included therein; for it is unquestionable that, + since each desires to be placed under the same conditions as the + other, the Chinamen themselves will be of very great assistance + in discovering those who now are not included in the incomplete + and untrustworthy census lists existing in the offices of the + Government of Sulu. It is believed, then, that it is expedient + and just to discontinue the franchise now enjoyed by the Chinese + here, and that they should begin to contribute at once towards + defraying the expenses of the treasury, paying at least as much as + is paid by their countrymen in other parts of the Philippines. It + would appear also equitable that the Indians residing here should + also begin to pay the cédulas [295] of the class to which they + respectively belong; but there must be borne in mind the limited + number of individuals of this race residing here; the expediency + of encouraging by this means the immigration of fresh residents; + and, above all, the services they render in any case of alarm, + whether caused by juramentados or by more serious aggressions + attempted against the city; all of which circumstances make it + proper that they should continue enjoying the exemption from + the payment of poll-tax which they now enjoy, as also exemption + from all the other taxes upon the insignificant industries from + which they gain a subsistence. The treasury could not hope for + any happy results in this direction; and, on the other hand, if + such a tax were imposed, the place would, in a very short time, + be left entirely without any civilian population; for only with + difficulty, and thanks to the franchises, can persons be found + who will face the constant danger in which residents in Jolo are + placed--especially those who engage in the cultivation of the + soil in the outskirts of the town; of which class the civilian + population is, in a very large majority, composed. + + It remains, only, most excellent Sir, to discuss the expediency, + or otherwise, of establishing taxation upon commerce, industry, + and property. All the urban property of Jolo is in the hands of + the Chinese, with so few exceptions that there are not more than + three property holders who do not belong to that race. In their + hands is all the commerce, with the sole exception of two Spanish + houses: every thing relating to business is in their power; so + that any burden imposed in this direction would not be borne by + them, but would be paid by the garrison of Jolo. For, united as + the Chinamen are in every thing that relates to the avoidance of + tax-paying, they would come to a perfect understanding to surtax + every thing,--not in the same proportion as the contributions + they would pay, but with a considerable increase, with the + result that the only tax-payer to the treasury and for the + Chinaman would be the unfortunate inhabitant of Jolo. And since + the population here consists almost entirely of the garrison, + which renders such arduous services at this place, I believe + that it would not be just to add to the other disadvantages that + the service here offers, the very serious one that would result + from the imposition of taxes in this capital. Furthermore, one + must not lose sight of what might happen or rather what would + immediately happen, when, by taxing the commerce of the city, + the majority of the Chinamen now established here would go to + Maymbung, with a tendency to store their merchandise at other + important points in the island, in which places our rule is, it + may be said, nominal, and it is unnecessary to insist upon the + undesirable consequences that would follow; for we should return + to the condition in which Maymbung stood in April of the year + 1887, when this town was a very important center of resistence + to our rule, due to the facility afforded in that place for the + purchase of unlimited arms and ammunition, a business carried + on by the foreign steamers who anchored there at that time. And + all this without taking into account the undesirability, from a + political point of view, of affording the Moros the opportunity + of purchasing their supplies at prices lower than those in this + city; since, if the merchants in that town did not pay taxes + they would be able to sell at lower prices than those in the + capital. Summing up what I have stated above and recapitulating + the questions herein treated, I will conclude by submitting to + the distinguished intelligence of your Excellency that I consider + necessary and of the highest political expediency the maintenance + of the freedom of the port granted to Jolo; that this franchise + should be extended to Siasi, which enjoys this privilege in fact + though not by right; and that care should be taken to prevent the + slightest obstacle from interfering with the trade at both points, + to the end that foreign steamers may, in their own interest, + touch only at these two points of the archipelago of Sulu; that + the Chinamen should be formed into guilds or associations, after + the pattern of the organizations prevailing in other parts of the + Philippines, these being necessary, further, to the making up of + the lists of tax-payers; that, as a consequence of the formation + of these associations, they should be compelled to pay taxes to + the same extent as all other Chinamen residing in the country, + unless your Excellency is of the opinion that the quota should + be increased in consideration of the other advantages they enjoy; + that there should be imposed a tax upon smokers of opium and upon + the importation thereof. This tax would be a source of revenue of + some consideration if it were farmed, as was the intention four + years ago, when sale to the highest bidder was desisted from in + view of the decree of franchises which is the subject of this + communication. Finally, that property, commerce, and industries + should not be taxed, nor should the civilian population be burdened + with the poll-tax, since the latter deserve consideration by + reason of the arduous services they render in this place; and + this applies to the garrison, as well as to the civilians who + make up the town, who, in the end, would be the persons who + alone would have to bear these burdens. Such, most excellent + Sir, is the opinion, expressed as succinctly as possible, of the + undersigned in regard to these matters, which, at no distant date, + will present themselves for resolution and which your Excellency + will determine with your well-known ability and good judgment. + + Which I have the pleasure to transmit to your most Illustrious + Excellency, to the end that you may take note of the part relating + to the economic side of this question. + + + God preserve your most illustrious Excellency for many years. + + Manila, July 31st, 1896. + + Blanco. + + To the most excellent and most illustrious the Intendant-General + of the Treasury. + + + +Office of the Intendant-General of the Treasury Division of Direct +Imposts + +Most excellent and most illustrious Sir: The just considerations set +forth by the politico-military governor of Sulu in a communication +addressed to his high Excellency the Governor-General of these islands +on July 9th of last year, forwarded to your most illustrious Lordship +on the 31st of the same month and year, reveal a close study of the +questions treated, based upon practice and experience. + +The chief of the division of direct imposts, who signs hereunder, +in presenting the report ordered by your most illustrious Lordship +in your decree of the first day of the following August, must begin +by expressing at once his conformity with the views given by the +governor of Sulu, in the part relating to this division. + +Undoubtedly considerations of the highest political moment led the +high authorities of the Archipelago, on August 23rd of 1887, to extend +for another term of ten years the franchises granted to Sulu, and +since these considerations have not ceased to be of moment, to judge +from the enlightened views expressed by the said politico-military +governor, it is to be presumed that it is expedient to grant a fresh +concession of franchises; but not, at this time, for a period of time +equal to that about to expire, though for a period that might well be +half that of the previous term; for, regarding the matter prudently, +it might happen that during this lapse of time the conditions in +the places under discussion should alter in such a way as to counsel +either the total suppression of the liberties in question or their +partial modification. + +But if there are considerations in favor of this new concession, +equity counsels that there be excluded therefrom the Chinese in so far +as relates to the imposition of the poll-tax, since they control all +the business and are the only persons who really exploit that region. + +Consequently, the chief of the division of direct imposts has the +honor to report to your most illustrious Lordship: + +1. That it be recommended to his high Excellency the Governor-General +of these Islands, that, to take the place of the present franchises, +there be granted again, at the proper time, to the ports of Jolo and +Siasi, the exemption from the payment of all urban and industrial taxes +in favor of the natives and of the Chinese established at those points. + +2. That there be created at once the imposition of the poll-tax upon +the Chinese. + +3. That the natives and the civilian population be exempt from the +payment of poll-tax. + +Your most illustrious Lordship will, however, determine whatever he +deems most expedient. + + +Manila, August 6th, 1897. + +Marcelino Pacheco. + + + +Office of the Intendant-General of the Treasury Division of Indirect +Imposts + +Most excellent and most illustrious Sir: In compliance with the +decree which, under date of August 10 of the current year, your +most illustrious Excellency saw fit to issue, to the effect that, in +the shortest possible space of time the divisions of imposts should +report upon the matters concerning each one in the proceedings set +on foot by the politico-military governor of Sulu in regard to the +expediency or the inexpediency of the renewal of the exemption from +taxation enjoyed by the natives in that place, I have to state to +your illustrious Excellency that: + +1. The undersigned chief, fully agreeing with the enlightened views set +forth by the governor of Sulu, believes that the maintenance of the +declaration of freedom of the port granted to Jolo is of the highest +political moment and that the franchise should be extended to Siasi. + +2. That in regard to indirect imposts which are of such a nature that, +while they are a source of profit to the state, they bring also no +small benefit to the tax-payer, these should be made applicable to +the Sulu archipelago, as undoubtedly has been the case, as a matter +of fact, up to the present time in regard to the stamp and lottery +revenues. + +3. Both for the reasons set forth by the governor of Sulu as well +as for these given by his predecessor on June 11, 1893, in favor of +a tax upon opium smokers, the undersigned chief believes that it is +not only just but a matter of the greatest necessity to continue the +imposition of this tax. + +Your most illustrious Excellency will, however, order whatever he +deems most expedient. + + +Manila, September 10th, 1897. + +José Garcés de Marcilla. + + + + +Office of the Intendant-General of the Treasury, + +Manila, December 28, 1897. + + +Let the report of the Chamber of Commerce and of the administration +of customs of Manila be heard, within one and the same period of +five days. + + +Dominguez. + + + + + + +APPENDIX XIX + +THE PROTOCOL OF SULU, OF 1877, BETWEEN SPAIN, GERMANY, AND GREAT +BRITAIN, MAY 30, 1877 [296] + + +General Government of the Philippines + +Royal Order + +Colonial office.--No. 281.--Excellent Sir: The Secretary of State sent +the following communication to this office on the 26th of March last: +By Royal order communicated by the Secretary of State and for such +action as is indicated therein I deliver herewith to your Excellency a +copy of the protocol signed on the 11th inst. by Señor Manuel Silvela, +Secretary of State, and by the representatives of Great Britain and +Germany, for the purpose of establishing the liberty of trade and +commerce in the Sulu seas; said protocol takes effect on this date, +as specified in Article 5 of the same.--Referred to your Excellency +by Royal order with a copy of the protocol, for its execution.--God +keep your Excellency many years. + + +Madrid, April 2, 1877. + +Martin de Herrera. The Governor-General of the Philippine Islands. + +Manila, May 30, 1877. The above order shall be executed, communicated +and published. Moriones. + + +[Protocol referred to.] + +The Hon. Austin Henry Layard, Envoy Extraordinary and Minister +Plenipotentiary of her Britannic Majesty; and Count Von Hatzfeldt, +Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary of his Majesty the +Emperor of Germany, commissioned by their respective Governments to +terminate the difficulties which have occurred in the Sulu seas and to +establish for that purpose, in a final way, the liberty of commerce +in those seas, acknowledged by the Secretary of State of Spain in +the Notes which he sent on April 15, 1876, to the representatives of +Great Britain and Germany; + +After having examined with due attention the preliminaries of the +question and especially the negotiations formerly carried on between +the Governments of Great Britain and Germany and that of Spain, +have agreed to draw up the following Protocol: + +The Secretary of State of Spain, in the name of his Government, says: + +Considering the preliminary fact that the German ships "Marie Louise" +and "Gazelle" were returned and an indemnity paid for their cargoes +in 1873 and 1874, and that the German ship "Minna" was returned twice +in 1875 and 1874; + +Duly appreciating the increasing requirements of navigation and +commerce, and above all the legal status constituted by the Notes of +the Spanish Secretary of State dated the 15th of April last and by +the official publication of said Notes by the Governments of Great +Britain and Germany, as also by the instructions given accordingly +by said Governments to their consuls, agents and commanders of their +naval forces; + +Therefore the Government of his Majesty the King of Spain recognizes +that the merchant ships going to the Sulu archipelago can no longer +be required to call first at Zamboanga, to pay the harbor dues there +and to provide themselves with a navigation permit delivered at said +port. It furthermore believes that it must acknowledge, as provided +in the Notes of the 15th of April last, the complete liberty of +direct trade and commerce for ships and subjects of Great Britain, +the German Empire and the other powers, with the Sulu archipelago. + +Considering that the Governments of Great Britain and of Germany have +maintained all their claims in regard to the liberty of navigation, +commerce and direct trade with the Sulu archipelago and within the +archipelago; that the Government of his Majesty the King of Spain +admits that it cannot guarantee the security of commerce at unoccupied +places of the archipelago in return for duties and dues paid, but will +guarantee perfect security to the ships and subjects of Great Britain, +Germany and the other powers at places occupied by said Government, +and provide the establishments necessary for the protection of their +trade, the Spanish Secretary of State remarks that there is no reason +why said ships and subjects should be exempted, at places occupied by +Spain, from the formalities, general regulations, and ordinary duties, +whose nature will be explained in the present Protocol. + +The undersigned representatives of Great Britain and of Germany refer, +on their part, to the Notes and official communications sent by them +on this matter to the Spanish Government, and requesting the latter to +acknowledge the absolute liberty of commerce and trade in all parts +of the Sulu archipelago, said acknowledgment having been mentioned +by the Spanish Government in the Notes of April 15, 1876. + +In consequence of what precedes and as the result of their conferences, +the undersigned have agreed on the following declarations: + +I + +Commerce and direct trading by ships and subjects of Great Britain, +Germany and the other powers are declared to be and shall be absolutely +free with the Sulu archipelago and in all parts thereof, as well as the +right of fishery, without prejudice to the rights recognized to Spain +by the present Protocol, in conformity with the following declarations: + +II + +The Spanish authorities shall no longer require ships and subjects +of Great Britain, Germany and the other powers, going freely to +the archipelago of Sulu, or from one point to another within the +Sulu waters, or from such a point to any other point in the world, +to touch, before or after, at any specified place in the archipelago +or elsewhere, to pay any duties whatsoever, or to get a permit from +said authorities, which, on their side, shall refrain from obstructing +or interfering in any way with the above mentioned trade. + +It is understood that the Spanish authorities shall in no way and under +no pretense prevent the free importation and exportation of all sorts +of goods, without exception, save at such places as are occupied, +and in accordance with Declaration III, and that in all places not +occupied effectively by Spain, neither the ships and subjects above +mentioned nor their goods shall be liable to any tax, duty or payment +whatsoever, or any sanitary or other regulation. + +III + +In the places occupied by Spain in the archipelago of Sulu the Spanish +Government shall be empowered to establish taxes and sanitary and +other regulations, while said places are effectively occupied; but +Spain pledges herself, on her part, to provide in such places the +offices and employees necessary to meet the requirements of commerce +and the application of said regulations. It is however expressly +understood that the Spanish Government, while it is resolved to impose +no restrictive regulations in the places occupied by it, pledges itself +voluntarily not to establish in said places taxes or duties exceeding +those provided in the Spanish tariffs or in the treaties or conventions +between Spain and any other power. Neither shall it put into force +in said places exceptional regulations applicable to the commerce +and subjects of Great Britain, Germany and the other powers. In case +Spain should occupy effectively other places in the archipelago of +Sulu, and provide thereat the offices and employees necessary to +meet the requirements of commerce, the Governments of Great Britain +and Germany shall not object to the application of the rules already +stipulated for places occupied at present. But, in order to avoid the +possibility of new claims due to the uncertainty of business men in +regard to the places which are occupied and subject to regulations and +tariffs, the Spanish Government shall, whenever a place is occupied +in the Sulu archipelago, communicate the fact to the Governments of +Great Britain and Germany, and inform commerce at large by means of +a notification which shall be published in the official journals of +Madrid and Manila. In regard to the tariffs and regulations stipulated +for places which are occupied at the present time, they shall only be +applicable to the places which may be subsequently occupied by Spain +six months after the date of publication in the Official Gazette of +Madrid. It remains agreed that no ship or subject of Great Britain, +Germany and other powers shall be required to call at one of the +occupied places, when going to or from a place not occupied by Spain, +and that they shall not be liable to suffer prejudice on that account +or on account of any class of merchandise shipped to an unoccupied +place in the archipelago. + +IV + +The three Governments represented by the undersigned pledge themselves +respectively to publish the present declarations and to have them +strictly respected by their representatives, consular agents and +commanders of the naval forces in the seas of the Orient. + +V + +If the Governments of Great Britain and Germany do not refuse their +adhesion to the present Protocol within 15 days from this date, or if +they notify their acceptance before the expiration of said period, +through their undersigned representatives, the present Declarations +shall then come into force. + + +Manuel Silva, Secretary of State of His Majesty the King of Spain. + +Done at Madrid, the 11th of March, 1877. + +A true copy.--Madrid, April 2, 1877.--A true copy.--The Subsecretary, +Francisco Rubio. + + + + + + +APPENDIX XX + +THE PROTOCOL OF SULU OF 1885, BETWEEN SPAIN, GERMANY, AND GREAT +BRITAIN, MARCH 7, 1885 [297] + + +General Government of the Philippines + +Royal Order + +Foreign Office.--No. 312.--Excellent Sir: The Secretary of State sends +me the following communication on March 29th, 1885:--Excellent Sir: I +have the honor to forward you a translated copy of the protocol between +Spain, Germany and Great Britain, the latter two nations recognizing +the sovereignty of the first over the archipelago of Sulu, signed in +Madrid on the 7th of March, 1885.--I send you this communication by +Royal order, and enclose a copy of the treaty referred to. God keep +your Excellency many years.--Madrid, April 8, 1885.--Tejada. + +Manila, June 17, 1885.--To be executed and published in the Official +Gazette. + + +Terrero. + + +A seal which says: Office of the Minister of State.--Translation.--The +undersigned, his Excellency Señor José Elduayen, Marquis of Pazo +de la Merced, Minister of State of his Majesty the King of Spain; +His Excellency Señor Count Solms Sonnerwalds, Envoy Extraordinary +and Minister Plenipotentiary of his Majesty the Emperor of Germany, +and His Excellency Sir Robert B. D. Morier, Envoy Extraordinary and +Minister Plenipotentiary of her Britannic Majesty, authorized in due +form to carry on the negotiations followed in London and Berlin during +the years 1881 and 1882 by the representatives of his Majesty the +King of Spain with the Governments of Great Britain and Germany, for +the purpose of obtaining from these two powers the solemn recognition +of the sovereignty of Spain over the archipelago of Sulu, have agreed +on the following articles: + +I + +The Governments of Germany and Great Britain recognize the sovereignty +of Spain over the parts which are effectively occupied as well as +over those which are not yet occupied, of the archipelago of Sulu, +whose limits are established in Article II. + +II + +As expressed in Article I of the treaty signed on September 23, 1836, +between the Spanish Government and the Sultan of Sulu, the archipelago +of Sulu includes all the islands between the western extremity of the +island of Mindanao on one side and the mainland of Borneo and the +island of Palawan on the other, except those mentioned in Article +III. It is understood that the islands of Balabak and Kagayan Sulu +belong to the archipelago. + +III + +The Spanish Government renounces, as far as regards the British +Government, all claims of sovereignty over the territories of the +mainland of Borneo which belong or may have belonged to the Sultan +of Sulu, including the neighboring islands of Balambangan, Banguey, +Malawati, and all those comprised within a zone of three maritime +leagues from the coast, and which are part of the territories +administered by the company known as "The British North Borneo +Company." + +IV + +The Spanish Government pledges itself to carry out in the archipelago +of Sulu the stipulations contained in Articles I, II, and III of the +protocol signed in Madrid on March 11, 1877, viz.: (1) Commerce and +direct trading by ships and subjects of Great Britain, Germany and the +other powers are declared to be and shall be absolutely free with the +archipelago of Sulu and in all parts thereof, as well as the right +of fishery, without prejudice to the rights recognized to Spain by +the present Protocol, in conformity with the following declarations: +(2) The Spanish authorities shall no longer require ships and subjects +of Great Britain, Germany and the other powers, going freely to the +archipelago of Sulu, or from one point to another point in the world, +to touch, before or after, at any specified place in the archipelago +or elsewhere, to pay any duties whatsoever, or to get a permit from +said authorities, who, on their side, shall refrain from obstructing +or interfering in any way with the above mentioned trade. + +It is understood that the Spanish authorities shall in no way and +under no pretense prevent the free importation and exportation of +all sorts of goods, without exception, save at such places as are +occupied, and in accordance with Declaration 3, and that in all places +not occupied effectively by Spain, neither the ships and subjects +above mentioned nor their goods shall be subject to any tax, duty +or payment whatsoever, or any sanitary or other regulation. (3) In +the places occupied by Spain in the archipelago of Sulu, the Spanish +Government shall be empowered to establish taxes and sanitary and +other regulations, while said places are effectively occupied; but +Spain pledges herself, on her part, to provide in such places the +offices and employees necessary to meet the requirements of commerce +and the application of said regulations. It is however expressly +understood that the Spanish Government, which is resolved to impose +no restrictive regulations in the places occupied by it, pledges +itself voluntarily not to establish in said places taxes or duties +exceeding those provided in the Spanish tariffs or in the treaties +or conventions between Spain and any other power. Neither shall it +put into force in said places exceptional regulations applicable to +the commerce and subjects of Great Britain, Germany and the other +powers. In case Spain should occupy effectively other places in the +archipelago of Sulu, and provide thereat the offices and employees +necessary to meet the requirements of commerce, the Governments of +Great Britain and Germany shall not object to the application of +the rules already stipulated for places occupied at present. But in +order to avoid the possibility of new claims due to the uncertainty of +business men in regard to the places which are occupied and subject +to regulations and tariffs, the Spanish Government shall, whenever a +place is occupied in the Sulu archipelago, communicate the fact to +the Governments of Great Britain and Germany, and inform commerce +at large by means of a notification which shall be published in the +Official Gazettes of Madrid and Manila. In regard to the tariffs +and regulations stipulated for places which are occupied at the +present time, they shall only be applicable to the places which +may be subsequently occupied by Spain six months after the date of +publication in the Official Gazette of Madrid. + +It remains agreed that no ship or subject of Great Britain, Germany +and the other powers shall be required to call at one of the occupied +places, when going to or coming from a place not occupied by Spain, +and that they shall not be liable to suffer prejudice on that account +or on account of any class of merchandise addressed to an unoccupied +place in the archipelago. + +V + +The Government of her Britannic Majesty pledges itself to see +that there is entire freedom of commerce and navigation, without +distinction of flags, in the territory of North Borneo administered +by the "British North Borneo Company." + +If the Governments of Great Britain and Germany do not refuse their +adhesion to the present protocol within fifteen days from this date, +or if they notify their acceptance before the expiration of said +period, through their undersigned representatives, the present +declarations shall then come into force. Done at Madrid the 7th +of March, 1885.--Seal.--(Signed) J. Elduayen.--Seal.--(Signed) +C. Solms.--Seal.--(Signed) R. B. D. Morier. + + + + + + +APPENDIX XXI + +DECREE OF THE GENERAL GOVERNMENT IN REGARD TO PAYMENT OF TRIBUTE BY +SULUS, MARCH 1, 1894 [298] + + +Office of the Governor-General of the Philippines, Manila, March +1, 1894. + + +In view of the obligation incurred by the Sultan of Sulu by virtue +of which the Moros of all the Sulu archipelago have to pay from the +first day of January of next year, one real each, as a tribute of +vassalage; and since it is necessary to organize this service in a +regular manner and in harmony with the customs of the races living +there, I decree the following: + +1. The Sultan of Sulu shall direct at once all the Datus and Chiefs +of the Moro rancherias [299] to make up lists of the names of the +inhabitants composing each aggregation, giving therein, besides the +names, the status of each individual. + +2. These partial lists shall be fused in one single general census +which the Sultan of Sulu shall deliver to the politico-military +governor of that archipelago before October 1, of the current year. + +3. The interpreters of Jolo, Siasi, Tata'an, and Bangao shall assist +the Sultan in the work of making up these lists and shall translate +them into Spanish; and for this extra work they shall receive the +allowances designated below, the amounts being deducted from the +total proceeds of the liege-money above referred to. + + + Allowances + + To the interpreter of Jolo P20 per month. + To the junior linguist of Jolo P 6 Do. + To the interpreter of Siasi P 8 Do. + To the interpreter of Tata'an P 8 Do. + To the interpreter of Bangao P 8 Do. + + +4. As soon as the lists are completed and have been examined by the +politico-military governor of Sulu, certified copies shall be sent +to this office. + +5. The collection of the tribute shall be made by means of certain +special cedulas, which in due time will be furnished to the Sultan for +distribution, who will collect the amounts paid in and deliver them +over in specie at the office of the politico-military governor of Sulu. + +6. The total proceeds from the said tribute, after deducting the +amount of the allowances to the interpreters, shall be devoted for +the present to the development of the establishments of Jolo, and +especially to the construction of roads. + +To be communicated. + + +Blanco. + + + + + + +APPENDIX XXII + +ROYAL COMMUNICATION RELATIVE TO THE RIGHTS OF FOREIGNERS ON THE PEARL +FISHERIES OF SULU [300] + + +Manila, December 25, 1895. His high Excellency the Minister of +Colonial Affairs. + + +Excellent Sir: In compliance with the Royal order communicated +under date of the 23rd of October last, I have the honor to send +to your Excellency a copy of the previous record of investigations +transmitted by the office of this General Government, together with +the report of the office of the secretary, the remittance of which +your Excellency requests. + +The inquiry formulated by the politico-military governor of Sulu, +arising out of a resolution of the fishery board of the naval station +relative to the order prohibiting foreign subjects from engaging in +the pearl fisheries in the waters of the Sulu archipelago, did not call +for a speedy resolution nor a close study, it being sufficient to bring +the matter to the knowledge of your Excellency without entering deeply +into the question involved, in order not to prejudice the resolution of +the same, leaving to the supreme judgment of his Majesty's Government +the entire appreciation of its reach and consequences, as the only +authority acquainted with the demands of our international relations +and the influence thereon of a decision in regard to a matter of such +recognized importance as is that of the interpretation to be given +to Declaration I of the Sulu Protocol of May 11th of 1877, contained +in Article IV of the Protocol between Spain, Germany, and Great +Britain, signed in Madrid on March 7th, 1885:--hence the brevity of +the data contained in the communications above referred to and even +the forbearance of this office from expressing a concrete opinion +(in any case, not called for) in regard to a question as vital as it +is complex. But circumstances, which are always superior to every will +and every calculation, now make prompt action necessary, and not only +forbid any delay, but impose upon this General Government the duty +of emitting an opinion which shall complement the data furnished +by the office of the secretary of the same, which data were less +extensive and explicit than they would certainly have been had not a +respect for the free initiative of the Supreme Government acted as +a restraining influence. The incident arising out of the presence +in the city of Jolo of the British subject Mr. H. W. Dalton, from +Sandakan, awaiting the arrival of a fleet of boats of light tonnage +belonging to the English concern, The Pearling and Trading Co. Ltd., +[301] of which he is the representative for the purpose of using the +same in the mother-of-pearl shell fishery, which fact I communicated +to your Excellency by cablegram on the 3rd of the current month, +makes more urgent the sovereign decision in regard to the concrete +point as to whether foreign subjects are allowed to engage in the +pearl fishery in the archipelago of Sulu. + +In the judgment of this office (which has, on various occasions, +inspired only by a regard for the best interests of the nation, +expressed the opinion that the Sulu Protocol is too prejudicial to +the said interests to permit of the points of doubtful interpretation +in the same being interpreted liberally), the point in regard to the +right of fishery which foreigners lay claim to exercise freely in +waters under the jurisdiction of our sovereignty, is not a doubtful +one at all, but is entirely contrary to their pretensions. The claims +are founded, according to the statements of those who agree with the +views which they involve, in Declaration I of the said Protocol of +1877, reproduced in the Protocol of 1885 and in that signed in Rome +in the same year, relating to the Caroline and Pelew Archipelagoes. + +This declaration runs as follows--ratified by Article IV of the second +of these important diplomatic documents: + + + The direct commerce and trade of boats and subjects of Great + Britain, of Germany, and of the other powers, is declared, and + shall be, absolutely free in the archipelago of Sulu and in all + its parts, as also the right of fishery, without prejudice to the + rights recognized as belonging to Spain in the present Protocol, + in conformity with the following declarations * * *. + + III. At points occupied by Spain in the archipelago of Sulu, the + Spanish Government may establish imposts, and sanitary and other + regulations of whatever kind, during the effective occupation of + the said points * * *. + + +From the transcript it is evident that Spain may regulate the +exercise of the right of traffic and commerce, not with the purpose +of restricting, and much less of denying, the principle of commercial +liberty recognized in Declaration I, but with that of conditioning +the exercise of that right in such a way that her own rights as +a sovereign nation shall not be infringed. And what she may do in +regard to mercantile trade, with greater reason she may and should +do in everything referring to the right of fishery, a right which is +declared only in general terms, and one of which the protocol does +not treat except in making the affirmation of the principle itself, +whereas in regard to commerce, it descends to minute details. + +And this could not be otherwise, for anything else would be equivalent +to impairing the sovereignty of Spain; and this, in an agreement in +which this sovereignty is openly recognized and proclaimed, would +pre-suppose a contradiction so palpable and absurd that it is not +worth while even to discuss it. + +Spain, as a sovereign and independent state, holds and exercises her +sovereignty not only in her territories and on the coasts of the same, +but in her jurisdictional waters, and can, therefore, regulate the +exercise therein of any right granted to foreign subjects, and may, +even, in the exercise of her sovereignty, prohibit the enjoyment +of such right altogether; this is an indisputable principle of +international law, though there is nothing to prevent a state from +limiting the same in favor of another or other states; but it is a +sine qua non condition to this that there shall be an express and clear +declaration of her will on this point, and no one can reasonably affirm +that Spain has made in the Sulu Protocols, neither in that of 1877, nor +in that of 1885, a total or partial surrender of this right in regard +to that of fishery; there is, it is true, a declaration in general +terms that the fisheries are absolutely free in the archipelago of +Sulu; but this absoluteness of the principle is immediately qualified +by the condition that it shall be without prejudice to the rights +recognized as belonging to Spain in the protocol, and it has already +been pointed out that one of these rights--the principal one and +that which contains all the others, the right of sovereignty--is +proclaimed and recognized at the head of the agreement. Outside this +declaration in general terms, there will not be found in all the +protocol a provision or regulation referring to the exercise of the +right of fishery and much less a concrete and express declaration on +the part of Spain that she will permit the exercise thereof freely on +her coasts and in her territorial waters. To permit of this a concrete, +clear, and definite declaration would be necessary, such as is to be +found in the Morocco Treaty, signed on November 30, 1861, Article 57 +of which establishes qualifiedly "That Spanish subjects shall have a +right to fish along the coasts of the Moroccan Empire;" and even so, +in Article 60 of the same treaty, it is stipulated that, in order to +facilitate the coral fishery, in which the Spaniards engage on the +coast of Morocco, fishers shall pay the sum of 150 Spanish dollars for +each coral fishing boat, and that through the representative of Spain +they shall request permission from the minister of foreign affairs +of His Majesty the Sultan who shall issue the necessary authorization. + +From which it may be seen that even in the case of declarations in +regard to the right of fishery which are concrete, clear and definite, +there is needed, for the free exercise of the same, something more +than a declaration in general terms, such as is that contained in +the Sulu Protocol of 1877. + +Furthermore, it is always customary in international agreements which +refer to fishery rights to lay down regulations and provisions which +shall regulate the exercise of such rights, as is proved by a multitude +of agreements, among which are: that already cited of Morocco, that of +February 18th, 1886, between Spain and France regarding the fishery +and navigation of the Bidasoa, in which the right of oyster fishing +is restricted, its absolute prohibition being made possible; as also +that of 1889 ratifying the preceding one, the Portuguese convention +of March 27th of 1893 and the coast police and fishery regulations; +as well as that of August 22nd of 1894, in regard to the fisheries +in the waters of the Algarbes, etc.; all of which is well known by +the illustrious Government of His Majesty, and attention is called +to it here only in support of the opinion maintained, namely, that +the right to authorize, condition, restrict, and even prohibit the +engagement in fishery on its coast and in its jurisdictional waters +is inherent in the sovereignty of an independent state; and if it has +this right in regard to fisheries in general, with greater reason must +it preserve and exercise the same in regard to oyster fisheries, by +reason of the changes which may be produced in the sea bed, and even +for the purpose of preserving the breeding grounds of the precious +pearl-shell mollusk, the Avicula Margaritifera, the banks being the +property of the nation, and like all its territory, inalienable and +non-prescriptible; both so that they shall not be exhausted and that +their exploitation may be reserved for the national industry. + +From the preceding, written with less detail than would have been the +case had the pressure of time permitted, it may easily be inferred +that, in the opinion of this General Government, Spain in spite of +Declaration I of the Sulu Protocol--perhaps it would be more correct +to say, by virtue of that very declaration, the terms of which +really determine the meaning of Declaration III and Article I of the +Treaty--preserves intact her right as a sovereign nation to restrict, +condition, and even prohibit engagement in the oyster fishery on her +coasts and in her jurisdictional waters, without further limitations +than those which she may deem expedient to self-impose. + +Admitting her rights as a sovereign state, there arises a question of +a political nature, which the circumstances above indicated convert +into a problem demanding an early resolution. + +To what extent should Spain exercise this right? + +On this point, the views of the General Government will be expressed +as concisely as possible and with the soberness demanded both by the +respect due to the high prerogatives of the public authorities and by +an ignorance of many of the elements which enter into the question, +without a knowledge of which it is difficult to determine to what +extent it is expedient to restrict the exercise of the right to engage +in the oyster fisheries which foreign subjects claim to exercise freely +in the Sulu archipelago, a pretension which this General Government +regards as entirely opposed to the rights of Spain and her moral and +material interests in the Far East. Our prestige with the Malay races +here, our moral influence over these semi-civilized Mohammedan people, +who recognize no right or supremacy but that of might, demand that +Spain, as a colonizing nation, shall maintain the integrity of her +sovereignty and shall not seem to be subjugated to the will of other +Powers, as would appear if, in her territories and on her coasts, +with the knowledge and permission of her authorities and of her war +ships, and without even heeding them, foreigners should perform acts +which, like that of engaging in the mother-of-pearl fishery, being +contrary to our material interests, cannot be carried out without +paying tribute to the Moro sultans and chieftains themselves. + +There is no doubt that the need for preserving cordial relations with +Germany and England and for maintaining the most perfect understanding +between the European powers in anticipation of some concerted action +in regard to the Empires of China and of Japan, which will render +necessary in the future the expansive policy of the latter towards +the south, as well as the hegemony claimed by the latter in the +Orient, counsel a circumspect international policy and a moderate +exercise of our sovereign rights in the archipelago of Sulu; and for +this reason, perhaps it would be inexpedient to forbid the right of +fishery to foreign subjects, as such action would certainly give rise +to diplomatic questions and remonstrances, which should be avoided +at any cost; but this General Government deems it indispensable to +condition and regulate the exercise of this fishery right, especially +in so far as it relates to the pearl-producing oyster, the exploitation +of which should be governed by considerations of our prestige and +of the advantage and benefit of our material interests. Supported +therefore by our right of sovereignty, by international practice, +and by the terms of Declarations I and III of the Protocol of 1877 and +of Articles I and IV of that of 1885, there should be issued certain +coast police and fishery regulations for the Sulu archipelago, laying +down clearly the relations which are to exist between the Spanish +Government and foreign subjects engaging in the fishery industries +along our coasts and in our jurisdictional waters; which industries +should not be engaged in, especially in the case of the oyster, +without the necessary authorization of the Spanish authorities, and +after the payment of the corresponding industrial patent or license, +or of the dues which it may be deemed expedient to exact. + +Much more might be said in regard to this important question, +as unexpectedly presented as it is urgent of resolution, given +the conditions created by the claim of the British subject +Mr. H. W. Dalton; and this General Government appreciates fully +the deficiency of its suggestions, which will be advantageously +supplemented by the great wisdom of his Majesty's Government, its +exalted patriotism, and the solicitous care that it gives to everything +touching the high interests of the nation, by which elevated sentiments +they are inspired. + + + + + + +APPENDIX XXIII + +ROYAL DIRECTIONS RELATIVE TO THE TREATMENT OF FOREIGNERS ENGAGED IN +PEARL FISHING IN THE SULU WATERS, MARCH 23, 1896 [302] + + +Colonial Office + +Excellent Sir: Examined by this office of the government the papers +transmitted by your Excellency with the official communication +No. 1967, of September 16th last, in the question raised by the +politico-military governor of Sulu, by reason of a communication +addressed to the same by the office of the commander-general of +the naval station at Manila, directing the prohibition of the +mother-of-pearl fishery in the waters of Sulu and the Carolines; +studied also the report of the General Government, and that of the +council of administration of the Philippines, and heard also the +illustrious opinion of the Department of State, to secure which the +papers were sent there, accompanied by the Royal order of the 7th of +January last; bearing in mind that our prestige among the natives in +those islands would perforce suffer seriously if foreigners were to +perform, without any intervention on the part of our authorities, acts, +which, like that of engaging in the mother-of-pearl shell fishery, +they cannot carry on without paying tribute to the Moro Sultans and +chieftains; though it is not less true that the absolute prohibition of +the right of fishery to foreigners would arouse, as wisely foreseen by +your Excellency, diplomatic remonstrances based upon the Protocol of +Sulu of March 7th, 1886; his Majesty the King (whom God protect), the +Queen Regent of the Kingdom acting in his name, has seen fit to direct +that your Excellency be informed that he has seen with pleasure the +tact and prudence with which this question has been dealt with, in the +first place by your Excellency, and afterwards by all the authorities +who have intervened in the same; that so long as the representative of +the English Pearling and Trading Company, the captains of their boats, +or other foreigners, do not urge with importunity the right to carry +on the industry of the mother-of-pearl shell fishery within the zone of +jurisdictional waters and at occupied places, an endeavor must be made +to prevent their doing so, in order, if possible, to set a precedent +favorable to our interests; and that in the event of their insisting, +it will be necessary to permit them to engage in the industry of the +mother-of-pearl fishery, with the obligation to submit in so doing to +the rules and regulations now in force or which may be put into force +hereafter. It is also the wish of his Majesty that your Excellency be +apprised of the expediency of formulating, with the greatest possible +despatch, coast police and fishery regulations for the archipelagoes +of Sulu and the Carolines; in which regulations care must be taken not +to make special mention of the Protocols, nor to recognize expressly +the rights of foreigners, and, on the other hand, not to depart from +the terms of the provisions of these international agreements, so +that in the event of any foreigners claiming the right in question, +they shall not be able to elude compliance with the regulations by +basing their pretensions on the terms of the said Protocols; for all +of which your Excellency will place yourself in harmony with the +competent authorities whose duty it is to take cognizance of this +matter, submitting afterwards for the approbation of this office +drafts of the coast police and fishery regulations above referred to. + +By Royal order I communicate the above to you for proper action. + +God protect your Excellency many years. + + +Madrid, March 23rd, 1896. + +Tomas Castellano: rubricated. + +To the Honorable the Governor-General of the Philippine Islands. + + + + + + +APPENDIX XXIV + +LA TORRE'S VIEWS ON THE POLICY THAT SHOULD BE ADOPTED IN MINDANAO +AND SULU, JANUARY 11, 1893 [303] + + +Office of the Governor-General of the Philippines + +A seal with the inscription: "Office of the Captain-General of the +Philippines. Headquarters." + +Excellent Sir: At all times the condition of the unsubdued regions +of the island of Mindanao and, in general, of the whole archipelago, +has occupied the close attention of the Governors-General of these +Islands, and they have studied, according to their respective views, +the best methods for the complete subjection of the same. + +For my part, I have meditated deeply upon every thing relating +to this important matter, and judging both from past experience +and from observations that I have been able to make personally, +as I apprised your Excellency after my return from a visit to the +aforementioned island on May 29th last, I believe it is evident +that the adoption of the same system for the subjection of different +races will not be productive of good results. In the island of Luzon, +a properly understood policy of conciliation, accompanied by slight +displays of force, will be successful in conciliating and subduing +the people sooner or later; for it may be observed at once that here +there does not exist that great racial antagonism which nearly always +makes compromise impossible. Such a policy, linked with prudence and +particularly with justice on the part of the delegates of authority, +will always be productive of great results, aside from the fact that +there are here many villages whose inhabitants are not warlike, but, +on the contrary, are docile, and await only some slight indication on +our part to regard us as protectors and allies against their enemies. + +Much has already been done in this direction, as is shown by the many +politico-military provinces existing in this island; but we should +not stop in this island of progress; and in order to carry forward +and consummate the complete subjugation of the extensive districts not +yet subdued, troops must be detailed,--not in very large numbers, but +still in numbers sufficiently large to affect appreciably the service, +equally necessary in other regions of the archipelago. This is one +of the reasons which make requisite an increase in the army force +stationed here; further, if the number of the comandancias [304] +is to be increased, it is obvious that, in order to garrison them, +more troops are needed. + +I have pointed out the need there is for employing different methods +for the subjection of the different races; and in fact, in regard +to the races inhabiting Mindanao, I believe that it is obvious and +unquestionable that favorable results will never be secured without +employing methods other than those of attraction. + +The Moro race is completely antithetic to the Spanish, whether the +latter be peninsular or indigenous, and will ever be our eternal enemy. + +The past proves clearly that those ostensible and ephemeral +submissions, apparently guaranteed by oaths and agreements, do not +bind the Moros in the slightest degree; for, knowing nothing of the +first principles of good-faith and loyalty, they do not hesitate +to break their promises whenever a favorable opportunity offers and +they think it possible to defeat our troops. They make a pretense of +being trusting and attentive even to our smallest suggestions, but +they are always watching for a good chance to open up hostilities, +and will resort to treason and cunning. + +For these reasons it is well that they should know that we are the +stronger; that our friendship suits their interests because we are +backed by force--which is the only argument they can understand; +that their friendship is of no moment to us; and that the instant +they antagonize us, they will be promptly and severely punished. + +Having taken up this point of view, the policy that we should adopt +may be inferred. + +It is not necessary to undertake operations on a large scale, or to +open what might be termed a regular campaign, as has been done every +two or three years in the past; but, with our troops established at +a number of fortified places, it may be seen at once from what has +been said above, that we ought to maintain them there at any cost, +and that, abandoning an attitude entirely passive, we should advance +little by little in our conquest, always establishing ourselves +firmly on the territory conquered. In this way we shall, step by +step, bring under our dominion a large area of territory, at the same +time extending our sphere of influence towards the interior. Given +the conditions above described, it will be understood at once how +much we should lose in importance in the eyes of such an enemy if, +in response to their frequent attacks, we confined ourselves entirely +to a defensive policy, for they would interpret such an attitude as +an indication of weakness; consequently it is impossible for us to +maintain an attitude of inactivity: rather, taking advantage of the +treacherous conduct of the enemy, we should castigate them by means +of rapid and unexpected excursions lasting a few days, and for this +purpose it is indispensable that small columns of troops be stationed +at two or three well chosen points. + +That the Moros are not disposed to be our friends is evident: and +while frequent examples in the history of these islands, in addition +to what has been said above, are sufficient to prove this assertion, +it is further corroborated by the many despatches I have addressed to +your Excellency, apprising you of the attacks made by the Moros upon +our troops and especially of the incidents which have taken place +during the last months of the year 1892. These I will recapitulate +succinctly, as they show that, far from breaking the rebels, the +events have only increased their strength. + +On the morning of October 28th, while a reconnaissance was being made +at the post of Baras, the detachment making the same was attacked +by some fifty or sixty Moros, who were awaiting them in ambush. The +latter were, however, repulsed, and our troops being reënforced by a +detachment from the fort, the enemy fled, leaving five dead on the +field, besides two spears, three krises, three kampilan, and two +daggers, the losses on our side being one dead and five wounded. + +On the morning of November 9th, again at the time of making a +reconnaissance, at the post of Malabang, our men were attacked by +some sixty Moros, who, being repulsed, fled, leaving six dead on the +field--three others dying later, according to reports received--besides +four kampilan, three krises, one tabas, one lance, and four daggers; +the losses of our side being one soldier killed and six wounded. + +These two posts being afterwards visited by the military commander +of Illana Bay and the politico-military governor of Mindanao, by +reason of reports having been received that some thousand Moros had +banded together for the purpose of attacking these two places, they +informed me that excellent discipline prevailed among the troops of +the said garrisons, and that the Moros must have beaten a retreat, +since they had not been seen in that country. + +On my part I have directed that the greatest possible vigilance, +care, and watchfulness be exercised at all the posts, never losing +sight of the fact that they are always in the presence of the enemy, +as is proved by the frequency with which they have been attacked. I +have ordered, further, that, when making reconnaissances or upon any +other occasion when it is necessary to separate a detachment from the +main body, the greatest number of soldiers that the circumstances +permit be employed, so as to prevent a surprise or ambuscade, +which aside from the direct loss that it entails, might have the +effect of demoralizing the troops, and so of increasing the boldness +and temerity of the enemy; I have given special instructions, too, +that the officers display in the field the greatest possible energy, +so as to keep up the spirits and confidence of the men. + +In the northern portion of Mindanao, between Iligan and Mumungan the +Moros have also been active in making attacks, and although beaten +in every case, thanks to the good discipline prevailing among the +men and the judgment shown by the officers, who inspire the former +with confidence and afford them a good example at all times, they +still hope to have better luck in their future raids, as is proved +by the despatches received from the politico-military commander of +Mumungan. These despatches show that our soldiers no longer fear the +Moro race, nor even the Juramentados; and that our men always await the +attack of the enemy with great calmness and bravery, as is shown by +the accounts of the frequent ambuscades laid and surprises attempted +by the Moros. Already at the beginning of 1892 the attitude of the +sultans and datus in the neighborhood of Mumungan was so questionable +that Captain Abad, then commander of the fort there, having attempted +to go up the river Agus, accompanied by only one officer and four +men--thus in the guise of absolute peace--Datu Ala, of Balud, who +is now our friend, stopped him when he approached his territory, +telling him that although he wished to live at peace with us, he +could not allow him to advance further, nor any part of our troops +to do so. In spite of this, two months after this incident, General +Castilla, following closely my instructions, and taking advantage of +the circumstance foreseen by me--that upon his arrival at Mumungan he +was visited by the neighboring datus and sultans, including the Sultan +of Pantar, he announced to the latter, acting under instructions from +me, his intention of returning the friendly visit. Leaving Mumungan +early, in spite of a continuous heavy rain storm, he reached Pantar +at about eleven in the morning without making any stop, accompanied +by Ala and another datu, and while he was holding an affectionate +interview with the Sultan of Pantar and the troops were resting, +the captain of engineers, Navarro, made a clandestine inspection of +the ground and took a rough sketch of the best site for the future +fort, close to a bridge that can be built across the river Agus, +with a turret or rough defensive fortification on the opposite bank; +this done, General Castilla returned that same afternoon to Mumungan, +which he reached before night, without having fired a shot, in spite of +the predictions of the datus that he might easily meet with resistance +on the road. + +Later, all the datus living in the region lying between Pantar and +Iligan reiterated to me, personally, in May last, at Mumungan, and +later to the military commander, their protestations of adhesion to +Spain. Afterwards there came the visit that a goodly number of datus, +among them the Datu of Pantar, made me in Manila, where they remained +and were entertained during fifteen days; and with the consistent +approval of these, the road from Iligan to Mumungan was built, in +consequence of which work the weekly attendance of Moros at the market +of Iligan increased, and the Datu of Bukamar and another from Marawi +presented themselves in that place. Thither also the Datu Amay-Pakpak, +now an old man, promised to send his son. The concurrence of Moros +at that place was further increased by the assistance that was given +to a wounded Moro; until, at last, a solemn oath of allegiance was +secured, being taken, in the presence of the aforementioned military +commander, by a great number of datus and sultans, in accordance with +their ritual. + +On November 8th, the military commander of Mumungan, under the pretext +of a wedding to which the Datu of Pantar had invited him and which he +attended, made an inspection of the country in the neighborhood of +the said rancheria [305] of Pantar, lying to the south of Mumungan, +and had an opportunity of seeing that, in conformity with the reports +I had received, Pantar possessed advantageous conditions for the +establishment there of another advance fort, the construction of +which could be commenced upon the continuation and completion up +to that point of the new road built from Iligan to Mumungan. But in +spite of the good intentions of the military commander not to break +into hostilities except in the last resort, in accordance with the +positive instructions I had given him, he was unable to prevent his +troops being attacked upon the return journey, and therefore they +opened fire upon the enemy; which proves once again the difficulty of +following the path of conciliation and attraction with an enemy who +pays absolutely no heed to reason; in spite of the fact that with +this method there had been joined that of warning the neighboring +Moros who profess to be so friendly, that the only genuine proof of +adhesion to which I should give credit would be that of the moral +and collective support of all of them against any act of aggression +within their territory committed by Moros from other rancherias, +whether in large or in small numbers. + +On November 25th I was informed by the same military commander that, +while the convoy was transferring supplies from Mumungan to Iligan, +there appeared a juramentado, who attempted to wound a soldier; but +the latter, waiting for him with great calmness, defended himself +valiantly, and the Moro was despatched with the assistance of some +other soldiers who came upon the scene. + +On the 10th of December I was informed that a detachment of the troops +stationed at Mumungan, while on its way to the market of Iligan was +attacked by a body of fourteen juramentados who, however, were repulsed +with a loss of two killed, while, on our side, one man was lost. + +At Baras, also, while making the reconnaissance on December 10th there +appeared a band of Moros in an attitude of hostility; but they were +compelled to retire at the first volley from our troops. Nevertheless, +two juramentados separated themselves from the main body and attacked +an equal number of our men; the latter awaited them firmly and killed +them with bayonet thrusts. Another Moro was also slain while attempting +a precipitate flight. Recently, on the 15th of December, the military +commander of Mumungan, hearing of the intentions of the enemy, which +were far from peaceable, determined, in order to guard against all +contingencies, to continue the extension of the road and to complete +and close the palisade around the new inclosure at the fort, made so +as to accommodate the increased number of troops. For the first of +these two purposes, he left the fort at half past five in the morning, +well-armed and ready to punish the Moros if they presented themselves, +setting out with one hundred and fifty men of the 73rd regiment and +sixteen convicts, besides a corporal and eight persons of the 73rd +in charge of a company of engineers, another company of the 73rd and +sixty convicts, who marched without arms and equipped for work. + +At ten o'clock in the morning the advance guard reached the entrance to +the wood, and as the intention was to collect lumber that had already +been cut and dragged to the road, the troops advanced. At this moment +there appeared in the middle of the road some eight hundred Moros +brandishing their arms and uttering war-cries, who immediately retired +to some defensive works which they had constructed out of the very +logs above referred to. In view of this, our troops continued their +march, opening fire at about one hundred yards from the defensive +works of the enemy, and in a little while, captured the same, routing +the defenders, as well as some more of the enemy who appeared on the +two flanks of the column, causing some eighty deaths; on our side we +had one killed and two wounded convicts. After this incident, the said +military commander made his way to Iligan without suffering any attack, +in spite of the fact that the Moros had constructed other defensive +works on the road, which latter were destroyed without any casualties. + +The conduct of the troops on this march was brilliant, and I wish to +recommend to the consideration of your Excellency those who especially +distinguished themselves; but I have again directed the military +commander of Mumungan to avoid as far as possible all necessity for +fresh combats, extending, but without any compromise of dignity, +the policy of conciliation which I have so strongly recommended to him. + +From all the above your Excellency will understand with how much +foresight I requested from the Government of his Majesty, on the +24th of April last, permission to place on a war footing as many of +the seven regiments which make up the infantry in these Islands as +had not yet been placed on this footing, setting forth the estimated +cost of the same in the plans which I sent for approval, and if the +increase was necessary then, it is evident that at the present time +it is much more necessary; for, as your Excellency will see from what +I have communicated to you in this extensive document, the condition +of the Moros, justifying the predictions made by me at that time, +has become steadily more hostile as they never rest nor miss any +opportunity of causing us the greatest possible harm, endeavoring +to obstruct all the work we plan to carry out for the improvement +of the means of communication between our present possessions; and +while it is true that they are not successful in their attempts, +still we must put a stop to their increasing audacity. + +I take the liberty again to call the attention of your Excellency to +the absolute necessity of placing on a war footing the three regiments +now on a footing of peace, in accordance with the permission already +granted by the Department--without waiting until next July. In this +way, without undertaking a regular campaign, as I have already stated, +and without expense to the Government, it will be possible to improve +the present condition of things, which is gradually becoming somewhat +discreditable to the honor of the flag. I do not doubt that your +Excellency will so understand it, and I thank you in advance, in +the name of this suffering army, for the immediate concession of the +credit necessary for the reënforcement above mentioned. God protect +your Excellency many years. + + +Manila, January 11th, 1893. + + +Most Excellent Sir:--Eulogio Despojol.--Followed by a rubric. The most +Excellent the Minister of War.--A copy.--The Acting Colonel in Command +of Headquarters.--Pedro de Bascaran.--A seal with the inscription: +"Office of the Captain-General of the Philippines.--Headquarters." + +A copy.--Luis de la Torre: rubricated. + + + + + + + +NOTES + +[1] See Ethnological Survey Publications, Vol. IV, Pt. I, p. 11. + +[2] The spelling of proper names used throughout this paper is that +adopted by the author and differs in some respects from that in use +in the Division of Ethnology.--Editor. + +[3] This settlement is on a small adjacent island of the same name. + +[4] An officer next below a datu in rank. + +[5] An officer next below a panglima in rank. + +[6] The word Tumangtangis means "Shedder of tears." As the summit of +this mountain is the last object to be seen by sailors leaving the +island, they weep from homesickness when they lose sight of it. + +[7] Quoted in Keppel's "Visit to the Indian Archipelago," p. 70. + +[8] Some maps place this mountain near Tu'tu', but reliable Moros +apply the name to the mountain west of Si'it and nearer to Su' than +to Tu'tu'. + +[9] Princess Ipil and her followers were wrecked and drowned at this +point. Their bodies are said to have turned into stone and formed the +rocks that line the shore. Some of the rocks seemed to the people to +resemble petrified human beings. + +[10] Names of fruits with no English equivalents. + +[11] A Philippine tree from the blossoms of which a perfume is made. + +[12] Spanish word for street. + +[13] Beach at the head of the bay. + +[14] A sultanate in northern Borneo. + +[15] The Mindanao Herald, July 21, 1906. + +[16] Gum copal. + +[17] Most of these are females. + +[18] See below, p. 148. + +[19] The eleventh month of the Mohammedan year. + +[20] Sulu; the head, the chief. + +[21] Arabic; the slave of the Merciful. + +[22] Malay; sir or mister. + +[23] Arabic; leader, caliph, high priest. + +[24] A Sulu form of the Arabic "Caliph." + +[25] Malay-Sanskrit; minister of state. + +[26] The central high region of Sumatra. + +[27] Malay; officer of state. It literally means "rich man." + +[28] Sanskrit; king. + +[29] Malay-Sanskrit; emperor or caliph. It is here used as a proper +noun. + +[30] A place in Lati, Sulu. + +[31] Sulu; chicken, fowl. + +[32] Sulu-Malay; slave. + +[33] Sanskrit; wise. + +[34] Arabic; understanding, mind. + +[35] Malay-Sanskrit; subordinate officer of state. + +[36] Arabic; lady, grandmother. + +[37] Arabic; safe and sound. + +[38] Malay; lady, woman. + +[39] Arabic; righteous. + +[40] A title of nobility. + +[41] Arabic, Fatimah; the name of the Prophet's daughter. + +[42] Arabic; brilliant. + +[43] Arabic; wife or husband. + +[44] Arabic; beautiful. + +[45] Arabic; hoping. + +[46] Arabic; faithful. + +[47] Arabic; religion. + +[48] Arabic; trusted or trustworthy. + +[49] Arabic; guide, leader. + +[50] Sulu; fruit. + +[51] Arabic; intelligent. + +[52] Arabic; feminine of "salim" or safe and sound. + +[53] Arabic; sleeping. + +[54] Arabic; known. + +[55] Arabic; noble, subordinate officer of state. + +[56] Sanskrit; Iddha, kindled, lighted, or sunshine. + +[57] Sanskrit; Indra, the god of the heavens, or most likely Indira, +name of Lakshmi, the wife of Vishnu. + +[58] Sulu; light, sun. + +[59] Arabic; wise. + +[60] The name of Mohammed's wife. + +[61] Arabic; everlasting, eternal. + +[62] Arabic; perfection. + +[63] Arabic; scribe. + +[64] Arabic; educated, taught. + +[65] Arabic; virtuous. + +[66] Arabic; pride, glory. + +[67] Arabic; father. + +[68] Arabic; firm, resolute, an attribute of God. + +[69] Arabic; Mary. + +[70] The Baklaya party should have been mentioned after the Tagimaha, +but it was evidently left out by mistake. Tagimaha is a Sanskrit word +which means country. + +[71] Arabic; generous, noble. + +[72] Arabic; served, master. + +[73] Arabic; noble, applied to a descendant of Mohammed. + +[74] Sulu, anchorage. The settlement lies 3 miles west of Jolo. + +[75] It is used here as a name. As a title it is higher than raja +and is equivalent to sultan or emperor. + +[76] The Moro word for Zamboanga. + +[77] Arabic; night, a common name. + +[78] Arabic; power, superior authority, sultan. + +[79] Arabic; glory. + +[80] A corrupt form of the Arabic Ahmad. + +[81] From the Arabic "Sheikh," meaning chief. + +[82] A place in Sumatra (?) + +[83] Java. + +[84] Arabic; master or noble, addressed to descendants of the prophet +Mohammed. + +[85] Town and state in southeastern Sumatra. + +[86] Arabic; noble. This word is often pronounced by the Moros as +"salip" or "sarip." + +[87] Arabic; height. + +[88] Sanskrit; princess. + +[89] Sanskrit; greater king, emperor. + +[90] In Malay it indicates rank or office; in Sulu it is used only +as a name. + +[91] Malay; young. + +[92] Arabic; defender. + +[93] Arabic; honor, respect. + +[94] Arabic; star, meteor, bright flame. + +[95] Arabic; chosen (by God). + +[96] Arabic; interceder. + +[97] Arabic; victory. + +[98] From the Arabic `azeem or great; not from `Alim, meaning learned. + +[99] Arabic; exalter or defender. + +[100] Arabic; Israel. + +[101] Arabic; honor. + +[102] Arabic; orator; the pandita who reads the oration, a part of +the religions services held on Friday. + +[103] See Ethnological Survey Publications, Vol. IV, pt. 1, p. 64. + +[104] The servant of the giver. + +[105] Jamiyun is Sanskrit and means brother or sister's son; Kulisa +is Indra's thunderbolt. + +[106] One of the names of the wife of Vishnu. + +[107] Sulu; the sun. + +[108] The Sulus believed that Alexander the Great came to Sulu and +that their ancient rulers were descended from him. + +[109] Sanskrit; the plant. Jamiyun Kulisa, Indira Suga, and Masha'ika +are the names of the ancient gods of Sulu. Prior to Islam the Sulus +worshiped the Vedic gods and evidently believed them to be the +forefathers or creators of men. The Sulu author was ignorant of this +fact and used the names of the gods as names of real men. + +[110] Arabic; faithful. + +[111] Chief. + +[112] A gong used for signals and in worship. + +[113] Western district of the Island of Sulu. + +[114] The northern and central district of the Island of Sulu. + +[115] The southern and central part of the Island of Sulu. + +[116] The eastern part of the Island of Sulu. + +[117] The town where the present Sultan of Sulu resides. + +[118] The inhabitants of the region west of the town of Jolo. + +[119] The inhabitants of the northern coast, east of Jolo. + +[120] Arabic; generous. + +[121] Arabic; master or served. + +[122] Arabic; noble; a title applied to a descendant of Mohammed. + +[123] Arabic; plural of wali, a man of God. + +[124] Sulu; anchorage; the ancient capital of Sulu. + +[125] A district in Sumatra. + +[126] Arabic; beauty. + +[127] Arabic; plural of karim, meaning generous. + +[128] Arabic; orator; a high religious title, allied to Imam. + +[129] Arabic; slave or servant. + +[130] Arabic; the Giver, referring to God. + +[131] See p. 152. + +[132] Genealogies; see Vol. IV, pt. 1, p. 11, Ethnological Survey +Publications. + +[133] Sanskrit; sunshine. + +[134] Natives of the Celebes; they were often called by the Spaniards +Macassars. + +[135] Timway or tumuway, meaning "leader" or "chief," is the title +given to the chiefs of the land before Islam. Timway has been replaced +by datu. + +[136] It is possible that this color distinction arose from an early +superstition or belief of Hindu origin assigning those divisions of +the island to the four respective Hindu deities, who are generally +represented by those four colors. + +[137] Quoted in Keppel's "Visit to the Indian Archipelago," p. 127. + +[138] This term is applied in Sulu in the same sense as the Malay +terms Orang-banua and Orang-bukit, meaning hill tribes or aborigines, +or, as they say in Mindanao, Manubus. + +[139] This term is used here in the same sense as Orang-Malayu meaning +the better or seacoast Malays. + +[140] The determination of this date and that of the rule of Abu +Bakr is covered by a complete statement which will appear in the +chapter on the early Mohammedan missionaries in Sulu and Mindanao, +to be published in a later paper. + +[141] The first historic seat of Malay rule was Pagar Ruyong (in +the mountains of Sumatra), the capital of the so-called "Empire of +Menangkabaw." (Malay-English Dictionary, R. J. Wilkinson, III, 2.) + +[142] Brass cannon used by Moros. + +[143] Variety of mango. + +[144] The prince of the princes. + +[145] The exalter of the humble. + +[146] The defender of the faith; the first. + +[147] Malay word, meaning "in the mountain." + +[148] The Sulu equivalent of "Digunung." + +[149] The kind. + +[150] "The Philippine Islands," Blair and Robertson, Vol. IV, p. 174. + +[151] Bisayas. + +[152] Natives of the Philippine Islands. + +[153] Large estates assigned to Spaniards. + +[154] An honorific title given to the early governors of the +Philippines. + +[155] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson II, pp. 98, 99. + +[156] Ibid., II, p. 156. + +[157] Ibid., VII, p. 68, 69. + +[158] So given in the text without explanation. It is probably +a weight. + +[159] The Philippine Islands, VIII, pp. 73-75. + +[160] Apuntes sobre Jolo, Espina, p. 56. + +[161] A large canoe used by the Malayan peoples with two rows of oars, +very light, and fitted with a European sail; its rigging of native +manufacture. (Philippine Islands, II, p. 246.) + +[162] Large Moro boat with outriggers. + +[163] Bungsu, the sultan; sire and intermediator. + +[164] Name of boat used in the Philippine Islands. + +[165] Rizal conjectures that this word is a transformation of the +Tagál word, lampitaw, a small boat still used in the Philippines. + +[166] We follow Stanley's translation. He derives the word cacatal +(zacatal) from zacatc, or sacate, signifying "reed," "hay," or other +similar growths, zacatal thus being a "place of reeds" or a "thicket." + +[167] A long weapon resembling a sword, used by Moros. + +[168] From kalasag, a shield. (Rizal.) + +[169] Argensola says that this native, named Ubal, had made a +feast two days before, at which he had promised to kill the Spanish +commander. (Rizal.) + +[170] Posts set upright in the ground. + +[171] Sucesos de Is Islas Filipinas, Dr. Antonio de Morga, Mexico, +1609; The Philippine Islands, XV, pp. 90-92. + +[172] See Appendixes I and II, Pacification of Mindanao. + +[173] Fathoms. + +[174] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson IX, pp. 283, 285-287. + +[175] Ibid., IX, pp. 289, 290. + +[176] See Appendix III, Moro Raids of 1599 and 1600. + +[177] History of the Philippines, Barrows, pp. 153, 154. + +[178] See Appendix IV, Gallinato's expedition to Jolo. + +[179] See Appendix V, Olaso's expedition. + +[180] The greatest Sultan of Mindanao, the son of Bwisan. + +[181] An account of this fight and the Moro expedition under Tagal +is given in "The Philippine Islands," Blair and Robertson XXVII, +pp. 215-226. + +[182] See "Letter from Corcuera to Philip IV." (The Philippine Islands, +XXVII, pp. 346-359.) + +[183] See Appendix VI, Corcuera's campaign in Jolo. + +[184] On Moro pirates and their raids in the seventeenth century, +see The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XLI, pp. 277-324. + +[185] A Spanish measure of weight used in the Philippine Islands, +equivalent to about 133 pounds. + +[186] The defender of the Faith. + +[187] Relación de a entrada del Sultan Rey de Joló, in Archivo del +Bibliófilo Filipino, Vol. I. + +[188] History of the Philippines, Barrows, p. 227. + +[189] See Appendix VII, Obando's report on the preparations to be +undertaken to return Alimud Din to Sulu; also Appendix VIII, Obando's +report on the circumstances attending the attempt to return Alimud +Din to Sulu. + +[190] The Philippine Islands, Foreman, pp. 145, 146. + +[191] The sultan complained that he had not been treated in Manila +with dignity equal to his rank and quality, and that he had constantly +been under guard of soldiers in his residence (this was explained to +be a guard of honor). + +[192] The Philippine Islands, Foreman, p. 147. + +[193] On the occupation of Palawan and Balabak, see Appendixes IX +and X. + +[194] History of the Philippines, Barrows, p. 228. + +[195] See Appendix XI. + +[196] See Forrest's "A Voyage to New Guinea," pp. 320-335. + +[197] Another name for Jolo and the name of the stream which passes +through it. + +[198] It is more likely that elephants were obtained from Borneo +and Sumatra. + +[199] Some were more than 90 feet in length. + +[200] One of the settlements forming the town of Kotabato. + +[201] This was an erroneous impression. It no doubt seemed so to +Captain Forrest who judged from his observations of Sultan Israel +who acquired a taste for European music in Manila. + +[202] A Voyage to New Guinea, Capt. Thomas Forrest, pp. 336-337. + +[203] Name given to the network of channels by which the waters of +the Pasig River find their way to the sea. + +[204] History of the Philippines, Barrows, pp. 246-248. + +[205] See Appendixes XII, XIII, XIV, and XV. + +[206] A variety of palm from which mats and sails are made. + +[207] Edition of 1853, pp. 57-69. + +[208] A leaf chewed with betel nut. + +[209] Amirul Mu'minin or Alimud Din I. + +[210] See Appendixes XVI and XVII. + +[211] A visit to the Indian Archipelago, p. 58. + +[212] A big dugout canoe. + +[213] Vessels of some 11 meters length, 1 1/2 meters beam, and 40 +centimeters overhang at the bow. They are furnished with outriggers +and a removable deck [commonly of loose slats]. (Note in Montero y +Vidal's History of the Piracy of the Mohammedan Malays.) + +[214] The Spanish word for conquest transliterated. The word can not +be understood by the Sulus. + +[215] Datu Daniel. + +[216] Spanish. Como reconocimiento de dominio (i.e., of Spain). The +idea is that the settler acknowledges that he does not own the land +in fee simple, but holds it as a tenant of the state. + +[217] A police force maintained in the Philippines during Spanish +times. + +[218] Troops made up of men deported from other parts of the Islands. + +[219] A large knife used by Moros in fighting. + +[220] Men who have taken an oath to kill non-Mohammedans. + +[221] Moro cannon. + +[222] About 5 cents, United States currency. + +[223] See Appendix XVIII, on regulations relative to taxes and +imports on natives and immigrants in Sulu; also Appendix XIX, on the +protocol of Sulu of 1877 between Spain, Germany, and Great Britain; +Appendix XX, on the protocol of Sulu of 1885 between Spain, Germany, +and Great Britain; Appendix XXI, decree of the General Government +in regard to payment of tribute of Sulus; Appendixes XXII and XXIII, +on rights of foreigners engaged in pearl fishing in Sulu waters. + +[224] A chief subordinate to a datu. + +[225] See Appendix XXIV, on La Torre's views on the policy that should +be adopted in Mindanao and Sulu. + +[226] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XV, pp. 93-100. + +[227] A point and settlement on the north bank of the Mindanao River +and at its mouth. + +[228] A careful review of Ronquillo's reports and letters on his +pacification of Mindanao shows an evident error in the use of the +word Bwayan to signify the settlement or stronghold of the Sultan +of Magindanao. Bwayan here, and probably in Figueroa's report, too, +is used in place of Magindanao, which lay on the site occupied at +present by Kotabato. Bwisan was then the Sultan of Magindanao and +headed the opposition to Ronquillo's advance up the north branch of +the Mindanao River. Sirungan, who is mentioned in this report, might +have been a datu or subdatu of Magindanao, not necessarily Sirungan, +the Raja of Bwayan. + +[229] The correct name is Sirungan. + +[230] Cachil or Kachil is a Malay word signifying "little" or "young," +hence a youth of distinction or a younger prince of the royal line. + +[231] A tributary of the Mindanao River which rises in Talayan, +and empties at Taviran. + +[232] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XI, pp. 135-139. + +[233] Unsigned. + +[234] Point or bay, not an Island. + +[235] Point or bay, not an island. + +[236] The Strait of Sunda, which separates Java from Sumatra. + +[237] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XV, pp. 190-196. + +[238] This word is as commonly used with an "l" as with an "r," +as Sirungan. + +[239] A strong wind south by west. + +[240] Shields. + +[241] This was the first piratical expedition made against the +Spaniards by the inhabitants of the southern islands. (Rizal.) + +Barrantes (Guerras Piraticas) wrongly dates the abandonment of La +Caldera and the incursion of the Moros 1590. Continuing, he says: +"The following year they repeated the expedition so that the Indians +retired to the densest parts of the forests, where it cost considerable +trouble to induce them to become quiet, for a woman, who proclaimed +herself a sibyl or prophetess, preached to them that they should not +obey the Spaniards any longer, for the latter had allied themselves +with the Moros to exterminate all the Pintados." + +[242] Native word for mountain. + +[243] Those to whom land had been granted with control over the +natives who worked on it. + +[244] The Island of Gimarás, southeast of Panay, and separated from +it by the Strait of Iloilo. + +[245] Probably gongs. + +[246] Neither Stanley nor Rizal throws any light on this word. The +Spanish dictionaries likewise fail to explain it, as does also a +limited examination of Malay and Tagal dictionaries. Three conjectures +are open: 1. A derivative of tifatas, a species of mollusk, hence a +conch; 2. A Malay or Tagal word for either a wind or other instrument, +the Malay words for "to blow," "sound a musical instrument," being +tiyup and tiyupkan; 3. A misprint for the Spanish pifas, a possible +shortened form of pifanos, signifying fifes. + +[247] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XV, pp. 240-244, +264-268. + +[248] Sailing vessels. + +[249] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XXIII, pp. 87, 88. + +[250] Unsigned. + +[251] A small vessel used as a tender to carry messages between +larger vessels. + +[252] The Philippine Islands, Blair and Robertson, XXVIII, pp. 41-63. + +[253] In the manuscript that we follow the letter of March 31 is +given second, while that of April 5 is given first; we have arranged +them chronologically. + +[254] Garo: probably the same as garita; a fortified outpost. + +[255] The translation of this passage seems to be, "If God fights +against a city, he who guards it watches in vain." The difficulty +lies in "a custodierit," which we translate as "fights against." + +[256] A Spanish measure of length which is about equal to 1 yard, +English measure. + +[257] The Gimbahans or Sulus of the interior mountains. + +[258] Babui, in their language, signifies "pig"; apparently they +called the Spaniards "swine," as expressing the acme of contempt for +their besiegers. + +[259] "Thanks be to God who has given us the victory through our Lord +Jesus Christ." + +[260] Combés says (Hist. Mindanao, Reana's ed., column 264) that this +queen, named Tuan Baluka, was a native of Basilan, and that she had +acquired such ascendancy over her husband that the government of Sulu +was entirely in her hands. This statement explains the presence of +the Basilan men in the Sulu stronghold. + +[261] Zamboanga, the correct spelling is Samboangan. + +[262] Culverins of small bore. + +[263] This letter is unsigned; but the transcript of it made by +Ventura del Arco places it with others ascribed to Barrios. See +detailed accounts of the expedition against Jolo (Sulu) in Combés's +Hist. Mindanao y Joló (Retana and Pastells ed.), cols. 349-368; +Diaz's Conquistas, pp. 388-401: Murillo Velarde's Hist. Philipinas, +fol. 92, 93; and La Concepcion's Hist. Philipinas, V, pp. 334-351. + +[264] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[265] The Recoletos or barefoot Augustinian friars. + +[266] Spanish expediente, the collection of all the papers referring +to a single subject. + +[267] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[268] Maestre de Campo. + +[269] The inhabitants of Koran, northeast Borneo, pagan pirates +subdued by Sulu in 1769. + +[270] Official designation of the Audiencia when assembled in executive +session under the presidency of the Captain-General. + +[271] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[272] Sp. forzados, men compelled to row in the galleys, usually as +punishment for crime. + +[273] Manila. The shorter form of its title of "La siempre noble y +leal Ciudad." + +[274] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[275] A small sailing vessel. + +[276] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[277] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[278] The Honorable East India Company. + +[279] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[280] I.e., of the Sulus. + +[281] Sp. champanes. + +[282] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[283] "En sus propios buques" (i.e., of Sulu). + +[284] This and the following statements are not correct. + +[285] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[286] Though inaccurate and biased, the ideas expressed in this report +represent the opinion and feelings of many Spanish officials who were +connected with Moro affairs. + +[287] The correct name is Abu Bakr. + +[288] Such a statement is unduly biased. + +[289] A Spanish magistrate. + +[290] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[291] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[292] Vessels up to 80 feet length by 18 or 20 beam, made of wood, +bamboo, nipah, and rattan. The Moros arm them by placing at the two +sides lantakas and falconets, mounted on iron swivels, and at the +bow and stern, cannon set in stout pieces of timber. The sails are +usually of matting made of saguran [a kind of palm-leaf], spread on +bamboo poles. (Note in Montero y Vidal's History of the Piracy of +the Mohammedan Malays.) + +[293] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[294] Sp. Contaduría General. + +[295] Personal registration fees. + +[296] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[297] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[298] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[299] Settlements. + +[300] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[301] The Gearling & Tradin (sic.). + +[302] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[303] From the Division of Archives, Executive Bureau, Manila. + +[304] A term used by the Spaniards to designate certain governmental +districts in the Philippines. + +[305] Settlement. + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The History of Sulu, by Najeeb M. Saleeby + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 41771 *** |